JP2019030377A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress an amusement felt by a player by executing a performance which is devised in a state in which a performance display possible area on a display unit is limited.SOLUTION: A game machine acquires lottery information based on establishment of a start condition, determines whether or not winning occurs based on the acquired lottery information, executes a special pattern variation based on establishment of the start condition, and if establishment of the start condition is satisfied, however, establishment of the start condition is satisfied, stores and reserves up to a prescribed number of lottery information, executes a performance capable of suggesting a determination result in the special pattern variation period, and the game machine has a display unit capable of displaying a reservation display indicating a number of pieces of lottery information being reserved and the performance. The game machine reduces a ratio of an area in the reservation display in a display area in the display unit, and the game machine can execute a special performance on an area which is included in an area of the reservation display before reduction of the ratio, and is not included in the area of the reservation display after reduction of the ratio.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 276

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (also generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  In a conventional gaming machine, when a game ball launched into the game area of the game board enters the start opening (hereinafter also referred to as “start prize”), a big hit lottery is executed with this start prize as a trigger. , It shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, after the start condition established by the above-described start winning is established, the symbol display device starts the variable display of the symbol and uses the display device to produce an effect that suggests the result of the big hit lottery Execute with symbol variation.

JP 2014-23551 A

  However, while the displayable display area in the display device is limited, there is a demand for an effect that suppresses a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in the interest of a player by executing an effect that has been devised while the displayable area of the display device is limited.

In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention employs the following configuration.
Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means for determining whether or not the winning based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means;
Symbol variation executing means for executing symbol variation based on establishment of a predetermined start condition;
A holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number;
Effect execution means for executing an effect capable of suggesting a determination result by the determination means;
A holding display indicating the number of lottery information held by the holding means, and a display means for displaying an effect executed by the effect executing means,
The effect execution means is capable of reducing the ratio of the reserved display area in the display area of the display means, and is an area included in the reserved display area before the reduction of the ratio, and A special effect can be executed in an area including at least an area that is not included in the area of the hold display after the reduction of the ratio,
As the special production, a plurality of types of production can be executed,
In addition to the display means for displaying the hold display, a special hold display means for indicating the number of lottery information held by the hold means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the special effect is performed as an effect that suggests an expectation that the determination result by the determination means is a win.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the fall of a player's interest can be suppressed by performing the production which was devised while the production | presentation displayable area in a display apparatus is limited.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including the partial enlarged view seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows other forms and includes the partially enlarged view seen from the front in the state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is the XX sectional view taken on the line of Fig.38 (a). It is the YY sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 39 including a partial enlarged view. It is a disassembled perspective view of the foul cover unit containing the partially expanded exploded view which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the partially expanded view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the partially expanded view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is the vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member, (b) is the cross-sectional top view. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A), (b) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. 45 which shows the normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), (c) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of a foul cover unit which shows other forms of an operation line invalidating member. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. 49 (a) is an enlarged view of a Z portion in FIG. 49, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z portion in FIG. 49 showing a state where a foul ball passes. (A), (b) is the enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 which shows the state by which an operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) shows the state which electrically operated the operation line invalidation member, and is an enlarged view equivalent to Z section of Drawing 49 showing the state where an operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is a rear view of the payout device for explaining the rotation position of the payout blade. It is a rear view of the payout device for explaining ball clogging and ball omission prevention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled FIG. 119 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line of Fig.117 (a). It is the other structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment) of this invention by which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is another structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 3rd Embodiment) of this invention by which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is another structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 4th Embodiment) of this invention by which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 5th Embodiment) of this invention in which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the front view of the game board which made the game panel opaque in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 130 from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the game panel is made transparent. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing the game panel in an opaque state in which a game ball circulates and an obstacle nail in an opaque state. It is a front view which expands and shows the attacker unit vicinity in a game board. It is a front view of the front structural member and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member and the game panel, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member and the game panel, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the game panel shown with the board cover removed, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the lower panel decoration board in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the decoration pattern of a game panel, a front structural member, and a front unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relationship between the decoration pattern and obstacle nail in a game panel. It is an enlarged view which shows the installation aspect of an upper left panel decoration board | substrate. It is an enlarged view which shows the game panel in a modification. It is a front view of a table effect unit in a modification. It is a front view of the panel board in a modification. (A) is a front view of the panel board in which the decoration pattern different from FIG. 143 was formed, (b) is a front view which shows the panel board of (a) with a front unit. It is a front view which shows the nail adjustment film for adjusting the obstruction nail currently planted by the game panel. It is a front view of a main part frame shown in the state where a game board was equipped. (A) is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the state before attaching a nail adjustment film to a game board, (b) is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the state which attached the nail adjustment film to the game board. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the routing of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. It is a front view of a table production unit. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 1st pattern in the table | surface production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light emission decoration of the 2nd pattern in the table | surface production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light emission decoration of the 2nd pattern of the table | surface production | presentation unit different from this embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower movable decoration body with which the back lower direction production | generation unit in the back unit was seen, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom movable decoration body with which the back bottom direction unit was equipped, and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows a motion of back bottom movable decorations. It is a schematic perspective view of internal structures, such as a back left movable decoration body. It is a front view which shows the motion of the back left movable decoration body of the back left production | presentation unit in a back unit. Raise the back bottom movable decorative body of the back bottom production unit from the standby position from the normal state, and move the back bottom moving arm to the back left bottom movable decorative body of the back left production unit and the back right bottom movable decoration body of the back right production unit The height of the back movable unit is lowered from the standby position, and the back upper movable arm is the same as the back upper left movable decorative body of the back left directing unit and the back upper right movable decorative body of the back right directing unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state of height. In the state of FIG. 165, the back bottom movable decorative body, the back top movable decorative body, the back top left movable decorative body, the back bottom left movable decorative body, the back top right movable decorative body, and the back bottom right movable decorative body are rotated. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back left movement arm of the back left production unit and the back right movement arm of the back right production unit from the normal state to the 2nd state. 167 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are moved to the second state from the state of FIG. 167. Move the back left moving arm to the right and the back right moving arm to the left from the normal state, and move the back upper left movable ornament and the back lower right movable ornament, and the back left lower movable ornament and the back upper right movable ornament. It is a front view of the game board showing the state where the effect image is displayed on the effect display device after the bodies are rotated so as to face each other. The back bottom movable decorative body, the back top movable decorative body, the back top left movable decorative body, the back left bottom movable decorative body, the back top right movable decorative body, and the back right bottom movable decorative body were moved from the normal state to the second combined position. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state. From the state of FIG. 170, the back bottom movable decorative body, the back top movable decorative body, the back top left movable decorative body, the back bottom left movable decorative body, the back top right movable decorative body, and the back bottom right movable decorative body are moved to the first combined position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the first pattern is light-decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. It is a timing diagram showing an example of the effect of performing the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of the game panel and the first pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the second pattern is light-decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. It is a timing diagram showing an example of the effect of performing the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of the game panel and the second pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 175 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second pattern of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from FIGS. 172 and 174 is light-decorated. The first design is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back bottom movable decorative body, the back top movable decorative body, the back top left movable decorative body, the back left bottom movable decorative body, the back top right movable decorative body, and the back right bottom It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the movable decoration body to the 2nd union position. The first design is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and the back bottom movable decorative body, the back top movable decorative body, the back top left movable decorative body, the back left bottom movable decorative body, the back top right movable decorative body, and the back right bottom It is a front view of a game board shown in the state where a movable decoration object was moved to the 1st union position. In the light guide plate of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from FIG. 178, the second pattern is illuminated and decorated, and the back lower movable decorative body, the back upper movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back left lower movable decorative body, and the back upper right movable body It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the movable decorative body and the back lower right movable decorative body are moved to the first combined position. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a view on arrow A in FIG. 182. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a connection relationship with a panel drive board | substrate. FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 186. It is a figure which shows the structure of a frame earth substrate. It is a circuit diagram explaining the outline | summary of the circuit structure of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which expanded the power supply board partially. It is a B arrow view of FIG. It is the silk printing (the 1) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is the silk printing (the 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary of a manufacture cancellation electronic component. It is the structure of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a payout control board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary of the wiring to the board | substrate handled as a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decoration board | substrate with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decoration board | substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in D section of FIG. 202. It is the structure of countermeasures, such as a reflectance fall which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the structure of countermeasures, such as a reflectance fall which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 205 is an enlarged view of the D ′ portion of FIG. 204 or the D ″ portion of FIG. 205 as seen from the LED non-mounting surface. It is the structure of countermeasures, such as a reflectance fall which concerns on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 207 is an enlarged view of the D ″ ″ portion of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a decoration board provided with a magnetic-type magnetic pole change detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 210. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 213 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 213. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 214. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a modification of a payout device. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electrically-powered object control processing which are performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for a lottery process for jackpots, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for a lottery process for jackpot types. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and a normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hold notice determination table used for determining a hold notice pattern at 1 o'clock on hold, (B) is a hold notice determination table used for determining a hold notice pattern at 2 o'clock, (C ) Is a hold notice determination table used for determining a hold notice pattern at 3 o'clock. (D) is a hold notice determination table used for determining a hold notice pattern at 4 o'clock on hold. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the production pattern set as the 1st change change production. It is a specific production example in the production display device at the time of execution of the first hold change production. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the production pattern set as the 2nd change change production. It is an example of a specific effect in the effect display device at the time of execution of the second hold change effect. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the production pattern set as the 3rd change change production. It is a specific example of an effect in the effect display device at the time of execution of the third pending change effect. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the stock production over a plurality of fluctuations when execution of the operation effect is determined in advance. (A) is a type of operation effective time, (B) is a scenario determination table used for determining a scenario determination pattern at 4 o'clock on hold, and (C) is determination of a scenario determination pattern at 3 o'clock on hold. It is a scenario determination table used for. It is a specific example of the effect in the effect display device at the time of execution of the stock effect and the operation effect. It is a specific example of the effect in the effect display device at the time of execution of the stock effect and the operation effect. (A) is the type of the mode immediately before the operation, (B) is a scenario determination table used for determining the scenario determination pattern at 4 o'clock on hold, and (C) is the determination of the scenario determination pattern at 3 o'clock on hold. It is a scenario determination table used for. It is the specific example of the production | presentation in the production | presentation display apparatus at the time of execution of the stock production which stocks the content of the aspect immediately before operation, and an operation production. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of cancellation notification when a specific period occurs after execution of the light guide effect at the time of change. It is a specific example of effects on the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 when the light guide effect at the time of change and the light guide effect at the time of release notification are executed. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the look-ahead effect at the time of stop and the regrettable effect in the temporary stop period of the lost pattern. It is the concrete example of an effect in the production | presentation display apparatus at the time of execution of the look-ahead effect at the time of stop using the temporary stop period of a losing symbol design, and a disappointing production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the serif notice as an example of the button related effect performed with an effect display apparatus. FIG. 259 is a timing chart of the serif notice shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation trigger pseudo-error effect as an example of the button related effect performed with an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-operation pseudo error effect as an example of the button related effect performed with an effect display apparatus. (A) is a timing chart of the operation trigger pseudo error effect shown in FIG. 261, and (B) is a timing chart of the non-operation pseudo error effect shown in FIG. It is the schematic of the handling of the conductor which floated with respect to the earth with which the various production units with which a game board is equipped are equipped. It is an example of a fluctuation pattern pattern table. It is one example which divided the 1st parameter | index determination table into two. It is an example of the other which divided the 1st parameter | index determination table into two. It is an example of a 1st promotion lottery table. It is an example of a 2nd parameter | index determination table. It is an example of a 2nd promotion lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of a barbell reach production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of a barbell reach production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of a barbell reach production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of a barbell reach production. It is an example of an effect color selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of bulletin board notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of bulletin board notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline | summary of bulletin board notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline | summary of bulletin board notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the prefetch effect which used the bulletin board prelude effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the bulletin board notice effect using a press operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the bulletin board notice gaze production using a press operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the bulletin board notice effect using a center press operation part and a rotation operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the bulletin board notice effect using a center press operation part and a rotation operation part.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 13 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 106) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, and the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the received game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a main body frame base 501 are attached. A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 includes outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a center of the game area 5a in front view. An effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a rear side of the effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 A peripheral control unit 1500 is configured as that the transparent substrate box, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege (for the player by receiving or passing the game ball B) ( For example, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B) are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy driving the handle 182.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect. The player can be entertained by performing a moving effect and a light emitting effect by various effect units such as the unit 3100, the back effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 22B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 33 and FIG. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 99). And a part of (see FIG. 100) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114 a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper dish ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b is aligned with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and the pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 23 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is in a state substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the ball supply unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 36A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking unit 144a and stays on the partition unit 143a (a state where the game ball B remains in the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a which is the standby position is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 36B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). State) and the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 185) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 36 (b) or the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, The operation line invalidating member 700 serving as the first fraud prevention means is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so as to be detachable from the rear side. Yes. Here, the invalidation of the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated by cutting, pinching (pinching), entanglement (winding), or bonding with hot melt or the like. It means making it into a state.

  The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right, and is a first piece that is vertically separated at the approximate center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. An inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the distal end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the portion 701 and the second piece portion 702, and the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702. And. The first piece 701 of the operation line invalidating member 700 is bent with respect to the flat surface of the operation line invalidating member 700 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same plane as the flat surface of the operation line invalidating member 700. Thus, in plan view, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V shape toward the right.

  The operation line invalidating member 700 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 is formed in the hitting ball supply port 142a. It will be in the state connected with.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 700, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. Or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as that) is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. When an illegal act is performed by operating the operation line to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or causing an illegal ball to be taken in or out of the first starting port 2002 or the like, the ball launcher 540 plays a game The operation line attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the illegal ball launched (hit) with a strength that can reach the region 5a. Thus, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.

  Note that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described form, but may be another form. For example, if the operation line attached to the illegal ball is cut or narrowed so as to suppress illegal acts, the operation line invalidating member 700 may be bent or bent in a form different from that described above. It is good also as a structure provided, and it is good also as a structure which replaces with a metal plate and has the resin molding member which has the shape which can cut | disconnect or narrow the operation line attached to the illegal ball | bowl.

  Further, when the illegal ball is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic, a metal game ball at the above-described standby position (on the above-described partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). ), And the detection signal is added to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 as the electric feeding means, thereby preventing the illegal ball from being launched. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal sphere made of synthetic resin and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not perform driving for ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball launcher 540 with a weaker force (a launch force that cannot reach the game area 5a) than a predetermined force (a launch force that can reach the game area 5a) and the game area 5a of the game board 5 The game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside is guided to the lower plate 202, and the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a which is a sphere opening of the tray unit 200. And a through ball passage 150a that communicates with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front. And a full ball receiving port 150b.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and the momentum unit 540 is launched from the launch rail 544 by the ball launcher 540 of the main body frame 4, but lacks momentum. A foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop opening 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and a front view right A lower tray ball supply port 211c that is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower corner and that releases the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving unit 150c and that serves as a ball opening of the dish unit 200. 150d, a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the ball, a ball discharge port 150d (more precisely, a storage passage 150e to be described later), and a communication passage 150 connecting a foul ball receiving portion 150c. It has a, and. The communication passage 150h includes an upper passage wall 150i disposed below the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one game ball from the upper passage wall 150i. And a lower passage wall 150j disposed in parallel with a distance of 始, the starting end portion opens upward to the downwardly inclined end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the terminal end portion extends from the storage passage 150e. Open downward.

  A series of passages from the foul ball drop opening 1013 established between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h and the storage passage 150e are returned to the foul ball. A return passage portion 1014 is formed by a series of elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving unit 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through-sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 109). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud due to the illegal sphere Q attached with the operation line L. Similarly, the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 are provided. The foul ball dropping opening 1013 opened during the period is provided with operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S as third fraud prevention means.

  The second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. As shown in the drawing, both lateral projections 7001 are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixed (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of safety, the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 are externally covered and accommodated so that the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like are difficult to contact.

  A specific operation line invalidating member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidating member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. A V-shaped opening that opens in a direction opposite to the flow-down direction of the sphere of the communication passage 150h by the one piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extended from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702. The shearing part 7000v is formed.

  In addition, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the foul cover unit 150 of the embodiment has the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the lid member 152 constituting the foul cover unit 150. It is arranged so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface, and at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000. A tapered guiding portion 150k capable of guiding the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on its upper surface, and is directed toward the lid member 152 toward the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line invalidating member 7000 side, and the width narrows toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka. A tapered portion 150k having a tapered shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L) and a second inclined portion 150kb. When the operation line L that receives tension by rolling of the illegal sphere Q or pulling from the outside is brought into sliding contact with the guide portion 150k, the second inclined portion 150ka to the second inclined portion due to the tension applied to the operation line L. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 so as to slide on the inclined portion 150 kb. Thus, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal foul sphere and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corner portions of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guide portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

  Since the second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is set using the space communicating from the lower tray ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The illegal ball Q that has been attached is allowed to enter the game area 5a and the manipulation line L on the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q. Unauthorized actions that cause the ball Q to be taken in and out of the first starting port or the like can be suppressed.

  For example, a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as “illegal act”) in which the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and is caused to flow backward to the launch position of the ball launcher 540. A ”) is performed, and when the illegal ball Q goes over the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and goes to the firing position of the firing rail 544, When pulled (with tension applied), the operation line L wraps around the U-turn along the folded portion. Then, the operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v by the first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020, and finally Since the operation line L cannot be operated as a result of the disconnection, it is possible to suppress an illegal act using the illegal sphere Q.

  In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the launch position, which is intentionally made into a foul ball, and a lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even when a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as “fraud act B”) is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball that has become a foul ball is grabbed and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a. The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent launch of the illegal sphere Q (tension is applied) and the operation line. L is pressed against the folded portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing part 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above. As a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. OK To become. 39 and 40 are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where the fraudulent act B is performed. In addition, for the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the illegal sphere Q that becomes a foul sphere (for example, a foul sphere is obtained In this embodiment, there is a possibility that the operation line L is not invalidated by the first fraud prevention means even if the fraudulent sphere Q is launched with a certain degree of strength. Therefore, this embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasures by the first fraud prevention means. It also has the effect of For this reason, when targeting the fraudulent act B, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 serving as the first and second fraud preventing means, and the operation line invalidating member 7000H serving as the third fraud preventing means described later. , 7000S are preferably used together as appropriate, and the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 or the third operation line disabling member 7000H, 7000S, which are different from the first operation line disabling member 700, are provided. It is good to install together in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 are not conspicuous because they are provided together on the door frame 3 side and are not exposed to the outside. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble, fraud countermeasure information is difficult to leak. In addition, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 can easily maintain the crime prevention performance if the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 are exchanged together with the door frame 3 because the reduction in sharpness or the like affects the crime prevention performance.

  By the way, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 serving as the first and second fraud prevention means described above cut and invalidate the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v. In other words, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022 so that the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. You may make it invalidate like this.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed by two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined at the hatched portion of the enlarged view of FIG. 41, and the metal plates 7011 and 7022 are formed. The first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of the two is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is designated as a pinching portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidating member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, for safety reasons, it is difficult to contact the hands of employees, game machine assemblers, and the like. And the cover member 152 is covered and accommodated from the outside.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the fold-back portion of the metal plate 701 wraps around in a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the fold-back portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-joint portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 7044 is pinched and pinched like tweezers.

  As a result, the illegal ball Q that has flowed back from the lower dish ball supply port 211c due to the illegal act A described above reaches the launch position of the launch rail 544, or the illegal ball Q that is intentionally made a foul ball by the illegal act B. Can be prevented from reaching the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a sphere opening, and the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line invalidating members 7000 even if it reaches that position. For this reason, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the flexible operation line L is only loosened, and as a result, the amount of the operation line L that can be fed cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging on the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to suppress fraud using the illegal sphere Q.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to be the introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is the pinching portion 7044. However, instead of this, a single metal plate is bent so that the plate surfaces overlap each other, and the leading end portion of one bent plate surface is expanded in a V-shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (guide portion). ), And the sandwiched width portion of both plate surfaces may be the retaining portion 7044. Thereby, the assembly work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of a metal plate can be improved, producing the same effect as the above-described fraud prevention effect.

  Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000 that clamps the operation line L is not shown, but a double-sided tape is installed in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. 42 or an adhesive that does not harden is filled. Then, an adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion so as not to move.

  Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000 that clamps the operation line L is changed from the above-described one composed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. You may install and form so that the induction | guidance | derivation direction of the 2nd inclination part 150kb of the induction | guidance | derivation part 150k and a self center axis line may be substantially orthogonally crossed. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted between the adjacent coils of the coil spring and clamped.

  Coil springs that have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, need to be placed in a compressed state like compression coil springs. It is advantageous in terms of installation work.

  Of course, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when there is no load, but as shown in FIG. 43, the coil on the entry side of the operation line L is bent so as to be slightly expanded. This is preferable because the operation line L can enter smoothly. Thus, when the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, the cost can be reduced because it can be manufactured at a low cost.

  In addition, a foreign object such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidating member 7000 from the opening for the sphere (lower tray ball supply port 211c), and the cell plate closes the guide portion 150k to the operation line invalidating member 7000. In order to cope with this, in the above-described embodiment, the course changing portion of the foul ball return passage portion 1014 (the portion corresponding to the upper portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in this embodiment) is possible. In addition, a slit 1015 into which the cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). Thereby, the further unauthorized operation | work which inserts a foreign material from the opening for balls (lower tray ball supply port 211c) and blocks the guide part 150k can also be suppressed. In addition, as a countermeasure for an illegal work to insert a foreign object such as a cell plate from the opening for the sphere (the lower tray ball supply port 211c) and close the guide portion 150k, a foreign object such as a cell plate is used as in the slit 1015 described above. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 39, the configuration is provided with a projecting obstacle 1016 that collides with a foreign substance such as a cell plate and blocks the arrival to the guiding part 150k. As a result, a higher level of fraud prevention may be achieved.

  Further, the first and second operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that is invalidated after the operation line L enters, but FIG. 49, FIG. 50, FIG. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that actively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal sphere Q may be used.

  49, FIG. 50, and FIG. 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. The operation line invalidating member 7000D is a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). Is pivotally attached to the path changing portion (the corner corresponding to the upper portion of the lower dish ball supply port 211c).

  That is, the operation line invalidating member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-like ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-like invalidating portion 2646 that protrudes perpendicularly to the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645 in FIG. And a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the disabling part 2646 intersects, and an arc-shaped ball stop 2648 centering on the shaft hole 2647 protruding from the upper edge of the disabling part 2646, A support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 50 (a). Can swing to the release position. The operation line invalidating member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2660 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the shaft hole 2647 of the invalidating portion 2646, and the ball receiving portion 2645 is energized by the biasing of the balance weight 2660. 50A is maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, a load for one game ball) is applied to the ball, while a load for one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. Sometimes it swings to the release posture of FIG.

  Further, the edge of the disabling portion 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D is an intersecting side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the disabling member 7000D swings to the release posture of FIG. 50 (b), the intersecting side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 having the above dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the communication passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward by the course changing unit, it is placed on the ball receiving part 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving attitude. Due to the load of the foul sphere, the operation line invalidating member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. Then, the foul sphere placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is discharged to the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line invalidating member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached to the balance weight 2660. Return to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

  In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may be generated at one time. Even in such a case, while the previous foul ball is processed by the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the subsequent foul ball is as shown in FIG. The arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 stops the operation line, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D moves backward to continue the processing. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls are generated simultaneously, they can be processed one by one without any trouble.

  Next, the above-mentioned fraud act B (a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of them is launched from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the foul cover unit 150 having the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. The foul sphere is intentionally weakly fired to form a foul sphere, which is taken out from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the sphere, and the operation line L connected to the illegal sphere is grabbed and the subsequent fraud When the illegal ball Q flows due to the illegal act of launching the ball Q into the game area 5a), the illegal ball Q flows down the communication passage 150h as shown in FIG. Immediately after that, it is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, the operation line invalidating member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 by the load of the irregular sphere Q and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. At this time, the disabling part 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D also rotates, and the crossing edge part 2651 at the edge of the operation line disabling member 7000D crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving part 2652 on the passage side. When the foul ball return passage is crossed, the operation line L passing there naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. Stop). Then, the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, and the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidating member 7000D is in a position that cannot be reached even if a hand is put in from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a sphere opening, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q that stops at this position is taken out from the outside.

  If it is made difficult for the operation line L to reversely move by meandering the operation line L between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652, the operation line L is captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000D. It is also difficult to pull the illegal ball Q back to the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thereby, the illegal sphere Q remaining on the operation line invalidating member 7000D can be stored and collected as a evidence sphere.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above uses the dead weight of the illegal sphere Q. However, the operation line invalidating member 7000D may be operated by the electric drive means as shown in FIG. Good.

  That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D in FIG. 52 connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 serving as an electric drive means to the portion provided with the balance weight 2660 and a ball detector connected to the disabling part 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D is changed from the ball receiving posture to the released posture. When the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655 (change in signal from presence to absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered and the operation line is changed. The disabling member 7000D returns from the release posture to the ball receiving posture. .

  When a normal foul ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the generation and release of the foul ball is detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is received in response to the detection. In order to operate appropriately, the foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line invalidating member 7000D using its own weight.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised and the operation line is invalidated. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is pinched by the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646 and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since the release signal is not emitted from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the raised position. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the target ball opening, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade in the intersecting side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646. be able to. In addition, the operation line invalidating member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of preventing the intrusion of the illegal sphere Q from the sphere opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 blocks the return passage portion 1014. It can also be used as a reverse prevention means. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exhibited.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D has, for example, a disabling portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retracts to open and close the communication passage 150h, and the front end of the shutter plate Is formed as an intersecting side crossing the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h and downstream of the movable region of the intersecting side and passes through the movable region of the intersecting side. Then, the invalid ball Q is detected by this ball detector and the invalidation unit is operated, and the operation line L is clamped or cut at the crossing side crossing the communication passage 150h. Also good.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above can also be applied to the first operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line invalidating member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the illegal deterrent effect can be reliably increased.

  FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that winds up the operation line L and invalidates it.

  In other words, the operation line disabling member 7000D is a square ring disabling portion 2646 that is attached to the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be able to rotate around the rotation shaft 2656 oriented in a direction orthogonal to the passage. And a motor 2657 serving as an electric drive means for rotating the invalidating portion 2646 and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the invalidating portion 2646 as an intersecting side portion 2651 provided downstream of the movable (rotating) region of the intersecting side portion 2651. The invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a foul sphere is detected by the sphere detector 2655.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h and passes through the invalidation unit 2646, and the foul ball detects the ball. The invalidation unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the detector 2655, but the foul sphere flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside through the sphere opening.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B described above flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal ball Q enters the invalidating unit 2646. Since the illegal sphere Q is detected by the sphere detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation because it passes through the invalidation unit 2646, the operation line L is wound around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stops in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q reaches the unauthorized person.

  Note that the sphere detector 2655 for detecting the illegal sphere Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q. In such a case, the illegal sphere Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, useless emptying of the operation line invalidating member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above can be eliminated.

  As described above, the following technical idea is included in the description of the embodiment relating to the dynamic operation line invalidating member.

“A game area where games are played with game balls,
A ball launcher that launches game balls;
A launch passage portion that forms a launch ball passage communicating with the game area from a launch position of the ball launch device; and
A return passage portion that forms a foul ball return passage that connects a foul ball drop opening that is established in the middle of the launch ball passage and a ball opening that discharges a game ball to the outside of the aircraft,
Fraud prevention means capable of preventing operation from the front of the operation line attached to the illegal ball,
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that invalidates the operation line by pinching, cutting, or winding.
The operation line invalidating member includes an intersection side portion that traverses the foul ball return passage of the game ball, and operates the intersection side portion after the illegal ball passes through the movable region of the intersection side portion, thereby the foul ball. A gaming machine that traverses the return passage, and thus invalidates the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage at the intersection by pinching, cutting, or winding. "

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 10, 11, 39, 47, and 48, the third fraud prevention means provided in the foul ball dropping opening 1013 described above is the end portion (end terminal) of the firing rail 544. And an operation line invalidating member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a rail base 1001x made of resin).

  The operation line disabling member 7000H provided at the projecting side end of the firing rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is comb-toothed so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the blade edge. It covers with the safety cover part 1017 arranged in order. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.

  Therefore, as described above, an illegal act of pushing the illegal ball Q back into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and sending it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540 When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls by tilting toward the launching position, the manipulation line L is pulled (with tension applied) and the operation line L becomes an operation line invalidating member. It is cut by touching a cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even when an illegal act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q is grabbed and the subsequent illegal ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the illegal ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000H in the process of dropping, the operation line L is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  On the other hand, the operation line invalidating member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wires in a brush shape as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 39 and FIG. Protruding.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 7000S, if the illegal ball Q reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state of being connected to the operation line L, the end of the operation line L is a lower tray ball supply port which is a ball opening. Even if an unauthorized person is grasping via 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is pulled between the wires of the operation line invalidating member 7000S by the tension. After that, even if the hand that manipulates the operation line L to lower the illegal ball Q is loosened, the operation line L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. The movement of the loosened hand is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. That is, since the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, the illegal act using the illegal ball Q can be suppressed as a result.

  As described above, the third fraud prevention means is effective in the operation line invalidating member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side in the initial stage of the fraud acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line invalidating member 7000S on the side exhibits an effect, a higher level of fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

  Of course, either one of the operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S can be used alone, and a specific invalidating member of the operation line invalidating member 7000H and the operation line invalidating member 7000S is also implemented. The forms may be interchanged or the same invalidating member may be employed.

  Further, in addition to the case where the operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S are made as separate parts and attached to the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 as in the embodiment, for example, a metal plate constituting the firing rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line. The forming member 7000H is integrally formed, or a wire rod is integrally formed on a resin-made rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or a corner portion of the rail base 1001x has a V-groove shape as shown in FIG. 8B. It is also possible to engrave the clamping part 7000Sv and attract the operation line L to the back of the groove of the clamping part 7000Sv.

  Furthermore, the operation line disabling member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line disabling member 7000 as shown in FIG. 48, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIG. 41 and FIG. , 7022, and a guide base 150k including a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

  As described above, in the embodiment in which the second operation line invalidating member 7000 for invalidating the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, the third operation line invalidating member 7000 is similarly set to the foul. Although the embodiment provided in the ball dropping opening 1013 has been described, of course, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided in the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, the inlet portion of the communication passage 150h. The wire invalidating member 7000 is provided at the exit portion (see z in FIG. 39) of the communication passage 150h, the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. The operation line L is a part where the operation line L is bent in contact with a part of the return passage portion 1014, such as being provided at each of the start end of the rail 1001 and the end of the firing rail 544, and the operation line L is the weight of the illegal sphere Q, etc. Provided in any position in the return passage portion 1014 on the condition that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it is going to be stretched straight by receiving a tensile force caused by an unauthorized person. Unishi may be. In addition, the installation position of the operation line invalidating member 7000 according to the embodiment is a position where the player cannot touch the fingertip even if the fingertip is inserted from the opening for the ball, and this position is the player's safety aspect and the operation line invalidity. It is preferable in view of a crime prevention surface that makes it difficult to perform illegal manipulations on the adjusting member 7000 itself.

  In the embodiment, the operation line disabling member 7000 is provided to be shifted to one side of the communication passage 150h. However, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the operation line disabling member 7000 is filled to the full passage width. A cutting blade may be arranged. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the end of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end of the communication passage 150h are used as a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is the operator. Is not touching. In this case, the cutting blade of the operation line disabling member 7000 uses a well-known broken blade structure or chip structure, which is installed in the sheath-like holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and the unit main body 151. If each of the lid members 152 is provided with a loading port 1019 and a discharge port 1020 so that the cutting blade can be pushed out in place to replace the old and new ones, the sharpness can always be maintained. In addition, in FIGS. 44A and 44B, reference numeral 1021 denotes a clamping line portion for the operation line L cut into the trough portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operation line L can bite into the clamping line portion 1021. It is like that. Therefore, even if the operation line disabling member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the clamping part 1021 such as the bottom wall 150g, so that the reliability of fraud prevention is ensured. improves.

  Moreover, although the example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown in the above-described embodiment, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In this case, using the space communicating from the upper bowl supply port (ball opening) to the game area 5a, a fraudulent act for intruding the illegal ball Q attached with the operation line L into the game area 5a (the fraud act A, A fraudulent act similar to B) may occur. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is exemplified that the second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in a space communicating from the upper tray ball supply port to the gaming area 5a as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side. However, the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, one second fraud prevention unit is provided in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage unit 1014. However, a plurality of the second fraud prevention units may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (for each of the folded portions), Two fraud prevention means may be provided. Thereby, it becomes possible to further enhance the deterrence effect of fraud using the illegal ball Q.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal plate is provided as the second fraud prevention means in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014. However, a resin molding having the same configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Or, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may have a special shape so that it can function as the second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, but instead, a taper provided at a folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. The slit-shaped capture portion is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage portion 1014 so that the operation line L can be captured at the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the guide portion 150k. The operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q may be clamped by the capture part which is the narrowest part of the guide part 150k. Even with such a configuration, an illegal deterrent effect equivalent to that of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. However, as shown in FIG. 45, 46, and 49, an illegal sphere that prevents the intrusion of the illegal sphere Q from the opening for the sphere (inhibits the backward or reverse flow of the illegal sphere Q) without affecting the flow of the normal foul sphere. By providing a reverse prevention means, fraud due to the illegal ball Q is prevented.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a dedicated tool such as a cell plate (foreign material) that pushes the illegal ball Q into the course changing portion (the portion corresponding to the portion directly above the lower dish ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014. In addition, it is possible to exemplify the provision of an attracting part 1022 for attracting the illegal sphere Q itself to another passage and sealing the movement (first illegal sphere reverse prevention means). As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that causes the illegal sphere Q to flow backward, such as the above-described illegal action A, without affecting the flow of the normal foul sphere. In addition, a trapping valve that can swing only in the intrusion direction of the backflowed illegal sphere Q into the attracting part 1022 at the inlet part of the attracting part 1022 (allows the intrusion to the attracting part 1022 and A single-open valve (not shown) that disables disengagement may be provided, so that traces using the illegal ball Q and evidence of fraudulent activity can be left.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, it is exemplified that a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the flow-down direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the illegal ball Q from moving backward (back flow). Yes (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that causes the illegal sphere Q to flow backward, such as the above-described illegal act A, without affecting the normal flow of the foul sphere. Note that the operation line invalidating member 7000D in FIG. 49 is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.

  The static operation line invalidating member and the dynamic operation line invalidating member described above may of course have both.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidating member different from the first operation line invalidating member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014. However, such an operation line invalidating member is, for example, a foul ball dropping port 1013. And the firing position or between the foul ball drop opening 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  Moreover, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, it is not limited to this, It applies to a pachislot machine or the game machine which unites a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 30 and 31. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 115). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 115).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by a procedure reverse to the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in the shallow box shape open | released back by the main-body part 171 and the back protrusion piece 172, and intensity | strength and rigidity are high. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 54A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 54B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the door frame tray unit as viewed, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252 in the left and right directions, and The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5-1. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, the front end is retracted rearward, and the guide passage portion 201a whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (FIG. 62). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (earth ground) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) so that the game The static electricity charged on the sphere B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. 59 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5-3d. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish lower left decorative board 283, the dish lower right decorative board 288, and the operation unit relay board 392. Is to do. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before removing the upper bowl and after removing the upper bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Accordingly, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a dish unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252 separately from each other on the left and right. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish lower left decoration unit 280, the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower right decoration unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5-4e. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The dish upper left decorative substrate 273 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right so as to follow the dish upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The dish upper right decorative substrate 278 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right so as to follow the dish upper right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4f. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The dish lower left decorative substrate 283 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish lower left decorative body 281. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The dish lower right decorative substrate 288 is formed in a long and narrow strip shape extending left and right so as to follow the dish lower right decorative body 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 68A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. And a dish central lower decorative board 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left edge of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the front (outside) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are caused to emit light, each of them can be light-decorated substantially uniformly and can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 69 and FIG. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5-5c. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 71B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. Driving the motor 342 can assist the player's rotation operation, and driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player's rotation operation to be performed. Can be loaded. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operational feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The production operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a shape in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, a front decoration substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semicircular arc shape, and a rear semicircle It is comprised by the back decoration board | substrate 352b formed in the elongate strip shape which has arc shape. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 69 and FIG. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320 so that the output direction is directed upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as sound, sound effects, music, and the like by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player will feel as if the production operation unit 300 has trembled. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can provide a player with more various effects.

  The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information and vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and gives sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, when resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the gaming machine, the material of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, the hardness, and the attachment method, sound information of only a specific frequency is input. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variation in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (sweep) eight times in one cycle for about 1 second in units of 1 Hz. This is intermittently performed by sweeping for 1 second and inputting again after 1 second.

  In the assembly work of the gaming machine, for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated. Based on that. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the gaming machine is turned on (or when the inspector turns on the gaming machine with the RAM clear switch operated), the main control board A command to clear and initialize the RAM 1310 is transmitted (output) to a peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, the peripheral control board performs vibration speaker operation confirmation processing for performing inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibration speaker. The inspector can confirm sound (sound) such as voice and music from the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation processing, and can also confirm vibration of the presentation operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the top and front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 78B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a position that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through in the center, And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is urged upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 79, etc.).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward in this state (the state shown in FIG. 78A) and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height that substantially matches the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in front in FIG. 78 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position state, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 81B and the like). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 78 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5-5j. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 81A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 81B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 79 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. At the same time, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Thus, the pressing operation portion 303, together with the lifting base 364, protrudes upwardly by the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365 and enters the raised position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is approximately the same as the top surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 81 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and therefore it is possible to attract attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Accordingly, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. 82A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and includes a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. Has been. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and its upper end is the top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450 door frame. It is formed to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window decoration part decoration substrate 413 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window decoration member 412, and on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411, the side window decoration member 412. It attaches to the site | part which becomes the back of the connection base 412a. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape on the top, bottom, left, and right around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419, and includes a right side upper decorative board 418a and a right side lower decorative board 418b. Has been. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in this way, and the expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 88A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 88B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front projecting portions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the front end upper portions of the left and right front projecting portions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are arranged on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Accordingly, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 97 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a lower portion of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a game ball B therein, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that is attached to the rear side of the game board 5 so as to be opened and closed and covers the rear side of the game board 5; And Tsu (500) viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and has a single guide passage extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, and a first rail attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. One rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555 that is spaced from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view and attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 The ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at the position of the tank rail 553 and the downstream end of the tank rail 553 It includes a Tamatome member 557 are, a.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball guided by the single guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 99A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 is a flat guide body 502a that extends to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge in the left-right direction. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 100B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving portion 150 c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b extending substantially downward with substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c extending in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a with the same width as the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A back plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end of the width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and the left plate portion 551b From the front of the lower side to the right It includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape. Note that a convex portion 551da is formed on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d in the left-right direction so as to protrude rearward at a portion separated from the lower side by a predetermined length.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in opaque black, and has a horizontal direction that is approximately half the horizontal width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is molded from a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward, thereby forming a single guide passage. Has been. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the single guiding passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed on substantially the same surface. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is bent multiple times downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white. The end of one rail cover 554 is attached so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The sphere straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 110). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that circulates in two upper and lower stages by this rectifying piece 556a, the flow is rectified so as to flow in a single stage on the downstream side, so that the inside of the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque red color, and is slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front. , The opening at the bottom left end of the tank rail 553 is closed, and the game ball B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit downstream.

  The cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is downward as it goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that is bent multiple times. A part of the plurality of bent portions is formed as a substrate housing portion 551aa for attaching the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded from a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a line from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from behind). And 10 external terminals of XCN10 are provided.))) And the substrate is accommodated so that its mounting surface is vertical toward the rear of the payout base 551 when the payout base 551 is viewed from the front. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 is horizontally oriented with its mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are mounted) facing downward. As seen from the front, the payout base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558 and attached to the board housing portion 551aa and covered with the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 is housed in a space formed by the substrate housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be viewed from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

  Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm). In contrast, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm). When the frame ground substrate 559 is accommodated and attached inside the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is seen. Is hidden due to the presence of the external terminal plate 558, but it is difficult to visually recognize, but of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. 1 can be visually recognized from the back surface (for example, refer to FIG. 93). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is as high as 13.4 mm as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the ground terminal ECN3 is hidden by the presence of the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have a low height of 7 mm and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. It is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame ground substrate 559 is for once collecting the electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places and grounding (earth ground) to the island equipment of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 103 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the back. FIG. 104 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by one guide passage of the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 includes a single payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the single guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 can flow, and a single ball pullout branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. In a normal state, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is discharged from the ball extraction passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 110).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 106 (a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 106 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. It is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotational position of the dispensing blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the payout device for explaining prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. In FIG. 107, in order to explain the rotational position of the payout vane, the payout gear member and a part of various gears that cannot be seen from the back of the payout device are described so as to be visible, and are the subject of explanation. A small circle is attached to the bottom of the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589. Here, the configuration of the payout device 580 will be described first, and then the rotational position of the payout blade, prevention of clogging of the balls, and prevention of ball dropout will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of dispensing device]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing device rear lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and is molded transparently. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be viewed from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear cover 582.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur-gear-like drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached, a spur gear-like shape that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front lid 583. Of the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z1: 20), the second transmission gear 586, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. It extends outward from the transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20), the spur gear-like payout gear 588a and the payout gear 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) meshing with the second transmission gear 587. A payout gear member 588 having a number of detecting pieces 588b and rotatably mounted between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and paying out between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 A payout vane 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the gear member 588 and project into the payout passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 are detected. Blade rotation detection sensor 590. The payout motor 584 is controlled by the payout control board 633 and is step-driven. When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the rotation shaft rotates stepwise at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in this embodiment). That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation shaft by 18 degrees in one step rotation. A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in opaque black. The payout blade 589 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582. In addition, the ball removal movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white. The ball release lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction, as viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side when viewed from the back. It opens downward near the left end. At this branching portion, a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension, and a ball clogging prevention portion 581r is projected in a rib shape toward the ball extraction passage 580b. The upper surface of 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage that forms the payout passage 580a are formed in the same plane to form a right downward inclined surface in rear view. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r will be described later.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-like detection pieces 588b having an arc shape extending outward at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape extending concentrically outwardly from the rotation axis thereof at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius that is slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a, and is recessed with an arc on the outer peripheral portion of the columnar shape. By forming the ball storage portions 589b at equal intervals, the blade pieces 589a serving as peaks and the ball storage portions 589b serving as valleys are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 106). Thus, the ball removal can be performed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593.

  When ball removal is performed by raising the ball removal lever 593 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in the state of daisy chaining upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 However, it will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side over the ball removal movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotating position of dispensing blade]
As described above, the payout device 580 includes a spur gear-like drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 (meshing with the drive gear 585). Tooth number Z1: 20), spur gear-like second transmission gear 587 (tooth number Z2: 20) meshing with the first transmission gear 586, spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a (tooth number) meshing with the second transmission gear 587 Z3: 24) and a discharge gear member 588 having a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a discharge blade 589 that rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the discharge gear member 588, and the like. When the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is driven to rotate, the rotation is paid via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. It is transmitted to rotate the blade 589.

  Here, the rotational speed of the payout gear member 588 is obtained by reducing the rotational speed of the payout motor 584 by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. . The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation based on the mechanism. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor excited by 2-2 phase excitation having a rotation shaft that rotates 18 degrees in one step rotation (the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 360 steps ( = 18 degrees × 20 steps))), the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 is 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees × reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. Thus, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 54 steps), and when one rotation (360 degrees rotation), 4.5 turns. It will rotate an extra degree.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees, so that the dispensing blade 589 rotates once (360 degrees). It is necessary to rotate the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 step by step 53.333 (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees), and the stepping drive to the dispensing motor 584 corresponding to one rotation (360 degrees rotation) of the dispensing blade 589 is performed. The number of steps that is the number of times is not an integer.

  That is, in this embodiment, three ball storage portions 589b are formed at equal intervals on the payout vane 589, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to step driving. The delivery blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588 (that is, the rotational axis of the delivery motor 584 is 1). Since the payout vane 589 rotates 6.75 degrees when it is stepped (rotated 18 degrees), one game ball B can be sent out every 120 degrees of rotation. In order to rotate the blades 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by 17.777... Step rotation (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Therefore, in this embodiment, the 18-step rotation, which is an integer rounded up to the nearest decimal point, is set as the number of times of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589, whereby the payout blade 589 is rotated more than 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation × 6.75 degrees)), so that the rotation position of the payout vane 589 reaches the position where the next game ball B is received. Can be rotated.

  The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B each time it rotates (360 degrees), but only one game ball B may be paid out. For example, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 may be erroneously detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590. Therefore, every time one game ball B is paid out, the origin of the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set. Is preferred. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is 18 step rotation that is an integer rounded up to the nearest decimal point, as described above. The payout vane 589 is rotated more than 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation × 6.75 degrees)) and paid out each time one game ball B is paid out. Processing for setting the origin of the rotational position of the blade 589 is performed to increase the accuracy of the rotational position of the payout blade 589.

  In addition, as described above, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that each game ball is paid out. Even if errors accumulate, the rotation angle of the payout vane 589 is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout vane 589. Each time it is paid out, the accumulated error can be reset. Thus, even if an error occurs every time a game ball is paid out due to the influence of cigarette dust, dust, etc., the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time one game ball is paid out. It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an error from occurring in the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball.

  In addition, as described above, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that each game ball is paid out. The positioning position is different every time. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the positions where dust and dust are attached can be dispersed. Naturally, if the reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member that causes such a positioning error is set, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the rotation angle of the payout vane 589 is Detecting with a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589 resets when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is ensured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotational position of the ball feed rotating unit that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, and the positions where the dust and dust adhere are distributed to the dust and dust. On the other hand, a strong dispensing device 580 can be provided. The payout device 580 has a single payout passage 580a as described above. For this reason, when compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a in the present embodiment when the payout speed of the game balls is the same. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, in the present embodiment, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a collides with the game ball and the payout blade 589 in comparison with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages. Since the number of times is also doubled, the probability that cigarette dust or dust adheres to the dispensing blade 589 is high.

  In this embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, as described above, the dispensing blade 589 exceeds one rotation, so that one rotation of the dispensing blade 589 is equivalent to the 54-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584. If the control is determined and managed as a set to be managed, an angular difference of 4.5 degrees with respect to one rotation of the dispensing blade 589 occurs every 54 steps of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584. For example, 80 sets In this case, the angle difference is finally increased to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of game balls B to be paid out increases by three.

  As described above, the payout gear member 588 is provided with three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120 degree regions having a 60 degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60 degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588 b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the dispensing control board 633.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 rotates the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-described angle difference does not occur. As a management range, a 120-degree area having a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed is used as one game ball B. It can be managed as a payout operation.

  Specifically, first, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed in the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588. Since this is a state, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps as the light shielding range (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 rotating integrally with the dispensing gear member 588). The 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed is in a state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is not cut off by the detection piece 588b. (Corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588).

  In other words, in this embodiment, the rotation gear rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is detected with the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the dispensing gear member 588 as the light-shielding range and the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. The area of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed is set as the light receiving range and is managed by 18 step rotation including the 9 step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. This is done by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by 18 steps.

  When the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates nine steps, the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps). Since the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can rotate slightly larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, a 60-degree region (light-shielding range) in which the detection piece 588b is formed, A 60-degree region (light receiving range) where the detection piece 588b is not formed can be reliably determined.

  Here, a method for setting the origin of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the payout control board 633 has a state in which the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 has changed the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state ("first edge "Detected state") is set with the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 as the point A. At this point A, the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which has rotated the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 from this point A by 5 steps, as the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout vane 589, which has rotated the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 from the origin by 4 steps, as a B point. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 is in a state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state (referred to as “second edge detection state”). In a region where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates from point A to the origin and point B, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the light receiving range (that is, the above-described dispensing gear). Of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the member 588, a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed).

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which has rotated the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 for nine steps from the point B, as the point A described above again. At this time, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 at the origin is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), in the region where the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates from the point B to the point A, as shown in FIG. Of the region of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of 60 degrees).

  Here, the control of the dispensing device 580 by the dispensing control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes a power-on process on the payout control side when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). In the payout control side power-on process, the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the steady process when executing the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after the interrupt start setting, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processes such as a payout motor control process, a history creation process, and an origin setting process in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process.

  The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms by repeatedly executing the history creation process. The payout control board 633 detects the rotation of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed every 4 ms for switching the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation, that is, this time and the previous time. The result of confirming whether the detection piece 588b is in a state of blocking or non-blocking the optical axis is determined from the least significant bit of the history information having a width of 8 bits. After bit shifting one bit at a time, when both the current and previous confirmation results are in a state where the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, both the current and previous confirmation results indicate that the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or this time (For example, one of the confirmation results of this time and the previous time is when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the blade rotation detection sensor) When the detection piece 588b is not blocking the optical axis 590), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

  In this manner, the payout control board 633 updates and creates history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms when the payout motor 584 is switched by 2-2 phase excitation in the history creation process. The payout control board 633 executes origin setting processing for setting the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the payout motor control process to rotate the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 for five steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A, as described above. Since the rotation position of the delivery blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b described above is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is detected by the detection piece. 588b is in a non-blocking state.

  Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having a width of 8 bits, the detection piece 588b has the blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point A. 000001B (“B” indicates bit information. The same applies hereinafter) is set because the optical axis of the optical fiber is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state (first edge detection state). . When the rotational position of the payout vane 589 advances from the point A to the origin, the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width is set to 00111111B. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 performs the first masking process on the history information with the first determination value of 11110000B, and extracts the data from the previous 8 times to the previous 5 times as the calculation result. Later (here, the calculation result is 00110000B by the first mask processing), and the second judgment value of 00010000B is further subjected to the second mask processing for the extracted data, so that the previous five times from the history information. Data is extracted as an operation result (here, the operation result is 00010000 by the second mask process). When the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotation position of the payout vane 589 is not at the origin, and the current rotation position of the payout vane 589 is not set as the origin. It is determined that the current rotational position of the blade 589 is at the origin, and the current rotational position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin.

  In addition, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 is set to point B, and the rotational axis of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 9 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 is located at the point B (that is, exceeding the light shielding range). This processing is finished as it is for a total of 13 steps with the rotation position of the delivery vane 589 as the point A again. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the time until the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates for a total of 13 steps passes. An origin detection prohibition time for prohibiting the origin setting for the payout blade 589 is provided.

  The payout control board 633 switches the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms by executing a payout motor control process. As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A, and sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the origin. Is set to 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the discharge motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the origin, and the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is changed to B. The time taken as a point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the discharge motor 584 is rotated 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the B point (that is, the light shielding range is reduced). The time when the rotation position of the delivery vane 589 again becomes point A again is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 step rotation). As described above, the payout of one game ball B is performed by 18-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. Therefore, the time required for paying out one game ball B is paid out. By performing 18 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the motor 584, 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 step rotation) is obtained.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine having a payout device that pays out a number of game balls according to the amount of rotation of a payout rotating body that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor has been proposed (for example, No. 2004-041261 (paragraph [0052] and FIG. 4)). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is rotated 30 degrees by the output of the data drive data for four steps, so that one game ball is paid out. ing. In a pachinko machine installed in a pachinko parlor, it is inevitable that tobacco dust or dust adhering to the game ball will adhere to the inside of the dispensing device. In addition, since the dispensation device is not disassembled and cleaned, a dispensation device that is strong against cigarette dust and dust is required. By the way, in the gaming machine of this document, since the payout motor rotates 30 degrees by driving the payout motor for 4 steps and is set to pay out one game ball, an accurate operation can be expected. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotating body is the same every time. For this reason, there has been a problem that the position at which tobacco dust and dust adhere is fixed and easily deposited.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball omission prevention]
Next, ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described first, and then prevention of ball dropout due to a non-energized state of the dispensing motor 584 will be described.

  As described above, the ball pulling lever 593 is positioned at the rising end so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened. It can be done. When ball removal is performed, the ball removal lever 593 is raised so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated. At this time, in a state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, a part of the inner wall of the passage that forms the payout passage 580a from the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589 as shown in FIG. Are in a state where a total of four game balls B are parked over the rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion 581r projecting toward the ball extraction passage 580b with a predetermined distance dimension. As the predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and downstream (that is, the payout blade 589 is present). It is a length located on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a. As a result, a rib-shaped ball clogging preventive portion in which a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a has a predetermined distance from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and protrudes toward the ball extraction passage 580b. When a plurality of game balls B stays in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, a part of the last game ball B that stops stops from the ball clogging prevention portion 581r toward the ball removal passage 580b. That is, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. The game ball B flowing down along the above-mentioned main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. Even so, the length is such that it can flow down to the ball extraction passage 580b. In this way, a part of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stops on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r so as to protrude toward the ball extraction passage 580b (in other words, ball clogging prevention). The length of a part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the portion 581r protrudes toward the ball extraction path 580b), and the width of the ball extraction path 580b is restricted to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down. Be able to.

  In addition, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has an upper surface and a passage inner wall surface that forms the payout passage 580a formed in the same plane and has a right downward inclined surface in a rear view.

  That is, in the case where the ball is removed while the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the game ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a. However, even if it collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has a right downward inclined surface in the rear view. The center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clog prevention unit 581r is located on the right side and the downstream side of the left end side of the ball clog prevention unit 581r. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from bouncing due to a collision and flowing down toward the ball removal passage 580b. Be able to Going on. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a from causing a ball blockage in the vicinity of the left end of the ball blockage prevention unit 581r.

  As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is moved along the ball removal path (the body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a). The flow path of the game ball B on the flow path to the side) is restricted to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down as the width of the ball removal passage 580b, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. Thus, clogging of the balls can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent clogging of the balls when removing the balls. In the present embodiment, although the width of the ball extraction passage 580b varies depending on the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589, it is set to be from the minimum width: 12 mm to the maximum width: 14 mm. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur in places where the width of various passages is narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) and slightly narrower (eg, 21 mm) than the diameter of the game ball.

  Next, a description will be given of prevention of ball dropout due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584. In a state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589. And the game ball B is stopped in the payout passage 580a in a state in which the following game balls B are in contact with the game balls B. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and slightly to the right from there. After being bent obliquely downward, it bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the discharge vane 589.

  For this reason, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B that comes into contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is the center of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 ( When the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589 follows the game ball B. A rightward force (that is, a force rotating in the clockwise direction) is applied to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 by the ball pressure due to the weight of the game ball B to be played.

  In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the dispensing motor 584 naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589 and is accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. The game ball B will flow down (send out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and the ball will drop out.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by the rotation axis of the payout blade 589 even if the payout motor 584 rotates naturally in the clockwise direction with respect to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589. The shape of the payout passage 580a on the right side of the payout vane 589 in the rear view is formed so as to be able to stop by 6-step rotation from the origin.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 108 (c), when the dispensing motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 6 steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stopped. , The game ball B that comes into contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 has a point S1 that comes into contact with the side wall of the payout passage 580a, and the outer periphery of the blade piece 589a having the arc shape of the payout blade 589. Of the surface, the side closer to the ball housing portion 589b in which the game ball B is housed (that is, the ball housing portion 589b in which the game ball B is housed, and the ball housing portion in which the game ball B that follows this ball housing portion 589b is not housed. Of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a that connects the portion 589b and the S2 point that contacts the ball storage portion 589b side where the game ball B is stored from the center of the outer peripheral surface. It is formed the shape of sea urchin dispensing passage 580a. As a result, a ball pressure that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the discharge blade 589 can be generated, and the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 can be stopped by rotating six steps from the origin of the discharge blade 589. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

  Note that when the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 in a state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stopped, the payout motor 584 is rotated by 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), it is in a state where it has advanced by rotating 2 steps in the light shielding range (9 steps) beyond the point B which has been rotated 4 steps from the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (d). However, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 13 steps (as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the remaining 7 step rotation + 5 step rotation from the point A because it proceeds by rotating 2 steps out of 9 steps), the dispensing blade 589 Is the origin, and the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589 flows down (sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a. It is adapted to be reliably detected by the detection sensor 591. Therefore, even when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout vane 589 (rotated and advanced by 6 steps) and stopped, an excessive number of balls from which the game balls B are paid out does not occur.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 receives the payout command from the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 as described above. Accordingly, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202). At the time of power recovery after power recovery after a momentary power failure (momentary power failure), first, the operation of returning the rotational position of the payout blade 589 to the origin by controlling the payout motor 584 is not performed. As described above, when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout vane 589 (rotating 6 steps) and stopped, an excessive number of game balls B are paid out. This is to prevent this.

[4-7-3. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full sphere path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 110).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled with the discharge unit 560, and the lower normal discharge path 610a, the lower full tank discharge path 610b, and the lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear, It is located immediately below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper bulb discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of ball tanks 552 are detected from the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Of game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 111A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 111B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 115 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631. The power supply board cover 631 is shaped with a transparent synthetic resin, and the power supply board 630 can be visually observed through the power supply board cover 631 without removing the power supply board cover 631 from the rear base 626. Yes. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 volts (AC100V) is stepped down to the power supply voltage for gaming machines of AC 24 volts (AC24V). AC24V, which is stepped down in the island facilities of the game hall, is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc.) from AC24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall and supplies them to various boards. In addition, the power supply board 630 originally needs to be supplied with a 24V AC game machine power supply voltage, but there is a possibility that a commercial power supply voltage of AC100V will be supplied due to an incorrect connection of a power supply cord (not shown), resulting in destruction. Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 620c is configured to be exchangeable using a common screwdriver (plus screwdriver) (fastening without using a common tool such as a plus screwdriver). It can also be configured so that the tool can be manually attached and detached).

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 115). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

  The payout control board box 632 includes a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The dispensing control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. The cover body and the beta body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, so that the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the dispensing control board 633 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed or unauthorized IC is mounted) It is possible to confirm whether or not it has been done from the outside of the payout control board box 632. Further, the dispensing control board box 632 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body, respectively, and when the dispensing control board box 632 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the dispensing control board box 632 is then paid out. In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the dispensing control board box 632. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrent against fraud to the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600. When the left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551 i of the payout base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601 a of the upper full ball path unit 600, it is formed on the upper side of the back cover 640.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward, and an abutting portion 640a that is lowered forward by one step is formed on the upper side. In a state assembled to the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551 (the rear surface of the convex portion 551 da formed on the upper portion 551 d of the back plate). Yes. Further, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551, and this contact portion is The upper portion 551d of the back plate is covered with a convex portion 551da.

  Except for the contact portion 640a, the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, a detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 124. 117A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 117B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 118 is an enlarged view showing the upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the ball tank as viewed from the front with the tank rail and the like assembled, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of FIG. FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 119 (a) as seen from the front. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 that is rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-letter shape that is mounted along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tab spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrilateral shape in plan view that extends in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in front view, and a front wall and a rear wall of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. In the ball tank 552, a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

  In addition, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. .

  In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction (in the present embodiment, about the bottom surface of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a when viewed from the front, at a portion where the upper side is closed. Three rectangular cutout portions 553aa having a predetermined interval (about 10 mm in this embodiment) are formed. Due to the rectangular cutout portion 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a has a thickness of the rear wall (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment) from the rear wall toward the front of the main guide portion 553a. A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate on the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a is formed upward from the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a (in this embodiment) , About 2.5 mm), a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a lateral length of about 30 mm is formed, and these rectangular holes are formed in communication.

  The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 fall off with the metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is attached to the main guiding portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is prevented, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a by naturally falling from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa, Metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a due to vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Thus, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a, and the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by an attendant such as a game hall clerk. It is possible to remove the metal powder from the main guiding portion 553a by performing the work of removing the removed metal powder.

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to coincide with the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature at the downstream side than at the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical spot can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force is less likely to disperse, so that the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball balls) can be made difficult to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's game can be enjoyed for the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in various production units, etc., the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, and belt can be checked with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The same operational effects as the effects can be obtained.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a side opposite the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface being the overflow surface portion And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from the lower side to the rear side from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically, from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower in front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side in the front view extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552, and the left end side It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end thereof is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Thereby, the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end that is inclined so that the circulation direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow, , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B through the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Therefore, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearwardly can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is not spilled rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d on the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in front view that is approximately 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The spherical tank 552 includes a right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape described above in a plan view, and a straight line connecting the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed region has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. Further, the spherical tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction and the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and on the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that it is lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side when viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, the position is higher along the tank rail 553 to the left than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can be grasped at the tip of the electric wiring by opening the grip portion by operating the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are configured such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g is lower as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower, and the right step 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 122). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball play) due to the engagement between the game balls B.

  Since the bypass passage 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from strongly acting backward on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by preventing the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour path 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed and bitten by the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the game balls B can be blocked. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rails 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a line.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored in the overflow surface portion 501g and the bulging portion 553b is provided in the tank rail 553. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electrical wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface portion 501m, and to make it difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (rightward in FIG. 122) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 122, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g due to their inclination, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4, which causes a problem. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (empty) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

  The ball tank 552 is molded from a conductive resin, whereas the tank rail 553 and a peripheral control board box of a peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded from a nonconductive resin. In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 has the same polarity. It is repelled and is not drawn to the peripheral control board box.

[4-12. Metal powder countermeasure configuration]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view of a part of a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 117 (a), and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for preventing metal powder. In FIG. 125, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the part of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is represented as a cross-sectional view.

  When the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble may occur, causing a malfunction in the peripheral control unit 1500 or causing a malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. The pin spacing of these ICs is reduced, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, thereby narrowing the spacing of various connectors. Therefore, since the distance between the connector and the special connector is also narrow, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, it is shifted backward (in this embodiment, about one half of the diameter of the game ball B). The distance is shifted by a distance of.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that is bent multiple times downward. A back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, a bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are substantially flush with each other. It is arranged. When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. In addition, the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa is received and attached at the top plate portion 551a, or received and attached at the convex portion 551da. Be able to. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 come into surface contact protrudes rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Since it is covered with the formed convex portion 551da, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 starts from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa abuts. It cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become.

  In this way, the top plate portion 551a and the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are metal of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Prevents powder from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a trap that can be. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 that is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 that is attached to the cover body 1501 is displaced (in the present embodiment, the displacement is about a distance of about half the diameter of the game ball B). (In other words, because the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly below the notch 553aa), the electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 This is effective for preventing metal powder.

  The plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, whereas the upper side, the left side, and the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). However, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the cover body 1501.

  Further, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 has a FAN mounting recess having a square shape for mounting the air cooling fan FAN formed on the center side thereof, and a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along each. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switch and seven connectors described later provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 along the lower side. Volume adjustment holes are formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. In the state in which the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, the gaps are formed by seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed in the cover body 1501. The volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume adjustment hole. In addition, in a state where a liquid crystal output board (to be described later) is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

  When the wing part of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the peripheral control is performed by ejecting the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing part by this rotation. Air from the outside of the unit 1500 passes through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. In addition, the gaps described above (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, gaps formed in the peripheral control board 1510, volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, cover) A volume adjusting hole formed in the body 1501; During and through the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal driving board, and two connector hole formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The area (total area) of each of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess of the cover body 1501 is the total area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 as described above. Clearance (seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed on the cover body 1501, gaps formed on the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the cover body 1501. The volume adjustment hole, the gap formed in the liquid crystal output substrate, the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output substrate, and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501) It is getting smaller. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air flow is taken in via the air flow rate, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be kept small. Thereby, heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from entering the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the ventilation holes 1501az due to the influence of the air flow.

  Incidentally, when the wing part of the air cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, when the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the wing part by this rotation, the air cooling fan FAN Since the air flow velocity due to the rotation of the wings of the game ball increases, the probability that the heavy powder of metal powder of the game sphere B is sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 due to the influence of the air flow is increased. Due to electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by metal powder, various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 may cause problems (failures). Become.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protruding portion along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. It can be configured to have a function as a bag for preventing the fan FAN from being sucked in, and by forming a protrusion along the vicinity of the upper side of the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501, a game ball It can be configured to have a function as a bowl that prevents heavy powder of metal powder B from being sucked into the air cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN is thin. (That is, the distance dimension (thickness) of the cooling fan FAN in the depth direction compared to the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess) When the air cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501 by selecting a short distance dimension), the heavy powder of the metal ball of the game ball B is blown by the inner wall of the FAN mounting recess. It can be configured to have a function as a bag for preventing inhalation by FAN. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B can be avoided (hereinafter referred to as “the metal powder countermeasure according to the second to fifth embodiments”). Will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment. FIG. 127 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. 126 to 129, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (hereinafter referred to as “a configuration of metal powder countermeasures according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the part of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is represented as a cross-sectional view.

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and upward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the bent end surface of the top plate portion 551a is disposed above the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. While the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same surface. In addition, the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 disposed substantially on the same plane as the tank rail 553 is branched from the portion to which the effect display device 1600 is attached and is extended rearward.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. The mounting recess 3010da is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, and the contacted portion is covered with an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment. In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back box in the back unit 3000 are arranged. 3010 is different from the rear surface 3010d in that it is arranged on substantially the same plane. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the mounting recess formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. 3010da is in contact with the surface, and the contacted portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. It is different at the point.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the same effects as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received on the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It can be attached. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact is formed by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. Since it is covered, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa comes into contact. The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  As described above, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 have dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Toward the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a bag that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is close to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. The main guide part 553a is arranged so as to protrude below the notch part 553aa formed in the main guide part 553a.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a which are in contact with the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Are arranged on the same plane.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion of the back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment. The bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are substantially on the same plane. It is different in that it is arranged in. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is bent below the tank rail 553. The abutting portion 6 is in contact with the end surface of the top plate portion 551a and is in contact with the top surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. And the upper surface of 0a are different in that they are arranged on the same plane.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the same effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is a bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. And the upper surface of the contact portion 640a of the back cover 640 can be received and attached. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551 a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in abutment is in abutment. As a result, no gap is formed, so that the game panel of the game board 5 starts from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa comes into contact. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502. It is like that.

  In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 has the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a trap that can be prevented. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Note that the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in abutment with each other is in abutment. As a result, no gap is formed, but the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is in close contact with the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. Or the positional relationship in which the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is intimately buried under the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640. A gap is not formed in the close contact portion between the formed contact portion 640a and the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is connected to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is directed rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one third of the diameter of the game ball B).

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The bent top plate portion 551a is in contact with the convex portion 551ab that protrudes downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a, and the contacted portion is in contact with the tank rail 553. Is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion of the back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. The bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed so as to slightly protrude rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is disposed below the tank rail 553. In addition, the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in contact with the convex portion 551ab formed to protrude downward, and the contacted portion is Disposed below the tank rails 553, it is different in that covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the same effects as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is a bent top plate portion disposed below the tank rail 553. It can be received and adhered at 551a. Further, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640, and a convex portion 551ab formed below the tank rail 553 and projecting downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a, Since the abutting portion where the surface contacts is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, it falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa. Attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the contacted portion of the metal balls of the game ball B The peripheral control unit 1500 cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a bowl that can prevent the game ball B and also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a functioning as a cage disposed below the tank rail 553 is used as a separate member (another structural component). It can also be configured to be attached to.

  Further, when the top plate portion 551a is a separate member (another structural component), a mechanism that can be detached or moved from the attachment position and returned to the attachment position for the purpose of removing attached metal powder may be used. In this case, the top plate portion 551a has a different color from the surrounding members, so that a mechanism portion that can be detached or moved from the attachment position and returned to the attachment position can be clearly defined, and the workability of removing the adhered metal powder is improved. Let me.

  In addition, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed. Are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Are not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to protrude downward as compared with the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the contact portion formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4. The front surface of 640a is disposed in parallel with the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a disposed so as to protrude downward relative to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. It is in contact.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  In contrast, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has a bowl-shaped main guide. It is arranged in parallel with the front wall of the portion 553a and is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. The part in contact with the main guide portion 553a is arranged so as to be largely displaced forward from the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion of the back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment. The bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553, and the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent forward and formed in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is connected to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a. It is arranged in parallel and is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged to protrude downward as compared with the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. Min, is different in that it is arranged largely shifted forward from notches 553aa which is plurally formed to the main guiding part 553a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the same effects as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 disposed below the tank rail 553. The side can be received and attached to the upper surface of the contact portion 640a formed by being greatly bent forward. Furthermore, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a are disposed parallel to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. The abutting portion where the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a comes into surface contact is arranged to be largely shifted forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a and is in contact with the gap. Is not formed. For this reason, from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa comes into contact, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000) The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  As described above, the contact portion 640a formed by bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward greatly is formed from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. To the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the dropped game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In addition to functioning as a bowl that can be prevented from falling down, it also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

  Incidentally, a gaming machine including a tank rail that guides a game ball from a ball tank to the downstream side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). The tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter that falls from the hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board located below the tank rail, an electrical trouble may occur, causing the control board to malfunction or malfunction. It was. In recent control boards, the pin spacing of the connector is narrowed by increasing the number of controlled objects, the connector spacing is narrowing by increasing the number of connectors, and the IC pin spacing is further reduced. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electrical problems caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 to 137. FIG. 130 is a front view of a game board in which a game panel is made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 130 viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board with the game panel made transparent. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing the game panel in an opaque state in which a game ball circulates and obstacle nails appearing with the game panel opaque. FIG. 137 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start port 2004, and a prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. As described above, the game is performed to entertain the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 136) that abut on the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 115, FIG. 185, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 The driving board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 are further provided.

  An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 141 and the like) that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

  The drive board unit 1700 includes a panel relay board 1710 that relays connection between the main control board 1310 and various sensors provided on the game board 5, and a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 according to commands from the peripheral control board 1510. A panel drive board 1720 for driving the decorative board and the drive motor provided in the above, and a drive board box 1730 for housing the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 so that the left side of the back view can be rotated by a hinge, and the right side of the drive board box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning ports 2001, and is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 and the start opening unit 2100 that is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a are attached to the right of the front view and have one general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005. Game unit 2400 above the starting port unit 2100 and side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a center accessory 2500 are closed so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500. And a front effect unit 2600 attached thereto.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in itself, and a second that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A start opening sensor 2402 and a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 are provided. In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 has a general winning port sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a game received in the first start port 2002. A first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the sphere B and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 185).

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back bottom effect unit 3100 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and a back effect unit 3200 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. And a back left effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back right effect unit 3400 attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. .

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 to 142. FIG. 138 is a front view of the front component member and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 is a view of the front component member and the game panel from the rear. FIG. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member and the game panel as seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member and the game panel as seen from the rear.

  The front component member 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch portion 1010 coincides with a notch portion of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate sticking portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. Yes.

  In addition, the front component member 1000 is substantially entirely formed transparent, and the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front. That is, it is possible to visually recognize a portion overlapping the front and rear decoration patterns 1150 described later from the front through the front component member 1000 (see FIG. 144).

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes columnar boss portions 1020 protruding forward at the four corners of the front surface. These four bosses 1020 are for positioning the front constituent members 1000 in a stacked state when transporting only the plurality of front constituent members 1000 to prevent load displacement.

[5-2. Game panel]
The gaming panel 1100 in the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 to 145 and the like. FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the game panel with the board cover removed, and FIG. 143 (b) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the lower panel decoration board in FIG. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative pattern of the game panel, the front constituent member, and the front unit. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decorative pattern and the obstacle nail in the game panel.

  The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  In addition, the gaming panel 1100 includes a panel decoration board 1130 on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are mounted, and a board on which the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the panel holder 1120. And a cover 1135. The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. The substrate cover 1135 includes an upper left substrate cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left substrate cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a thin plate thickness by separating the plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole penetrating forward and backward and a short long hole, and an upper edge and a lower edge in the left-right direction. A plurality of engaging step portions 1114. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion 1114 is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engagement claws 1125 and the engagement pieces 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a) or the like, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right in front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the frame-shaped circumferential direction) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The balls B are wide enough to be arranged, and the upper and right sides are narrow enough that a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

  The panel plate 1110 includes a decoration pattern 1150 formed by a plurality of linear grooves on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at regular intervals, a plurality of upper right diagonal lines rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees at the same intervals as the horizontal lines, and horizontal lines and upper right diagonal lines. And a plurality of left-up diagonal lines rotated clockwise by 60 degrees at the same interval as a plurality of horizontal lines. In other words, the decoration pattern 1150 is a geometric pattern picture in which a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines formed by a horizontal line, an upper right diagonal line, and a left upward diagonal line are arranged in a fixed pattern. The decorative pattern 1150 is assembled to the game board 5 with two equilateral triangular contour portions on the left and right sides of the first starting port 2002 and three equilateral triangular contour portions near the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Are further provided with a pattern composed of two equilateral triangular outlines of different sizes.

  The decorative pattern 1150 formed by a plurality of linear grooves is formed in a V shape having a sharp cross section. This decoration pattern 1150 indicates the presence of a linear groove in the front game even when various LEDs mounted on the gaming panel 1100 are not lit (including a state where the power of the gaming machine 1 is not turned on). The contour of the equilateral triangle is formed by a combination of a plurality of linear grooves having different traveling directions, which is formed at a depth exceeding a predetermined depth (1 mm in the present embodiment) so that it can be visually recognized from the user side. The game pattern 5a can be identified from the player side ahead, and the game area 5a is decorated. In addition, the panel board 1110 forms a geometric pattern pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 is caused to emit light and enter the inside (side surface) of the panel board 1110. The light is reflected by a plurality of linear grooves (light is reflected by a surface portion having an acute angle), and the decoration pattern 1150 can be decorated with light emission. Further, the decoration pattern 1150 allows other light emitted behind the panel board 1110 to be emitted from behind or obliquely behind the linear groove even when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not emitting light. When incident, light is reflected by a plurality of linear grooves composing a geometric pattern made up of contours of equilateral triangles (light is reflected by an acute-angled surface portion), and according to the amount of incident light. The decoration pattern 1150 can be decorated with light emission in the form (light emission density, reflection density, or luminance). Even if other light emitted behind the panel plate 1110 is incident from behind or obliquely behind the linear groove, if the amount of incident light is remarkably small, the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 is used by the player. It becomes difficult to recognize.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are provided behind the panel plate 1110. Further, the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 has the back upper left front decoration board 3311a on which the LED 3311aa is mounted, the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 has the back left lower front decoration board 3321a on which the LED 3321aa is mounted, and the back upper right movable decoration. The body 3410 includes a back upper right front decorative board 3411a on which the LED 3411aa is mounted, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 includes a back right lower front decorative board 3421a on which the LED 3421aa is mounted.

  When the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa provided on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are emitted, Light is incident on a linear groove located forward or diagonally forward, and the light is reflected by a plurality of linear grooves constituting a geometric pattern made up of a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines (at the surface portion forming an acute angle). If the amount of incident light is such that the player can recognize the light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150, the decoration pattern 1150 is light-decorated in a manner corresponding to the amount of incident light. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED 3311aa provided on each of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 behind the panel board 1110. , 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa are provided at positions suitable for decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110, and the decoration pattern 1150 can be decorated by emitting light with a light amount exceeding a specific luminance. It has become.

  The positions where light emitting means such as LEDs are provided behind the panel plate 1110 and can decorate the decoration pattern 1150, the distance from the panel plate 1110 (distance from the back surface of the panel plate 1110), etc. are as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as it is appropriately determined according to the brightness of the light emitting means, the distance from the groove of the decorative pattern 1150, and the like. In other words, if the luminance of the light emitting means is too high, the light emitted from the light emitting means becomes conspicuous and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 becomes inconspicuous. The distance from the back surface of 1110 is increased). When it is desired to make the player notice the light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150, the light-emitting means is made to emit light with a light amount that does not exceed a specific luminance, and when the player does not want the player to notice the light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150. The light emitting means may emit light with an amount of light exceeding a specific luminance to make the light emitting means stand out.

  The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 includes a radiating portion 1151 that mainly reflects light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 to the inside, and light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 to the inside. And a radiation light guide 1152 that reflects and guides light along a linear shape. The radiation light guiding unit 1152 satisfies at least one of the depth of the groove and the long circumferential length in the cross section as compared with the radiation unit 1151. The radiation light guide unit 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) the plurality of radiation units 1151, and diffusely reflects the light irradiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 within the panel plate 1110. The light can be guided in the extending direction of the groove. That is, the radiation light guide unit 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiation units 1151 connected to itself to the other. Within a limited range, the overall photosensitivity of the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 (the ratio of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) is increased. Specifically, the radiation light guide 1152 is normally guided from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 143 (a). The light is guided to the radiating portion 1151 arranged outside the light region 1103 to cause the radiating portion 1151 to emit light, and the overall photosensitivity of the decorative pattern 1150 is increased.

  As a result, the radiation light guide unit 1152 has more radiation parts 1151 than the radiation part 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a part where light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is difficult to reach (usually a part outside the light guide region 1103). Light can be delivered to decorate the radiating portion 1151 with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light, the light incident on the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiation unit 1151 and the radiation light guide unit 1152, and from the outlines of a plurality of equilateral triangles. The decorative pattern 1150 formed in the geometric pattern can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness over substantially the entire pattern.

  The panel board 1110 has a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N has a specific obstacle nail N1 that has an important role for the game. As shown in FIG. 145, the specific obstacle nail N <b> 1 is disposed in the vicinity of the warp inlet 2501, the general winning opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, and the gate portion 2003. Since these specific obstacle nails N1 are distorted or bent when the game ball B comes into contact with each other, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the warp entrance 2501, the general winning port 2001, or the like changes. This is a subject that is always subject to maintenance so that there is no distortion or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) around the specific obstacle nail N1 is set as the decoration prohibited area 1104, and the decoration pattern 1150 is included in the range. The radiation part 1151 and the radiation light guide part 1152 are not formed. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted. Moreover, since the groove of the radiation part 1151 and the radiation light guide part 1152 is not formed in the decoration prohibition area 1104 around the specific obstacle nail N1, it is necessary to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 during maintenance. When the obstacle nail N1 is struck, the force is transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the radiating portion 1151 and the radiation light guiding portion 1152, and the panel plate 1110 can be prevented from being cracked or cracked.

  Further, among the obstacle nails N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1, the obstacle nail N implanted in a portion overlapping with the decorative pattern 1150 is not shown, but the tip implanted in the panel plate 1110 is not shown. However, it protrudes into the groove constituting the decorative pattern 1150. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light and light is incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110, light is irradiated from the groove of the decoration pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstacle nail N protruding into the groove. Then, the light is reflected by the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be shined. Thereby, the obstacle nail N can be made to shine, and the player can show the player a light emitting effect that has not been available in conventional pachinko machines. In the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N planted in a special part, and thereby, together with the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150. The special nail N in the special part can be illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the special nail N in the special part, and the game ball B can be driven into the special nail N. The operation can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 including linear grooves is formed on the panel plate 1110 by cutting. The decorative pattern 1150 is formed before the formation of the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the cutting waste discharged by the formation of the decoration pattern 1150 from clogging the planting hole, and the obstacle nail N can be planted in a good state.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1123 that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion 1123 is substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. A through-hole 1121 is provided.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion 1123, and is disposed outside the holding step portion 1123 and a plurality of protruding pins 1124 that are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws 1125 that elastically engage with the engaging step portion 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and a panel protruding from the lower outer side of the holding step portion 1123 upward. A pair of engagement pieces 1126 respectively engaged with two engagement step portions 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110 are provided. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement step 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece 1126 from the diagonally upper front side, and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to move the upper and lower left sides. By engaging the engaging step portion 1114 at the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125 elastically, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in a state of being accommodated in the holding step portion 1123. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel holder 1120 includes two board mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear in the upper left corner and the upper right corner when viewed from the front outside the holding step 1123, and the rear side of each board mounting recess 1127. And two connector recesses 1128 that are recessed forward. An upper left board cover 1136 to which an upper left panel decoration board 1131 is attached and a lower left board cover 1137 to which a lower left panel decoration board 1132 is attached are attached to the two board attachment recesses 1127 from the front. The upper substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400. In addition, the lower substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the certificate sticking portion 1012 in the front component member 1000. In the lower substrate mounting recess 1127, an engaging claw 1125 that engages with an engaging step portion 1114 at a lower left oblique portion of the panel plate 1110 protrudes from the boundary side with the holding step portion 1123.

  In the connector recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connection connector 1131 a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 attached to the board attachment recess 1127 and the connection connector 1132 a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 pass through the rear wall of the board attachment recess 1127. In such a state that the space protrudes to the inside, a space is formed so that a sufficiently large space is formed so that a finger can be inserted around the connection connector 1131a and the connection connector 1132a. Thereby, the connection cable (illustration abbreviation is omitted) and connection work to connection connector 1131a and connection connector 1132a can be performed easily.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132. The upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 are arranged along the upper left diagonal portion of the peripheral edge of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost side facing right and the lowermost side facing downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and is mounted so as to irradiate light downward to the right so that the remainder is perpendicular to the upper left diagonal portion of the panel plate 1110. The upper left panel decoration board 1131 has a connection connector 1131a protruding rearward on the rear surface.

  The lower left panel decoration board 1132 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. As shown in FIG. 143 (b), the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is cut out so as to avoid the lower engaging claws 1125 in the panel holder 1120, and a plurality of lower left panel decorative boards 1132 are avoided in a state where the cut out parts are avoided. The panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted so as to irradiate light upward, rightward, and rightward. The lower left panel decorative board 1132 has a connection connector 1132a protruding rearward on the rear surface.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is formed of a white member so as not to stand out from the front. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side-view type wide-angle full-color LEDs, and can irradiate light forward.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is arranged so that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side view type panel decoration LED 1130 a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. Thereby, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the panel decoration board 1130 can be made thinner than the panel board 1110, the panel decoration board 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100). The decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be decorated with light emission while suppressing an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, the panel decoration substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110 and is too large for the size of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). The plate surface. In other words, the panel decoration substrate 1130 has other areas (excessive) in which the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are 40 to 100 times larger than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be mounted are not mounted. Area). Thereby, the attachment strength of the panel decoration board 1130 can be increased, and even if the vibration or impact generated during the transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 is applied, the panel decoration board 1130 and the panel board 1110 It is possible to make it difficult to cause the positional relationship deviation, and it is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decoration LED 1130a and to prevent the occurrence of a defect in the incidence of light on the panel plate 1110.

  Further, since the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, vibrations and shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are possible. However, it is difficult to be transmitted to the panel decoration substrate 1130. Therefore, vibrations and the like acting on the panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) can be reduced, and a decrease in the durability of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be suppressed, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 It is possible to make it difficult to cause the positional relationship deviation, and it is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decoration LED 1130a and to prevent the occurrence of a defect in the incidence of light on the panel plate 1110.

  A panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 1135. The board cover 1135 is formed in a frosted glass-like translucent so that the panel decoration board 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so that light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be diffused. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to reduce that the light irradiated (leaked) forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player and makes the player feel dazzling. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment, a decorative pattern 1150 having a plurality of equilateral triangular outlines is formed on a transparent panel board 1110, which is more transparent and three-dimensional than a conventional decoration by a printed sheet. The decoration can be shown to the player. Then, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 is caused to emit light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be illuminated and decorated, and the game ball B in the game area 5a that has not been seen in the past pachinko machines It is possible to show the player the light emitting decorations in the distribution area.

  In addition, since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed only in the decoration pattern formation area 1101 in which the game balls B in the game area 5a circulate through various flow paths, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed throughout the game area 5a. Compared with the case where it forms, the cost concerning formation of the decoration pattern 1150 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment has the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is caused to emit light, the function display unit 1400 is displayed. The player can illuminate from behind, and can show the player a light-emitting effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit) not present in the conventional pachinko machine is decorated with light emission.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), most (more than half) of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is covered with the function display unit 1400 so that it cannot be seen. Thus, a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is visible without being covered by the function display unit 1400. That is, not only the upper left board cover 1136 attached to the surface of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 but also a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the upper left panel decoration board 1131 at the back of the upper left board cover 1136. Also, the function display unit 1400 can be viewed without being covered. Thereby, it is possible to visually confirm the panel decoration LED 1130a in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to install the upper left panel decoration board 1131. In addition, in the example of FIG. 146 (A), a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is arranged so that it can be seen, so that the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light to decorate the panel board 1110. It is possible to see through the upper left substrate cover 1136 without going through the light emitting decoration of the pattern 1150. When adjusting the brightness of the panel decoration LED 1130a, the panel decoration LED 1130a can be emitted while being visually observed through the upper left substrate cover 1136.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the side wall portion of the upper left board cover 1136 and the side surface of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 can be visually recognized from the side of the game board 5 with the game board 5 assembled. However, the side surface of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is difficult to distinguish because it is thin, and the side wall of the upper left board cover 1136 is provided, making it difficult to visually recognize the panel decoration LED 1130a. Therefore, it is difficult to confirm from the side of the game board 5 that the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a are installed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be seen from the front of the game board 5, it can be confirmed that the panel decoration LED 1130a is securely installed, and forgetting to install the panel decoration LED 1130a. Can be reliably prevented. Note that, by not providing a part of the side wall portion of the upper left board cover 1136, at least a part of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be visible from the side of the game board 5.

  Further, it is sufficient if at least a part of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is arranged so as not to be covered by the function display unit 1400. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, when the door frame 3 is closed, the function display unit 1400 covers only a portion that is difficult to be seen by the player (a part on the end (left end) side of the game board 5 in the upper left panel decorative board 1131). You may make it not break. Thereby, in the manufacturing process, not only the upper left board cover 1136 attached to the surface of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 but also the upper left panel decoration board 1131 can be confirmed by visual observation, so forgetting to install the upper left panel decoration board 1131. In addition to being able to prevent, in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed in the game store, that is, in a state where the player can play, the upper left board cover 1136 and the upper left panel decoration board 1131, Further, the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 can be made difficult to be visually recognized.

  Further, since the panel decoration LED 1130a is not easily seen by the player, it is possible to prevent the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a from interfering with the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 when the panel decoration LED 1130a is caused to emit light. . As described above, in this example, the panel decoration LED 1130a is a side view type and irradiates toward the game area 5a. LED (status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator) can be prevented from being mistaken. Further, the direct light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a is stronger than the indirect light caused by the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110. The panel decoration LED 1130a is disturbed by the strong light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a (attention is paid to the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a itself), and the effect of the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 may be diminished. . As described above, the panel decoration LED 1130a and the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a are made difficult to be seen by the player through the upper left substrate cover 1136. The light emission of the decoration LED 1130a can be visually observed, and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be noted. Note that it is only necessary that at least a part of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is visible when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, and a part of the panel decorative LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is partially included. Even if it will be in the state which can be visually observed, it may be in the state where all cannot be visually observed. That is, it is only necessary that at least a portion of the plate surface portion of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 that is exposed without mounting any mounting component be visible.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is disposed behind the certificate sticking part 1012. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is caused to emit light, the card sticking part 1012 The attached sticker (not shown) can be illuminated from behind, and the player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which a sticker that is not in a conventional pachinko machine is illuminated.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is formed large (wide range) with respect to the certificate paper affixed to the certificate affixing portion 1012, and a part of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is not covered by the certificate paper. Visible. That is, not only the lower left board cover 1137 attached to the surface of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 but also a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 and the lower left panel decoration board 1132 at the back of the lower left board cover 1137. Also, it is visible without being covered by the stamp. Thereby, it is possible to visually confirm the lower left panel decorative board 1132 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the manufacturing process, and it is possible to prevent the installation of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 from being forgotten. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 is also visible, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a is emitted from the panel board 1110. It is possible to see through the lower left substrate cover 1137 without going through the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150, and when adjusting the luminance of the panel decoration LED 1130a, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be performed while viewing through the lower left substrate cover 1137.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the side wall portion of the lower left substrate cover 1137 and the side surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 can be viewed from the side of the game board 5 with the game board 5 assembled. However, the side surface of the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 is difficult to distinguish because of its thin thickness, and the side wall portion of the lower left substrate cover 1137 is provided, making it difficult to visually recognize the panel decoration LED 1130a. Therefore, it is difficult to confirm from the side of the game board 5 that the lower left panel decoration board 1132 and the panel decoration LED 1130a are installed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be seen from the front of the game board 5, it can be confirmed that the panel decoration LED 1130a is securely installed, and forgetting to install the panel decoration LED 1130a. Can be reliably prevented. Note that, by not providing a part of the side wall portion of the lower left substrate cover 1137, at least a part of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be visible from the side of the game board 5.

  Further, the lower left portion of the game board 5 on which the lower left panel decoration board 1132 is installed is a position that is difficult to be visually recognized in the game, and the panel decoration LED 1130a is a side view type that irradiates the game area 5a to make the panel decoration. In order to prevent the light emitted from the LED for LED 1130a from going directly to the player, strong light generated by the light emitted from the LED for panel decoration 1130a is not easily seen by the player, and the LED for panel decoration 1130a through the light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 on the panel board 1110 The light emission of the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be noticed. It should be noted that at least a part of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 only needs to be visible when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, and a part of the panel decoration LED 1130a is visible. Alternatively, it may be in a state where all cannot be visually observed. That is, it is only necessary that at least a portion of the plate surface portion of the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 that is exposed without mounting any mounted component is visible.

  As described above, in this example, at least a part of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the lower left panel decoration board 1132 mounted on the game board 5 and mounted with the panel decoration LED 1130a is visually observed when the game board 5 is viewed from the front. It can be done. Therefore, the panel decoration LED 1130a can be visually confirmed with the game board 5 assembled in the manufacturing process, and forgetting to install the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the lower left panel decoration board 1132 can be prevented. That is, even if it is forgotten to install the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine, the presence or absence of a defect can be found by visually observing a part of the visible board from the outside. It becomes early and easy, and it is possible to eliminate a factor of interest reduction such as the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 not being decorated with light emission in the course of the game. Further, when the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 are not installed, a space in which the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 are supposed to be installed is vacant, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Through the panel holder 1120, the back portion becomes visible. It should be noted that the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 in the installation area of the panel holder 1120 are portions that are visible without being covered by at least the function display unit 1400 or the certificate paper, and the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and When the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is installed, a sticker or drawing on which characters or figures for drawing attention are drawn on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left panel decorative board 1132 which are covered with the left lower panel decorative board 1132 and difficult to see. Alternatively, it may be possible to recognize at a glance whether the left upper panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 are forgotten. In addition, the panel decoration LED 1130a that can be visually recognized among the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be a top view type, and in this case, irradiation of the front view type panel decoration LED 1130a toward the player is performed. You may make it provide the cover member to ease. Thereby, when the panel decoration LED 1130a is caused to emit light, the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be prevented from interfering with the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110.

  Further, although the side view type LED is used as the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the lower left panel decoration board 1132, a top view type LED may be used. After the substrate cover 1136 is attached to the surface of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 (the surface on which the panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted), the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is perpendicular to the side surface of the panel plate 1110. The upper left board cover 1136 may be attached to the panel holder 1120 substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 5a so that the light is applied to the game board 5a, and the lower left board cover 1137 is attached to the surface of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 (panel decoration). The surface on which the LED 1130a is mounted) Then, the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 irradiates light perpendicularly to the side surface of the panel board 1110 so that the lower left board cover 1137 is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a. You may make it attach to the holder 1120. FIG.

  Further, in this case, the upper left board cover 1136 and the lower left board cover 1137 are constituted by a bottom portion attached substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a and a side wall portion extending substantially perpendicularly from an end portion of the bottom portion. Thus, the bottom portion may not be provided in a portion through which the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a passes so that the irradiation light of the panel decoration LED 1130a is not blocked by the bottom portion. In this case, the upper left board cover 1136 and the upper left panel decoration board 1131, and the lower left board cover 1137 and the lower left panel decoration board 1132 are visible from the front of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the game board 5. Alternatively, at least some of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a may be visible from the side of the game board 5 by not providing a part of the side walls of the upper left board cover 1136 and the lower left board cover 1137. . Further, when the upper left board cover 1136 and the lower left board cover 1137 are attached to the panel holder 1120 substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a, the upper left board is viewed from the side of the game board 5 with the game board 5 assembled. Although the back surface of the panel decoration board 1131 and the lower left panel decoration board 1132 (the surface on which the panel decoration LED 1130a is not mounted) can be visually recognized, the panel decoration LED 1130a cannot be seen, but mounting components such as resistors and capacitors can be used. Since it can visually recognize, it can confirm indirectly that LED 1130a for panel decorations is installed.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment, a condensing lens, a diffusing lens, or the like is not disposed between the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is directly radiated to the side surface of the panel plate 1110 in a wide range, and the light can be incident on a wide range inside the panel plate 1110. It can be decorated with beautiful luminous. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the condensing lens and the diffusing lens are not arranged by using the wide-angle LED, but the condensing lens and the diffusing lens may be arranged. Further, when a diffusing lens is disposed, a narrow-angle or medium-angle LED may be used without using a wide-angle LED. In the case where the condenser lens and the diffusing lens are not arranged, the side surface of the portion of the side surface of the panel plate 1110 irradiated with light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is formed in the same shape as that of the diffusing lens. The light incident on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 from the LED 1130a may be diffused and guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, a concavo-convex diffusing portion 1110a may be formed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 that is irradiated with light from the panel decoration LED 1130a. In this example, the irradiation position corresponding to each panel decoration LED 1130a is formed in a convex shape, and the light irradiated from the panel decoration LED 1130a is guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110 while being diffused. Accordingly, light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided over a wider range with fewer LEDs, and light emission decoration over a wide range of the game panel 1100 is possible.

  Note that the side surface of the portion irradiated with light from the panel decoration LED 1130a may be formed in the same shape as the condenser lens. For example, the irradiation position corresponding to each panel decoration LED 1130a is formed in a concave shape. Then, the light emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130 a may be condensed and guided to the inside of the panel plate 1110. Thus, by condensing the light incident on the side surface of the panel board 1110 from the panel decoration LED 1130a and guiding it to the inside of the panel board 1110, the amount of light of the target light emitting decoration can be increased. Further, a side surface of a portion irradiated with light from some of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a among the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens, and the same as the diffusion lens among the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. Side surfaces of the portions irradiated with light from some of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a except for the panel decoration LEDs 1130a that irradiate the portion formed in the shape (other than the side surfaces formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens) All of the side surfaces or a part of the side surface other than the side surface formed in the same shape as the diffusing lens) may be formed in the same shape as the condensing lens. That is, a shape similar to the diffusion lens or a shape similar to the condensing lens may be appropriately formed according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be decorated with light emission, the amount of light at the time of decoration with light emission, and the like.

  Further, the shape similar to the diffusion lens formed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 can change the degree of diffusion by changing the shape. Specifically, for a convex portion formed with a predetermined projection amount corresponding to the irradiation position of the panel decoration LED 1130a, increasing the projection amount increases the degree of diffusion and reduces the projection amount of the convex portion. It is possible to weaken the degree of diffusion. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to change the degree of diffusion according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be decorated with light emission, the amount of light at the time of decoration with light emission, and the like. That is, although the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided to a wider range by increasing the diffusion degree, the amount of light is weakened, but the range in which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided by reducing the diffusion degree is narrowed. Since the amount of light increases, the light emission decoration in a desired mode can be realized by appropriately setting the degree of diffusion according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be decorated for light emission, the amount of light when the light emission decoration is performed, and the like. In addition, you may make it form the convex-shaped part formed corresponding to the irradiation position of several panel decoration LED1130a by predetermined | prescribed protrusion amount for every panel decoration LED1130a, and, thereby, of the decoration pattern which carries out light emission decoration Light emission decoration can be performed in a manner aiming at a decoration pattern by setting the degree of diffusion for each panel decoration LED 1130a according to the position, range, amount of light at the time of light emission decoration, and the like.

  Similarly, the shape similar to the condensing lens formed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 can change the degree of condensing by changing the shape. Specifically, with respect to the concave portion formed with a predetermined concave amount corresponding to the irradiation position of the panel decoration LED 1130a, the degree of light collection is increased by increasing the concave amount, and the concave amount of the concave portion is reduced. Thus, it is possible to weaken the degree of light collection. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to change the light collection degree according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be decorated with light emission, the amount of light at the time of light emission decoration, and the like. That is, although the amount of light can be increased by increasing the degree of light collection, the range in which the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be guided is narrowed, and the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is guided by reducing the degree of light collection. However, since the amount of light can be increased, the amount of light increases, so the light emission decoration in a desired mode can be achieved by appropriately setting the degree of light condensing according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be light-decorated, the amount of light to be light-decorated, etc. Can be realized. In addition, you may make it form the recessed part formed corresponding to the irradiation position of several LED 1130a for panel decorations by predetermined | prescribed dent amount for every LED 1130a for panel decorations, and, thereby, of the decoration pattern which carries out light emission decoration Light emission decoration can be performed in a manner aiming at a decoration pattern by setting the degree of condensing for each panel decoration LED 1130a according to the position, range, amount of light used for light emission decoration, and the like.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the diffusion portion 1110a formed on the panel plate 1110 by the front component member 1000 is visually recognized by the player. It is difficult. Thus, the front component member 1000 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a function of hiding the diffusing portion 1110a formed on the panel plate 1110 so that it is difficult for the player to see.

  Furthermore, the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment is provided with a panel decoration board 1130 (LED for panel decoration 1130a) on the panel holder 1120 for light-decorating the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110. In order to change the model of the game board 5 or make a minor change to the model, when changing to a panel board 1110 with other different decoration patterns, it can be handled by simply replacing the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component member 1000, the panel decoration substrate 1130, and the substrate cover 1135 can be used as common components. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel board 1110 on which the other decoration pattern 1150 is applied, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment, the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the board attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, and the panel decoration board 1130 and the panel board 1110 are separately provided. I try to install it. Thereby, the panel holder 1120 from which the board cover 1135 and the panel decoration board 1130 are removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel board 1110 to which the decoration pattern 1150 is not applied. 1120 and the front component member 1000 can be a common part. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel board 1110 on which the other decoration pattern 1150 is applied, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to. When used in a model having a panel plate 1110 not provided with a decorative pattern 1150, a dummy substrate cover 1135 may be attached to the substrate attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. The substrate cover 1135 and the panel decoration substrate 1130 may be used while attached.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game panel 1100 is formed by a plurality of members of the panel board 1110 and the panel holder 1120. However, the game panel 1100 may be formed by a single member. As shown in FIG. 147 (A), a through hole 1110A1 is formed in a part of the outside of the game area 5a defined by the outer rail 1001 of the flat gaming panel 1100, and a panel decoration board is formed in the through hole 1110A1. 1130 may be disposed to irradiate light to the side surface of the through hole 1110A1 from the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration board 1130 toward the inside of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 147 (B). As described above, at least a part of the outside of the gaming area 5a defined by the outer rail 1001 of the flat gaming panel 1100 The panel decoration board 1130 is disposed on the panel decoration board 1130 by placing the panel decoration board 1130 on the thinner part than the other parts to form the stepped portion 1110B1. You may make it irradiate light to the side surface of level | step-difference part 1110B1 toward the inner side of 5a. In this manner, the game panel 1100 itself is provided with an arrangement portion for disposing the panel decoration board 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) at a position relatively close to the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the game panel 1100 without interfering with the game. By doing so, it is possible to make light incident on the game panel 1100 at a position close to the decoration pattern 1150, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize a sufficient light-emitting decoration without hindering the progress of the game.

  An area where the through hole 1110A1 and the stepped portion 1110B1 are formed (an area where the thickness is thinner than the other areas) is an opening formed at the center of the game area 5a (the panel board 1110 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example). The size is smaller than that of the opening 1112 formed in the vicinity of the center of the game panel 1100, and is formed according to the range of the decoration pattern formed on the game panel 1100. For example, when the decoration pattern of the gaming panel 1100 is formed at least near the center on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a or over a wide range above and below, the upper left portion of the gaming panel 1100 (the pachinko machine 1 in this example) Through-hole 1110A1 and stepped portion 1110B1 are formed in the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the lower left part (part where the lower left panel decorative board 1132 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is installed). Is formed only on the upper left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, on the upper left part of the game panel 1100 (the part where the upper left panel decoration board 1131 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is installed). A through hole 1110A1 and a step 1110B1 are formed, and the decorative pattern of the game panel 1100 is the center of the game area 5a. In the case where it is formed only on the lower left side of the object 2500, a through hole 1110A1 and a stepped portion 1110B1 are formed in the lower left part of the game panel 1100 (the part where the lower left panel decorative board 1132 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is installed). The panel decoration board 1130 may be disposed in the through hole 1110A1 or the stepped part 1110B1, and light may be emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration board 1130 toward the inside of the game area 5a.

  Moreover, the panel decoration board | substrate 1130 is formed with the white member, and is not conspicuous from the front. The panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1130 is a side view type wide-angle full-color LED, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light to the side surfaces (side walls) of the through-hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the panel decoration board 1130 according to the range of the decoration pattern formed on the game panel 1100 and the brightness of the light-emitting decoration. In other words, basically, when the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 is formed over a wide range of the game area 5a, more LEDs are mounted than when the game area 5a is formed only in a narrow range. In order to increase the brightness of the light emitting decoration, the number of LEDs to be mounted is increased.

  Further, the side surface (side wall) irradiated with light from the panel decoration LED 1130a among the side surfaces (side walls) of the through hole 1110A1 and the stepped portion 1110B1 has the same shape as the diffusing portion 1110a and the condensing lens having the same shape as the diffusing lens. The light condensing part may be formed. As a result, it is possible to realize the light emission decoration in a desired mode by setting the diffusion degree and the light collection degree according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be light emission decoration, the amount of light when the light emission decoration is performed, and the like. In addition, the number of LEDs mounted can be suppressed by appropriately setting the degree of diffusion and the degree of light collection, and light emitting decoration over a wide range of the gaming panel 1100 can be realized while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. . In addition, the front component member 1000 may be attached in front of the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1, thereby concealing the diffusion portion 1110a formed in the through hole 1110A1 and the step portion 1110B1 by the front component member 1000, 1110a can be made difficult to see from the player.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the panel decoration board 1130 is disposed outside the game area 5a defined by the outer rail 1001 of the flat gaming panel 1100 as described above, and the panel is mounted on the panel decoration board 1130. Although it is configured to irradiate light from the decoration LED 1130a toward the inside of the game area 5a, in addition to or instead of this, a panel decoration board is provided in an opening formed inside the game area 5a. Light may be emitted from the panel decoration LED that is arranged and mounted on the panel decoration substrate toward the inner wall of the opening (toward the outside of the game area 5a). For example, as shown in FIG. 148, a panel decoration board is arranged inside the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel board 1110, and the panel decoration LED mounted on the panel decoration board is mounted on the center of the panel board 1110. You may make it irradiate light toward the inner wall of the opening part 1112 formed in the vicinity.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to the modified example includes a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 formed along the edge of the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel plate 1110, and a frame of the center accessory 2500. A front rendering unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside, a transparent flat light guide plate 2601 for closing the inside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and a guide Light is incident from the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 on which a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 that are decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light plate 2601 are mounted, and the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601. A second pattern decoration board 2622 on which a plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620 to be decorated with light emission are mounted, a right side surface of the light guide plate 2601, and an LED 2621 A plurality of condensing lenses 2623 that are provided in between to collect light from the LEDs 2621 and a panel decoration board 2622A on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 2621A that allow light to enter from the side surface of the game panel 1100 are mounted. I have.

  Further, a top view type full color LED is mounted on the panel decoration board 2622A and the second pattern decoration board 2622, and each is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5a. It has been. Further, the panel decoration board 2622A and the second pattern decoration board 2622 are opposite to each other (the LED 2621 mounted on the second pattern decoration board 2622 is the center of the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel board 1110). The panel decoration LED 2621A mounted on the panel decoration substrate 2622A emits light toward the outside of the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel plate 1110). Are arranged back to back to irradiate. Further, the panel decoration board 2622A and the second pattern decoration board 2622 are arranged on the back of the frame portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, the panel decoration board 2622A and the second pattern decoration board 2622 are provided with side-view type connection connectors on the surface side (surface on which the panel decoration LED 2621A and the LED 2621 are mounted). The connection cables that are electrically connected to each other are bundled, routed along the frame portion of the center accessory 2500, bent backward, and connected to the panel drive board 1720.

  Thus, the panel decoration board 2622A and the second pattern decoration board 2622 are not arranged so that the mounting surface of the LEDs (panel decoration LED 2621A, LED 2621) is substantially parallel to the game board 5a. Since the mounting surface of the panel decoration LED 2621A and the LED 2621 is arranged so as to be substantially perpendicular to the game board 5a, the side surfaces of the thin panel decoration board 2622A and the second pattern decoration board 2622 are the sides of the gaming machine. Compared to the case where the panel decoration board 2622A or the second pattern decoration board 2622 is arranged so that the mounting surface of the LED (panel decoration LED 2621A, LED 2621) faces the front side of the gaming machine. Since the installation width in the direction can be reduced, the panel decoration board 2622A and the second pattern decoration board 262 are provided. The panel decoration board 2622A and the panel decoration LED 2621A, the second pattern decoration board 2622 and the LED 2621 can be hidden by the frame portion of the center accessory 2500 provided in front of the panel decoration board 2622A and the panel decoration LED 2621A. The decorative board for second pattern 2622 and the LED 2621 can be made difficult for the player to see.

  Note that side view type LEDs may be mounted on one or both of the panel decorative board 2622A and the second pattern decorative board 2622. In this case, the left and right direction of the board on which the side view type LEDs are mounted. Is installed so that it fits in the frame portion of the center accessory 2500 provided in front of the board, and the board on which the top view type LED is mounted is placed on the back side of the board on which the side view type LED is mounted with respect to the board You may make it arrange | position so that it may become substantially perpendicular | vertical. Accordingly, the panel decoration board 2622A, the panel decoration LED 2621A, and the second picture decoration LED 2621A by the frame portion of the center accessory 2500 provided in front of the panel decoration board 2622A and the second picture decoration board 2622 (the front side of the gaming machine). The decoration board 2622 and the LED 2621 can be hidden, and the panel decoration board 2622A and the panel decoration LED 2621A, and the second pattern decoration board 2622 and the LED 2621 can be made difficult to see from the player.

  In addition, although the panel board 1110 is not shown in FIG. 148, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a part of the frame portion of the center accessory 2500 is arranged to cover the front of the panel board 1110. The panel decoration LED 2621A mounted on the panel decoration substrate 2622A is provided in the vicinity of the inner wall of the opening of the panel board 1110 and irradiates light toward the inner wall of the opening (toward the outside of the game area 5a). It is supposed to be.

  In addition to the opening 1112 formed near the center of the panel board 1110 and to which the center accessory 2500 is attached, a unit such as a prize opening placed in the game area 5a in addition to or instead of the opening 1112. A panel decoration board on which panel decoration LEDs are mounted may be provided. For example, it is attached to the right side of the front opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a, and has one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005. It is configured to include a panel decoration board on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs that allow light to enter the attacker unit 2400 from the side surface of the gaming panel 1100 (unitized), and the inner wall of the opening 1112 to which the attacker unit 2400 is attached You may make it irradiate light toward (outside the game area 5a). In this case, the panel decoration board and the panel decoration LED may be arranged behind the outer edge portion of the attacker unit 2400 (the portion where the attachment portion attached to the game panel 1100 is formed). The decorative board and the panel decoration LED can be concealed by the attacker unit 2400, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the panel decoration board and the panel decoration LED.

  Further, a panel decoration board is arranged in the opening formed inside the game area 5a, and the panel decoration LED mounted on the panel decoration board is directed toward the inner wall of the opening (toward the outside of the game area 5a). ) Even in the case of irradiating light, a portion of the inner wall of the opening that is irradiated with light from the panel decoration LED may be formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens and the condensing lens. As a result, it is possible to realize the light emission decoration in a desired mode by setting the diffusion degree and the light collection degree according to the position and range of the decoration pattern to be light emission decoration, the amount of light when the light emission decoration is performed, and the like. In addition, the number of LEDs mounted can be suppressed by appropriately setting the degree of diffusion and the degree of light collection, and light emitting decoration over a wide range of the gaming panel 1100 can be realized while suppressing the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. . Further, the inner wall of the opening formed in the same shape as the diffusing lens and the condensing lens is arranged behind the outer edge portion of the attacker unit 2400 (the portion where the attachment portion attached to the game panel 1100 is formed). However, with this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the inner wall of the opening formed in the same shape as the diffusion lens and the condensing lens.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the transparent flat panel plate 1110 is used so that the back of the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized. However, a cell in which a pattern such as a character, a character, or a graphic is drawn. At least the panel board 1110 is attached to the surface of the panel board 1110 by sticking it on the surface (the surface on which the game ball rolls) or the back surface, or by directly printing a pattern such as a character on the surface or back surface of the panel board 1110. For some, it may be difficult to visually recognize the back surface.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, a cell sheet in which a pattern of a sword 1110b is partially drawn may be attached to the surface of the panel board 1110. Further, in this example, a translucent cell sheet is used, and although it is difficult to visually recognize the back portion in the pattern portion, the light irradiated from the back portion is not blocked. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a part of the blade 1110ba in the sword 1110b drawn on the cell sheet can be visually recognized (for example, the target part is transparent or cut). For example, a decorative pattern is formed on a part of the panel plate 1110 corresponding to this part so that it can be visually recognized through the cell sheet or from a cut-out part of the cell sheet. A pattern (sword 1110b) drawn on the cell sheet and a decorative pattern formed on the panel board 1110 are combined to represent one pattern.

  In addition, the decorative pattern formed on the panel plate 1110 is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside, and the radiation portion that mainly reflects the light irradiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 forward. A radiation guide part that reflects light forward and guides light along a linear shape, and for a decoration pattern formed on a part of the blade 1110ba, even if the panel decoration LED 1130a is not emitting light, It is made visible from the front player side. Then, the decoration pattern formed on a part of the blade 1110ba is combined with the pattern (sword 1110b in this example) drawn on the cell sheet to decorate the game area 5a. Accordingly, a part of the sword 1110b (part of the blade 1110ba in this example) which is drawn on the cell sheet and decorates the game area 5a is illuminated and decorated by causing the panel decoration LED 1130a to emit light, and a part of the blade 1110ba is Luminous decorations that can be brilliant can be performed, thereby making it possible for the player to guess that something will happen and to enhance the gaming interest. In addition, it is not necessary that all areas of the cell sheet have translucency, and at least an area that overlaps with the decoration pattern formed on the panel board 1110 (area where light emission is decorated) has translucency. It is only necessary that the light emitting decoration formed by the panel board 1110 is made visible when the panel decoration LED 1130a is made to emit light, and part of the non-translucent region (such as blocking light from the rear) Area) may be included.

  In addition, a decoration pattern of the panel board 1110 may be formed in an area other than the blade 1110ba. In this case, the decoration of the panel board 1110 from the front player side in a state where the panel decoration LED 1130a is not lit. Although it is difficult to visually recognize the pattern, the light emission decoration by the decoration pattern of the panel board 1110 emerges through the cell sheet by causing the decoration pattern of the panel board 1110 to emit light. That is, when the panel decoration LED 1130a is caused to emit light, the blade 1110ba of the sword 1110b is illuminated and decorated, and the panel sheet 1110 is illuminated and decorated with a predetermined decoration pattern.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a decoration pattern is formed on the panel board 1110 so as to constitute a part of a pattern such as a character drawn on the cell sheet, and the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light, the cell sheet A part of a picture such as a character drawn on the screen can be decorated with light emission. In addition, as a decoration pattern of the panel board 1110 which comprises a part of pictures, such as a character drawn on a cell sheet, the predetermined site | part (for example, blade 1110ba of a sword 1110b, a character's eyes), etc. drawn on a cell sheet Etc., in addition to the contours and shadows of the pattern of the character, etc. drawn on the cell sheet, and the decoration (pattern that expresses a sense of depth) to show the pattern of the character, etc. drawn on the cell sheet in three dimensions Also good.

  The decorative pattern of the panel board 1110 is also formed on the rear part of the center accessory 2500, in other words, on the part of the panel board 1110 that is arranged forward so as to cover the frame part of the center accessory 2500. That is, the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the panel plate 1110 and the decoration pattern is formed in the vicinity of the opening that is blocked by the light guide plate 2601. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a is caused to emit light, it is possible to perform light emission decoration near the light guide plate 2601 provided in front of the effect display device 1600 and the effect display device 1600 described later. The light emitting decoration is performed in association with the effect to be executed (so that the display of the effect display device 1600 and the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 are continuously connected to the light emitting decoration outside the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601). be able to. On the other hand, the panel display 1110 provided at a position not covered by the effect display device 1600 is illuminated and decorated around the effect display device 1600, so that the panel decoration LED 1130a is displayed without interfering with the display of the effect display device 1600. The panel board 1110 can be illuminated and decorated with a predetermined decoration pattern.

  Further, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back lower right movable decorative body 3420, which will be described later, are arranged on the back side of the panel board 1110 in the standby state, so that the player It has become difficult to see. Further, the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa mounted on the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the back lower left movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration body 3420, respectively, The body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are allowed to emit light, and these LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa are caused to emit light to emit light. The cell sheet can be illuminated and decorated with a decoration pattern formed on the panel plate 1110 by irradiating light from the rear of the substrate 1101. In this way, the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa mounted on the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are the panel plate 1110. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the cell sheet can be decorated with a decoration pattern formed on the panel board 1110 when used as the backlight of the panel board 1110. .

[5-2-1. Second Embodiment of Decoration Pattern in Game Panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a decoration different from the decoration pattern 1150 shown in FIGS. The panel board 1110 on which the pattern 1160 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “decoration pattern 1160 according to the second embodiment”) is formed will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 150A is a front view of a panel board on which a decorative pattern different from that of FIG. 143 is formed, and FIG. 150B is a front view showing the panel board of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the decorative pattern 1160 according to the second embodiment has a V-shaped cross-section on the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110, similarly to the decorative pattern 1150 according to the first embodiment. Yes. This decoration pattern 1160 can be seen from the player side ahead even when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not emitting light, and decorates the game area 5a. The decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be decorated with light emission by causing the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 to emit light and causing light to enter the inside of the panel board 1110.

  As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern 1160 has a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, a gate portion 2003, a side slope 2300, a warp inlet 2501 of the center accessory 2500 on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, as shown in the drawing. A radiating portion 1161 that reflects light incident on the inside from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 forward is formed in a rear portion such as. Accordingly, when the decoration pattern 1160 (radiating portion 1161) is decorated with light emission, the general winning opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the side slope 2300, the warp inlet 2501 of the center accessory 2500, etc. Can be illuminated with light from behind, making them stand out.

  Although not shown, the decoration pattern 1160 may be formed with a plurality of radiation light guides that guide light from the panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 to the radiation unit 1161. Further, the decoration pattern 1150 may be combined with the decoration pattern 1160.

[5-2-2. Adjustment of obstacle nails in game panel]
Next, adjustment of the plurality of obstacle nails N in which the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is implanted will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view showing a nail adjustment film for adjusting the obstacle nail implanted in the game panel. FIG. 152 is a front view of the main body frame with the game board mounted. FIG. 153 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state before the nail adjustment film is mounted on the game board, and FIG. 153 (b) is an explanatory view showing the state where the nail adjustment film is mounted on the game board. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 136 and the like, the game board 5 has a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge array in the game area 5a. Specifically, the plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 between the inner periphery of the frame of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and the outer periphery of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. It is installed.

  By the way, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a are frequently brought into contact with the game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a due to the game being performed. Indeed, the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases. When the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases, the flow path of the game ball B changes from the initial state of manufacture, and a winning opening (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large The game ball B becomes difficult to be received at the winning opening 2005, etc., or the game ball B becomes difficult to pass through the gate part 2003, so that the player can not enjoy the game and the interest in the game is reduced. There was a problem. Alternatively, the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases, so that the game ball B is easily received in the winning opening, and the payout of the game ball B increases, so that the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine is installed is increased. There was a problem that increased. In addition, when the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases, some players recognize that the game ball B is difficult to enter the winning hole just by looking at the surface of the game board 5, and as a pachinko machine to play However, there was a problem that the operation rate of the pachinko machine was lowered because the game with the pachinko machine was avoided.

  To deal with such problems, the nail adjustment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed with a hammer that strikes the obstacle nail N and a gauge ball having the same diameter as the game ball B is attached to the tip of a long and narrow bar. The strain of the obstacle nail N is adjusted periodically using a working gauge. However, in the adjustment using the nail adjustment gauge, since the distorted obstacle nail N is adjusted by intuition or experience, the adjustment of the obstacle nail N is likely to vary. Moreover, the adjustment of the obstacle nail N is performed not only by a skilled engineer who is called a nail maker but also by an unskilled engineer. There was a problem that it took.

  For such a problem, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a nail adjustment film 1170 as shown in FIG. 151 is prepared. The nail adjustment film 1170 is made of a transparent resin film having the same front pattern 1171 as the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component member 1000 and the front unit 2000) and the same nail pattern 1172 as the obstacle nail N. Has been printed. The nail pattern 1172 is drawn in a circle having substantially the same diameter as the head of the obstacle nail N. Moreover, the nail adjustment film 1170 has the identification part 1173 which shows the specific obstacle nail N1 which plays an important role with respect to a game among the plurality of obstacle nails N. The identification unit 1173 is a circular pattern having a diameter that is slightly larger than that of the nail pattern 1172. Thereby, the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn in a double circle by the nail pattern 1172 and the pattern of the identification unit 1173, and can be discriminated at a glance. Further, the identification unit 1173 has different types of circles drawn according to the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1. Here, the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1 is divided into “most important” and “important”. (See the enlarged view of FIG. 151).

  The resin film constituting the nail adjustment film 1170 includes polyethylene terephthalate film, polyethylene naphthalate film, polypropylene film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film, polyimide film, polyphenylene sulfide film, nylon film, aramid film, polyethylene film, celluloid. Film, etc. are mentioned. In the present embodiment, as the resin film constituting the nail adjustment film 1170, a material that easily generates (charges) static electricity is used. The nail adjustment film 1170 is only one embodiment, and a front pattern 1171 equivalent to the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component member 1000 and the front unit 2000), and a nail pattern 1172 same as the obstacle nail N However, as long as it is printed, it is good also as applying a sheet-like or plate-like nail adjustment face material with low flexibility instead of the nail adjustment film 1170.

  The nail adjustment film 1170 has a positioning / fixing portion 1174 for positioning / fixing to the game board 5. The positioning fixing portion 1174 of the present embodiment is a hole into which each of the four boss portions 1020 (see FIG. 152) protruding forward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 is inserted.

  The positioning / fixing portion 1174 may be configured to support the nail adjustment film 1170, and is not limited to the hole into which the boss portion 1020 of the front component member 1000 is inserted. 5 may be a hole into which a game board lock member 505, a payout passage opening / closing door 613, a door frame hook 652, an outer frame unlocking lever 656, and the like are inserted. . Alternatively, the positioning and fixing portion 1174 is the upper part (upper side) of the nail adjustment film 1170 and is inserted into the gap between the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 and the upper end of the game board 5 to fix the positioning. Also good. When the positioning fixing portion 1174 is the left side of the nail adjustment film 1170 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted. Thus, positioning is performed by inserting the tool into the groove portion 530a (see FIG. 152) of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 for preventing an unauthorized tool from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the left side surface. It may be fixed.

  Next, a method for adjusting the obstacle nail N using the nail adjustment film 1170 will be described. In a state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility in the game hall, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4. In this state, the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is covered with the nail adjustment film 1170 from the front, and the boss part 1020 of the front component member 1000 is inserted into the positioning fixing part 1174 so as to be attached to the game board 5. The nail adjustment film 1170 is positioned and fixed. In this embodiment, since the nail adjustment film 1170 is formed of a material that is easily charged, the nail adjustment film 1170 is stuck to the front surface of the front component member 1000 due to static electricity when the game board 5 is charged. Therefore, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be positioned and fixed by this static electricity and supported on the front surface of the game board 5. Further, the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the attacker unit 2400, and the center accessory 2500 provided in the game board 5 are substantially the same as the tip (head) of the obstacle nail N on the side not embedded. A flat surface portion having a height of 5 mm is provided in the vicinity of the obstacle nail N, and positioning and fixing by the boss portion 1020 can be performed while keeping the nail adjustment film 1170 straight without bending.

  When viewed from the front with the nail adjustment film 1170 positioned and fixed on the front surface of the game board 5, the front pattern 1171 of the nail adjustment film 1170 can be aligned with the shape of the front component member 1000 or the front unit 2000. The displacement of the nail adjustment film 1170 can be confirmed. In this state, the head of the obstacle nail N can be seen through the transparent nail adjustment film 1170. When the obstacle nail N is distorted, the circle of the nail pattern 1172 and the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N are not concentric, and the centers of the circles do not coincide ( (See FIG. 153 (b)). Thereby, the obstacle nail N which should be adjusted can be discriminated easily.

  When adjusting the distorted obstacle nail N, the nail adjustment film 1170 is struck and the corresponding obstacle nail N is struck with a hammer, and then the nail adjustment film 1170 is covered, and the circle of the nail pattern 1172 The deviation from the circle of the head of the nail N is confirmed, and this is repeated, and the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N is adjusted to be concentric with the circle of the nail pattern 1172. Further, when the obstacle nail N is adjusted, since the identification unit 1173 indicating the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn on the nail adjustment film 1170, the specific obstacle nail N1 is carefully adjusted.

  As described above, according to the nail adjustment film 1170 of the present embodiment, the same front pattern 1171 as the front component member 1000 and the front unit 2000 is drawn. By doing so, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily aligned with the game board 5. In addition, the nail adjustment film 1170 has an identification portion 1173 indicating the specific obstacle nail N1 that plays an important role in the game, so that the position of the specific obstacle nail N1 that requires careful adjustment can be easily determined. Can be determined. Further, since the nail adjustment film 1170 includes a positioning fixing portion 1174 into which the boss portion 1020 of the front component member 1000 is inserted, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily positioned and fixed with respect to the game board 5. Therefore, by adjusting the obstacle nail N according to the nail adjustment film 1170, the variation in the adjustment of the obstacle nail N can be reduced, and even an unskilled engineer can easily adjust the obstacle nail N. The working time for adjusting the obstacle nail N can be shortened.

  In the nail adjustment film 1170, the identification portion 1173 is shown as a circle pattern having a diameter larger than the circle of the nail pattern 1172. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may color-code.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 152, the predetermined member provided on the front side of the game board 5 includes a plurality of reference parts used to make it easier to align the nail adjustment film 1170 with respect to the front side of the game board 5. P1 to P4 are provided. The plurality of reference portions P1 to P4 are drawn so that numbers are assigned to the inside of the star pattern as well as the star pattern. In addition, as shown in FIG. 151, on the nail adjustment film 1170, a plurality of reference pictures R1 to R4 simulating the plurality of reference parts P1 to P4 are printed together with the same front picture 1171 as the front view of the game board 5. Has been. The guide patterns R1 to R4 are printed on the nail adjustment film 1170 so as to coincide with the corresponding guide portions P1 to P4 when the game board 5 is covered with the nail adjustment film 1170 from the front. In addition, as the reference patterns R1 to R4, all of the patterns drawn on the reference portions P1 to P4 are imitated, but the nail adjustment is performed so as to imitate only a part of the patterns drawn on the reference portions P1 to P4. It may be printed on the film 1170.

  As described above, when the nail adjustment film 1170 is put on the game board 5 from the front, the reference pictures R1 to R4 may be matched with the reference parts P1 to P4. On the other hand, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily aligned. In addition, since the design having the same shape as the member on which the reference parts P1 to P4 are drawn is drawn on the front picture 1171, the reference parts P1 to P4 are drawn using the reference parts P1 to P4 as marks. If the front picture 1171 matches the member, it can be confirmed more reliably whether or not the nail adjustment film 1170 is displaced with respect to the game board 5. According to such a method, when the game board 5 is covered with the nail adjustment film 1170 from the front, it is determined whether or not the positioning fixing portion 1174 is inserted into the boss portion 1020 of the front component member 1000. Regardless, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be aligned with the game board 5.

  The reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on a member fixed to the front side of the game board 5. As a specific example, the reference portion P1 is located on the lower left side (near the warp entrance 2501) of the center accessory 2500, the reference portion P2 is placed on the first start opening 2002, the reference portion P3 is placed on the big winning opening 2005, and the upper right side on the gate portion 2003 A guide portion P4 is provided on a member provided outside the game area 4a located at the position. Since these members are fixed to the front side of the game board 5, the game ball B that has flowed down the game area 5a continues to come into contact with the center accessory 2500, the first start opening 2002, the grand prize winning opening 2005, and the like. However, the position is not displaced, and it is possible to prevent the position adjustment of the nail adjustment film 1170 with respect to the game board 5 from becoming difficult. In addition, since the member (outside game area member) provided outside the game area 4a located on the upper right side of the gate portion 2003 does not contact the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a in the first place, The reference portion P4 provided in the part does not shift in position, and the use of the reference portion P4 can prevent the alignment of the nail adjustment film 1170 with respect to the game board 5 from being difficult. In addition, when the guide portion is provided on a member (outside the game area) provided outside the game area 4 a, the member (outside game area member) provided with the reference portion is provided with the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. You may make it provide in the part coat | covered with the decoration part (except for the glass plate 162) of the door frame 3 when it closes. As a result, an unauthorized person who illegally obtained the nail adjustment film 1170 while the amusement hall (hall) is in operation or the like has closed the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the nail adjustment film from above the glass plate 162. It is difficult to align 1170, and some illegal acts (for example, helping to check whether the nail state is suitable for other illegal acts) are performed using the nail adjustment film 1170 obtained illegally. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the reference | standard parts P1-P4 should just be provided in the member fixed to the front side of the game board 5, and other than 1st starting opening 2002 and big winning opening 2005, for example, other winning openings (2nd starting opening) 2004, general winning opening 2001) or the gate portion 2003 may be provided. In addition, as members fixed to the front surface side of the game board 5, for example, reference parts P1 to P4 are provided on a decorative body (including a light-emitting decorative body decorated with light emission by an LED) with a predetermined decoration. May be. Further, in this example, the flat panel plate 1110 is transparent, but a cell on which a predetermined pattern is drawn is pasted before or after the panel plate 1110, and a reference position is provided at a visible position in the cell. Parts P1 to P4 may be provided. Since such a cell is affixed to the panel board 1110, the position does not shift. Moreover, it is preferable that the reference | standard parts P1-P4 are provided in at least 2 or more of the members fixed to the front side of the game board 5. FIG. In this way, by using at least two or more members, when the nail adjustment film 1170 is aligned with respect to the game board 5, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of positional deviation in the nail adjustment film 1170. it can.

  As described above, the reference portions P1 to P4 may be provided on a member fixed to the front side of the game board 5, but for a windmill capable of changing the flow direction of the game ball B, the game board 5 However, when the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a comes into contact, the nail that supports the windmill may be bent to make it difficult to align the nail adjustment film 1170 Therefore, the reference portions P1 to P4 are not provided.

  In addition, the reference portions P1 to P4 are drawn so that numbers are added to the inside of the star symbol pattern together with the star symbol pattern. Preferably it is drawn. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 152, it is preferable that the reference | standard parts P1-P4 are drawn with the dark color. In such a case, the reference parts P1 to P4 can be easily found, and the reference pictures R1 to R4 can be easily matched to each of the reference parts P1 to P4. The nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily aligned.

  Similarly, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided on members that are asymmetrical bodies such as a left-right asymmetric body and a top-bottom asymmetric body, such as members such as the center accessory 2500, the first starting port 2002, and the big prize opening 2005. In addition, the reference portions P1 to P4 are, for example, colored members such as the center accessory 2500, the first start opening 2002, and the prize winning opening 2005 in a dark color, and are darker than other members. It is preferable to be provided on the member. Even in such a case, the members provided with the reference portions P1 to P4 can be easily found, and the reference patterns R1 to R4 can be easily matched with each of the reference portions P1 to P4. The nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily aligned with the game board 5.

  Further, the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided so as to be located in the vicinity of the specific obstacle nail N1 that plays an important role for the game among the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5. For example, when the reference portions P1 to P4 are provided at positions separated from the specific obstacle nail N1, even if the nail adjustment film 1170 is aligned using the reference portions P1 to P4 as marks, printing is performed on the nail adjustment film 1170. The nail pattern 1172 and the pattern of the identification unit 1173 are likely to be shifted from the normal position of the specific obstacle nail N1, but the reference parts P1 to P4 are provided so as to be located in the vicinity of the specific obstacle nail N1. As a result, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of deviation from the normal position of the specific obstacle nail N1.

  In addition, it is preferable to provide at least two guide portions P1 to P4. For example, the nail adjustment with respect to the game board 5 is performed so that the two guide patterns R1 to R4 coincide with the two guide portions P1 to P4. By aligning the film 1170, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be aligned with respect to the game board 5 more reliably. When the nail adjustment film 1170 is aligned using the two reference portions P1 to P4 as marks, the two reference portions P1 to P1 such as the nail pattern 1172 printed on the nail adjustment film 1170 and the identification portion 1173 are displayed. The pattern provided between P4 and the periphery thereof is less likely to be displaced from the normal position of the obstacle nail N or the specific obstacle nail N1. For this reason, between the two reference portions P1 to P4 and in the vicinity thereof, among the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5, there are many specific obstacle nails N1 that play an important role for the game. Thus, it is preferable that the reference | standard parts P1-P4 are provided.

  Moreover, the reference | standard parts P1-P4 are made to be provided in the member which is a flat shape with which the surface is not uneven | corrugated like members, such as the center accessory 2500, the 1st starting port 2002, and the big prize opening 2005. Further, the reference portions P1 to P4 are substantially flush with the tips of the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5, such as members such as the center accessory 2500, the first start opening 2002, and the big prize opening 2005. It is made to provide in the member in which the surface was formed. In such a case, only a part of the nail adjustment film 1170 does not come into contact with the game board 5, and it is easy to match the reference pictures R1 to R4 to the reference parts P1 to P4. Thus, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily aligned with the game board 5. The reference portions P1 to P4 are not limited to the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side slope 2300, the attacker unit 2400, and the center accessory 2500 provided in the game board 5, but the front component member 1000, etc. Alternatively, it may be provided in another part.

  In this example, the nail adjustment film 1170 is substantially the same as the game board 5 so that the same front picture 1171 as the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component member 1000 and the front unit 2000) can be printed. Although a resin film having a size is used, a resin film having a size (for example, A4 size) smaller than the size of the game board 5 may be used. For example, the A4 size nail adjustment film 1170 includes a nail pattern 1172 and an identification unit 1173 corresponding to the specific obstacle nail N1 that plays an important role in the game among the plurality of obstacle nails N provided on the game board 5. In addition to the above-mentioned picture, the reference pictures R1-R4 corresponding to the reference parts P1-P4 located in the vicinity of the specific obstacle nail N1, and the pictures corresponding to the members provided with the reference parts P1-P4, Print it out. Further, for example, the A4 size nail adjustment film 1170 extracts only the part necessary for nail adjustment so that the specific obstacle nail N1, the reference portions P1 to P4, and the members provided with the reference portions P1 to P4 are included. Thus, it may be printed separately on a plurality of nail adjustment films 1170, or may be printed side by side on one nail adjustment film 1170 as appropriate. As described above, when a resin film having substantially the same size as the game board 5 is used as the nail adjustment film 1170, it becomes difficult to carry the nail adjustment film 1170, or the nail adjustment film with respect to the game board 5. Although the alignment of 1170 may be difficult, for example, the use of a compact resin film such as the A4 size nail adjustment film 1170 can prevent such difficulty from occurring. Moreover, when extracting only the part required for nail adjustment, it is preferable that at least two or more reference parts P1 to P4 are provided in the extracted part. Thereby, regardless of whether the number of nail adjustment films 1170 is plural or one, the nail adjustment film is, for example, so that the two reference pictures R1 to R4 match the two reference parts P1 to P4. By aligning the nail adjustment film 1170 with the portion extracted in 1170, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be more reliably aligned with the portion extracted in the nail adjustment film 1170.

  Further, in view of making it difficult to illegally align the nail adjustment film 1170 from above the glass plate 162 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4 as described above, the door window 101a. The upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276, the upper central decorative body 312 a of the dish, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the side window decorative part 410 b of the side window decorative member 412, and the right side decoration of the door frame The body 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 are partially provided with projecting portions that project toward the center of the game area (the center portion of the glass plate 162), and the projecting portions abut against the glass plate 162. Or you may make it provide so that it may adjoin. By doing so, even if the nail adjustment film 1170 is smaller than the size of the game board 5 (for example, A4 size), the alignment itself is caused by the contact with the protruding portion on the glass plate 162. In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, any illegal acts (for example, whether the nail state is suitable for other illegal acts) using the illegally obtained nail adjustment film 1170. Such as help for confirmation) can be prevented.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, it is possible to receive all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 132 to FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 185) for controlling game contents, payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. A main control board 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. The cover body and the beta body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, so that the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed or unauthorized IC is mounted) Or not) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found, and the deterring power against the illegal action on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2506, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning port sensor 2403, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a general winning port sensor 2401, and a general winning port sensor 3001. The first start port sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 130, FIG. 132, FIG. 140, FIG. 142, FIG. FIG. 154 is a schematic explanatory diagram of the routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 that is input to a connection connector 1400a that protrudes rearward from the upper side of the rear surface of the function display unit 1400. Or a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, etc. are displayed.

[5-5-1. Function display unit configuration]
Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 includes two status indicators, which are three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two normal lottery results that are drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs, and a normal hold display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate part 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like. Display.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-5-2. Noise countermeasures]
Here, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other, and a plurality of wirings (hereinafter simply referred to as “wirings”) for transmitting a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400. Will be described in detail.

  As described above, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connection connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is drawn from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 as shown in FIG. When it is turned, it is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is gathered together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, respectively. Pulled downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower side of the main control unit 1300. Turned.

  When the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is formed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed to the lower side, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL for electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a long wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. They are routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 along the right side of the main control board box 1320 on the rear side of the board holder 1200 that is collected and attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100. Thus, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 115 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Will be placed.

  Further, as described above, the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400. The wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131, is bent upward on the rear surface of the game panel 1100 as shown in FIGS. Then, it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010 and is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state of being close (or in contact) with the wiring FCBL described above. Then, it is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and gathered together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and below the peripheral control unit 1500. Thus, the drive board unit 1700 is drawn to the upper side. Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the above-described path of the wiring FCBL, and is bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500 and on the upper side of the driving board unit 1700, along the upper side of the driving board unit 1700. After being routed and routed to above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, the drive board unit 1700 is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  As described above, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel driving board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, the upper right of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL routed from the corner to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and the upper side of the back side of the back box 3010 is bent downward on the rear side of the back box 3010, and is moved up and down along the right side of the rear side of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the direction are collected and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. In this manner, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 115 in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 in the same manner as the wiring FCBL described above. It will be arranged in front of the payout unit 560.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out the game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full sphere path unit 600 for guiding the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward; A lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball B is ground in the island facility of the game hall or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby causing electromagnetic noise. Release. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can stay are attached.

  The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. I have. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The forced reset by the circuit has a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by the user program. Therefore, when a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control-side power-on process described later. Will be. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs. The contents of the stored RAM are completely erased (cleared). In other words, if the internal reset circuit is forcibly reset, the RAM is cleared when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again.

  In the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as the package of the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are provided. The main control board 1310 protrudes from the soldering surface (surface opposite to the mounting surface). That is, the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  In this way, since the static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are attached and the periphery thereof, if electromagnetic wave noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the function display is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. The unit 1400 may enter the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the main control board 1310, and the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 may be electrically connected. May intrude into the wiring UPCBL. As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and enter the wiring UPCBL. Conversely, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may jump out and enter the wiring FCBL.

  For example, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is assumed to be in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, the right side of the main control board box 1320 and about the upper side of the main control board box 1320). A portion having a length of a quarter, bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320), and the left side from the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310 At the stage of passing over the function display unit connector MFCN arranged close to the main control board box 1320 After being bent toward the side and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, when electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is When routed through the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the front of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control board 1310a). When passing through the area (in front of the bottom plate of the control board box 1320), electromagnetic noise enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. Under the influence of electromagnetic noise, the main control MPU 1310a is forced to reset by its built-in reset circuit. Door and there is a consuming fear.

  In addition, instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, when the wiring accommodating groove is formed in the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the wiring FCBL is , Not the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but is accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320. It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a. When passing through a region in front of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the mounting position (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320), electromagnetic noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a may intrude into the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, as a positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, The connector MFCN is arranged closer to the left side from the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. . That is, in the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged with the function display unit connector MFCN below the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. By disposing the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

  As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is connected to the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control. It is possible to prevent the MPU 1310a from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space separating the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by disposing the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. The electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated on the main control board 1310 or in a space where the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other in the main control board 1310. ing. Also in this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320. This is to prevent noise from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the first wiring separation distance from the wiring FCBL.

  Further, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 as described above. On the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 without being routed (or accommodated along the wiring receiving groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200). And then bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 and routed to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 132 is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance dimension between the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter referred to as “second wiring separation distance dimension”). ) Can be secured greatly. The second wiring separation distance dimension is larger than the first wiring separation distance dimension. As a result, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrudes from the wiring FCBL toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the second wiring separation distance. Can be prevented. Also in this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. However, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to be connected. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay substrate 1710 with an element that can reduce or eliminate the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise for each wiring FCBL). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being affected by electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs). As a filter circuit, a signal having a waveform width larger than the waveform width is used. Designed to pass.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, and the like, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be cited as such elements. When coils and beads are used, electric power is supplied to a plurality of wirings FCBL. When using capacitors, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor Circuits configured by combining these may be inserted.

  Further, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the game board 5 and the big prize opening 2005 provided in the game board 5. Large winning opening sensor 2403, general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, and a magnetic acting near the first start opening 2002 provided on the gaming board 5. Two wirings from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the above are electrically connected and integrated. That is, in the panel relay board 1710, in addition to the two wires from various sensors, the wires FCBL from the function display unit 1400 are also electrically connected and integrated. Two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The two wires from the sensor 2402 are electrically connected directly to the respective predetermined connectors of the main control board 1310 without going through the panel relay board 1710.

  In addition to the two wires from various sensors, panel relay substrate 1710 is electrically connected to wire FCBL from function display unit 1400 to main control substrate 1310 via connection connector 1710a shown in FIG. Yes. Therefore, when the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL on the panel relay board 1710 is reduced or reduced. By providing an element that can be removed (that is, by providing each element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic wave noise to the plurality of wirings FCBL that transmit a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400. ), It is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the two wires from various sensors.

  In the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the panel drive board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a long wiring length as described above. In particular, the wiring UPCBL routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent toward the lower side of the back surface of the back box 3010, Since a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface are collected and routed to the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, wiring is performed in this way. In the region where the UPCBL is routed, electromagnetic noise may enter in the same manner as the wiring FCBL described above. As described above, the wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500 and on the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed to a position above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in 1700, the panel drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the predetermined connector, so that the influence of electromagnetic wave noise caused by the wiring UPCBL reaches the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a fear.

  Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, a detailed description thereof will be described later. Connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 182) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. CN8 and CN9 are arranged (see FIG. 182). Various corresponding wirings are electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, when various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring UPCBL intersect or contact each other (arrangement), electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL jumps out to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When entering into various wirings that are electrically connected, for example, the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 is disturbed due to the influence of electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL (for example, a black screen or the like) Disturbance occurs).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 so as to be separated from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Yes. As a result, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 does not intersect (contact) with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Specifically, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not contact in parallel with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9, and is electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Do not contact some of the various wires connected to the cable. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit described above, various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310 intersect or contact the wiring UPCBL. Arranged not to.

  In the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. As a positional relationship with the mounting position of a peripheral control IC 1510a (described later in FIG. 154), the peripheral control IC 1510a is disposed above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510. . In other words, in this embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a Are arranged to be separated from each other.

  Thus, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged away from the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 through the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged separately from the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring UPCBL, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. Incoming electromagnetic noise can be attenuated. Also in this respect, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 are electrically connected via a wiring (not shown), and this wiring and the wiring UPCBL cross or contact each other. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated by the panel drive board 1720, so that the peripheral control board 1510 from the panel drive board 1720 through the wiring is used. It becomes extremely difficult to enter the area, and the influence of electromagnetic noise does not reach the peripheral control board 1510. Also in this respect, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In this embodiment, in the panel drive board 1720, electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated by the ground (solid ground), but an element that can further reduce or eliminate the electromagnetic wave noise is provided. (That is, each of the elements that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic wave noise with respect to the plurality of wirings UPCBL that transmits a control signal from the panel drive board 1720 to the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400. Preferably). Thereby, electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring UPCBL can be reliably attenuated or removed in the panel drive substrate 1720. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs). As a filter circuit, a signal having a waveform width larger than the waveform width is used. Designed to pass.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, and the like, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be cited as such elements. When coils and beads are used, electric power is supplied to a plurality of wirings UPCBL. When using capacitors, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings UPCBL. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings UPCBL, or a bead and a capacitor Circuits configured by combining these may be inserted.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine in which a display device (display unit) for displaying a normal map variable display game, a special map variable display game, a game state display, etc. is arranged on the surface of the game board has been proposed (for example, a special game Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-154676 (paragraph [0014], paragraph [0070], FIG. 2 and FIG. 21)). This display device (display unit) is display-controlled by a CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device. By the way, when electromagnetic noise enters a wiring that electrically connects the display device (display unit) and the game control device (game control means), the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device is connected via this wire. There was a risk of impact.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, and other boards (peripheral data ROM board and liquid crystal output board described later). ing. The configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 projecting outward from the lower surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixed grooves 3010c opened in an upper inner peripheral surface in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the back. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 130, FIG. 131, FIG. 133, FIG. 134, FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allow the game ball B to be received according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged below the center in the up-down direction in the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. ing. The left general winning opening 2001 is arranged in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the right general winning opening 2001 is arranged near the right end in the gaming area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed in the vicinity of the upper right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed at a position higher than the first start port 2002 below the right general winning port 2001. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged on the left side of the second start opening 2004 at a height between the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004.

  A plurality of general winning openings 2001 (four general winning openings 2001) are winning openings (entrance balls) having similar uses, and the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate part 2003 have uses. It is a similar winning entry (entrance entrance). Here, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate part 2003 will be briefly described as winning holes (ball holes) having similar uses. The first start port 2002 is a game ball B. The first special lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the acceptance of the game, and the second start port 2004 is based on the acceptance of the game ball B. The second special lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the control unit 1300, and the gate unit 2003 is based on the passage of the game ball B and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. This is because the normal lottery result can be obtained by executing the lottery.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a front left of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning holes 2001, and the side slope is attached along the inner rail 1002 in the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 and a general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005, which are attached to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. In the game area 5a above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached at a position slightly above the center in front view and has a gate portion 2003, and is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500. A table production unit 2600.

[5-8-1. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the gaming area 5a near the lower end at the center in the left-right direction and immediately above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received. The start-up unit 2100 is entirely formed transparently, and the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144).

  The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the general winning port 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first start port 2002 is a center described later. It is located immediately below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability. The starter unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first starter port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfer it to the guide path in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is detected by a first start port sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 185).

  The first start port sensor 3002 includes a first start port sensor main side (hereinafter referred to as “first start port sensor main side 3002a”) and a first start port sensor slave side (hereinafter referred to as “first start port sensor”). Mouth sensor slave side 3002b "), and the first starter sensor main side 3002a and the first starter sensor slave side 3002b are at least a false detection prevention distance dimension (14 mm in this embodiment). And has a larger distance dimension than the diameter of the game ball (11 mm). Since the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port If the sensor slave side 3002b is disposed in a state where the distance from the sensor detection side 3002b is equal to or smaller than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension, the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a is moved together with the first start port sensor main side 3002a to the first start port. The game ball B that may be detected by the sensor slave side 3002b and that passes through the first starter port slave side 3002b is detected by the first starter sensor slave side 3002b together with the first starter sensor main side 3002a. Because there are cases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor subordinate side 3002b are spaced apart by a dimensional distance (43 mm in this embodiment) that is larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. As a result, when the first start port sensor main side 3002a detects the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection reaches the first start port sensor sub side 3002b. Thus, even though the game ball B has not yet passed through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b, the physical detection that the first start port sensor slave side 3002b erroneously detects it. When the first start port sensor slave side 3002b detects a game ball B that passes through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b, When the electrical influence by the knowledge reaches the first start port sensor main side 3002a, the game ball B is already passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, but the first start It is possible to prevent the mouth sensor main side 3002a from erroneously detecting the physical structure. Thus, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is first detected by the first start port sensor main side 3002a by passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, and then the first start port sensor subordinate. After passing through the side 3002b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002 including the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor subordinate side 3002b (double sensor) is employed, so that the first start The game ball B received in the mouth 2002 can be reliably detected. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. A detailed description of the fraud detection process that can detect and notify a fraudulent act caused by radio wave irradiation using a first start port sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensors) will be described later.

[5-8-2. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at the same height as the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side in the left-right direction is Is open upward at a position higher than the general prize opening 2001, and the leftmost general prize opening 2001 is opened at a position higher than the intermediate general prize opening 2001 toward the upper left in the front view. Yes.

  The side unit 2200 is entirely transparent, and the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the three general winning holes 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfer it to the guide path of the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 are detected by a general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 185).

[5-8-3. Side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left area of the center accessory 2500 to the right. The entire side slope 2300 is transparent, and the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144).

[5-8-4. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The entire attacker unit 2400 is formed to be transparent, and the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144). The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning port 2001, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 among the four general winning ports 2001 (see FIG. 136 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 has an outer shape in a front view, which is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 2400 is provided with a general winning opening 2001 which is always open upward in the upper right corner, and can be opened upward at a position on the left side of the general winning opening 2001. Two starting ports 2004 are arranged. Also, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. In the attacker unit 2400, the second start opening 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens upward, and the big winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It opens upwards with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a large And a big winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 185).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start port door 2411 that can open and close the second start port 2004, and opens and closes the second start port door 2411 according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate part 2003. The start opening solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to one special lottery result or a second special lottery result.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the attacker unit 2400 has a right upper left passage 2421 and a right upper right passage 2422 through which a game ball B can flow downward on both the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001 arranged at the upper right, and an upper right right passage 2422. The upper right left guide shelf 2423 that inclines so as to go down to the left so as to merge with the upper right left passage 2421 from the downstream end of the general winning opening 2001, and below the upper right left guide shelf 2423 The second starting port upper guide shelf 2424 extending to the left so as to become lower toward the second starting port 2004 from directly below the upper right left passage 2421, and the left end side from the left end of the second starting port 2004 to be lowered. The second start opening lower guide shelf 2425 extending to the left and the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425 below the left end of the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425 from the left end. The upper prize-winning upper guide shelf 2426 extending to the left so as to become lower toward the big prize opening 2005 from the top, and the big prize opening extending to the left so that the left end side of the big prize opening 2005 is lowered. A lower guide shelf 2427.

  Further, the attacker unit 2400 opens toward the left on the right end side of the second starting port upper guide shelf 2424 and guides the game ball B downward from the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005. A central left passage that opens upward between the passage 2428, the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425, and the big winning opening upper guide shelf 2426 and guides the game ball B downward from the big winning opening 2005. 2429.

  The second starting port door 2411 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered. The second starting port 2004 opens upward by moving forward and backward. Can be opened and closed. The second starting port door 2411 is attached in the vicinity of the upper end of the second starting port 2004 so as to be able to advance and retract in the front-rear direction. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 by moving forward, and guides the game ball B that has circulated through the second starting port upper guide shelf 2424 to the left, and then the second starting port. It can be delivered onto the lower guide shelf 2425. The second start port door 2411 can be moved backward by driving the start port solenoid 2412 to open the second start port 2004 and allow the game ball B flowing down to the second start port 2004 to be received. it can. The second start opening door 2411 closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid is ON (when energizing). Let

  The grand prize opening door 2413 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered, and opens and closes the big prize opening 2005 that opens upward by moving forward and backward. It is possible. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 by moving forward, and guides the game ball B that has circulated through the large winning opening upper induction shelf 2426 to the left, and then lowers the special winning opening lower induction shelf. It can be delivered to 2427. In addition, the special winning opening door 2413 is retracted by driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the special winning opening 2005, and the game ball B that has circulated through the right guide passage 2510 of the center object 2500 is made into the special winning opening 2005. Can be accepted. The special prize opening door 2413 closes the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when no power is supplied), and opens the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when current is supplied).

  The attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the general winning opening 2001 is below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 described later (slightly to the left from directly below). The second starting port 2004 is located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500, and the big prize opening 2005 is located below the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500. Moreover, in the state attached to the panel board 1110, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (general winning port 2001).

  Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning port 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are positioned above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the game ball B is released from the stage 2503. Even if it is released, it will not be accepted into the general winning port 2001 or the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (right guide passage 2510) of the center accessory 2500 may be received in the general winning port 2001 or the second start port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500, an upper right left passage 2421, a general winning port 2001, and an upper right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left. B will enter either of them.

  When the game ball B supplied through the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 and above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is received by the general winning opening 2001, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401. In the rear side of the game panel 1100, the game panel 1100 is discharged downward (on the board holder 1200). On the other hand, when the game ball B enters the upper right left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 or the right upper right passage 2422 on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 without being received in the general winning opening 2001, it falls onto the second start opening upper guide shelf 2424. And it distribute | circulates to the 2nd starting port 2004 side (left side). In a state where the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2411, the left end side of the second start port door 2411 is inclined so as to be lowered. , Flows through the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425, and is discharged to the left from the left end of the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425. When the game ball B passes through the second start port upper guide shelf 2424, if the second start port 2004 is opened, the game ball B is accepted into the second start port 2004 with a high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second start opening 2004, it is discharged to the left big winning opening 2005 side via the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425. . When the game ball B released from the upper right left passage 2421 to the second start opening upper guide shelf 2424 enters the central right passage 2428 from the right end side of the second start opening upper guide shelf 2424, the second start port 2004 is displayed. The game is not discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without the opportunity to be received at the big winning port 2005 and the first start port 2002.

  The second start opening lower guide shelf 2425 is disposed above the winning prize opening 2005 and the first start opening 2002, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are located on the left side of the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425. Has been planted. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425 flows down to any of the first start opening 2002 side, the big winning opening 2005 side, and the central left passage 2429 side. Become. When the big prize opening 2005 is closed by the big prize opening door 2413 when it flows down to the big prize opening 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the big prize opening door 2413, To the left. When the big prize opening door 2413 that closes the big prize opening 2005 is retracted and the big prize opening 2005 is open, the game ball B that has flowed down from the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425 to the big prize opening 2005 side. Is accepted into the grand prize opening 2005. The game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has entered the central left passage 2429 from the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425 and the game ball B that has been released to the left from the lower winning guide lower guide shelf 2427 are played through the out port 1008. It is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has flowed from the second start opening lower guide shelf 2425 to the first start opening 2002 side through the obstacle nail N may be received by the first start opening 2002. The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is detected by the first start port sensor 3002 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200). On the other hand, the game ball B that is not received in the first start port 2002 passes through the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a, and is discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

[5-8-5. Center character]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, etc., and is located slightly above the center of the front view. It is attached to the front surface of 1110. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. it can. Further, the center accessory 2500 is substantially entirely formed transparent, and the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5 a Can not invade.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501 can be released. A warp outlet 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape that is depressed in the center in the left-right direction, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). 1110), a substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined so that a portion (top) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and a portion (valley) that is the lowest on both left and right sides are lowered toward the front. Thus, the game ball B can be released from these parts into the game area 5a.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the elevated portion (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  In addition, the center accessory 2500 is located at a position slightly below the upper right corner in a front view (a position directly below the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 when assembled to the game board 5). A gate space forming portion 2505 that forms a space of a predetermined size through which the game ball B can flow between the rail 1005 and the game ball B from the downstream end of the gate space forming portion 2505 along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view. A right guide passage 2510 that is allowed to flow down and is guided to the left slightly in the vicinity of the lower end and then discharged downward.

  The center accessory 2500 is provided with a gate portion 2003 at the center of the gate space forming portion 2505, and a gate sensor 2506 for detecting the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is attached. The gate space forming portion 2505 has such a size that the game ball B can be distributed on both the left and right sides of the gate portion 2003. In the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted above the gate portion 2003.

  The right guide passage 2510 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly to the right of the general winning port 2001 in the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Yes.

  In the state in which the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the distance between the right side from the center of the upper outer peripheral surface and the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is formed so as to be largely separated. As a result, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505 and the right guide passage 2510 Are always circulated and flow down above the attacker unit 2400. Accordingly, in order to pass the game ball B through the gate 2003, it is necessary to hit the right, and when the right winning opening 2005 is opened, the right hit is made to the winning winning opening 2005 with a high probability. B can be accepted.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a sub-function display unit 2520 in the upper right corner frame. The sub-function display unit 2520 has a plurality of full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2520 is interlocked with the normal symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the gate unit is controlled by the lighting / flashing of the LED, the emission color, and the like. Display the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to 2003, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 To do.

  Since the center accessory 2500 is substantially entirely transparent, a flange-like portion that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is also transparent. Therefore, in a state where the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 144, the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear panel plate 1110 is viewed from the front through the center accessory 2500. be able to. As a result, when the game board 5 is assembled, the discontinuous portion between the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the table effect unit 2600 described later is as narrow as possible. It is possible to enhance the continuity between the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630, thereby giving a sense of unity.

[5-8-6. Table production unit]
Next, the table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158 and the like. FIG. 155 is a front view of the front effect unit. FIG. 156 is a front view showing a state where the first design is light-decorated in the front effect unit, and FIG. 157 is a front view showing a state where the second design is light-decorated in the front effect unit. FIG. 158 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern of the front effect unit different from the present embodiment is decorated with light emission.

  The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500, and makes the light incident from the transparent flat light guide plate 2601 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500 and the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601. The first pattern decorative substrate 2612 on which a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 to be decorated with light is mounted, and the second pattern 2620 to be decorated by emitting light from the right side of the light guide plate 2601. A plurality of condensing lenses 2623 for condensing the light from the LED 2621 provided between the LED 2621 and the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 on which the plurality of LEDs 2621 are mounted, It has. The LED 2611 and the LED 2621 are full-color LEDs.

  The light guide plate 2601 has a first pattern 2610 (see FIG. 156) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex upper reflection parts that reflect only light from above in the forward direction, and only light from the right direction in the forward direction. And a second pattern 2620 (see FIG. 157) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex right reflecting portions to be reflected. That is, the front effect unit 2600 can cause the first pattern 2610 to emit light when the LED of the first pattern decoration board 2612 emits 2611 light, and emit the LED 2621 of the second pattern decoration board 2622 to emit light. Two pictures 2620 can be displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  The light guide plate 2601 has fine irregularities formed in each of an infinite number of upper reflection portions forming the first pattern 2610 and an infinite number of right reflection portions forming the second pattern 2620. In the state where the LED 2611 of the decorative board for pattern 2612 and the LED 2621 of the decorative board for second pattern 2622 are not lit, it looks transparent and various decorative bodies and the effect display device 1600 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side. The effect image displayed on the screen can be visually recognized in a good state.

  The plurality of upper reflective portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the right reflective portion forming the second pattern 2620 are perpendicular to the straight lines connected to the corresponding LED 2611 and LED 2621. It has a flat surface extending and inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate 2601. The upper reflection part and the right reflection part are recessed in a pent roof-like triangle. The upper reflection unit and the right reflection unit reflect light incident from the corresponding LED 2611 and LED 2621 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, light incident from the LED 2611 and the LED 2621 that are not supported is reflected in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. Therefore, only the light from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 can reach the eyes of the player located in front of the light guide plate 2601.

  The plurality of LEDs 2611 mounted on the lower surface of the first design decorative board 2612 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and are arranged in four groups of a first LED 2611a, a second LED 2611b, a third LED 2611c, and a fourth LED 2611d. It is divided. The first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are arranged to make a predetermined number (three in this case) from the left.

  As shown in FIG. 156, the first pattern 2610 is a pattern related to the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. The first pattern 2610 is a pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles with the extended lines of the horizontal line, upper right oblique line, and left upward oblique line forming the decorative pattern 1150 as boundaries (see FIG. 172). . The first pattern 2610 includes six large triangular patterns having approximately the same size as the regular triangle formed by collecting four regular triangle outlines in the decorative pattern 1150, and the regular triangle outline in the decorative pattern 1150. It is composed of a plurality of small triangular patterns that fit within the interior. The six large triangular patterns are arranged in a circle around the center of the game area 5a so that the whole is a hexagon, and a plurality of small triangular patterns surround the six large triangular patterns. Has been placed.

  The large triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610 seems to be superposed such that a plurality of regular triangles of different sizes are eccentric in the order of the size in the state of being eccentric to the apex side near the center of the game area 5a. It is formed in a simple pattern. The small triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610 is formed in a pattern in which contour lines of regular triangles are arranged concentrically.

  The first pattern 2610 includes a first pattern portion 2610a configured by a plurality of upper reflecting portions corresponding to the first LED 2611a and a second pattern portion 2610b configured by a plurality of upper reflecting portions corresponding to the second LED 2611b. And a third pattern portion 2610c configured by a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the third LED 2611c, and a fourth pattern portion 2610d configured by a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the fourth LED 2611d. It is configured.

  The first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c are arranged so that the large triangle pattern in which a plurality of equilateral triangles having different sizes in the first pattern 2610 are overlapped in order. The fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically stacked on the center side of the game area 5a. Occasionally, a small triangle pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles in the first pattern 2610 has a first pattern portion 2610a, a second pattern portion 2610b, a third pattern portion 2610c, The four pattern portions 2610d are arranged concentrically in the order.

  As shown in FIG. 157, the second pattern 2620 is a pattern having a guidance (message) for the player made up of characters “CHANCE!”.

  As a second embodiment of the front effect unit 2600, a second pattern 2630 as shown in FIG. This second pattern 2630 is a pattern related to the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 in the gaming panel 1100. The second pattern 2630 is a geometric pattern that is obtained by extending the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the left upward diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 with a thick width (see FIG. 176).

  Next, the light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED 2611a of the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the first pattern portion 2610a, and the remaining second pattern portion 2610b, third pattern portion. In 2610c, the 4th pattern part 2610d, and the 2nd pattern 2620, since it reflects to those other than the front, only the 1st pattern part 2610a appears to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. When the second LED 2611b of the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second pattern portion 2610b, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a, third Since the pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the second pattern portion 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern portion 2610b appears to be shining to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, when the third LED 2611c of the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the third pattern portion 2610c, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a, second Since the pattern portion 2610b, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the second pattern portion 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the third pattern portion 2610c appears to be shining from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the fourth LED 2611d of the first pattern decorative board 2612 is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a, second Since the pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth pattern portion 2610d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the first pattern 2610, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, and the second pattern portion in the large triangular pattern portion. 2610b and the third picture part 2610c are decentered and superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a. In the small triangular picture part, the first picture part 2610a, the second picture part 2610b, and the third picture part 2610c. , And the fourth pattern portion 2610d are arranged concentrically toward the center in the order, and when the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are emitted in this order, the first pattern The part 2610a, the second pattern part 2610b, the third pattern part 2610c, and the fourth pattern part 2610d will emit light in this order, and from the outside to the center Towards a like motion to move it can be performed emission effect, such as animation.

  On the other hand, when the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a are caused to emit light in this order, the order of the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the third pattern portion 2610c, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the first pattern portion 2610a. It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that emits light and moves from the center side toward the outside.

  Further, when the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are caused to emit light in different colors, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are displayed. , Light can be emitted in different colors.

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs 2621 on the second pattern decorative substrate 2622 are caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second pattern 2620, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a, second pattern Since the part 2610b, the third pattern part 2610c, and the fourth pattern part 2610d are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern 2620 appears to be shining to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the second pattern 2620 composed of the characters “CHANCE!” Can be caused to emit light by the plurality of LEDs 2621.

  As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (first pattern portion 2610a, second pattern portion 2610b, third pattern portion 2610c, first pattern portion 2610c, the first pattern portion 2610c, and the second pattern portion 2610c). Since the four picture portions 2610d) can emit light, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each picture in order to display an animation or the like, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, since it is possible to easily secure a wide space behind the light guide plate 2601, it is possible to arrange other effect units in the space, and to increase the appeal to the player, as well as the player It is possible to entertain the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the light guide plate 2601 can display a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation by the semi-transparent first pattern 2610 floating in front of the rear unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is familiar with the light production, and to surprise and entertain the player, and to make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are patterns related to the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inside and outside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 are continuous. It is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of unity and improve the appearance in the game area 5a.

  Further, since only the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 by the light guide plate 2601 well, other games that are far from the front From the player, the light emission display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 becomes difficult to see, and it can be difficult for other players to notice that the performance using the light guide plate 2601 is being performed, While being able to suppress other players from paying attention, it is possible to play a game without bothering other players, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the front. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 has a general winning port sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a first unit provided in the start port unit 2100. A first start port sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in one start port 2002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 185). .

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back bottom effect unit 3100 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and a back effect unit 3200 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. And a back left effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back right effect unit 3400 attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. .

  Further, the back unit 3000 receives the game balls B received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 and guided to the back of the game panel 1100, respectively. A guide path for discharging into the substrate holder 1200 is provided.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b And a notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by cutting from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower side (see FIGS. 133 and 134).

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable left and right.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

[5-9-1. Bottom production unit]
Next, the back bottom production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162 and the like. FIG. 160 is an exploded perspective view of the underside movable decorative body provided in the underside effect unit in the back unit, as viewed from the front. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the back bottom movable decorative body provided in the back bottom effect unit as seen from behind. FIG. 162 is a front view showing the movement of the lower back movable decorative body. The back lower effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

  The underside effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the underside movable ornament 3110 having a triangular pyramid shape whose bottom is pointed forward and pointed forward, and the effect display device 1600. The lower movable decorative body 3110 is attached, and the lower back moving arm 3130 (see FIG. 165 and the like) and the lower back moving arm 3130 are vertically moved. And a lower back lifting mechanism 3150 to be moved.

  The lower back movable decorative body 3110 includes a disk-shaped decorative body base 3111 attached to the lower back movement arm 3130, and a lower back rotation drive motor attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base 3111 with the rotation shaft protruding forward. 3112, a drive gear 3113 attached to the rotation shaft of the backside rotary drive motor 3112, a transmission gear member 3114 rotated by the drive gear 3113 and rotatably attached to the decorative body base 3111, and a decorative body A rear-stage base 3115 that is rotatably supported by the base 3111 and has a flat plate shape and is substantially equilateral triangle, a rear-stage decoration portion 3116 that is attached to the front surface of the rear-stage base 3115 and is rotated by the transmission gear member 3114, and a rear-stage decoration It is disposed in front of the portion 3116 and is rotatably supported by the rear decoration portion 3116. A middle stage base 3117 rotated by a cage drive gear 3113, a middle stage decorative part 3118 attached to the front surface of the middle stage base 3117, a middle stage decorative part 3118, a middle stage base 3117, which are arranged in front of the middle stage decorative part 3118; A front decoration part 3119 that passes through the rear decoration part 3116 and has a rear end attached to the decoration body base 3111 and a backside rotation detection that is attached to the rear surface of the decoration body base 3111 and detects the rotational position of the rear stage base 3115. The sensor 3120 is attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3111, and the back lower rear decorative board 3121 for illuminating the rear decorative part 3116, and the front decorative part 3119 between the middle base 3117 and the middle decorative part 3118. The middle decoration part 3118 and the front decoration part 3119 that are attached are illuminated and decorated. And back under before decorative substrate 3122 of the eye, it has a.

  The lower back rotation drive motor 3112 is attached to the decorative body base 3111 at a position eccentric from the center of the disk-shaped decorative body base 3111 so that the rotation shaft protrudes forward. The transmission gear member 3114 is attached to the decorative body base 3111 so that the center of rotation is at a position eccentric from the center of the disk-shaped decorative body base 3111. The transmission gear member 3114 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear portion 3114a that meshes with the drive gear 3113, and a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 3114b that rotates integrally with the front side of the first gear portion 3114a. . The first gear portion 3114a meshes with the drive gear 3113, and the second gear portion 3114b meshes with a rear gear portion 3116d of a rear decoration portion 3116 described later.

  The rear base 3115 includes a bearing hole 3115a into which the outer periphery of the disc-shaped decorative body base 3111 is slidably inserted, and a detection piece 3115b detected by the back bottom rotation detection sensor 3120. The rear stage base 3115 constitutes the bottom surface of the backside movable decorative body 3110 having a triangular pyramid shape.

  The rear decoration portion 3116 is formed in a shape on the rear side when the outer shape of the triangular pyramid pointed forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and the three side plate portions in a trapezoidal shape with a flat front side and a flat plate shape. 3116a and a front plate portion 3116b which is a regular and flat plate connecting the front end sides of the three side plate portions 3116a. The rear decoration part 3116 is formed in a container shape with the rear side opened by three side plate parts 3116a and one front plate part 3116b, and the rear base 3115 at the rear end is closed so that the opened rear side is closed. Is installed. Further, the rear decoration portion 3116 is formed in the center of the front plate portion 3116b with a smaller diameter than the decorative body base 3111 in the front-rear direction and a bearing hole 3116c formed on the rear side of the front plate portion 3116b. A spur gear-like rear gear portion 3116d penetrating therethrough. A shaft tube portion 3117b of a middle base 3117, which will be described later, is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c so as to be relatively rotatable. The rear gear portion 3116d meshes with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114. The rear decoration 3116 is formed to have translucency.

  The middle base 3117 is an equilateral triangle smaller than the front plate part 3116b of the rear decoration part 3116, has a flat plate-like main body part 3117a, and penetrates the center of the main body part 3117a. A protruding shaft tube portion 3117b and a spur gear-shaped middle gear portion 3117c formed at the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the shaft tube portion 3117b are provided. The shaft tube portion 3117b is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c of the rear decoration portion 3116 so as to be relatively rotatable. The middle gear portion 3117 c meshes with the drive gear 3113.

  The middle decorative portion 3118 has an outer shape formed in an intermediate shape when a forward-pointing triangular pyramid is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. And a front plate portion 3118b which is a regular and flat plate connecting the front end sides of the three side plate portions 3118a. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed in a container shape whose rear side is opened by three side plate portions 3118a and one front plate portion 3118b, and the middle base 3117 at the rear end so that the opened rear side is closed. (Main body 3117a) is attached. Further, the middle decorative portion 3118 includes a through hole 3118c penetrating forward and backward at the center of the front plate portion 3118b. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed to have translucency.

  The front decoration part 3119 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape whose outer shape is narrowed forward. The front decoration 3119 includes a columnar front shaft 3119a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the triangular pyramid. The front shaft portion 3119a is inserted into the shaft tube portion 3117b of the middle base base 3117 so as to be relatively rotatable, and the rear end is attached to the decorative body base 3111. The front decoration part 3119 is formed to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the back bottom decorative substrate 3121. The front back decorative substrate 3122 has a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that emit light toward the outside in the normal direction and a plurality of full-color LEDs (top view type) that emit light toward the front. ) And have been implemented. The back lower front decorative substrate 3122 is attached to the front shaft portion 3119a of the front decorative portion 3119.

  The back lower movement arm 3130 is formed to have a length straddling the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the back lower movable decorative body 3110 is attached to the center of the front surface. In addition, the lower back moving arm 3130 has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted in a row on the front surface. In order to increase the rigidity of the back bottom moving arm 3130, a metal back bottom moving arm reinforcing plate (not shown) is provided so as to cover the back side. Of the both ends in the left and right direction of the reinforcing plate for the lower back moving arm, one of the two disposed in the vicinity of the lower back lifting drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186) is made of a metal that can slide and move by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. A metal cylindrical rod not shown which is attached to the slide rail 3151ns for the lower back movement arm (see FIG. 264 (a)) and which is not arranged near the lower back raising / lowering drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186). Sliding part for the back moving arm (not shown) that slides along the surface (moves while sliding the surface of the metal cylindrical bar along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical bar) (even if it is molded with conductive resin) Or may be molded from a non-conductive resin). In addition, you may comprise so that the both ends of the left-right direction of the reinforcement board for back back movement arms may be attached to metal slide rails 3151ns and 3151ns for back down movement arms, respectively.

  The lower back lifting mechanism 3150 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back bottom elevating mechanism 3150 is a rod-like back bottom that rotates around one end side by driving the back bottom elevating drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 186) and the back bottom elevating drive motor 3151. And an elevating arm. The tip of the back / bottom lift arm is connected to the back / bottom movement arm 3130. By rotating the back / bottom lift arm by the back / bottom lift drive motor 3151, the back / bottom movement arm 3130 is moved via the back / bottom lift arm. Can be moved up and down.

  Next, the operation of the back bottom production unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the back lower stage production unit 3100 has a triangular pyramid formed by matching the vertices of the triangles of the rear decoration part 3116, the middle decoration part 3118, and the front decoration part 3119 of the lower back movable decoration body 3110. As it is formed, one vertex of the triangle faces upward. Further, in a normal state, the lower back moving arm 3130 is positioned at the lower moving end by the lower back lifting mechanism 3150. In this normal state, the pointed apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is located at substantially the same height as the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500, and most of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 Is in a standby position located below the effect display device 1600. In this state, the back bottom moving arm 3130 and the back bottom lifting mechanism 3150 are located behind the back left bottom decorative body 3380 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right bottom decorative body 3480 of the back right rendering unit 3400 described later. It is in a state invisible from the front (see FIG. 135, etc.).

  In the normal state, when the lower back moving arm 3130 is moved to the upper moving end via the back lower lift arm 3151 by the lower back lifting drive motor 3151, the upper vertex of the back lower movable decorative body 3110 in the front view is the gaming area. It will be in the state of the 1st united position located in the center vicinity of 5a (refer FIG. 170).

  The back lower direction production unit 3100 uses the back lower lift mechanism 3150 to move the back lower movable decorative body 3110 through the back lower movement arm 3130 to the standby position (original position) where the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is moved downward and to It can be moved up and down freely between the united positions. In this embodiment, the 2nd union position which moved the distance of 1/7 of the whole movement distance from a stand-by position to the 1st union position from the 1st union position to the stand-by position side is set up.

  In the normal state, the back lower stage production unit 3100 has a triangular pyramid formed by matching the vertices of the triangles of the rear decoration part 3116, the middle decoration part 3118, and the front decoration part 3119 of the lower back movable decoration body 3110. In addition to the formation, one vertex of the triangle faces upward (see FIG. 162 (a) and the like). In this state, the detection piece 3115b of the rear stage base 3115 is detected by the lower back rotation detection sensor 3120, and the original position (standby position) of the rear decorative part 3116 and the middle decorative part 3118 of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is detected. Become.

  Then, when the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the back under rotation drive motor 3112 in a state where the back bottom movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the first combined position or the second combined position, the first gear portion is moved to the drive gear 3113. The transmission gear member 3114 meshed with 3114a rotates in the opposite direction to the drive gear 3113, and via the rear gear portion 3116d of the rear decoration portion 3116 meshed with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114. The rear decoration 3116 rotates in the opposite direction to the transmission gear member 3114. That is, the rear decoration 3116 rotates in the same direction as the drive gear 3113. On the other hand, in addition to the first gear portion 3114a of the transmission gear member 3114, the middle gear portion 3117c of the middle base 3117 meshes with the drive gear 3113, and the middle decoration portion 3118 is driven by the middle gear portion 3117c. It rotates in the opposite direction to 3113. Since the front decoration part 3119 is attached to the decoration body base 3111, the front decoration part 3119 does not rotate even if the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the back lower rotation drive motor 3112 (see FIG. 162 (b)). reference).

  Accordingly, when the lower back rotation drive motor 3112 is driven, the rear decoration part 3116 and the middle decoration part 3118 rotate in opposite directions with the front decoration part 3119 stopped. In this embodiment, each gear ratio is set so that when the rear decoration 3116 rotates once, the middle decoration 3118 rotates twice.

  Further, in the lower back effect unit 3100, the LEDs mounted on the back lower back decorative board 3121 and the back lower front decorative board 3122 of the back lower movable decorative body 3110 are appropriately caused to emit light, so that the back lower movable decorative body 3110 is displayed. Light emission decoration can be performed, and light emission decoration can be performed even when the rear decoration part 3116 and the middle decoration part 3118 are rotating.

  Further, in the back lower direction production unit 3100, the plurality of LEDs provided in the back lower movement arm 3130 are caused to emit light, whereby the back lower movement arm 3130 can be illuminated and decorated, and the plurality of lower back movement arms 3130 can be decorated. By causing the LEDs to emit light in order toward the backside movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light flows to the backside movable decorative body 3110. In addition, by causing the plurality of LEDs of the lower back movable arm 3130 to emit light in order so as to move away from the lower back movable decorative body 3110, a light emitting effect can be performed such that light flows from the lower back movable decorative body 3110.

[5-9-2. Backward production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back effect unit 3200 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the back-side movable ornament 3210 having a triangular pyramid shape with a regular triangular bottom and a forward point, and the effect display device 1600. The upper movable decoration body 3210 is attached, and both the left and right ends are supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The back upper movement arm 3230 (see FIG. 165 and the like) and the back upper movement arm 3230 are moved in the vertical direction. And a back lifting mechanism 3250 to be moved.

  The back upper movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the back lower movable decorative body 3110. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back upper movable decorative body 3210 is attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base with a disk-shaped decorative body base attached to the back upper moving arm 3230 and a rotating shaft protruding forward. The back surface rotation drive motor 3212 (see FIG. 186), the drive gear attached to the rotation shaft of the back surface rotation drive motor 3212, and rotated by the drive gear and rotatably attached to the decorative body base A rear gear base that is rotatably supported by a decorative base and has a flat plate shape and is substantially equilateral triangle, and a rear decorative portion 3216 that is attached to the front surface of the rear base and is rotated by the transmission gear member. And a middle stage which is disposed in front of the rear decoration part 3216 and is rotatably supported by the rear decoration part 3216 and rotated by a drive gear. A middle stage decorative portion 3218 attached to the front surface of the middle stage base, and the middle stage decorative portion 3218 is disposed in front of the middle stage decorative portion 3218 and passes through the middle stage decorative portion 3218, the middle stage base, and the rear stage decorative portion 3216. A front decoration part 3219 attached to the decorative body base, a back rotation detection sensor 3220 (see FIG. 186) attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base for detecting the rotational position of the rear base, A back-and-back back-decoration board that is attached to the front surface to illuminate and decorate the back-end decoration portion 3216, and a front-stage decor portion 3219 between the middle base and the mid-stage decor portion 3218. A back front decorative board for decorating the portion 3219 with light emission.

  The rear decoration portion 3116 is formed in a rear shape when the outer shape of the triangular pyramid sharpened forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. The rear decoration 3116 is formed to have translucency. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed in an intermediate shape when a triangular pyramid pointed forward is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed to have translucency. The front decoration part 3119 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape whose outer shape is narrowed forward. The front decoration part 3119 is formed to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the back bottom decorative board. The back bottom front decorative board has a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that emit light toward the outside in the normal direction, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (top view type) that emit light toward the front. And have been implemented.

  The back upper movement arm 3230 is formed to have a length straddling the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 is attached to the center of the front surface. Further, the back upper moving arm 3230 has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted in a row on the front surface. In order to increase the rigidity of the back top moving arm 3230, a metal back top moving arm reinforcing plate (not shown) is provided so as to cover the back side. Of the both ends in the left-right direction of the reinforcing plate for the back upper moving arm, one of the two disposed in the vicinity of the back lifting drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186) is made of a metal that can slide and move by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. A metal cylindrical rod not shown, which is attached to the slide rail 3251ns for the back moving arm (see FIG. 264 (a)) and is not arranged in the vicinity of the back lifting drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186). Sliding movement for the back moving arm (not shown) that slides along the surface (moves while sliding the surface of the metal cylindrical rod along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical rod) (even if it is molded with conductive resin) Or may be molded from a non-conductive resin). In addition, you may comprise so that the both ends of the left-right direction of the reinforcement board for back upper movement arms may be attached to the metal slide rails 3251ns and 3251ns for back upper movement arms, respectively.

  The back lifting mechanism 3250 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back lifting mechanism 3250 is a rod-like back that rotates about one end side by driving the back lifting drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 186) and the back lifting drive motor 3251. And an elevating arm. The tip of the back lifting arm is connected to the back lifting arm 3230, and the back lifting arm 3230 is rotated by the back lifting drive motor 3251 so that the back lifting arm 3230 is moved via the back lifting arm. Can be moved up and down.

  Next, the operation of the back effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, the back effect unit 3200 has a triangular pyramid formed by matching the vertices of the triangles of the rear decoration part 3216, the middle decoration part 3218, and the front decoration part 3219 of the back movable decoration body 3210. As it is formed, one vertex of the triangle faces downward. In this state, since the back upper movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the back lower movable decorative body 3110, a detection piece (not shown) corresponding to the detection piece 3115b of the rear base 3115 of the back lower movable decorative body 3110 While being detected by the rotation detection sensor 3220, it becomes the original position (standby position) with the rear decoration part 3216 and the middle decoration part 3218 of the back movable decoration body 3210. Further, in a normal state, the back up / down moving mechanism 3250 causes the back up moving arm 3230 to be positioned at the upper moving end. In this normal state, the pointed apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the back movable ornament 3210 is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, and the back movable ornament 3210. Is in a state of a standby position located above the effect display device 1600. In this state, the back top moving arm 3230 and the back top lifting mechanism 3250 are located behind the back left top decorative body 3370 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right upper decorative body 3470 of the back right effect unit 3400, which will be described later. It cannot be seen from the front (see FIG. 135, etc.).

  In the normal state, when the back upper moving arm 3230 is moved to the lower moving end via the back lifting arm by the back lifting drive motor 3251, the lower vertex of the back movable decorative body 3210 is a game in front view. It will be in the state of the 1st union position located near the center of the area | region 5a (refer FIG. 170).

  The back top production unit 3200 is moved by the back top lifting mechanism 3250 via the back top moving arm 3230, with the back top movable decorative body 3210 moved to the uppermost standby position (original position) and the first moved to the lowermost position. It can be moved up and down freely between the united positions. In this embodiment, the 2nd union position which moved the distance of 1/7 of the whole movement distance from a stand-by position to the 1st union position from the 1st union position to the stand-by position side is set up.

  When the back top rendering unit 3200 drives the back top rotation drive motor 3212 in a state where the back top movable decorative body 3210 is moved to the first combined position or the second combined position, the front decoration unit 3219 is stopped. In this state, the rear decoration 3216 and the middle decoration 3218 rotate in opposite directions. In this embodiment, each gear ratio is set so that when the rear decoration 3216 rotates once, the middle decoration 3218 rotates twice.

  Further, in the back effect unit 3200, the back movable decorative body 3210 can be light-decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the back back decorative substrate and the back front decorative substrate to emit light. Even when the decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 are rotating, the light emitting decoration can be performed.

  Further, in the back effect unit 3200, the plurality of LEDs provided in the back movement arm 3230 can emit light, so that the back movement arm 3230 can be illuminated, and the plurality of the back movement arm 3230 can be illuminated. By causing the LEDs to emit light sequentially toward the backside movable decorative body 3210, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light flows to the backside movable decorative body 3210. In addition, by causing the plurality of LEDs of the back upper movement arm 3230 to emit light in order so as to move away from the back movable decoration body 3210, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light flows from the back movable decoration body 3210.

[5-9-3. Back left production unit]
Next, the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159, 163, 164, and the like. FIG. 163 is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the back left movable decorative body and the like, and FIG. 164 is a front view showing the movement of the back left movable decorative body of the back left effect unit in the back unit. Note that in FIG. 163, some members are represented as wire frames so that the internal structure can be easily understood, and reference numerals related to the internal structures of a plurality of other movable decorations excluding the back left movable decoration body are shown in parentheses. .

  The back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

  The back left effect unit 3300 extends in the up-down direction across the back left and right movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower and right movable decorative body 3320 having a triangular pyramid shape with the tip directed to the right, and the effect display device 1600. The decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are movably attached, and the back left moving arm 3330 and the back left moving arm 3330 are supported by moving the back left and right moving arms 3330 left and right. And a back left traversing mechanism 3350 for moving in the direction. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are formed in equilateral triangles as viewed from the front. Further, the back-upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back-bottom left movable decorative body 3320 having a triangular pyramid shape are tilted so that the ends thereof are positioned forward with respect to the left-right direction.

  The back left effect unit 3300 also extends in the left-right direction on the lower side of the back decorative plate and a flat back left back decorative plate 3360 extending in the left-right direction in front of the upper end of the back left moving arm 3330. A back upper left decorative body 3370 in which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed, and a lower left bottom in which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed extending in the left-right direction in front of the lower left moving arm 3330. And a decorative body 3380.

  The back upper left movable decoration body 3310 is attached to a trapezoidal base stage decoration part 3311 whose front view is narrowed to the right, and to the right side surface of the base stage decoration part 3311 so that the tip is directed to the right. A triangular pyramid-shaped front decoration part 3312, a back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 (see FIG. 186) attached to the inside of the base decoration part 3311 and rotating the front decoration part 3312, A back upper left base decoration board that is attached to the interior of the decoration portion 3311 and is used to decorate the base stage decoration portion 3311 with light emission, and is attached to the right side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3311 and the front stage decoration portion 3312 is light emitting decoration. And an upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a for the purpose. The base stage decoration part 3311 and the front stage decoration part 3312 are formed to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration part 3311 to which the back upper base decoration board is attached are mounted on the upper left base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the left surface side of the front-stage decoration portion 3312 are mounted on the back upper left front-stage decoration board 3311a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 is caused by rotation of the main gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 and the front decoration portion 3312. The front decoration portion 3312 is rotated through a back upper left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a slave gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the shaft. A magnet 3312a having a small columnar shape is disposed and fixed on the left side surface of the front decoration portion 3312 facing the right side surface of the base decoration portion 3311 in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312. Specifically, the magnet 3312a is in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3312 and is arranged on the left side surface of the front decoration part 3312 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3312. The left side surface is accommodated in the inner space of the front stage decoration portion 3312 so that the left side surface does not protrude from the left side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3312 toward the right side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3312a is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3312. This is because the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3312 is resonated by the rotation of the front decoration part 3312 by the back upper left rotation drive motor 3313. It is a position that does not generate.

  Since the magnet 3312a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front decoration portion 3312, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 is transmitted through the back left upper rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the first stage decoration unit 3312 starts to rotate by being transmitted to the rotation axis of the stage decoration unit 3312, the locus becomes a circular orbit.

  Therefore, the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a has a hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (opposite the magnetized surface of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape), and A back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab configured with a peripheral circuit and capable of detecting a magnetic pole change is mounted. This back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a circuit used for setting the original position by specifying the rotational position of the front decoration part 3312 by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3312a fixed to the front decoration part 3312. A detailed description thereof will be described later. The original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the front decoration unit 3312 is, for example, the position shown in FIGS. 145, 159, and 164 (a), and the base decoration unit 3311 and the front stage decoration unit 3312. A state in which the vertices of the respective triangles of the decorative portion 3312 coincide to form one triangular pyramid can be mentioned.

  Although the detailed illustration of the base stage decoration portion 3311 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 is omitted, on the rear surface, a first mounting boss protruding in a columnar shape from the center near the bottom (left side) and a first mounting A second mounting boss projecting in a columnar shape from a portion on the right side of the boss to the rear, and a third mounting boss projecting in a columnar shape from a portion above the first mounting boss to the rear. . The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The lower left movable ornament 3320 has a trapezoidal base stage decorative portion 3321 whose shape in front view narrows to the right, and is rotatably attached to the right side surface of the base stage decorative portion 3321, with the tip directed to the right. A triangular pyramid-shaped front stage decoration portion 3322, a back left lower rotation drive motor 3323 (see FIG. 186) attached to the inside of the base stage decoration section 3321 and rotating the front stage decoration portion 3322, a base stage A back lower left base decoration board for lighting and decorating the base decoration 3332 attached to the interior of the decoration section 3321 and a light emitting decoration for the front decoration 3322 attached to the right side of the base decoration 3321. And a lower left front stage decorative substrate 3321a. The base decoration 3332 and the front decoration 3322 are formed so as to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration portion 3321 to which the back lower base decoration board is attached are mounted on the lower left base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa (eight full-color LEDs 3321aa (1) to 3321aa (8) in the present embodiment) that irradiate light toward the left surface side of the front-stage decoration portion 3322 are mounted on the lower left front-stage decoration board 3321a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back left lower rotation drive motor 3323 is caused by the rotation of the main gear (not shown) attached to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back left lower rotation drive motor 3323 and the front decoration portion 3322. The front decoration portion 3322 is rotated through a back left lower rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a slave gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the shaft. On the left side surface of the front stage decoration part 3322 facing the right side surface of the base stage decoration part 3321, a magnet 3322 a having a small cylindrical shape is disposed and fixed near the rotation axis of the front stage decoration part 3322. Specifically, the magnet 3322a is in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3322, and is arranged on the left side surface of the front decoration part 3322 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3322. The left side surface is accommodated in the inner space of the front stage decoration portion 3322 so that the left side surface does not protrude from the left side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3322 toward the right side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3322a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3322. This is because the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3322 is caused to resonate due to the rotation of the front decoration part 3322 by the back left lower rotation drive motor 3323. It is a position that does not generate.

  Since the magnet 3322a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front decoration portion 3322, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back lower left rotation drive motor 3323 is advanced through the back left lower rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the first decoration part 3322 is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration part 3322 and starts to rotate, the locus becomes a circular orbit.

  Therefore, the lower left lower front decorative substrate 3321a has a Hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on this circular orbit (opposite the magnetized surface of the magnet 3322a having a small cylindrical shape), and A back left bottom magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab configured with peripheral circuits and capable of detecting a magnetic pole change is mounted. The back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab is a circuit used for detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3322a fixed to the front decoration part 3322 to identify the rotational position of the front decoration part 3322 and to set the original position. A detailed description thereof will be described later. The original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the front decoration unit 3322 is, for example, the positions shown in FIGS. 145, 159, and 164 (a), and the base decoration unit 3321 and the front stage decoration unit 3322. A state in which the vertices of the respective triangles of the decorative portion 3322 are coincident to form one triangular pyramid can be mentioned.

  Although the detailed illustration of the base decoration 3332 of the lower left movable ornament 3320 is omitted, a first mounting boss projecting in a columnar shape from the center near the bottom (left side) on the rear surface and the first mounting. A second mounting boss projecting in a cylindrical shape rearward from a portion on the right side of the boss, and a third mounting boss projecting in a cylindrical shape rearward from a portion lower than the first mounting boss. . The back left lower movable decorative body 3320 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back left moving arm 3330 extends in the up and down direction, and is attached to the moving arm base 3331 to which the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are movably mounted, and to the vertical center of the moving arm base 3331. A rear left upper movable decorative body 3310 and a rear lower left movable decorative body 3320 for moving the rear left lower movable decorative body 3320 are provided.

  Although the back left moving arm 3330 is not shown in detail, a spur gear-like pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the back left moving drive motor 3332 and a vertical direction above the center of the moving arm base 3331 in the vertical direction. And an upper slider having an upper rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear and a movable arm base 3331 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction below the center in the vertical direction. A lower slider having a lower rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear from the side opposite to the upper rack gear.

  The movable arm base 3331 has an upper first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base stage decoration portion 3311 in the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 is slidably inserted, and the second mounting boss of the base stage decoration portion 3311 slides. An upper second slit that can be inserted, and an upper third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decoration part 3311 can be slidably inserted. The upper first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The upper second slit extends downward in a circular arc shape with a rotation angle of 30 degrees downward from the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward linearly. The upper third slit extends downward in a circular arc shape with a rotation angle of 30 degrees downward from the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward linearly.

  Further, the movable arm base 3331 has a lower first slit into which the first mounting boss of the base stage decoration portion 3321 in the back left lower movable decoration body 3320 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base stage decoration portion 3321. The lower second slit is slidably inserted, and the lower third slit is slidably inserted into the third mounting boss of the base decoration portion 3321. The lower first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends upward in a circular arc shape with a rotation angle of 30 degrees upward about the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends linearly upward. The lower third slit extends upward in a circular arc shape with a rotation angle of 30 degrees upward about the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends linearly upward. The lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit with respect to a horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back left movement drive motor 3332. And line symmetrical.

  The upper slider is attached with the second mounting boss of the base decoration part 3311 in the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 in the vicinity of the upper end. In the lower slider, the second mounting boss of the base stage decorative portion 3321 in the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 is attached near the lower end.

  Further, one of the movable arm bases 3331, which is disposed in the vicinity of the back left traversing drive motor 3351 provided in the back left traversing mechanism 3350, which will be described later, is slidable by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. It is attached to a metal back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns (see FIG. 264 (b)), and the other one not disposed in the vicinity of the back left traversing drive motor 3351 is along a metal cylindrical rod (not shown). Sliding movement for the back left moving arm (not shown) which may be slid (moves while sliding the surface of the metal cylindrical rod along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical rod) , Which may be molded from a non-conductive resin). In addition, you may comprise so that the both ends of the up-down direction of the movement arm base 3331 may be attached to the metal back left movement arm slide rails 3351ns and 3351ns, respectively.

  The back left traversing mechanism 3350 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although not shown in detail, the back left traversing mechanism 3350 includes a back left traverse drive motor 3351 and a rod-shaped back left traverse arm that rotates around one end side by driving the back left traverse drive motor 3351. ing. The tip of the back left traversing arm is connected to the back left traversing arm 3330. By rotating the back left traversing arm by the back left traversing drive motor 3351, the back left traversing arm 3330 is moved via the back left traversing arm. Can be rampant.

  The back left back decorative plate 3360 has a hologram sticker attached to the front. The back left upper decorative body 3370 has a lower side attached to substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The lower left decorative body 3380 is attached so that the upper side is substantially the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back left back decorative plate 3360, the back left top decorative body 3370, and the back left bottom decorative body 3380 have their front ends attached at substantially the same position as the front end of the back box 3010, and are arranged at the rear. The back lower moving arm 3130 of 3100, the back upper moving arm 3230 of the back upper production unit 3200, etc. can be hidden from the front in an invisible state.

  Further, the back left back decorative plate 3360 is located on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and cooperates with the back right back decorative plate 3460 described later, The decorative pattern 1150 formed on the plate 1110 is easily visible from the player side (front).

  Next, the operation of the back left effect unit 3300 will be described. First, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 will be described. In a normal state, the front stage decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the front stage decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 are in front of the base stage decoration part 3311 and the base stage decoration part 3321 in the front view. It is in the state of the rotational position that forms a triangle. In this state, when the back upper left rotation driving motor 3313 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the back lower left rotation driving motor 3323 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 are driven, respectively, the respective front decoration portions 3312 and the front decoration portions. 3322 can be rotated (see FIG. 166).

  Next, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 with respect to the back left moving arm 3330 will be described. In the initial state, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 has a first mounting boss, a second mounting boss, and a third mounting boss, which are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3331. Located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are horizontally arranged, the base (left side) of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 extends vertically, and the tip faces rightward. It faces (see FIG. 164 (a)). When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left movement drive motor 3332 from the initial state and the upper slider is moved downward via the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back left top movable decorative body 3310 is obtained. Since the second mounting boss is attached to the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 rotates in the clockwise direction around the first mounting boss. Will be.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are located on the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3331 and extend in the respective arc shapes. To slide. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arc-shaped portion of the upper second slit by the upper slider moving downward, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is rotated in the clockwise direction around the first mounting boss. , And the tip is directed to the lower right (second state) (see FIG. 164 (b)). In this state, the lower side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 extends horizontally.

  When the upper slider moves further downward by driving the back left movement driving motor 3332 in a state where the back left upper movable decoration body 3310 is rotated 30 degrees in the clockwise direction by the downward movement of the upper slider, the back left upper movable decoration is performed. The body 3310 will move downward in a rotated posture. At this time, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3331. The inside slides to the lower end of each, and the downward movement stops. In this state, the lower side of the upper left movable decorative body 3310 is in a state (first state) approaching the vertical center of the movable arm base 3331 (see FIG. 164 (c)).

  From this state, when the back left movement drive motor 3332 is driven in the reverse direction and the upper slider is moved upward via the pinion gear, the back left top movable decorative body 3310 in the first state moves opposite to the above-described movement. To return to the initial state.

  On the other hand, in the lower left movable decorative body 3320, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331. Located at the lower end of each slit. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the lower left movable decorative body 3320 are horizontally arranged, the base (left side) of the lower left movable decorative body 3320 extends vertically, and the tip faces rightward. It faces (see FIG. 164 (a)). When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left movement drive motor 3332 from the initial state and the lower slider is moved upward via the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back left bottom movable decorative body 3320 Since the second mounting boss is attached to the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. Will move.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320 are located above the portions extending in the respective arc shapes in the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the movable arm base 3331. To slide. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arc-shaped portion in the lower second slit by the lower slider moving upward, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. It will be in the state rotated 30 degree | times to the direction, and will be in the state (2nd state) which the front-end | tip turned to the upper right (refer FIG. 164 (b)). In this state, the upper side of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 extends horizontally.

  If the lower left movable decorative body 3320 is rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise by the upward movement of the lower slider, and the lower slider is further moved upward by driving the rear left movement drive motor 3332, the lower left movable is movable. The decorative body 3320 moves upward in a posture in which it is rotated. At this time, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320 are moved to the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331. Each interior slides to its upper end, and the upward movement stops. In this state, the upper side of the lower left movable ornament 3320 is in a state (first state) approaching the center of the movable arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 164 (c)).

  From this state, when the back left movement drive motor 3332 is driven in the reverse direction and the lower slider is moved downward via the pinion gear, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the first state moves opposite to the above-described movement. To return to the initial state.

  Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider are respectively meshed with the pinion gear with the pinion gear rotated by the back left movement drive motor 3332 in between, the pinion gear is driven by the back left movement drive motor 3332. When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in different directions above and below. Thereby, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 by the back left moving drive motor 3332 is performed simultaneously. Therefore, when the back left movement drive motor 3332 is driven from the initial state, the top left movable decoration body 3310 and the bottom left movable decoration body 3320 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and the front end faces rightward, the front ends thereof approach each other. In the second direction after rotating in the direction to move, the movement toward the first state by moving in the direction in which the whole approaches each other.

  Next, the movement of the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left effect unit 3300 will be described. In the initial state of the back left moving arm 3330, the part to which the back top left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left bottom movable decorative body 3320 are attached is located at the left moving end. In this state, the back left moving arm 3330 is located on the left side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view. In this state, when the back left traverse arm is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by the back left traverse drive motor 3351 of the back left traverse mechanism 3350, the back left traverse arm 3330 is moved to the right by the back left traverse arm. It can be moved to the moving end. In the state where the back left moving arm 3330 is located at the right moving end (first state), the part to which the back left upper decorative ornament 3310 and the back lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached is the left and right of the effect display device 1600. It is located at a distance of about 1/3 from the left end side to the right with respect to the width of the direction (see FIG. 170).

  As shown in FIG. 164, the back left moving arm 3330 is formed in a shape whose upper end extends to the right, and in the first state where the right end is located at the right moving end, the lower back effect unit 3100 is provided. And the back lower movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper rendering unit 3200 are located in the center in the left-right direction.

  The back left moving arm 3330 can be moved by the back left traversing mechanism 3350 between the position in the initial state which is the left moving end and the position in the first state which is the right moving end. In the present embodiment, the position of the second state is moved by a distance of about 2/3 from the position of the initial state to the right with respect to the total movement distance between the position of the initial state and the position of the first state. Is set (see FIG. 169).

  In the normal state, the back left effect unit 3300 has a back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and a back lower left movable decorative body 3320 in an initial state, which are lined up at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The base sides of the base stage decoration part 3311 and the base stage decoration part 3321 are in a vertically extending state, and the respective tips are directed to the right. In the normal state, the back left traversing mechanism 3350 causes the back left moving arm 3330 to be positioned at the left moving end, which is the initial state.

  In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower lower movable decorative body 3320 in the initial state are located near the left end in the back box 3010. The stage decoration unit 3321 is located near the left end of the effect display device 1600, and the previous stage decoration unit 3312 and the front stage decoration unit 3322 are located in front of the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are in the standby positions with the initial state (FIG. 135, etc.). See).

  As shown in FIG. 164, the back left moving arm 3330 is formed in a shape whose upper end extends to the right. Therefore, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved from the position of the second state to the right moving end (first When it is moved to a position in one state, it comes into contact with the back movable decorative body 3210 at the standby position. Therefore, when the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right moving end (second state), the back top movable decorative body 3210 needs to be moved downward from the standby position. Further, when the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right moving end in a state where the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are directed rightward (initial state), the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 is moved. The tip of the abutment comes into contact with the back movable decorative body 3210 moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the front end faces the lower right.

  In addition, when the back left moving arm 3330 is in the initial position, the bases of the back top movable decorative body 3310 and the back left movable decorative body 3320 are located near the left end in the back box 3010. When the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are rotated so as to be in the second state by the drive motor 3332, the respective base sides are brought into contact with the left side surface in the back box 3010. Touch. Accordingly, when the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are rotated from the initial state to the second state side by the back left moving drive motor 3332, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved from the initial state position to the right. It is necessary to move to the direction.

  In the back left rendering unit 3300, the back left upper base decorative board and the back left top decorative board of the back upper movable ornament 3310, and the back left base decorative board and the back lower front decorative board of the back left movable decorative body 3320 are used. The back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 can be light-decorated by appropriately emitting light from each mounted LED.

  In the present embodiment, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left movable arm 3330 are respectively located in the initial state, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are provided. Is the standby position. The positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the back left movable arm 3330 are positioned in the first state, respectively. Is the first coalescence position. Furthermore, the position of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left movable arm 3330 are positioned in the second state, respectively. Is the second merged position.

[5-9-4. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 and 163. The back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

  The back-right effect unit 3400 extends in the vertical direction across the triangle-pyramidal back-upper right movable ornament body 3410 and the back-right lower movable ornament body 3420 with the tip directed leftward, and the effect display device 1600. The movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are movably attached, and the back right moving arm 3430 and the back right moving arm 3430 are supported so that both ends in the vertical direction can be moved in the horizontal direction. And a right / left traversing mechanism 3450 for moving the right and left directions (see FIG. 167). The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are formed in a regular triangle shape in front view. Further, the back right upper movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 having a triangular pyramid shape are tilted so that the tips thereof are positioned forward with respect to the left-right direction.

  The back right effect unit 3400 also extends in the left-right direction on the lower side of the back decorative plate and the flat back right back decorative plate 3460 extending in the left-right direction in front of the upper end of the back right moving arm 3430. A back upper right decorative body 3470 in which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed, and a back right in which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed extending in the left-right direction in front of the lower end of the back right moving arm 3430. A lower decorative body 3480.

  The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is a trapezoidal base stage decorative part 3411 whose shape in front view narrows to the left, and is rotatably attached to the right side surface of the base stage decorative part 3411. A triangular pyramid-shaped front decoration part 3412, a back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 (see FIG. 187) attached to the inside of the base decoration part 3411 for rotating the front decoration part 3412, a base stage A back upper right base decoration board for decorating the base stage decoration part 3411 with light emission and attached to the interior of the decoration part 3411 and a left side surface of the base stage decoration part 3411 for light emission decoration of the front stage decoration part 3412 And a back upper right front decoration board 3411a for causing the above. The base decoration part 3411 and the front decoration part 3412 are formed to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration part 3411 to which the back upper right base decoration board is attached are mounted on the back upper right base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa (in the present embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3411aa (1) to 3411aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the right surface side of the front-stage decoration portion 3412 are mounted on the back upper right front-stage decoration board 3411a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 is caused by the rotation of the main gear (not shown) attached to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 and the front decoration portion 3412. The front decoration part 3412 is rotated via a back upper right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a not shown gear that is fixed to the shaft. A magnet 3412a having a small cylindrical shape is disposed and fixed on the right side surface of the front stage decoration part 3412 facing the left side surface of the base stage decoration part 3411 in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration part 3412. Specifically, the magnet 3412a is in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3412 and is arranged on the right side surface of the front decoration part 3412 so that the axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3412. The right side surface of the front stage decoration part 3412 is accommodated in the inner space of the front stage decoration part 3412 so that it does not protrude from the right side surface of the front stage decoration part 3412 toward the left side surface of the base stage decoration part 3411. Is fixed. The magnet 3412a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3412. This is because the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3412 is resonated by the rotation of the front decoration part 3412 by the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413. It is a position that does not generate.

  Since the magnet 3412a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front decoration unit 3412, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 is transmitted through the back upper right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the first stage decoration unit 3412 starts to rotate by being transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration unit 3412, the locus becomes a circular orbit.

  Therefore, the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a has a hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (opposite the magnetized surface of the magnet 3412a having a small cylindrical shape), and A back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab configured with a peripheral circuit and capable of detecting a magnetic pole change is mounted. This back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab is a circuit used for detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3412a fixed to the front decoration part 3412 to identify the rotational position of the front decoration part 3412 and to set the original position. A detailed description thereof will be described later. The original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the front stage decoration unit 3312 is, for example, the position shown in FIGS. 145 and 159, and the base stage decoration unit 3411 and the front stage decoration unit 3412. A state in which the vertices of the triangles coincide to form one triangular pyramid can be mentioned.

  Although the detailed illustration of the base decoration part 3411 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 is omitted, a first mounting boss projecting in a columnar shape from the center near the bottom (right side) on the rear surface, and a first mounting A second mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the left side of the boss to the rear, and a third mounting boss that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the portion above the first mounting boss to the rear. . The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is movably attached to the back right moving arm 3430 through the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back lower right movable ornament 3420 has a trapezoidal base stage decorative portion 3421 whose front view is narrowed to the left, and is rotatably attached to the left side surface of the base step decorative portion 3421. A triangular pyramid-shaped front decoration part 3422 directed to the back, and a lower right rotation drive motor 3423 (see FIG. 187) attached to the inside of the base decoration part 3421 for rotating the front decoration part 3422; A back lower right base decoration board for light emitting decoration of the base stage decoration part 3421 attached to the inside of the base stage decoration part 3421 and a front stage decoration part 3422 attached to the left side surface of the base stage decoration part 3421. And a lower right lower front decoration substrate 3421a for decorating the light emission. The base stage decoration part 3421 and the front stage decoration part 3422 are formed to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base stage decoration portion 3421 to which the rear lower base decoration board is attached are mounted on the back lower right base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3421aa (1) to 3421aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the right side of the front-stage decoration portion 3422 are mounted on the back lower-right front-stage decoration board 3421a. Has been.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back lower right rotation drive motor 3423 includes a main gear (not shown) that is attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back lower right rotation drive motor 3423, and a front decoration 3342. The front decoration portion 3422 is rotated through a back lower-rotation rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a non-illustrated slave gear that is fixed to the rotation shaft. A magnet 3422a having a small cylindrical shape is disposed and fixed on the right side surface of the front stage decoration part 3422 opposite to the left side surface of the base stage decoration part 3421 in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration part 3422. Specifically, the magnet 3422a is in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3422, and is arranged on the right side surface of the front decoration part 3422 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3422. The right side surface is accommodated in the inner space of the front stage decoration portion 3422 so that the right side surface does not protrude from the right side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3422 toward the left side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3421. Is fixed. The magnet 3422a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3422. This is because the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3422 is resonated by the rotation of the front decoration part 3422 by the back lower right rotation drive motor 3423. It is in a position where no phenomenon occurs.

  Since the magnet 3422a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front decoration portion 3422, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back lower right rotation drive motor 3423 is performed via the above-described back right lower rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the first stage decoration unit 3422 is transmitted to the rotation axis of the first stage decoration unit 3422 and starts rotating, the locus becomes a circular orbit.

  Therefore, the lower right front stage decorative substrate 3421a has a Hall element, at a position corresponding to one position on this circular orbit (opposite the magnetized surface of the magnet 3422a having a small cylindrical shape), And a back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab configured with peripheral circuits and capable of detecting magnetic pole changes. This back lower right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab is used for detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3422a fixed to the front decoration part 3422 to identify the rotational position of the front decoration part 3422 and to set the original position. The circuit will be described in detail later. Note that the original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the front decoration unit 3422 is, for example, the position shown in FIGS. 145 and 159, and the base decoration unit 3421 and the front decoration unit 3422. A state in which the vertices of the triangles coincide to form one triangular pyramid can be mentioned.

  Although the detailed illustration of the base stage decorative portion 3421 of the lower right movable ornament 3420 is omitted, a first mounting boss projecting in a columnar shape from the center near the bottom (right side) on the rear surface, and a first A second mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from the left side of the mounting boss and a third mounting boss that protrudes in a columnar shape from a portion lower than the first mounting boss; and Yes. The back right lower movable decorative body 3420 is movably attached to the back right moving arm 3430 through the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back right moving arm 3430 extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the moving arm base 3431 to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are movably mounted, and the vertical center of the moving arm base 3431. And a back right movement drive motor 3432 for moving the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back right lower movement decoration body 3420.

  Further, although the back right moving arm 3430 is not shown in detail, a spur gear-like pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the back right moving drive motor 3432 and a vertical direction above the center of the moving arm base 3431 in the vertical direction. The upper slider having an upper rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear and the movable arm base 3431 is slidably attached in the vertical direction below the center in the vertical direction. A lower slider having a lower rack gear that meshes with the pinion gear from the side opposite to the upper rack gear.

  The movable arm base 3431 has an upper first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base stage decoration part 3411 in the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 is slidably inserted, and the second mounting boss of the base stage decoration part 3411 slides. An upper second slit that can be inserted and an upper third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decoration part 3411 can be slidably inserted are provided. The upper first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The upper second slit extends downward in a circular arc shape with a rotation angle of 30 degrees downward from the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward linearly. The upper third slit extends downward in a circular arc shape with a rotation angle of 30 degrees downward from the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then extends downward linearly.

  Further, the movable arm base 3431 includes a lower first slit into which the first mounting boss of the base stage decoration portion 3421 of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base stage decoration portion 3421. And a lower third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decoration 3342 is slidably inserted. The lower first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends upward in a circular arc shape with a rotation angle of 30 degrees upward about the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends linearly upward. The lower third slit extends upward in a circular arc shape with a rotation angle of 30 degrees upward about the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then extends linearly upward. The lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit with respect to a horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back right movement drive motor 3432. And line symmetrical.

  The upper slider is attached with the second mounting boss of the base decoration part 3411 in the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 near the upper end. The lower slider is attached with the second mounting boss of the base stage decoration portion 3421 of the lower right movable ornament 3420 near the lower end.

  In addition, one of the movable arm bases 3431 disposed in the vicinity of the back right traversing drive motor 3451 provided in the back right traversing mechanism 3450 described later is slidable by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. It is attached to a metal back right moving arm slide rail 3451ns (see FIG. 264 (b)), and the other one not disposed in the vicinity of the back right traversing drive motor 3451 is along a metal cylindrical rod (not shown). Sliding movement for the back right moving arm (not shown) which may be slid (moves while sliding the surface of the metal cylindrical rod along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical rod) , Which may be molded from a non-conductive resin). In addition, you may comprise so that the up-down direction both ends of the movement arm base 3431 may be attached to the metal back right movement arm slide rails 3451ns and 3451ns, respectively.

  The back right traversing mechanism 3450 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although not shown in detail, the back right traversing mechanism 3450 includes a back right traverse drive motor 3451 and a rod-shaped back right traverse arm that rotates around one end side by driving the back right traverse drive motor 3451. ing. The tip of the back right traverse arm is connected to the back right traverse arm 3430, and the back right traverse arm is rotated by the back right traverse drive motor 3451 so that the back right traverse arm 3430 is moved through the back right traverse arm. Can be rampant.

  The back right back decorative plate 3460 has a hologram sticker attached to the front. The back upper right decorative body 3470 has a lower side attached to substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The back lower right decorative body 3480 has an upper side attached to substantially the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back right back decorative plate 3460, the back right upper decorative body 3470, and the back right lower decorative body 3480 are attached at the same positions as the front ends of the back box 3010, and the back bottom effect is arranged rearward. The lower back moving arm 3130 of the unit 3100, the back upper moving arm 3230 of the back effect unit 3200, etc. can be hidden from the front in an invisible state.

  In addition, the back right back decorative plate 3460 is positioned on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and cooperates with the back left back decorative plate 3360 to cooperate with the panel plate 1110. The decorative pattern 1150 formed on the player can be easily seen from the player side (front).

  Next, the operation of the back right effect unit 3400 will be described. First, the movement of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 will be described. In a normal state, the front stage decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the front stage decoration part 3422 of the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 are respectively in front view with the base stage decoration part 3411 and the base stage decoration part 3421. It is the state of the rotational position which forms an equilateral triangle. In this state, when the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back lower right rotation drive motor 3423 of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 are driven, respectively, the respective front decoration portions 3412 and the front stage are driven. The decoration portion 3422 can be rotated (see FIG. 166).

  Next, the movement of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 with respect to the back right moving arm 3430 will be described. In the initial state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 has a first mounting boss, a second mounting boss, and a third mounting boss, which are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431. Located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are arranged horizontally, the base (right side) of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 extends vertically, and the tip is on the left side. It is suitable. When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back right movement drive motor 3432 from the initial state and the upper slider is moved downward via the upper rack gear engaged with the pinion gear, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is obtained. Since the second mounting boss is attached to the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. Will move.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are located in the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431 extending downward in the respective arc shapes. To slide. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arc-shaped portion in the upper second slit by the upper slider moving downward, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. The state is rotated by 30 degrees in the direction, and the tip is directed to the lower left (second state) (see FIG. 168). In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 extends horizontally.

  If the upper slider moves further downward by driving the back right movement drive motor 3432 in a state where the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise by the downward movement of the upper slider, the back upper right movable is possible. The decorative body 3410 moves downward in a rotated posture. At this time, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431. The inside slides to the lower end of each, and the downward movement stops. In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is in a state (first state) approaching the center of the movable arm base 3431 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 170).

  From this state, when the back right movement drive motor 3432 is driven in the reverse direction and the upper slider is moved upward via the pinion gear, the back right upper movable decorative body 3410 in the first state moves opposite to the above-described movement. To return to the initial state.

  On the other hand, in the lower right movable ornament 3420, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower second slit of the moving arm base 3431. Located at the lower end of each of the three slits. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are arranged horizontally, the base (right side) of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 extends vertically, and the tip is left. Facing. When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back right movement drive motor 3432 from the initial state and the lower slider is moved upward via the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back right bottom movable decorative body Since the second mounting boss 3420 is attached to the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 is rotated clockwise about the first mounting boss. It will turn.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the lower right movable ornament 3420 are portions extending in respective arc shapes in the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the movable arm base 3431. Slide upward. When the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arc-shaped portion of the lower second slit by the lower slider moving upward, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is rotated clockwise around the first mounting boss. It will be in the state rotated 30 degree | times to the direction, and will be in the state (2nd state) which the front-end | tip turned to the upper left (refer FIG. 168). In this state, the upper side of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is in a state of extending horizontally.

  When the lower right movable decorative body 3420 is rotated 30 degrees in the clockwise direction by the upward movement of the lower slider, when the lower slider is further moved upward by driving the rear right movement drive motor 3432, the lower right lower back The movable decorative body 3420 moves upward in a posture in which it is rotated. At this time, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3431. Are slid to their respective upper ends, and the upward movement stops. In this state, the upper side of the back lower right movable ornament 3420 is in a state (first state) approaching the center of the movable arm base 3431 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 170).

  From this state, when the back right movement drive motor 3432 is driven in the reverse direction and the lower slider is moved downward via the pinion gear, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 in the first state is opposite to the above-described movement. Move and return to the initial state.

  Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider are respectively meshed with the pinion gear with the pinion gear rotated by the back right movement drive motor 3432 interposed therebetween, the pinion gear is driven by the back right movement drive motor 3432. When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in different directions above and below. Thereby, the movement of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 by the back right movement drive motor 3432 is performed simultaneously. Accordingly, when the back-right movement drive motor 3432 is driven from the initial state, the back-upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back-right lower movable decoration body 3420 that are separated from each other up and down and the front ends are directed to the left, After rotating in the approaching direction and entering the second state, the whole moves in the approaching direction and moves to the first state.

  Next, the movement of the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effect unit 3400 will be described. In the initial state, the back-right moving arm 3430 has a portion to which the back-upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back-right lower movable decorative body 3420 are attached located at the moving end to the right. In this state, the back right moving arm 3430 is located on the right side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view. In this state, when the back right traverse arm is rotated clockwise in the front view by the back right traverse drive motor 3451 of the back right traversing mechanism 3450, the back right traverse arm is moved leftward by the back right traverse arm. It can be moved to the end. In the state where the back right moving arm 3430 is located at the left moving end (first state), the part to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are attached is the effect display device 1600. It is located at a distance of about 1/3 from the right end side to the left with respect to the width in the left-right direction (see FIG. 170).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back right moving arm 3430 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends to the left, and in the first state where the left end is located at the left moving end, the lower back effect unit 3100 and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper rendering unit 3200 are located in the center in the left-right direction.

  The back-right moving arm 3430 can be moved by the back-right traversing mechanism 3450 between the initial state position that is the right moving end and the first state position that is the left moving end. In the present embodiment, the position of the second state is moved by a distance of about 2/3 to the left from the position of the initial state with respect to the entire moving distance between the position of the initial state and the position of the first state. Is set (see FIG. 169).

  In the normal state, the back-right effect unit 3400 has a back-upper right movable decorative body 3410 and a back-right lower movable decorative body 3420 in an initial state, arranged in a vertical direction with a predetermined interval, The bases of the base stage decoration part 3411 and the base stage decoration part 3421 are in a state of extending vertically, and the respective tips are directed leftward. Further, in the normal state, the back-right traversing mechanism 3450 causes the back-right moving arm 3430 to be positioned at the right-side moving end in the initial state.

  In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, which are the initial state, are located near the right end in the back box 3010. The base stage decoration unit 3421 is located near the right end of the effect display device 1600, and the previous stage decoration unit 3412 and the front stage decoration unit 3422 are located in front of the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right movable arm 3430 are in the standby positions with the initial state (FIG. 135). Etc.).

  Since the back right moving arm 3430 is formed in a shape whose upper end extends leftward, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved from the second state position to the left moving end (first state position). If it does, it will contact | abut to the back top movable decoration body 3210 of a standby position. Therefore, when the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left moving end (second state), the back top movable decorative body 3210 needs to be moved downward from the standby position. Further, when the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left moving end in a state where the back right upper movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are directed leftward (initial state), the back upper right movable decorative body is obtained. The tip of 3410 abuts on the back movable decorative body 3210 moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the front end faces the lower left.

  In addition, when the back right moving arm 3430 is in the initial position, the bases of the back top right movable ornament 3410 and the back right bottom movable ornament 3420 are located near the right end in the back box 3010. When the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the initial state are rotated by the movement drive motor 3432 so as to be in the second state, the respective base sides are the right side surfaces in the back box 3010. Abut. Therefore, when the back right upper movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are rotated from the initial state to the second state side by the back right movement driving motor 3432, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved from the position in the initial state. It must be moved to the left.

  In the back right rendering unit 3400, the back upper right base decoration board and the back upper right front decoration board of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back right lower base decoration board and the back lower right front stage of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420. The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate to emit light.

  In the present embodiment, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the back right movable arm 3430 and the back right movable arm 3430 are positioned in the initial state, respectively. The position of the body 3420 is the standby position. Further, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the back right movable arm 3430 are positioned in the first state, respectively. Is the first merged position. Further, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the back right movable arm 3430 are positioned in the second state, respectively. Is the second merged position.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 165 to 171 and the like. FIG. 165 shows that the back lower movable decorative body of the back lower direction production unit is lifted from the standby position from the normal state, and the back lower movement arm is moved to the lower left movable unit of the back left production unit and the back right lower right movement unit. Move the back upper movable decorative body of the back upper production unit from the standby position and move the rear upper moving arm to the upper left movable decorative body of the rear left production unit and the rear right upper production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state made into the same height as a decoration. FIG. 166 shows that the back lower movable decorative body, the back upper movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are rotated in the state of FIG. 165. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which exists.

  FIG. 167 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back left moving arm of the back left effect unit and the back right moving arm of the back right effect unit are moved to the second state from the normal state. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are moved to the second state from the state of FIG. 167. FIG. FIG. 169 shows that the back left moving arm is moved to the right and the back right moving arm is moved to the left from the normal state, and the back top left movable decorative body, the back bottom right movable decorative body, and the back bottom left movable decorative body are It is a front view of the game board showing the state where the effect image is displayed on the effect display device after rotating the back upper right movable decorative body so as to face each other. FIG. 170 shows a second combined position of the lower back movable decorative body, the back upper movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back right lower movable decorative body from the normal state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state moved to. FIG. 171 shows the first combination of the back bottom movable decorative body, the back top movable decorative body, the back top left movable decorative body, the back left bottom movable decorative body, the back top right movable decorative body, and the back bottom right movable decorative body from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing the state moved to the position.

  The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side slope 2300, an attacker unit 2400, a center accessory 2500, and the like. Since it is formed almost transparently, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 is passed through them. In the back unit 3000, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110 of the back bottom rendering unit 3100, the back top movable decorative body 3210 of the back top rendering unit 3200, the back top left movable decorative body 3310 of the back left rendering unit 3300, and the back bottom bottom movable decorative body 3320. , Back left back decorative plate 3360, back left top decorative body 3370, back left bottom decorative body 3380, The back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, the back right back decorative board 3460, the back upper right decorative body 3470, the back right lower decorative body 3480, and the like of the right effect unit 3400 can be favorably visually recognized. .

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110 of the back bottom rendering unit 3100 is in the standby position, and the back left bottom decorative body 3380 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back It faces forward from between the back lower right decorative body 3480 of the right effect unit 3400. Further, in the normal state, the back upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper rendering unit 3200 is in the standby position, and the back left upper decorative body 3370 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back of the back right rendering unit 3400 are displayed. It faces forward from between the upper right decorative body 3470. In a normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300 are in the standby position, and are lined up and down with their tips facing right. It is out. Further, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400 are in the standby position, and are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction with the tip toward the left. Are lined up.

  In this normal state, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged symmetrically with respect to each other on both the upper and lower ends of the effect display device 1600 at a position leftward with respect to the horizontal center of the game area 5a. In addition, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are positioned higher than the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. Are arranged vertically and centered on the left and right ends of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed in a good state from the player side (front).

  The game board 5 provides the back-under effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The back bottom movable decorative body 3110 of the unit 3100, the back top movable decorative body 3210 of the back top rendering unit 3200, the back top left movable decorative body 3310 and the back bottom bottom movable decorative body 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300, and the back of the back right rendering unit 3400 The upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 perform a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, as a movable effect using the back lower effect unit 3100 and the back upper effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, the back lower moving arm 3130 is moved from the normal state by the back lower lift mechanism 3150. , The back lower left movable ornament 3320 and the back lower right movable ornament 3420 are moved to the same height as the tip (vertex) facing the center in the left-right direction, and the back upper moving mechanism 3250 moves the back upper moving arm 3230. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are moved to the same height as the tip (vertex) facing the center in the left-right direction. As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 are positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 while blocking the effect image of the effect display device 1600. The movement of the movable movable body 3210 on the back side can be noticed. Further, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back lower movable decorative body 3110 are moved by the back lower moving arm 3130, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back upper movable decorative body. The body 3210 can be shown to be connected to each other by the back upper movement arm 3230, and the player can be reminded of a sense of fun.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 166, the rear stage decoration unit 3110 and the middle stage decoration part 3118 are arranged by the back side rotation drive motor 3112, and the rear stage movable decoration body 3210 is arranged by the back side rotation drive motor 3212. The decoration part 3216 and the middle decoration part 3218 are connected to the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the front decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 by the back upper left rotation driving motor 3313 and the lower left lower rotation driving motor 3323. Are rotated by the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 and the back right lower rotation drive motor 3423, respectively, of the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the front decoration part 3422 of the back right lower movement decoration body 3420. Thereby, the inside of the game area 5a can be made a lively feeling, and a player can be entertained.

  At this time, if the plurality of LEDs arranged in the back lower moving arm 3130 and the back upper moving arm 3230 are turned on / flashing / turned off so as to flow toward the center in the left / right direction, the left / right back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are rotated by injecting energy into the back upper movable decorative body 3210 and the back lower movable decorative body 3110. The production can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when a plurality of LEDs arranged in the back lower moving arm 3130 and the back upper moving arm 3230 are turned on / flashing / turned off so as to flow outward in the left / right direction, the back upper movable decorative body 3210 and the lower back movable arm are movable. The energy is released from the decorative body 3110, and the left and right back left upper movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are rotated. You can show them. By such an effect, it is possible to make the player feel as if the expected value is increasing, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  Further, as a movable effect using the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved from the normal state to the second state by the back left traversing mechanism 3350. The back right traversing mechanism 3450 moves the back right moving arm 3430 to the position of the second state. Accordingly, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 move toward the center in the left-right direction while facing each other. Since the player is approaching and blocks the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600, the player is provided with the back upper left movable ornament 3310, the back lower left movable ornament 3320, and the back upper right movable ornament. The movement of the body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be noticed, and the movement can be enjoyed.

  Then, from the state of FIG. 167, as shown in FIG. 168, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are moved from the initial state to the second state and back right moved, as shown in FIG. The drive motor 3432 moves the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 from the initial state to the second state. Thus, the tip of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the tip of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in a state where the tip of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the tip of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 face each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and to increase the expectation for the game. At this time, the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the front decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320, the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration body 3420. The first-stage decoration unit 3422 may be rotated, or the effect display device 1600 may display an effect image that connects the tips of each.

  Further, as a movable effect using the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400, as shown in FIG. 169, from the normal state, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right and the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are rotated so as to face each other from the initial state. Thus, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image that connects the tips. As a result, an “X” -shaped effect image is displayed so as to connect the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 facing each other, and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen and to increase the expectation of the game. At this time, the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the front stage decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320, the front stage decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration body 3420. The first-stage decoration portion 3422 may be rotated.

  Furthermore, as a movable effect using the back bottom effect unit 3100, the back top effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. The movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the second combined position. . Thereby, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are fixed. Since they are arranged so as to be gathered on the circumference of the hexagon at intervals, an advantageous gaming state in which the player can be impacted and the player has an advantage (for example, “big hit game”) Can be thought of as occurring.

  When changing from the normal state to the second combined position as shown in FIG. 170, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 may be moved simultaneously to the second combined position. Or you may make it move to a 2nd union position in an appropriate order, and by moving to a 2nd union position in order, a player is decided by whether to move to the 2nd union position in each movement. In addition to being thrilled and excited, it is possible to perform a variety of movable effects, making it difficult for players to get bored.

  Then, from the state of FIG. 170, as shown in FIG. 171, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, And the lower right movable ornament 3420 is moved to the first combined position. As a result, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are densely arranged. Since it can gather together to form a large hexagonal decoration, it can have a strong impact on the player, and the first lottery result and the second special lottery result that have been drawn are “big hit” It can be convinced that there is, and can raise the interest in the game.

  In the state of the first combined position as shown in FIG. 171, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body. The body 3410 and the lower right movable ornament 3420 may be moved from the second combined position or the normal standby position to the first combined position. Alternatively, the player may be moved to the first coalescence position in an appropriate order, and by moving to the first coalescence position in order, the player can be moved depending on whether or not to move to the first coalescence position in each movement. In addition to being thrilled and excited, it is possible to perform a variety of movable effects, making it difficult for players to get bored.

  Subsequently, main light emission effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 172 to 176 and the like. FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first pattern is light-decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 173 is a timing diagram illustrating an effect example in which the decoration pattern of the game panel and the first pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit emit light. FIG. 174 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second pattern is light-decorated on the light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 175 is a timing diagram illustrating an effect example in which the decoration pattern of the game panel and the second pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit emit light. FIG. 176 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second design of the table effect unit of the embodiment different from FIGS. 172 and 174 is light-decorated. The game board 5 has a game panel 1100 and a front unit according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 2000 front effect units 2600 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

  Specifically, as a light emission effect using the game panel 1100, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is illuminated and decorated by light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130. As a result, a geometrical pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles is illuminated on the back side of the area in which the game balls B in the game area 5a circulate. It is possible to show the player the lighting effect and entertain the player.

  Moreover, as a light emission effect using the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000, for example, as shown in FIG. Of the LEDs 2611, the first LED 2611 a is caused to emit light, and only the first pattern portion 2610 a that constitutes a part of the first pattern 2610 is illuminated and decorated. As a result, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar to the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600, so that nothing happens to the player. I can make you think. In addition, the second LED 2611b of the first pattern decorative board 2612 is caused to emit light, and only the second pattern portion 2610b constituting a part of the first pattern 2610 is illuminated and decorated. Thereby, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns different in size from the first pattern portion 2610a are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600, which is similar to the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110). You can make the player think that something will happen.

  In addition, the third LED 2611c of the first pattern decorative board 2612 is caused to emit light, and only the third pattern portion 2610c constituting a part of the first pattern 2610 is illuminated and decorated. Accordingly, a plurality of equilateral triangular patterns similar in size to the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in front of the effect display device 1600 and different in size from the first pattern part 2610a and the second pattern part 2610b. Is displayed so that the player can think that something will happen. Further, the fourth LED 2611d of the first pattern decorative substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, and only the fourth pattern portion 2610d constituting a part of the first pattern 2610 is illuminated and decorated. Thereby, it is similar to the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in front of the effect display device 1600, and is different in size from the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c. Since a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns are displayed, it is possible to make the player think that something will happen.

  Further, in the first pattern decorative board 2612, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are repeatedly emitted in this order, and the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern. The light emission decoration is repeated in the order of the part 2610c and the fourth pattern part 2610d. As a result, in the first pattern 2610, in the portion of the large triangular pattern, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, and the second pattern portion. The part 2610b and the third picture part 2610c are decentered and superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangular picture part, the first picture part 2610a, the second picture part 2610b, and the third picture part 2610c and the fourth pattern part 2610d are arranged concentrically toward the center in the order, so that it is possible to show a light-emitting effect such as an animation that moves from the outside toward the center, It can surprise and entertain the player and make the player think that there is something good about the player ’s game. It is possible to heighten a sense of waiting.

  In addition, the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a are caused to emit light repeatedly in the order, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the third pattern portion 2610c, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the first pattern portion 2610a. Repeat in order to decorate the light. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect such as an animation that moves from the center side toward the outside, so that the player can be surprised and entertained. It can be thought that there is something good, and the player's sense of expectation can be enhanced.

  Note that when the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are caused to emit light, they may be emitted in different colors. Thereby, the player can show the illuminating decoration that changes to rainbow color, and the player can be entertained. The switching of the part 2610d can be easily understood, and the animation effect can be exerted more strongly.

  In the first pattern 2610, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are simultaneously decorated with light emission, and then the first pattern portion 2610a and the second pattern portion. 2610b, the third pattern part 2610c, and the fourth pattern part 2610d may be light-decorated in order. Thus, initially, the stationary first picture 2610 is lit and displayed, so that the player can think that it is a light emitting decoration by a conventional light guide plate, and then the first picture 2610 is displayed. By moving like an animation, the player can be greatly surprised, and the effect of the light guide plate 2601 can be further enhanced.

  FIG. 173 shows a timing diagram of an effect example in which a light emitting decoration is executed between the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 and the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601. In this example, after the production effect such as displaying the design (decorative design) on the production display device 1600 is started, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back left top front decoration board 3311a at the timing t1, and the back left top. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa for illuminating and decorating the front decoration part 3312 of the movable decoration body 3310 and a front decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 mounted on the back lower left front decoration board 3321a A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for luminescent decoration and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a for luminescent decoration of the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 ) 3411aa and back lower right front decoration board 3421a mounted on the back lower right movable decoration A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa that illuminates and decorates the front decoration 3342 of 3420 and the same luminescent color (for example, red. Note that the luminescent color may be made different according to the degree of expectation of the big hit. The probability that the big hit effect result is derived and displayed when the light is emitted with the red light emission color than when the light is emitted with the blue light emission color may be increased.

  At this time, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a to illuminate and decorate the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back lower lower front decorative substrate 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that are mounted and illuminate and decorate the front decoration portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the front upper right movable decorative body 3410 mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that illuminate and decorate the step decoration 3412, and a plurality that illuminate and decorate the front decoration 3342 of the lower right movable ornament 3420 mounted on the back lower right front decoration board 3421a. Full-color LED (side view type) 3421aa, and the gaming panel 100 decorative pattern 1150 is a light-emitting decoration.

  Next, at time t2, the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back upper left front decoration board 3311a, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa for emitting and decorating the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310; A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa mounted on the back lower left front decorative substrate 3321a to illuminate the front decorative portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and mounted on the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that illuminate and decorate the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 and a front stage of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 mounted on the back lower right front decoration board 3421a. Multiple full-color LEDs (side view type) that decorate the decoration 3422 All turn off and 3421aa, the.

  Thereafter, at timing t3, the peripheral control board 1510 emits a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that is mounted on the back left top front decoration board 3311a and that lights up and decorates the front decoration part 3312 of the back top left movable decoration body 3310. At time t4, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decoration board 3311a and illuminating the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 are turned off, while the lower left A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa mounted on the front decorative board 3321a and emitting and decorating the front decorative part 3322 of the lower left movable decorative body 3320 are caused to emit light, and at the timing t5, the lower left lower front decorative board 3321a. Of the lower left movable ornament 3320 The plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that decorates the step decoration 3322 are turned off, while the front step decoration 3342 of the back lower right movable ornament 3420 is emitted by being mounted on the back lower right front decoration board 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa to be decorated are caused to emit light, and at timing t6, they are mounted on the back lower right front stage decorative board 3421a, and a plurality of front side decorative parts 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are light- decorated. The full color LED (side view type) 3421aa is turned off, and the front stage decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 is mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a to emit light. 3411aa is made to emit light, and at the timing t7, the back upper right front stage Mounted on the substrate 3411a and turning off the plurality of full color LED (side view type) 3411Aa for emitting decorating Sakidan decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410.

  Further, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the same control as the timings t3 to t7 at timings t7 to t11. As a result, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a to illuminate and decorate the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and mounted on the back lower lower front decorative substrate 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for illuminating and decorating the front stage decoration portion 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 and mounted on the back lower right front stage decoration board 3421a and the tip of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa that illuminate and decorate the step decoration 3422, and a plurality of full-color LEDs that illuminate and decorate the front decoration 3434 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 mounted on the back upper right front decoration substrate 3411a. (Side view type) Rotation to move the light emission state in the order of 3411aa So light control is performed twice.

  That is, the front stage decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the front stage decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320, the front stage decoration part 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420, and the back upper right movable decoration body 3410. A mode in which light rotates in the order of the front decoration unit 3412 is executed twice. In synchronism with the movement of the light emission state (LEDs that emit light among the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa), a region corresponding to the light emission state in the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is illuminated and decorated. The light emission decorations of the decoration pattern 1150 move in the order of upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right, and the light emission decorations of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 rotate.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 reaches the timing t11, that is, when the rotational light emission control of the LEDs 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, and 3421aa is executed twice, all of them are turned off and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is lost. Mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the front view of the panel holder 1120 at timing t12 based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 within the effective period, and emits light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be irradiated and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a which are mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. , And the top right corner of the back A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that is mounted on the decoration board 3411a and illuminates and decorates the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and a back right lower front decoration board 3421a A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa that illuminate and decorate the front decoration portion 3422 of the movable ornament 3420 and a predetermined luminescent color (for example, red. Note that the luminescent color is made different depending on the expected degree of big hit. It is also possible to increase the probability that a big hit effect result is derived and displayed when light is emitted with a red light emission color than when light is emitted with a blue light emission color). After displaying the result of the variation effect at (after all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not limited to fixed stop but may be temporarily stopped)), the light is turned off.

  Thereby, the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is illuminated and decorated. Further, in this example, when the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is illuminated with a predetermined emission color, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that emit light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are caused to emit light with a predetermined emission color. In addition, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a to illuminate and decorate the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back lower right front decoration board A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa mounted on 3421a to illuminate and decorate the front decoration part 3422 of the lower right movable decorative body 3420 and a plurality of panels in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. A gaming panel by emitting light with the same emission color as that of the decoration LED 1130a Auxiliary light is incident on a portion that is far from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a or the light emission from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is difficult to reach, and is far from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a or a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. A position where light emission from the panel is difficult to reach (in this example, there is a notch or a through-hole or the like between the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a even in the right area of the center accessory 2500, even at a position close to the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. Light emission decoration by the decoration pattern 1150 applied to the panel decoration LED 1130a formed at a position where light emission from the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is difficult to reach), and the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is made to emit light almost uniformly. Be able to.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the back upper right front decoration board 3411a used for other light emission effects (light emission effects when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved). A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that are mounted to illuminate and decorate the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and a back lower right movable decoration body 3420 mounted on the back lower right front decoration board 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa for illuminating and decorating the front decoration portion 3422 of the game device 1100 are used as auxiliary light emission means for assisting the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. A plurality of panel decorations are synchronized with the light emission of the plurality of dedicated panel decoration LEDs 1130a. And emit light in the same emission color and emission color of use LED1130a. Therefore, when the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are caused to emit light to decorate the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100, the same light emission color as that of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is synchronized with the light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that are mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a and illuminate and decorate the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back lower right front decoration board 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa that are mounted and illuminate and decorate the front decoration portion 3422 of the lower right movable ornament 3420 are provided behind the portion that assists the illumination decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1 emitted at the standby position In order to assist the light emission of 30a, the gaming panel 1100 reduces the number of installed panel decoration LEDs 1130a, which are dedicated light emitting means for decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100, to reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. The almost uniform light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 can be realized.

  When the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 is light-decorated in a specific manner, the light emission is the same as the light emission color of the light-emitting means in synchronization with the light emission of the dedicated light-emitting means that causes the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 to emit light. You may make it make an auxiliary light emission means light-emit with a color. Further, the specific mode may be a predetermined emission color (for example, red) or a predetermined lighting pattern. Further, in this example, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a used in the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 when it is movable. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa that illuminate and decorate the step decoration 3412, and a plurality that illuminate and decorate the front decoration 3342 of the lower right movable ornament 3420 mounted on the back lower right front decoration board 3421a. The full-color LED (side view type) 3421aa and a plurality of light-emitting means are used as auxiliary light-emitting means. However, the distance from the dedicated light-emitting means for decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 and the dedicated light-emitting means The number of auxiliary light emitting means is appropriately determined according to the difficulty of light emission from the light emitting means, the range in which the auxiliary light is irradiated, and the like. For example, when the range in which the auxiliary light is irradiated is narrow, one of the light emitting means used for other effects may be set as the auxiliary light emitting means. In the above example, the LED as the light emitting member provided on the movable member is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting member provided on the non-movable member fixed at a predetermined position (irradiating auxiliary light or It may be used as a light emitting member for partially emphasizing the decorative pattern 1150. In this case, since the position does not change, it is possible to always irradiate the game panel 1100 with a certain amount of light, and to perform light-emitting decoration with stable luminance. Further, these light emitting members (light emitting members for irradiating auxiliary light or partially emphasizing the decoration pattern 1150) should be capable of irradiating at least a region where the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is formed. It suffices to use either side view type or top view type LED.

  Note that the dedicated light emitting means for decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 may be an LED having a higher luminance than the auxiliary light emitting means. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the light emission of the auxiliary light emitting means becomes more conspicuous than the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 due to the brightness of the auxiliary light emitting means being too high.

  In addition, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d mounted on the first design decorative board 2612 based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 within a predetermined effective period The first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion of the first pattern 2610 are emitted with the same emission color as the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a and LEDs 3411aa and 3421aa that decorate the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel 1100. 2610c and the fourth pattern part 2610d are illuminated and decorated at the same time. Thereby, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar to the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) on the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600, and the first pattern portion 2610a have different sizes. A plurality of equilateral triangle designs, and a plurality of equilateral triangle designs that are similar to the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and different in size from the first design portion 2610a and the second design portion 2610b, Similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c have a plurality of equilateral triangular patterns. Since it is displayed, a wide area between the game panel 1100 around the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. It is possible to perform the light-emitting decoration associated with over the circumference, it is possible to think that it would be happen something to the player.

  The first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d that are mounted on the first pattern decorative board 2612 and illuminate and decorate the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 display the result of the variation effect. It is turned off before (before all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not limited to fixed stop but may be temporarily stopped)). As described above, when displaying the result of the variation effect most noticed by the player, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, and the second LED 2611a, which are mounted on the first pattern decoration board 2612 and illuminate and decorate the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601. Since the third LED 2611c and the fourth LED 2611d are turned off, it is possible to prevent the display content of the effect display device 1600 from becoming difficult to visually recognize due to the light emitting decoration of the first pattern 2610 on the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, the LEDs 1130a, 3411aa, and 3421aa that illuminate and decorate the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 display the results of the fluctuating effects (after all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not limited to the fixed stop but may be temporarily stopped)) Therefore, even if the light emission decoration of the first pattern 2610 on the light guide plate 2601 is stopped, the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 formed over a wider range than the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 is continued. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the production effect and a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 as viewed from the front and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the front view of the panel holder 1120 A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 disposed in the lower left corner and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, and mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a and movable on the back upper right A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa for illuminating and decorating the front decoration part 3412 of the decoration body 3410 and a front decoration part 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 mounted on the back lower right front decoration board 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3421aa that decorates the light are turned off. The imming is not limited to the above, but the timing after the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 are turned off and before the next variation effect is executed (for example, a predetermined result after displaying the result of the variation effect). After the period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, after the derivative effect presentation result is derived and displayed (after definitive stop), a command from the main control board 1310 (a variation pattern command for instructing the start of the next variation effect, The command may be turned off when a command for instructing execution of the demonstration is received). Further, the light guide plate 2601 may be turned off before reaching the reach effect in the fluctuating effect executed by the effect display device 1600. In this case, the reach effect is provided by the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, since the lighting decoration of the game panel 1100 is continued even after reaching, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect and a decrease in the game entertainment.

  In addition, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a that are mounted on at least the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 as viewed from the front and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the front of the panel holder 1120 The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the view and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are emitted over a plurality of variation effects. You may do it. For example, in a normal state, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a that are mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, and the panel holder 1120. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the front view and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are made to emit blue light to decorate the game panel 1100. The gaming area 5a is decorated in blue by illuminating the pattern 1150 in blue. In the short time state, the gaming area 5a is mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that emit light toward the panel, and a panel holder 1120 A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged in the lower left corner when viewed from the front and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are made to emit red light to decorate the game panel 1100. The game area 5a may be decorated in red by lighting 1150 in red. Thereby, it can be notified by the light emitting decoration of the gaming panel 1100 that the player is in an advantageous state, and the gaming interest of the player who has recognized that the advantageous state is being executed can be improved.

  In a state where left-handed gaming is recommended, a plurality of panel decorations that are mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110. LED 1130a and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front and emit light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 emit light in blue By decorating and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 in blue, the gaming area 5a is illuminated in blue, and in a state where right-handed gaming is recommended, it is arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. A plurality of panel decorations mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 The LED 1130a and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and emit light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are caused to emit red light. Then, the decoration area 1a of the gaming panel 1100 may be illuminated in red so that the gaming area 5a is illuminated in red. This allows the player to recognize whether the right-handed game is recommended or the left-handed game is recommended, and does not give a disadvantage to the player.

  In addition, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view for each variation effect and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110, and the panel holder The emission color of a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged in the lower left corner of the front view 1120 and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 may be switched. For example, in the variation effect, the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light with a blue emission color, and when the variation effect ends and the next variation effect starts, the emission color of the panel decoration LED 1130a is switched to green. Also good. This makes it possible to easily recognize that the change effect has been switched. Note that the emission color switching timing is at least the timing before the next variation effect is executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the variation effect result, or the variation effect effect result). After derivation display (after definitive stop), a command (a timing when a command (a variation pattern command for instructing the start of the next variation effect, a command for instructing execution of a customer waiting demonstration, etc.) is received from the main control board 1310). .

  Further, in this example, the game panel 1100 that decorates the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 that decorates the front of the effect display device 1600 are formed as separate members, so that the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 The light incident on one side can be prevented from being decorated with light emission, and not only the gaming panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 can be decorated with light emission at the same time, but also each can be individually decorated with light emission. Therefore, it is possible to execute various lighting effects such as decorating the gaming panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 at the same time or decorating only one of them.

  The above-described light emission effects are merely examples, and the light emission modes such as the light emission color, the light emission timing, the light emission period, and the light emission pattern (blinking interval) are not limited to those described above. That is, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decoration board 3311a to illuminate the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and mounted on the back lower front decoration board 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for illuminating and decorating the front decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 and a front upper right movable decoration body 3410 mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa for decorating the decoration part 3412 and a plurality of lamps mounted on the back lower right front decoration board 3421a for emitting and decorating the front decoration part 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 Full color LED (side view type) 3421aa and light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 By appropriately combining the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 that is decorated by emitting light, it is possible to show a variety of light emission effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Since the player can be entertained, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In addition, as a light emission effect using the front effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the second pattern 2620 is decorated with light emission. Thereby, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a guidance (message) for the player consisting of the characters “CHANCE!” Is emitted as the second pattern 2620. Can be suggested, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  FIG. 175 shows a timing diagram of an effect example in which a light emitting decoration is executed between the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 and the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 different from FIG. In this example, after the production effect such as variably displaying the design (decorative design) on the production display device 1600 is started, the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front at the timing t1 ′. A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 have a predetermined emission color (for example, red. Note that the emission color varies depending on the expected degree of jackpot. Alternatively, the probability that a big win effect result is derived and displayed when light is emitted with a red light emission color rather than when light is emitted with a blue light emission color may be increased). At the timing t2 ′, the panel holder 1120 is mounted on the upper left panel decorative board 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the front view and faces the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110. While turning off the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that emit light, the panel holder 1120 is mounted on the lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner when viewed from the front, and emits light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a have a predetermined light emission color (for example, red. Note that the light emission color may be varied according to the expectation level of the big hit, and the red light emission color is higher than the case where light is emitted with the blue light emission color. The probability that a big hit effect result may be derived and displayed when the light is emitted is also the same emission color as the panel decoration LED 1130a or a different emission color). At t3 ′, the panel board 1110 is mounted on the lower left panel decorative board 1132 disposed at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. Toward the periphery turns off the LED1130a for multiple panels decorative irradiating light.

  The peripheral control board 1510 performs the same control as the timings t1 'to t3' at timings t3 'to t5'. As a result, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 as viewed from the front and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, a predetermined emission color. The alternate light emission control for alternately emitting light is performed twice.

  Further, when the alternate light emission control is performed, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110. And a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner of the front view 1120 and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, in synchronization with light emission. Of the decoration pattern 1150 of 1100, the area corresponding to the light emission state is decorated with light emission, and the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 moves alternately between upper left and lower left. That is, the upper left of the gaming panel 1100 is emitted by the light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110. The decorative pattern 1150 is light-emitting decorated, and is mounted on the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the front view of the 1120 and emits light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110. As a result, the decoration pattern 1150 at the upper left of the gaming panel 1100 is illuminated and decorated.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, that is, a plurality of panel decorations that emit light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 at the timing t5 ′. LED 1130a and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the lower left panel decoration board 1132 disposed in the lower left corner of the front view of 1120 and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are executed. Then, all of these are turned off, the light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 disappears, and the upper left in front view of the panel holder 1120 at timing t6 ′ based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 within a predetermined effective period. The peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed in the corner A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that irradiate light, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) that are mounted on the back upper left front decoration board 3311a and illuminate and decorate the front decoration portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 3311aa and a predetermined emission color (for example, red. Note that the emission color may be different depending on the expectation of big hit, and the light is emitted in a red emission color than in the case of emission in a blue emission color. In this case, it is possible to increase the probability that the result of the big hit is derived and displayed, or the emission color may be different from the emission color before the operation of the effect operation unit 301. Is displayed (after all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not limited to fixed stop but may be temporarily stopped)).

  As a result, the decoration pattern 1150 at the upper left of the game panel 1100 is illuminated and decorated. In this example, when the decoration pattern 1150 at the upper left of the gaming panel 1100 is decorated with a predetermined emission color, it is mounted on the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and the panel board 1110 is mounted. In addition to causing the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel to emit light in a predetermined emission color, they are mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a and are mounted on the front upper decorative portion of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa that decorate the light emitting element 3312 are mounted on an upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 as an assisting light emitting means, toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110. The plurality of panels in synchronization with the light emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that emit light By emitting light in the same emission color as that of the decoration LED 1130a, the panel holder 1120 is mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and emits light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 The decoration pattern 1150 applied to the upper left portion of the gaming panel 1100 that is decorated with light emission by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a is promoted, and the upper left decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 is illuminated with a higher light amount. Be able to. In this way, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, and the upper left front decoration A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the board 3311a and emitting and decorating the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 have the same light emission mode (lighting / flashing period and interval, light emission color) Etc.), the decoration pattern 1150 at the upper left of the gaming panel 1100 is coordinated to light up and decorate, and the amount of light of the decoration pattern 1150 that is decorated with light emission increases. Thus, a clear light-emitting decoration in the part can be realized.

  Further, a plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second pattern decoration board 2622 based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301 within a predetermined effective period, and a plurality of panels that illuminate the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. The second pattern is emitted and decorated by emitting light in the same emission color as the decoration LED 1130a and LEDs 3411aa and 3421aa. As a result, the guidance (message) for the player consisting of the characters “CHANCE!” Is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600, so that the lighting decoration of the game panel 1100 around the effect display device 1600 In combination, light emission display can be performed on the light guide plate 2601 in front of the effect display device 1600, and the player can be made to think that something will happen.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs 2621 that are mounted on the second pattern decorative board 2622 and illuminate and decorate the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are displayed before the result of the variation effect is displayed (all the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed (the confirmation stop). It is not limited to a temporary stop. Thus, when displaying the result of the variation effect that the player pays most attention to, the plurality of LEDs 2621 that are mounted on the second pattern decoration board 2622 and illuminate the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are turned off. It is possible to prevent the display content of the effect display device 1600 from becoming difficult to visually recognize due to the light emitting decoration of the second pattern 2630 on the light plate 2601. On the other hand, the LEDs 1130a and 3311aa that illuminate and decorate the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 display the result of the variation effect (after all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (not limited to the fixed stop but may be temporarily stopped)). Therefore, even if the light emission decoration of the second pattern 2630 on the light guide plate 2601 is stopped, the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 formed over a wider range than the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 can be continued. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the production effect and a decrease in the entertainment interest.

  A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110, and the upper left front decoration board The timing of turning off the plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on 3311a and illuminating and decorating the front decoration portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 is not limited to the above, but at least the first What is necessary is just to make it light-extinguish at the timing after several LED2611 for one pattern 2610 is light extinction, and before the next fluctuation production is performed. Further, the light guide plate 2601 may be turned off before reaching the reach effect in the fluctuating effect executed by the effect display device 1600. In this case, the reach effect is provided by the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, since the lighting decoration of the game panel 1100 is continued even after reaching, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect and a decrease in the game entertainment.

  Further, in this example, the game panel 1100 that decorates the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 that decorates the front of the effect display device 1600 are formed as separate members, so that the game panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 The light incident on one side can be prevented from being decorated with light emission, and not only the gaming panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 can be decorated with light emission at the same time, but also each can be individually decorated with light emission. Therefore, it is possible to execute various lighting effects such as decorating the gaming panel 1100 and the light guide plate 2601 at the same time or decorating only one of them.

  Further, when the decoration pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the gaming panel 1100 is light-decorated in a specific manner, the decoration pattern 1150 is promoted with the same light emission color as that of the light-emitting means in synchronization with the dedicated light-emitting means for light-decorating the predetermined area of the gaming panel 1100. The light emitting means may emit light. Further, the specific correspondence may be a predetermined emission color (for example, red) or a predetermined lighting pattern. Further, in this example, it is mounted on the back upper left front stage decoration board 3311a as the facilitating light emitting means for facilitating the light emission decoration of the upper left decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, and the front stage decoration portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 emits light. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa to be decorated are mounted on the back lower left front stage decorative board 3321a as an assisting light emitting means for promoting the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 at the lower left of the game panel 1100, and the lower left lower movable decoration A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for illuminating and decorating the front decoration portion 3322 of the body 3320 are used. However, the range of the region that facilitates the luminescence decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 in the game panel 1100 and the luminescence decoration The number of facilitating light emitting means is appropriately determined according to the amount of lightFor example, when facilitating the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern on the left side of the game panel 1100, a plurality of full colors mounted on the back upper left front decoration board 3311a to light up and decorate the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310. LED (side view type) 3311aa and a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa mounted on the back lower left front decoration board 3321a and emitting and decorating the front decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 You may make it set a means as a promotion light emission means.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a used for other light emitting effects (light effect when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are movable). A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa for emitting and decorating the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and a front stage of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 mounted on the back lower left front decoration board 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that illuminates and decorates the decoration portion 3322 are used as facilitating light emitting means for facilitating the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the gaming panel 1100, and in the predetermined area of the gaming panel 1100 A plurality of dedicated panel decoration LEDs 1130 for decorating the decoration pattern 1150 with light emission Synchronization of the emission is made to emit light at the same light emission color and emission color of LED1130a for multiple panels decoration. Therefore, when the decoration pattern 1150 in the predetermined area of the gaming panel 1100 is illuminated by illuminating the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, the emission colors of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are synchronized with the emission of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a with the same light emission color to light up and decorate the front decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the lower left lower front decorative substrate 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa that are mounted on the back left lower movable ornament 3320 and illuminate and decorate the front decoration portion 3322 are waiting positions behind the portion that promotes the luminescence decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 Play with the game panel 110 In order to promote light-emitting decoration in a predetermined area, the number of installation of a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, which are dedicated light-emitting means for light-decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100, is reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is suppressed. A light emitting decoration that emphasizes the decoration pattern 1150 in a predetermined area of the game panel 1100 can be realized.

  Note that the dedicated light emitting means for decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 may be an LED having a higher brightness than the promotion light emitting means. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the light emission of the promotion light emitting means is more conspicuous than the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 due to the brightness of the promotion light emission means being too high.

  Further, in addition to the light emission of the dedicated light emitting means for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100, the auxiliary light emitting means and the auxiliary light emitting means may be linked to emit light. For example, in the case where the entire decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 is illuminated, the dedicated light emitting means for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 emits light in a predetermined emission color, and the auxiliary light emitting means is used as the gaming panel 1100. When the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is made to emit light with the same emission color as that of the dedicated light emitting means for emitting and decorating only the decoration pattern 1150 on the left side of the game panel 1100, the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 is The dedicated light emitting means for lighting decoration is caused to emit light in a predetermined emission color, and the facilitating light emitting means is caused to emit light with the same emission color as that of the dedicated light emitting means for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100. Also good. Thereby, in addition to being able to decorate the entire decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 almost uniformly, it is possible to realize a lighting decoration that emphasizes only the decoration pattern in a predetermined area of the gaming panel 1100.

  The above-described light emission effects are merely examples, and the light emission modes such as the light emission color, the light emission timing, the light emission period, and the light emission pattern (blinking interval) are not limited to those described above. That is, a plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decoration board 3311a to illuminate the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and mounted on the back lower front decoration board 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3321aa for illuminating and decorating the front decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 and a front upper right movable decoration body 3410 mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (side view type) 3411aa for decorating the decoration part 3412 and a plurality of lamps mounted on the back lower right front decoration board 3421a for emitting and decorating the front decoration part 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 Full color LED (side view type) 3421aa and the right side of the light guide plate 2601 By appropriately combining the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on the second decorative board 2622 for the second pattern, it is possible to show a variety of light emission effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Since the player can be entertained, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Furthermore, as a light emission effect using a front effect unit 2600 different from that in FIGS. 172 and 174, for example, as shown in FIG. 176, the light effect is mounted on the second design decorative board 2622 arranged on the right side of the light guide plate 2601. The plurality of LEDs 2621 are caused to emit light, and the second pattern 2630 is illuminated. Thereby, the second pattern 2630 of a geometric pattern in which the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the left upward diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 are extended with a thick width, respectively. However, since it is decorated with light emission, it is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of unity between the outside and the inside of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can be entertained.

  Note that the light emission decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the light emission decoration of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 may be performed simultaneously. Thereby, the player can be shown a luminous decoration with a sense of unity between the outside and inside of the center accessory 2500, and the player can be entertained.

  Subsequently, an effect obtained by combining the movable effect and the light emission effect in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. FIG. 177 illuminates and decorates the first pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and moves the lower back movable decorative body, the back upper movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, And it is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back lower right movable decorative body is moved to the second combined position. FIG. 178 illuminates and decorates the first pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit, and moves the lower back movable decorative body, the back upper movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower right movable ornament is moved to the first combined position. 179 illuminates and decorates the second pattern on the light guide plate of the front effect unit of the embodiment different from that of FIG. 178, and moves the back lower movable decorative body, the back upper movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, and the back lower left movable decoration. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back right lower movable decorative body are moved to the first combined position.

  The game board 5 has the movable effect and the light effect described above according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Produce an appropriate combination of Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 177, the first pattern 2610 is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back left upper movable. The decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the second combined position.

  Thus, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back left bottom movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are moved forward. Since six large triangular pattern portions in one pattern 2610 are located, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 are arranged depending on the large triangular pattern portion of the first pattern 2610. The back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be decorated. The back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back left upper movable movable body 3310 can be decorated. The appearance of the back lower left movable ornament 3320, the back upper right movable ornament 3410, and the back lower right movable ornament 3420 can be changed. Therefore, since the player can be given a different impression from the state of FIG. 170, the player can be presented with more various effects, making the player hard to get bored, and the state of FIG. 170. Compared to, it can make you think that better things will happen, and can increase the expectation of the game.

  In addition, as an effect obtained by appropriately combining the movable effect and the light emission effect described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 178, the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 is made to emit light decoration and the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the first combined position. Accordingly, the large triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and Since the back lower right movable ornament 3420 overlaps with the front and rear, the back lower movable ornament 3110, the back upper movable ornament 3210, the back upper left movable ornament 3310, the back lower left movable ornament 3320, the back upper right movable The decoration body 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 can be decorated to change their appearance. Accordingly, since the player can be given an impression that is clearly different from the state of FIG. 171, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result selected Can be convinced that is a "big hit" and can increase the interest in gaming.

  Furthermore, as an effect obtained by appropriately combining the movable effect and the light emission effect described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 179, the second pattern 2630 is light-decorated on the light guide plate 2601 of the table effect unit 2600 of the embodiment different from the above. In addition, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are combined. Move to position. Accordingly, in the front view, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420. A second pattern 2630 of a geometric pattern of a thick line extending the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the left upward diagonal line forming the decoration pattern 1150 of the gaming panel 1100 in front of the adjacent ones of the game panel 1100. Since it is decorated with light emission, the second pattern 2630 can make it difficult to see between them. The back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 It is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the decoration form formed by the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the movable effect can be assisted. More dramatic effect and can give enhanced.

  In addition, in the state where the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 (second pattern 2630) of the light guide plate 2601 are decorated with light emission, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, The back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be appropriately decorated with light emission. Accordingly, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back left bottom movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are decorated. Since the light from the light reaches the player's eyes through the light guide plate 2601, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration with high brightness that cannot be achieved with the light guide plate 2601 alone, and to entertain the player. it can.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect and light emission effect can be combined as appropriate, and can also be combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. it can. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and to make the player hard to get tired. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Although the present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It is. For example, as in the invention in which at least a part of the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is visibly arranged so as to prevent forgetting to install the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 and the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132, the first pattern At least a part of the first pattern decoration board 2612 and the second pattern decoration board 2622 may be arranged so as to be visible so as to prevent the installation of the decoration board 2612 and the second pattern decoration board 2622. .

[6. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 13 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The overall configuration will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184. 180 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 181 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 182 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 183 is an XX line in FIG. FIG. 184 is a view taken in the direction of arrow A in FIG. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a transparent cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and main control for controlling the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of presentation based on commands from main control board 1310 of unit 1300, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output board 1530 that is electrically connected to the peripheral board, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 that can reduce (suppress) electromagnetic wave noise entering the liquid crystal output board 1530; A conductive material that is attached (adhered) to a predetermined portion of a metal shield plate 1540 A sexual member 1545 includes a transparent base member 1502 for closing the opening of the cover member 1501, a. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position together with a metal shield board 1540, whereby the shield board 1540 is provided. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is configured by being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510, in various boards attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed in the upper right portion of the cover body 1501 because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape in the remaining one third of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

  The boards between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector described later, and the boards between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is transparently molded, and covers the upper, left, lower and right sides of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. Side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding toward the rear (front side of the pachinko machine 1).

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the air cooling fan FAN at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, which is slightly in the center and the upper right side when viewed from the front. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have predetermined cylindrical shapes inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air-cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aa1 to 1501aab4 each having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. In addition, by forming the arc-shaped slit hole 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of illegally taking out various electronic components and the like included in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air cooling fan FAN is installed by being pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal-headed pan head screw (not shown) having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer that is the seat portion of the pan head screw with the seat comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In the present embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along its lower side when viewed from the front, and the positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are 1 The connector recess 1501ac is formed as two closed, substantially oblong rectangular regions (to be precise, a convex region with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as the upper part and the connectors CN2 to CN7 as the lower part) of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Yes. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. For this reason, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are exposed. At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height becomes lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted on the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac by the protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, the plug is hidden. The cover flat plate 1501a cannot protrude from the surface. The volume adjustment switch 1510d is lower than the heights of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, some metallic powder or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. Can be prevented.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a closed horizontally long rectangular region at a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501ad is opened at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, respectively. . At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height becomes lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted on the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac by the protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, the plug is hidden. The cover flat plate 1501a cannot protrude from the surface. Thereby, even if dust adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallicity, or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It is like that.

  Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for attaching the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead opening 1501ae and can block the wiring lead opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a short distance compared to the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503 at a predetermined height of a columnar shape inserted through the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). And a mounting hole 1501afb1 at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring lead opening 1501ae is closed, and a plurality of wirings (to transmit drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover for protecting the wiring from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of non-conductive resin and is molded transparently.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed which protrude in the upper and lower sides at predetermined intervals in the center in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side wall 1501c. At the same time, there are formed a hinge hook 1501cc arranged above the guide 1501ca and projecting outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd arranged below the guide 1501cb and projecting outward. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, a cover side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having circular shapes are formed on the back side of the substrate 1510, respectively, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively peripheral control boards. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A through hole 1540c2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is aligned with a mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as follows. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed as the through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L-shape of the shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to match the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. The cover boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are arranged so as to match with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are respectively contacted. In addition to being in contact, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan-screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Thus, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. .

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, solder copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520; Solder copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are respectively A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may match with the attachment boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 are respectively abutted. It will be in contact. Further, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are in contact with each other. Further, the metal pan head screw shaft (screw portion) is screwed into mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 becomes the peripheral data. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged on the inner side of the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surfaces on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control board 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions so as to protrude diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the liquid crystal output Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having circular shapes are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, respectively, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively liquid crystal output substrates. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1530.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may match with boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. In addition, the lands 1530 rb 1 to 1530 rb 4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are brought into contact with each other. Further, the metal pan head screw shaft (screw portion) is screwed into mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. .

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 and screwed into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Is arranged on the inner side of the side end face (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the peripheral control IC 1510a and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the gap having the predetermined distance dimension described above is fixed. (In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the peripheral control is performed by ejecting the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 A gap is formed, and a gap is formed in the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. Further, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are provided. A gap is formed. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. In addition to taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the described ventilation hole 1501az, the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven formed on the cover body 1501) Gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, a volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and a gap formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 Two connectors CN8 with And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  Each of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa plus the area (total area) is the area in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501; The volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the gaps and the peripheral control board 1510 formed in the gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501). And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover body 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. A plurality of air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 are formed in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through the ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept small.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is transparently formed, and is formed on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular base plate 1502a when viewed from the front. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding toward the front (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is formed to be slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Thus, in a state where the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 so as to close the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are placed inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e. Will be in a state of being inscribed (surface contact).

  The base flat plate 1502a is wired to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped by a force when inserting a connector for connection. The force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 at the position where it does not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the force when operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the peripheral control board 15 Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  Further, the base flat plate 1502a is on the right side when viewed from the front thereof, and at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab that is longer than the back surface of the ground piece 1540d and that is long in the vertical direction is formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engagement portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. L-shaped flange portions 1501 cca and 1501 cda of hinged portions 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. In addition, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In addition, a base side sealing portion 1502ea protruding outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 at the center of the right base side wall 1502e. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. Shield plate]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield as viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) on the upper left side of the flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm) and the lower central side of the left side. Are formed respectively.

  Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, on the upper right side and lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) Between the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, an L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (25 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring lead concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is formed. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a, and The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane, The L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 are formed so that the back surface of the shield plate 1540a and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are parallel to each other. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension from the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  In the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2, through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 protrudes from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is one attachment boss hole of a pair of attachment boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed in the above manner. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501am1 protrudes from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one mounting boss hole of the formed pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  In the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 extend from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. These are two mounting boss holes out of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to protrude.

  Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the cover plate 1501 together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height (the present embodiment) between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In the embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

  These two spaces are distance dimensions of a first predetermined height between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In this embodiment, the second space between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having a 12 mm) and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real-time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e described later, power supply generation circuit not shown, Resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, LEDs ML1 to ML4 to be described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 to be described later), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, etc. (peripheral data ROM 1520a to be described later, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, A special connector SCN3 (to be described later) and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN4 to be described later) are accommodated. The second space 1505b, various electronic parts and the like is not at all accommodated. This is because various electronic components that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components in the first space 1505a by not containing the etc. is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise.

  The shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 is provided with vent holes 1540az having the same shape at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular vent holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similarly to the ventilation holes 1501az. Yes. When the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. Thus, air is taken in from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 via the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
A conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and a conductive covering portion 1545a; It is comprised from the foam 1545b which has a rectangular shape as a core material coat | covered with the electroconductive coating | coated part 1545a, and the electroconductive adhesive tape 1545c stuck on the electroconductive coating | coated part 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be listed. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive cover 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape with a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / Os. Peripheral control IC 1510a in which an O interface or the like is integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of the game presentation (demonstration performed while waiting for the player) and the progress of the presentation Various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510b for preliminarily storing various schedule data to be defined and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be transferred and stored. DRAM (Synchronous Dynamic
Random Access Memory (SDRAM) 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and a backup power source that can supply power even when the power is turned off to a real-time clock IC (not shown). 1510e, a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The peripheral control IC 1510a, the ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510. The IC pin interval is reduced, and various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 are provided. ~ CN7, pin spacing of special connectors SCN1, SCN2 is narrowed, the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, the distance between connectors CN1 to CN7 is narrowed, and the distance between connector CN7 and special connector SCN2 is also narrowed ing.

  The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os, various parallel I / Os, and the like. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side. In some cases, SPI communication or I2C communication is employed as a communication method for transmitting control data (communication via a corresponding connector among connector CN3, connector CN6, and connector CN7).

  In the present embodiment, for example, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electrical drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in various rendering units, communicate via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7). And an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 and an operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the rendering operation unit 300), and communicates via the connector CN3. ) Is transmitted to the drive control IC for driving, and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in various effect units and communicated via the connector CN6). Signals received from the camera as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300). , And the and receives signals from communicating through the connector CN3.) As the detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / Os, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the control target and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or control signals for the control target (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are output from the GPIO (connector CN6). Or a signal is output from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. In this embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from GPIO, and data is output bit by bit from GPIO based on this clock signal. Serial data can be created. By using such GPIO to function as serial communication, for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)) The light emission data can be output as a plurality of game board-side serial systems and a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side. Light emission data can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

  In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is allocated to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are allocated to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is allocated as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The data can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Random Access Memory) and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board.

  Peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from special connector SCN2 using a plurality of types of video signals. As the plurality of types of video signal systems, for example, there are a plurality of types such as the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) system, the eDP (Embedded Display Port) system, and the clockless system. In this case, four systems (four systems in total) are employed, one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system and second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. Peripheral control board adopting eDP method, for example, instead of MIPI method, 1 system for RGB system, 2 systems for LVDS system (first LVDS system, 2nd LVDS system), and 1 system for eDP system 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. LEDML1 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 5V is being supplied. LEDML2 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 12V is supplied. LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC + 35V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state in which DC + 35V is supplied. LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, so that two spaces are formed. As described above, the two spaces have a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) and the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. 2 and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height of 2 (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

  As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic parts provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic parts provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 being lit.

  Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are completely different in structure. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the vertical direction with respect to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When the sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are fitted, there is no amount of movement in the vertical direction when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are viewed from the front.

  Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively. Special connectors SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and special connectors SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets.

  The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, so that the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1 and the front side) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. It is a structure provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range in the direction of Note that the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even when the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not contact the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, a gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into and inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). It has a structure provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the board 1510) is moved as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the special front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is not contacted with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of connector SCN4 and the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a peripheral data ROM 1520a capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Various control information (peripheral data) includes image data such as background images, character images, and design images for rendering various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 The drive data etc. for drive-controlling the various movable production bodies with which it is provided can be mentioned.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, is cheaper than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the cost can be reduced and the power consumption can be suppressed, and various stored data can be read out at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a need to be accurately and reliably transmitted from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Thus, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. Prevent damage to the surroundings The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during the operation, the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is established. It can be reliably formed.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to progress the effect (for example, for the player). An image that tells you that an advantageous big hit gaming state will occur compared to the normal state, an image that tells you that no big hit gaming state will occur, and a state where a big hit gaming state will occur compared to the normal state, although no big hit gaming state will occur This is an important substrate for drawing an image or the like indicating that it is approaching as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not used without adopting a configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at the time, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is reliably established. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced as compared with the case where the three-dimensional arrangement is performed, for example, a large effect unit (movable effector is operated on the game board 5). Electric drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the depth direction of the distance dimension of fit.

[6-6. Peripheral control unit assembly method]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is replaced with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss is formed so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Placed to match hole 1501ah2, made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Accordingly, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is The cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are sandwiched.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, they are adjusted as they are or as a fine adjustment. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield board 1540 is covered. The body 1501 and the various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

  Thus, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restraining movement in the vertical and horizontal directions. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, the peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restriction is applied to the peripheral control substrate 1510. When fixing to the back surface side of 1501a, absorption is performed by respective dimensional tolerances in through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. Can be done.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The base body 1502 is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are attached to the base body. Inserted into U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf of hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad formed in the engaging portion 1502 ca of 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is wrapped around so that the opening side of the cover body 1501 is covered, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 by entering. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a sealed state.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and inscribed (surface contact). Further, in the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) extending to the back surface is 6.8 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 has to be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the opening and closing traces, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and deterring power against illegal actions on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN are drawn from the wiring lead recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. From the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the rear, respectively, a lead screw with a metal seat (not shown) having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out openings 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered with the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peel sheet of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is placed on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) 1545 adhesive tape 1545c.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to an attachment portion formed on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box that is inserted into a mounting groove that constitutes a mounting portion formed in the outer peripheral control unit 1500 and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It fixes by screwing in toward the attachment hole which comprises the attachment part formed in the back surface side.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A frame-shaped metal frame accommodates a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of itself, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Are connected to the same ground (GND). When peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to a mounting portion formed on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box of production display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit ground piece of metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of base body 1502 1540d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and contacts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545 as shown in FIG. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed and crushed in the height direction (in this embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing a dimensional deviation due to a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are in an electrically and reliably connected state, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 Since it can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to be the same ground (GND), an environment strong against electromagnetic noise is constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can do.

  In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the through-hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through-hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to match the formed mounting boss hole 1501ag4, and the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Of the metal shield plate 1540 A through hole 1540b2a formed in shape attachment pieces 1540B2, arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover body when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side). And the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 The peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the predetermined position described above. It can also be fixed to the left side.) Even in such a procedure for attaching various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb the error in the front-and-rear direction caused by the pushing-in, so that the plug and socket It is possible to prevent breakage of a plurality of connection terminals formed on the substrate, and to reliably form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, and to connect the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards attached to the pachinko machines having different game specifications. In this embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common without depending on the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game board game specification. The peripheral data corresponding to is stored as a board that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (recycled). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 including a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described board-to-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily exchanged according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems that are input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of systems are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced in accordance with the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the video signal system input to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 matched to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are configured by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and a peripheral control board is provided in the internal space of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Connected. For this reason, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is led to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) serving as a circuit ground via a metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can do.

  Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming whether or not there is fraud.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 182, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the peripheral control board. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number) In other words, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multi-directional angles. So that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. It is. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 5V from the power supply substrate 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, so that the direct current + 5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of being controlled, it also has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the area is larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , Connector pin count, IC Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk-printed on each. Are arranged in a distributed manner so as to be a large area in which the contents can be almost confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in the lighting state in a state where the direct current + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special data SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the surface data of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the IC pin state is improved, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. And improving the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. And an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the 1530 are respectively distributed and arranged. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in the lighting state when the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN4 on the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Improved visibility of the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are part numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1, respectively. The state of the IC pins of 1510c2 and the contents (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that they can be confirmed from multi-directional angles. Has been placed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. Can do. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state in a state where the direct current + 12V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is originally provided with a function of confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but also having a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM 1510c. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the blades of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades and the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air cooling fan FAN). The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the periphery control IC 1510a.

  In the present embodiment, as LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface mount type and a wide angle of about 120 degrees are employed, and a type with weak directivity is employed. It is also suitable for lighting applications. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, so that two spaces are formed. As described above, the two spaces have a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) and the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. 2 and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 183) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height of 2 (1.6 mm in this embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic parts provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic parts provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 that is also suitable for use as illumination.

  Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has gloss, and the area on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 that faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. And the surroundings also have a function as a reflection part that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and direct the light toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. You may comprise so that the coloring paint which has glossiness may be further apply | coated to these reflection parts.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and paid out to the side of the game board 5. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path constituted by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities in the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are formed by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. Further, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. In this case, a configuration is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates to form a circuit ground. In the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. A configuration in which the same ground (GND) is used by electrically connecting to the (GND) line is adopted.

  Accordingly, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, which are circuit grounds, through the metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided and removed through a metal shield plate 1540 to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) serving as a circuit ground.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 In a state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided on the ROM board 1520, and the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged near the center of the ball tank 552. By placing it away from the tank rail 553 It has become possible way. As described above, the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. By disposing the inter-connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The inter-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As shown in FIG. 182, since it can be arranged long in the vertical direction, the area to which dust, some metallic powder, etc. adhere can be minimized. In addition, when the above-mentioned board-to-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, some metallic powder, etc. adheres will be extremely increased. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a long arrangement in the left and right direction as shown in FIG. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is formed by a protruding wall called a cover flat plate 1501a. Even if plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The dust adhering to the surface, some metallic powder, etc. are covered with the cover side wall 1501. It is dropped from, so that it can be prevented from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. In this way, the direction in which the above-described inter-board connector is disposed, and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are disposed so that dust, powder having some metallicity, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electrical terminal, Is selected.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there is a gaming machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board mounted with a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images, and the like. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems inputted to the display device. For this reason, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify the production control board in accordance with the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to reduce the cost of the production control board. there were.

  Conventionally, a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board (effect control means) on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted, etc. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-116667 (FIG. 2)) is proposed. By the way, the game balls supplied to the gaming machine from the island equipment of the gaming hall are charged with static electricity by the game balls rubbing each other when circulating between the island equipment and the gaming machine of the gaming hall. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 187. FIG. 185 is a block diagram schematically illustrating the control configuration of the pachinko machine, FIG. 186 is a block diagram schematically illustrating the connection relationship with the panel drive board, and FIG. 187 is a block diagram illustrating the continuation of FIG. 115. As shown in FIG. 115, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 can control a game operation (game progress). Peripheral control board 1510 is capable of controlling the progress of performance based on various commands from main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that can control the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that can control the release of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182. Yes.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 185, the main control board 1310 that can control the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and the game that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs such as a main control program for controlling the operation, various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various sensors are input. Main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, Built in the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring the sign of instantaneous power failure and the main control MPU 1310a A RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM that is provided with a. The main control MPU 1310a is operated by a high frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also includes a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a and forces the main control MPU 1310a to be affected by electrical noise when the register changes to an inconsistent content. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control-side power-on process described later. Will be. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased ( Will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, a reset signal is not output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware”) that updates a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. "Random number circuit"). The main random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 to 65535 as a minimum value is set in advance as a minimum value), and generates an initial value. The circuit configuration is such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the hard random number circuit with built-in main control first sets a clock signal (main control) to the main control MPU 1310a with an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at a high speed on the basis of a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, and within a predetermined numerical range. Once all the values in are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value in the predetermined numerical range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining the big hit It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the main control system reset, the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information is provided, and a main control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function without a reset terminal, It is composed of The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with a reset function is a signal based on the information by resetting the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. In contrast, the main control output circuit without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without a reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is not reset. The circuit is configured to be output from the various output terminals.

  First start port sensor 3002 (first start port sensor main side 3002a and first start port sensor slave side 3002b described above) that detects game ball B received in first start port 2002, second start port 2004 The second start port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the game, the general game port sensors 2401 and 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general game port 2001, and the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003 are detected. The detection signals from the gate sensor 2506, the big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005, the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. The signal is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The detection signals from the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, through the main control input circuit 1310b. Via the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001, the gate sensor 2506, the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are transmitted via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly through the main control. The signal is input to the board 1310 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, so that the main control solenoid with reset function outputs the main control solenoid. By outputting a control signal to the drive circuit 1310d, the respective drive signals are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. Or by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, from the main control output circuit with a reset function, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display, Hold display, 1st special symbol display, 1st special Pending number indicator, the second special symbol display device, the second special reserved number indicator, the respective drive signals to the round indicator, without passing through the other substrate, that is directly or outputs.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, so that the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with reset function. Main control with reset function by outputting various information (game information) related to games to the main control output circuit with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output circuit to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002 (the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b), the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the prize winning port. The sensor 2403 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 use contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are used. , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so the game ball by the big prize opening sensor 2403 Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having a high durability and a long life is also used for the big prize opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. For this reason, mechanical winning switches 2401 and 3001 use mechanical switches that have a shorter lifetime than proximity switches.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function, so that the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function. Send various commands as serial data. When the payout control board 633 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the effect (main payout ACK signal). A signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with a reset function to the payout control board 633.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit without the reset function.

  Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) BC0 (see FIG. 189, etc.) is provided. With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and triggered by this, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases (clears) the main control built-in RAM. Yes. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without reset function, and is output from the main control output circuit without reset function to the payout control board 633.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC + 12V and DC + 35V from the power supply board 630, and monitors these DC + 12V and DC + 35V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure of DC + 12V and DC + 35V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning, and the power failure warning signal is output from a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to the input terminal, main control board 1310 (output via the main control output circuit 1310c), and input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110 Is input. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. In addition, you may comprise so that a power failure warning signal may be each input into the board | substrate etc. with which the door frame 3 is mounted | worn.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power supply lines: a power supply line (+ 12V power supply line) supplied with DC + 12V and a power supply line (+ 35V power supply line) supplied with DC + 35V. By monitoring each voltage, it is possible to grasp the sign of power failure such as power outage or instantaneous power failure more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power line or + 35V power line. Can be done.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, the payout control board 633 for performing the launch control and the ball transport control of the game ball B performs the discharge control by the payout control unit 633a for performing various controls relating to payout and the launch solenoid 542. , A launch control unit 633b that performs ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145, an error LED display 633c that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error that is displayed on the error LED display 633c An error release switch 633d.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 185, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is executed after a predetermined time elapses from the time when the power is turned on, while controlling the power-on process executed when the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 633aa which is a microprocessor incorporating various processing programs including a payout control program for controlling a payout operation of game media, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control input circuit 633ab to which a detection signal from the sensor is input, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 A payout motor drive circuit 633ad.

  The payout control MPU 633aa has its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and its operation ( A watchdog timer for monitoring the system) (hereinafter referred to as “WDT with built-in payout control”) and a function for preventing fraud are also incorporated.

  The payout control input circuit 633ab does not have a reset function because a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to the various input terminals is not provided. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured so that the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

  The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, a payout control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function without a reset terminal, and It is composed of The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit with a reset function is a signal based on information obtained by resetting the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the payout control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit without the reset function is such that the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is not reset. The circuit is configured to be output from the various output terminals.

  A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing detection of the dispensing device 580 A detection signal from the sensor 591 and a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The detection signal from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are a payout control input circuit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab.

  Various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Further, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  When the payout control MPU 633aa completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit with a reset function.

  Also, the payout control MPU 633aa sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function as serial data, thereby providing a payout control output without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The payout control MPU 633aa is driven from the payout control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with a reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display 633c. By outputting a drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the error LED display 633c.

  The error LED display 633c is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 633c include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633 is notified, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570, and when the number “2” is displayed, it indicates that it is “ball gummy” (specifically Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B mesh with each other, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589, and the number “3” is displayed. When the "counting switch (Specifically, a failure has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number “5” is displayed, “retry” “Error” (specifically, that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” ( Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the game ball B in which the lower tray 202 is stored is informed that the game ball B is full), and when the number “7” is displayed, “CR” "Not connected" (indicating that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1), and the number "9" When displayed Informs that it is “in stock (award ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number) Yes.

  Also, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out as a prize ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control with a reset function. From the output circuit, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls is output to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown).

  Also, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls B and various information (game information, error contents related to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1). The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall computer. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and can control the main control board 1310 that can advance the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can be controlled and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the production, so that malfunction or failure does not occur. The hall computer grasps the number of game balls B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, so that the payout information of the game ball B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called so-called , Pitching information) and the player's game.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is sent from the payout control MPU 633aaa through a CR unit input / output circuit (not shown). The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the lending operation unit 220.

  Note that various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. As described above, the power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 has the capacitor BC0 (FIG. 189 etc.) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. See). The capacitor BC0 allows the payout control MPU 633aa to store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is turned off, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. Various types of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control input circuit when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab, and triggered by this, the payout control MPU 633aa is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b is based on a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing reference A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 and the will of the player. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an interface and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b that stores in advance various programs and various schedule data that define the progress of production, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are stored. SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and a real And backup power source 1510e which can also supply power during power failure to the time clock IC, and includes a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports, various parallel I / O ports, and the like.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs various kinds of control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as one process of the initial setting process when the power is turned on (including when power is restored from a power failure). Data) is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps as described above, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Transferred at high speed. As the control information (peripheral data), as described above, image data such as background images, character images, and design images for rendering various effect images on the effect display device 1600, the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data for defining light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, light extinction, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and games This is drive data for driving and controlling various movable effects provided in the board 5.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system, it reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred from the main control board 1310 to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands, and proceeds with the production. .

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads and reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands. In accordance with the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is read, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600. Various effects are advanced by performing control so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates drawing data for reading the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and drawing the image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, control to output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is performed. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state where it can accept screen data that defines the screen configuration, it outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 or the like by reading out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and generating and outputting them based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow. When a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker Audio signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) are output to 464 and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass frame 4 By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and reads the read schedule data. In accordance with the above, the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is output from the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2. It is read and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or driven to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5. The game board side drive data for outputting signals is SDRAM. 510c1 and 1510c2 are read out and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720, or driven to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the like. Door side drive data for outputting signals, and door side for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to full color LEDs or single color LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 The door side drive light emission data composed of the light emission data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from the various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side. The panel drive board 1720 is provided in the game board 5 based on the received game board side drive data (that is, a command) upon receiving game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a). In addition, a drive motor control circuit (not shown) that can output drive signals to various drive motors included in the various rendering units is provided.

  The detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), combined position) of the various production units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are the panel drive board 1720 and the surrounding It is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the control input circuit. In addition, a detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the rendering operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevation detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348. Are received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Further, signals from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power generation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 includes a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC + 12V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Kinds are made and supplied.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether its own system is running away.

[7-3-1. Panel drive board]
Here, the panel drive board 1720 which is a subordinate board of the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. Here, the relationship with each decoration board of the game board 5 will be described, and then the relationship with various drive motors of various rendering units and the relationship with various detection sensors will be described.

[7-3-1a. Relationship with each decorative board of game board
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. The game board-side light emission data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from the various serial I / O ports to the decorative boards of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. Each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided with one or a plurality of LED constant current drive circuits capable of causing a predetermined constant current to flow through the LEDs.

  As each decoration board of the game board 5, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 that is decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 in the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is mounted. The second pattern 262 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620 that is decorated by emitting light from the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 in the table effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000. And a decorative substrate 2622 for use.

  Further, as each decorative board of the game board 5, an upper left panel decoration on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 and radiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 is mounted. There is a substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are arranged in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted.

  In addition, as the decorative boards of the game board 5, the back-under-bottom post-decorative board 3121 on which a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the back-bottom movable decorative body 3110 in the back-bottom effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are mounted. There are a decorative board 3122 and a back-side moving decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs that illuminate and decorate the back-bottom moving arm 3130 in the back-bottom effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

  In addition, as the decorative boards of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the back movable ornament body 3210 in the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are mounted, respectively. There are a front decoration board and a back movement decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the back movement arm 3230 in the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

  In addition, as each decorative board of the game board 5, a back left top front stage decoration on which a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa for illuminating and decorating the front stage decoration part 3312 of the back top left movable decoration body 3310 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is mounted. There are a board 3311a and a back left lower front stage decoration board 3321a on which a plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa that illuminate and decorate the front stage decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 187, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa for illuminating and decorating the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are mounted as the decoration boards of the game board 5. And a plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa that illuminate and decorate the front decoration portion 3422 of the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 in the back right production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are mounted. There is a step decoration substrate 3421a.

[7-3-1b. Relationship with various drive motors of various production units]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads out game board side drive data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5. Are transmitted as commands to the panel drive board 1720 from various serial I / O ports. As described above, when the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) by the drive motor control circuit (not shown), the drive motor control circuit (not shown) Based on the board-side drive data (that is, command), a drive signal is output to various drive motors provided in various presentation units provided in the game board 5.

  Returning to FIG. 186, as the various drive motors provided for the various effect units, the lower back rotation drive motor that rotates the rear decoration part 3116 and the middle decoration part 3118 of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 in the lower back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. 3112 and a back-bottom lift drive motor 3151 that lifts and lowers the back-bottom movable decorative body 3110 by rotating the back-bottom moving arm 3130 by rotating the back-bottom lift arm in the back-bottom effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. is there.

  In addition, as various drive motors provided in the various effect units, a back rotation drive motor 3212 that rotates the rear decoration part 3216 and the middle decoration part 3218 of the back movable decoration body 3210 in the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, A back up / down drive motor 3251 that lifts the back movable decorative body 3210 up and down by rotating the back up / down moving arm 3130 and raising / lowering the back up / down moving arm 3230 by turning the back up / down moving arm in the back production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000. There is.

  In addition, as various drive motors provided in various effect units, a back left upper rotation drive motor 3313 for rotating the front decoration part 3312 of the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, and the back of the back unit 3000. In the left effect unit 3300, a back left lower rotation drive motor 3323 that rotates the front decoration portion 3322 of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. A back left movement drive motor 3332 for moving 3320 and a back left traverse drive motor 3351 for rotating the back left traverse arm in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 to traverse the back left movement arm 3330. is there.

  Further, as various drive motors provided in the various effect units, as shown in FIG. 187, a back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 that rotates the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. The back right lower rotation drive motor 3423 for rotating the front stage decoration portion 3422 of the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, and the back upper right movable of the back unit 3000 in the back right rendering unit 3400. The back right movement drive motor 3432 for moving the decoration body 3410 and the back right lower movable decoration body 3420 and the back right traverse arm in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are rotated to traverse the back right movement arm 3430. And a back right traverse drive motor 3451.

[7-3-1c. Relationship with various detection sensors]
As described above, the detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), combined positions) included in the various production units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are panel driving. The signals are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the substrate 1720 and the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  As various detection sensors for detecting positions (standby position (original position), combined position) provided for various effect units, as shown in FIG. 186, the back bottom movable decorative body in the back bottom effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 3110 An optical back rotation detection sensor 3120 for detecting a standby position (original position) between the rear decoration unit 3116 and the middle decoration unit 3118 and a back lower lift arm in the back lower production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 are rotated. Then, by raising and lowering the lower back movement arm 3130, an optical lower back standby position detection sensor (not shown) that detects the standby position (original position) that has moved the lower back movable decorative body 3110 downward, and the rear unit 3000 The lower back movable arm 3130 is rotated by rotating the lower back lifting arm 3130 to move the back lower moving arm 3130 up and down. And back under the moving position detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the position moved the body 3110 to the most upward, there is.

  In addition, the standby position (original position), the first combined position, and the second combined position of the back lower movable decorative body 3110 described above are detected signals from the back lower standby position detection sensor and the back lower upper movement position detection sensor. Based on this, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets it.

  As the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each merged position) provided for the various effect units, the rear decoration unit 3216 on the back movable ornament body 3210 in the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 and An optical back rotation detection sensor 3220 for detecting a standby position (original position) with respect to the middle decoration unit 3218 and a back up / down arm in the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are rotated to move the back down movement arm 3130. An optical backside standby position detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the standby position (original position) where the backside movable decorative body 3210 is moved upward most by raising and lowering the backside moving arm 3230, and the back of the back unit 3000 Rotating the back lifting arm in the top production unit 3200 to lift the back bottom moving arm 3130 and the back top moving arm 3230 And back vertical movement position detection sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the position moved the back on a movable decorative body 3210 to the most downward by, there is.

  The standby position (original position), the first combined position, and the second combined position of the above-described back movable decorative body 3210 are based on detection signals from the back standby position detection sensor and the back vertical movement position detection sensor. Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  As the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), combined positions) provided for various effect units, the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. The magnetic back left top magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back left top front decorative substrate 3311a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position, and the back left bottom movable in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 The magnetic back left bottom magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab mounted on the back left bottom front stage decoration board 3321a that detects the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front stage decoration portion 3322 of the decoration body 3320, and the back unit 3000 Light for detecting an initial state in which the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left effect unit 3300 is located at the left moving end. The back left initial state detection sensor (not shown) and the back left movement arm 3330 in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 for detecting the state where the back left moving arm 3330 is located at the right moving end are not shown. The state detection sensor and the state in which the base (left side) of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 extends vertically and the front end faces rightward, and the base of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 An optical back left top / bottom initial state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a state where the side (left side) extends vertically and the front end faces right (see the VR creation drawing V135 (a)), and the back unit 3000 In the back left rendering unit 3300, the lower side of the upper left movable decorative body 3310 approaches the vertical center of the movable arm base 3331 and the lower left movable. And back left vertical approaching state detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type upper side of Kazaritai 3320 detects a state close to the center in the vertical direction of the moving arm base 3331, there is.

  Note that the standby position (original position) of the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 is based on a detection signal from a magnetic back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back upper front stage decoration board 3311a. The stand-by position (original position) of the front decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the magnetic back left lower magnetic pole change detection mounted on the back left lower front decoration board 3321a is detected. The peripheral control IC 1510a sets the detection signal from the circuit 3321ab.

  The initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back left moving arm 3330 described above are set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the back left initial state detection sensor and the back left movement state detection sensor. In addition, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the above-described back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are determined from the back left / upward initial state detection sensor and the back left / upper / lower approach state detection sensor. Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detected signal. Thereby, the standby position (original position), the first merged position, and the second merged position of the above-described back left upper movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and back left movable arm 3330 are detected as the back left initial state detection. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the sensor, the back left movement state detection sensor, the back left up / down initial state detection sensor, and the back left up / down approach state detection sensor.

  As various detection sensors for detecting positions (standby position (original position), combined positions) provided in various effect units, as shown in FIG. 187, the back upper right movable decorative body in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 A magnetic back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab mounted on the back upper right front stage decoration board 3411a that detects the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front stage decoration unit 3412 of 3410, and the back right of the back unit 3000 A magnetic back lower right magnetic pole mounted on the back lower right front stage decoration board 3421a that detects the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front stage decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 in the effect unit 3400. The change detection circuit 3421ab and the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are positioned at the right moving end. An optical back right initial state detection sensor (not shown) that detects the initial state and an optical type that detects a state in which the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is positioned at the left moving end. And a state in which the base (right side) of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 extends vertically and the tip is directed to the left. An optical back right and up / down initial state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a state in which the base (right side) of the lower movable ornament 3420 extends vertically and the tip is directed leftward, and the back right effect unit of the back unit 3000 A state in which the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in 3400 approaches the vertical center of the movable arm base 3431 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420. And back right vertical approaching state detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the state in which the lateral sides close to the center in the vertical direction of the moving arm base 3431, there is.

  Note that the standby position (original position) of the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is based on a detection signal from a magnetic back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a. In addition, the standby position (original position) of the front decoration part 3422 of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the magnetic back lower right mounted on the back lower right front decoration board 3421a. The peripheral control IC 1510a sets the detection signal from the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab.

  The initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back right movement arm 3430 described above are set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the back right initial state detection sensor and the back right movement state detection sensor. In addition, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 described above are a back right up / down initial state detection sensor and a back right up / down approach detection sensor. Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the basis of the detection signal from. Thereby, the standby position (original position), the first combined position, and the second combined position of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the back right movable arm 3430 described above are the back right initial state. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the detection sensor, the back right movement state detection sensor, the back right up / down initial state detection sensor, and the back right up / down approach state detection sensor.

[8. Ground wire system]
The frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 is capable of once collecting the electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall (ground earth). Here, a system of ground wires by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 188 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 188 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 188 (d) is a table showing an explanation of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the frame ground substrate 559 has a mounting surface facing downward (that is, a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are directed downward). It is housed and attached inside a substrate housing portion 551aa formed on the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, ECN2 arranged in a line from the right side to the left side along the upper side, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. The earth terminals ECN1 to ECN5 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 188 (d), the earth terminal ECN1 is an earth provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected via the ground connection terminal and the island facility ground wire in the island facility of the game hall as the island facility ground. The earth terminal ECN3 is illustrated as a sphere tank ground on the sphere tank 552 shown in FIG. 102B (specifically, on the outside of the side wall of the sphere tank 552 near the substrate housing portion 551aa). One end of the ball tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw that is not The other end of the ground wire is electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 serves as a body frame metal ground, which is a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to a metal screw (not shown) on the upper side of the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 (specifically, the other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected). The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal provided on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG.

  In the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 serves as a power source ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are each electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. In addition, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 as a power source ground, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed. The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN3 is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 and island facility ground wire as the island facility ground and removed, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the metal frame metal ground. The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire is guided to the earth ground of the island equipment in the game hall and removed, and the electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is Via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, the island equipment ground wire It is guided to the earth ground of the island capital of the gaming hall is adapted to be removed.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island equipment of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are ground in the island facility of the game hall or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can stay are attached.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the discharge unit 560 where static electricity is likely to accumulate, and the ball tank 552 which is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as a result of the static electricity being easily accumulated. In the frame ground substrate 559, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground, and the body frame metal are disposed in the vicinity of the unit 560 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4. The earth terminal ECN4 as ground is gradually attenuated by passing electromagnetic noise through the resistors ER1 and ER2, respectively, to suppress high voltage instantaneous discharge, and the island equipment from the earth terminal ECN2 as island equipment ground It became possible to lead to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the ground wire That. In other words, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 that is likely to accumulate static electricity from the frame ground substrate 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground called a frame ground. By guiding to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall, electromagnetic noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall.

  In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are regions that are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise as described above. The ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground is used for the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the frame ground board 559 as described above. A large earth terminal is used because it is guided to the earth ground of the island facility and removed. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 adopting these large-sized ground terminals are squares having a cross-sectional shape of 1.14 mm on a side, rated current: 7 A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 18), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable electric wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and its height is 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. 188 (a) (earth terminals ECN2 to ECN2). When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is smaller than the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 described above, and the current is small. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are small-sized ground terminals. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting this small-sized ground terminal are squares having a cross section of 0.64 mm on a side, rated current: 3 A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 22), rated voltage: 250V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and as shown in FIG. 188 (a), the height is 7 mm (on ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5) When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

  In the present embodiment, each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, main body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Compared to each ground wire (interface ground wire, power ground wire), the current caused by electromagnetic noise is large, so each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The thickness of the ground wire (main body frame ground wire) is larger than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1, ECN5. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559 is 1.6 mm as shown in FIG. 188 (a).

  As described above, since the electromagnetic noise generated at various places is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall, it can be removed. The earth substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static eliminating action.

  Further, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in each place is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall from the frame ground substrate 559, the pachinko machine 1 The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 disposed on the upper side of the pachinko machine 1 is routed to the power supply substrate 630 disposed on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and electromagnetic noise is temporarily aggregated on the power supply substrate 630 to make island facilities in the game hall Compared with the configuration in which it is guided to the earth ground and removed, the ground wire (wiring) can be routed extremely easily.

  Further, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 can be arranged in the substrate housing portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a state of being close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 are provided. Terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, 10 external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from the back) are provided. ) And a hall computer provided in the game hall, respectively, by wiring, an earth terminal ECN2 as an island equipment ground in the frame ground board 559, and an earth connection terminal provided in the island equipment of the game hall Can be performed as a series of operations by electrically connecting the island equipment ground wires (wiring). Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  Further, since the frame ground board 559 can be disposed in the board housing portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island equipment of the game hall are provided. Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game, and the effects) provided in the game board 5 with the island equipment earth wires (wiring) for electrically connecting the earth connection terminals provided. The peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the peripheral control board, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. Adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) and the like included in the device can be eliminated.

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the main body frame 4 is close to the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly influenced by electromagnetic noise. The main body frame base unit 500 is made of a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and the frame ground substrate 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 as a sphere tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground. The length of the electrically connected ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) is made extremely short, and electromagnetic wave noise is guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. be able to.

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the ball tank 552 which tends to accumulate static electricity and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting a static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the main body frame metal ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting a static elimination action, and the power source. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a discharging action, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a discharging action. It can be configured to be the shortest in comparison with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the main body frame 4 is close to the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly influenced by electromagnetic noise. The main body frame base unit 500 includes a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and a frame ground substrate 559 includes a ground terminal ECN3 as a sphere tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground. Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, so that the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected, and the island facility from the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 Lead to earth ground of the game hall island facility through the ground wire and remove it It is possible.

By the way, to make it easier to supply the AC power supply of the CR unit, the grounding is once concentrated on the power supply board located on the CR unit side at the bottom of the body frame, and connected to the earth ground of the island facility via the power supply board. Then, a gaming machine to be grounded has been proposed (for example, JP 2012-120593 A (paragraph [0335], FIG. 84, FIG. 85)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged below in gaming machines. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground in the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the prize ball device or the like of the gaming machine toward the lower power supply board. By drawing the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic wave noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way, which may have an unexpected effect. Also, since the ground wires are concentrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs in the power supply board, it may affect the ground, or conversely, current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. Also, when the grounding point of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to connect the ground wires gathered by the power supply board again from below to connect them.
[8-1. Conductor floating against the ground]
Next, members provided in the game board as handling of a floating conductor with respect to the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is a schematic diagram of handling of a floating conductor with respect to the ground included in various effect units included in the game board.

  As described above, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 and the payout unit 560 is disposed on the side of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5. The game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities in the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise.

  In the game board 5, various effect units are provided in the back unit 3000. These various production units include structures used for improving rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanisms, electrical parts (including housings of electrical parts), and conductive plating applied to decorative structures. And a plurality of conductors such as a structure (including a decorative structure) molded by a conductive resin. The game board 5 is provided with various substrates, and these various substrates are arranged close to various effect units. In addition, the influence of these conductors on the electric circuit when electrostatic discharge is performed depends on the size of the surface area. When the surface area of the conductor is small, the amount of charge that can be stored is so small that the influence on the electric circuit due to electrostatic discharge is negligible, and it is not necessary to remove electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge. On the other hand, if the surface area of the conductor is large, the amount of charge that can be stored is large, and the influence of the electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit cannot be ignored, and it is necessary to safely remove the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge. .

  In a state where these conductors are floating with respect to the ground, the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the above-described electromagnetic noise, and thus electrostatic induction occurs in the conductors under the influence of electromagnetic noise. If it does so, when the electrostatic discharge is carried out from the conductor which floated with respect to the ground, there exists a possibility that the various board | substrate with which the game board 5 is equipped may be damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the plurality of conductors of the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, if at least electrostatic discharge is performed, the various boards provided in the game board 5 are affected and malfunctioned. A structure that does not float against the ground is adopted for things that may be damaged or that may be damaged.

[8-1-1. Handling of conductors in the lower back production unit and the upper production unit]
The back bottom production unit 3100 (the back top production unit 3200) will be described. As described above, the back bottom movement arm 3130 (the back top movement arm 3230) is illustrated so as to cover its back side in order to increase its rigidity. A metal reinforcing plate for the back and bottom moving arm is provided, and one of the left and right ends of the reinforcing plate for the back and bottom moving arm that is disposed in the vicinity of the back and bottom lifting drive motor 3151 is predetermined in the vertical direction. It is attached to a metal slide rail 3151ns (below back move arm slide rail 3251ns) that is slidable by a distance dimension, and the other one not disposed near the back lift drive motor 3151 is not shown. Sliding along the metal cylinder (sliding the surface of the metal cylinder along the longitudinal direction of the cylinder) Reluctant moving) back under the moving arm sliding unit (not shown) (which may be molded of a conductive resin, a non-conductive resin may be molded.) It is attached.

  In the present embodiment, among at least a plurality of conductors provided in the lower back effect unit 3100 (back upper effect unit 3200), at least when electrostatic discharge occurs, the various boards provided in the game board 5 are affected and malfunctions. Where the surface area of a single conductor is greater than the predetermined surface area, which is likely to be damaged or damaged, it is selected as a target that does not float on the ground. It is in a state where it is brought into contact, fixed and conducted. For example, a metal back-bottom moving arm reinforcing plate and a metal back-bottom moving arm slide rail 3151ns (metal back-bottom moving arm reinforcing plate and back-up moving arm slide rail 3251ns) are attached. It is in a conductive state where it is structurally contacted and electrically connected.

  As shown in FIG. 264 (a), the lower back moving arm 3130 (back upper moving arm 3230) has a predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction arranged in the vicinity of the lower back lifting drive motor 3151 (back upper lift driving motor 3251). The metal housing of the slide rail 3151ns (back slide arm 3251ns for back movement arm) and the metal of the bottom lift drive motor 3151 (back lift motor 3251) which can be slid only by the metal. Of the pair of mounting holes 3151n, 3151f (3251n, 3251f) provided in the case made of steel, the mounting hole 3151n (3252n) closer to the back lower moving arm slide rail 3151ns (back upper moving arm slide rail 3251ns) And the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc for the back bottom production unit (the back top production unit). The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251nc) is electrically connected, and the mounting hole 3151f (3251f) farther from the back lower moving arm slide rail 3151ns (back upper moving arm slide rail 3251ns) and the panel The drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the lower conductor effect unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc (back upper effect unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251fc).

  The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc for the back direction production unit (the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251nc for the back production unit) has wiring terminals crimped at both ends thereof, and the wiring terminal at one end thereof moves below the back. The arm slide rail 3151ns (back moving arm slide rail 3251ns) is fixed by screwing to the metal housing, and the other end wiring terminal is connected to the back lower lift drive motor 3151 (back upper lift drive motor). 3251) is fixed by being screwed into an attachment hole 3151n (3251n) provided in the metal casing. At this time, the metal case of the lower back raising / lowering drive motor 3151 (back upper raising / lowering driving motor 3251) forming the attachment hole 3151n (3251n) is fixed to the lower back effect unit 3100 (back upper effect unit 3200).

  The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc for the lower back effect unit (second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251fc for the rear effect unit) has a wiring terminal crimped at one end and a connector provided at the other end. The terminal for wiring is fixed by screwing into a mounting hole 3151f (3251f) provided in the metal casing of the back lower up / down drive motor 3151 (back up / down drive motor 3251), and the other end connector is connected to the panel. The drive board 1720 is inserted into a corresponding connector and fixed. At this time, the metal casing of the lower elevating drive motor 3151 (back upper elevating drive motor 3251) forming the attachment hole 3151f (3251f) is fixed to the lower back effect unit 3100 (back upper effect unit 3200). The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc for the lower back effect unit (second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251fc for the rear effect unit) is electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720 via the resistor Rs0 (resistor Via Rs1) and ground (GND). The ground (GND) line of the panel drive board 1720 is a ground of various boards such as a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards, and various decoration boards. It is electrically connected to the (GND) line.

  The plurality of electric wires (harnesses) for driving the lower lift drive motor 3151 (back upper lift drive motor 3251) are provided with connectors, and the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3151fc for the back lower effect unit (first for the rear effect unit). The two conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251fc) is inserted into a corresponding connector on the panel drive board 1720 different from the connector into which the connector is inserted.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the lower back effect unit 3100 (the upper back effect unit 3200), at least when electrostatic discharge is performed, the various boards included in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunctioned. For the case where the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area, there is a possibility of being damaged or damaged, and each of them is structurally contacted and fixed to be in a conductive state. The bottom back moving arm reinforcing plate and the metal back bottom moving arm slide rail 3151ns (metal back bottom moving arm reinforcing plate and back top moving arm slide rail 3251ns) are structurally contacted. These conductors are electrically connected to each other, and these conductors are connected to the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc for the back and bottom effect unit. The metal case of the drive motor 3151, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 fc for the back and bottom effect unit, and the resistor Rs 0 of the panel drive board 1720 are grounded to the ground (GND) (these conductors are The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251nc for the rear effect unit, the metal casing of the rear raising / lowering drive motor 3251, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3251fc for the rear effect unit, and the resistance Rs1 of the panel drive board 1720 are provided. Via the ground (GND)).

  Thereby, if at least electrostatic discharge is performed among a plurality of conductors provided in the lower back effect unit 3100 (back upper effect unit 3200), the various boards included in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunctioned. Because it is configured so that these conductors do not float from the ground, as the surface area of the single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area as there is something that may be damaged or Even if electromagnetic wave noise enters these conductors, this electromagnetic wave noise is safely guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) serving as a circuit ground via the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720. Can be removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and damages of various boards provided in the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

  In addition, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters into these conductors, the electric circuit part in various boards provided in the game board 5 is not affected by malfunction or failure even if electromagnetic noise enters the conductor. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and the impact of electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the occurrence state of the probability variation Player discomfort such as disappearance can be prevented.

[8-1-2. Handling of conductors in back left production unit and back right production unit]
The back left effect unit 3300 (the back right effect unit 3400) will be described. The moving arm base 3331 of the back left effect unit 3300 (the moving arm base 3431 of the back right effect unit 3400) is the back left of the both ends in the vertical direction. A metal back left, one of which is arranged in the vicinity of a back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) provided in the traverse mechanism 3350 (back right traverse mechanism 3450) is slidable by a predetermined distance in the horizontal direction. It is attached to the moving arm slide rail 3351 ns (back right moving arm slide rail 3451 ns), and the other one not disposed in the vicinity of the back left traversing drive motor 3351 (back right traversing drive motor 3451) is made of a metal not shown. Slide along the cylindrical rod (the surface of the metal cylindrical rod A back left moving arm sliding portion (not shown) that moves while sliding along the longitudinal direction (may be molded with a conductive resin or may be molded with a non-conductive resin). Installed.

  In the present embodiment, among at least a plurality of conductors provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (the back right effect unit 3400), at least when electrostatic discharge occurs, the various boards provided in the game board 5 are affected and malfunctions. In contrast to the case where the surface area of a single conductor is larger than a predetermined surface area, there is a possibility that the surface of the conductor alone will not float on the ground. For example, a metal back left moving arm slide rail 3351 ns (back right moving arm slide rail 3451 ns).

  As shown in FIG. 264 (b), the moving arm base 3331 of the back left effect unit 3300 (the moving arm base 3431 of the back right effect unit 3400) is in the vicinity of the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451). The metal housing of the back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns (back right moving arm slide rail 3451ns), which is slidable by a predetermined distance dimension in the left-right direction, and the back left traversing drive motor 3351 Of the pair of mounting holes 3351n, 3351f (3451n, 3451f) provided in the metal casing of the (back right traverse drive motor 3451), the back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns (back right moving arm slide rail 3451ns). The mounting hole 3351n (3452n) closer to the The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351nc (back right effect unit first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451nc) is electrically connected and the back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns (back right moving arm slide rail). 3451ns) and the relay board 3351a provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (the relay board 3451a provided in the back right effect unit 3400) of the back left effect unit 3300 to prevent the second conductor potential fluctuation of the back left effect unit. It is electrically connected via the wiring 3351fc (second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451fc for the back right effect unit).

  The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351nc for the back left effect unit (the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451nc for the back right effect unit) has a wiring terminal crimped at both ends thereof, and the wiring terminal at one end thereof moves to the back left. The arm slide rail 3351ns (back right moving arm slide rail 3451ns) is screwed and fixed to the metal casing, and the wiring terminal at the other end is connected to the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor). 3451) is fixed by being screwed into a mounting hole 3351n (3451n) provided in the metal casing. At this time, the metal housing of the back left traversing drive motor 3351 (back right traversing drive motor 3451) that forms the attachment hole 3351n (3451n) is fixed to the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400).

  The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351fc for the back left rendering unit (second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451fc for the right right rendering unit) has a wiring terminal crimped at one end and a connector provided at the other end. The terminal for wiring is fixed by being screwed into a mounting hole 3351f (3451f) provided in the metal casing of the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451), and the connector at the other end is back. The relay board 3351a provided in the left effect unit 3300 (the relay board 3451a provided in the back right effect unit 3400) is inserted into a corresponding connector and fixed. At this time, the metal casing of the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) forming the attachment hole 3351f (3451f) is fixed to the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400). The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351fc for the back left effect unit (second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451fc for the back right effect unit) is provided on the relay board 3351a (the back right effect unit 3400) provided in the back left effect unit 3300. When electrically connected to the relay substrate 3451a), it is grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2 (via the resistor Rs3). The ground (GND) lines of the relay board 3351a provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (the relay board 3451a provided in the back right effect unit 3400) are the panel drive board 1720, the power supply board 630, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, various relay substrates, various decorative substrates, and other substrates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line.

  A plurality of electrical wires (harnesses) for driving the back left traverse drive motor 3351 (back right traverse drive motor 3451) are provided with connectors, and the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3351fc for back left effect unit (for back right effect unit). The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451fc) is inserted into the corresponding connector in the relay board 3351a (the relay board 3451a provided in the back right effect unit 3400) provided in the back left effect unit 3300 different from the connector into which the connector is inserted. . The relay board 3351a provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (the relay board 3451a provided in the back right effect unit 3400) is electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720 via electrical wiring (harness). The electrical wiring (harness) is provided with a connector at both ends thereof, and is inserted into a corresponding connector on the panel drive board 1720 and fixed.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (the back right effect unit 3400), at least when electrostatic discharge is performed, the various boards provided in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunctioned. For example, the conductor of the metal back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns has a back left effect, whereas the surface area of the single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area because there is a risk of damage or damage. First conductor potential fluctuation wiring 3351nc for unit, metal housing of back left traverse drive motor 3351, second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3351fc for back left rendering unit, and relay board 3351a provided in back left rendering unit 3300 Is grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2. (The metal back rail 3451ns conductor for the back right moving arm is the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451nc for the back right effect unit, the metal housing of the back right traverse drive motor 3451, the second right effect unit second conductor. The conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3451fc and the resistor Rs3 of the relay board 3451a provided in the back right effect unit 3400 are grounded to the ground (GND)).

  As a result, among at least a plurality of conductors provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (back right effect unit 3400), if at least electrostatic discharge is performed, the various boards provided in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunctions may occur. Because it is configured so that these conductors do not float from the ground, as the surface area of the single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area as there is something that may be damaged or Even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes into these conductors, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered through the conductor is connected via the resistance Rs2 of the relay board 3351a provided in the back left effect unit 3300 (the resistance of the relay board 3451a provided in the back right effect unit 3400). (Via Rs3) and lead to the circuit ground (ground of various boards (GND)) as a circuit ground for safe removal It can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and damages of various boards provided in the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

  In addition, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters into these conductors, the electric circuit part in various boards provided in the game board 5 is not affected by malfunction or failure even if electromagnetic noise enters the conductor. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and the impact of electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the occurrence state of the probability variation Player discomfort such as disappearance can be prevented.

  As described above, electromagnetic noise generated in various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall to be removed. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination action. That is, a path for safely removing electromagnetic noise generated at various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 to the earth ground of the island equipment in the game hall is formed. On the other hand, if at least electrostatic discharge is performed among a plurality of conductors of various rendering units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the various boards provided in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunctioned. It can be safely removed by introducing it to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) that becomes the circuit ground so that it does not float on the ground for things that may be damaged or that may be damaged it can. In other words, among the plurality of conductors of the various effect units in the game board 5, if at least electrostatic discharge is performed, the various boards provided in the game board 5 may be affected and may malfunction or be damaged. A path is formed in which electromagnetic noise can be guided to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) serving as a circuit ground and safely removed. As described above, independent paths for removing electromagnetic noise that are independent of each other are formed in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 and are not affected by each other. Therefore, also in this respect, malfunction and damage due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented.

  As described above, the influence of the conductor on the electric circuit when electrostatic discharge is performed depends on the size of the surface area. Further, the ease of electrostatic discharge varies depending on the distance between the conductor and the electric circuit. Therefore, in this embodiment, taking into account the size of the surface area of the conductor and the distance between the conductor and the electric circuit, the electromagnetic noise of the plurality of conductors is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall for safety. The conductors that need to be removed are individually selected (whether or not they are conductors that are dropped to earth ground), and the circuit ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) that serves as the circuit ground for electromagnetic noise. )), And the conductors that need to be removed safely are individually selected (whether or not they are conductors that are dropped to the circuit ground).

[9. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 included in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 194. 189 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 190 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 191 is a view taken along arrow B in FIG. 190, and FIG. FIG. 193 is a silk print of an electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (No. 2), and FIG. 194 is an electronic component that has been discontinued. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary. Here, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described first, followed by a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape, fuse fusing confirmation, capacitor capacity, and measures for discontinuing manufacturing electronic components.

  As described above, the island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which reduces the AC 100V commercial power supply voltage to the AC 24V gaming machine power supply voltage. When a power cord plug (not shown) is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines in an island facility of the game hall, AC24V is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power board 630 creates various power sources (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc.) from the AC 24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them from the power board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. doing.

[9-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 189, the power supply board 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a power destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

  AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm). (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal) and are input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a through the B-type fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, the line 24 of AC24V (hereinafter referred to as “AC24V1” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “L side”)) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a. An AC 24V line 2 (hereinafter referred to as “AC24V2” (hereinafter also referred to as “N side”)) is input to the input side terminal 1 of 630a. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

  When a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates the power switch 630a to turn on, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected to each other, and AC24V1 is transferred to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically conductive, and the supply of AC24V2 is started to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates the power switch 630a to turn OFF, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 become electrically non-conductive, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. While the supply is cut off, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically non-conductive, and the supply of AC24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. Thereby, the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by the OFF operation of the power switch 630a.

  In addition, with the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall turned on, a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. There are cases where the power is turned on all at once, and there are cases where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off simultaneously by turning off the breakers of the game hall.

[9-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, which is a circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise, and a choke coil L1, and the output of the power switch 630a. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC includes capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. Capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. Electrically connected. One end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is connected via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the earth connection terminal DCN5 as the frame ground FG2. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 188 via a power supply ground line (not shown).

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC includes a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in the AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. One end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a.

  The AC24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24VA. The AC24V2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC and also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24V. . The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise disturbance. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the CR unit that is not connected, and AC24VA and AC24V are supplied to the CR unit (not shown).

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[9-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q1 and Q2, and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and Zener diodes.

  The AC24V1 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, respectively.

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to DC by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2 2 and output respectively. The package types of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type, and are fixed to the radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 190). ing. The heat dissipating fins HS1 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  As described above, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6 in addition to the rectifier circuit 630c, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. Are respectively input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified direct currents respectively output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d through the choke coil L2.

[9-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q3 and Q4 and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and inductors.

  The direct current from which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and directly to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. Respectively. A gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit is input to the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current from which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is controlled by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to suppress the generation of higher harmonics, the power factor is improved, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Are output respectively. The package types of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the package types of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above). It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 190). The radiating fins HS2 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[9-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The plurality of electrolytic capacitors have their negative terminals grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, respectively, and their positive terminals are input with direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsating current from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and the fuse FUSE3 (this embodiment) In the form, it is the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, through a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals on both ends are made of metal), B-type fusing stipulated by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law) Then, DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE3 becomes the + 35V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-5. Power generation circuit]
When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply generation circuit 630f generates direct current + 12V and direct current + 5V from the input direct current. The power generation circuit 630f outputs the generated direct current + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board in the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the generated direct current + 5V from the + 5V terminal to output the direct current + 12V from the power supply board 630. 1 is supplied to each substrate inside. The power supply line supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the + 12V power supply line of each board in the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is + 5V of each board in the pachinko machine 1. Power line.

  The power generation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor correction circuit 630d by performing control to output the power factor correction gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via the diodes D5 and D6. The power generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output a power destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power destruction circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the game hall, and is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than DC + 35V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  The power generation circuit 630f has a predetermined value (threshold value: this embodiment) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. In this case, the power supply breakdown circuit gate signal can be output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g.

  When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a power destruction circuit gate signal to the power destruction circuit 630g, the power destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters a short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode, when the power supply switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By flowing into the CGND terminal of the creating circuit 630f all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

  The GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 to which the GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is grounded becomes the ground (GND) line of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-6. Power destruction circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as “FET”) Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 that is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal.

  When the power destruction circuit gate signal is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 is activated and the source terminal is connected to the source terminal of the FET Q5. When a large current flows toward (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, thereby maintaining a short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive. Is done. The FET Q5 is the same package type (TO-220F described above) as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. , Q2, Q3, Q4, unlike Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, they are arranged at positions where they are not in contact with the radiation fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is disposed while the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 are disposed, and is not fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 190 and 191). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 through heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that they are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, the FET Q5 is short due to heat generation when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent). This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

  In other words, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24 V, the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When inserted, the power supply generation circuit 630f has a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, it is set to about 50 V.), the power supply breakdown circuit gate signal is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. In the ON operation state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 which is in the short mode state in the power supply breakdown circuit 630g. By flowing into the CGND terminal all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted, so that only the power supply board 630 is destroyed and the plug of the power supply cord is commercial. A which is power supply voltage Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 100 V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. In the state where the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is destroyed, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced with ones that are not blown, and the power cord plug is AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the game hall island facility. Even if it is inserted into the power outlet, the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g is already destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so that the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c And power supply destruction circuit 630g When a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the short mode state, a large current flows through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 or Both will melt again. In other words, if the power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is not replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has not been destroyed, the plug of the power supply cord is connected to the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines, the game cannot be started.

[9-1-7. Backup power circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is connected to the capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the plus (+) terminal. The minus (−) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main power line serving as a backup power supply line from the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A circuit is formed in which a wiring pattern for taking out VBB and a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 185 is formed. Yes.

  That is, the minus (−) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). Main VBB that serves as a backup power supply line to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 from between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the payout control The payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the substrate 633 has a circuit divided into two systems: a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the + 5V power line) is a Schottky barrier diode D20. To the capacitor BC0 to charge the capacitor BC0, and supply the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM. The payout control board 633a of the payout control board 633 provides the payout control MPU 633aa with the payout control built-in RAM and stores various information stored in the payout control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (including when the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off all at once by turning off the breakers in the game hall), or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In such a case, the direct current + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response, capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, while the Schottky barrier diode D20 prevents the supply to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM by being supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is held, and supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

  In other words, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off all at once by turning off the breakers of the game hall), or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Then, even if the direct current + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0, the capacitor BC0 discharges to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided is held and stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Various information is stored.

[9-2. Method for identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 of the power factor correction circuit 630d and the Schottky. The barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FETQ5 of the power supply breakdown circuit 630g have the same package type (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, long Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal).

  FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different types of electronic components, but FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that are not destroyed, and the FETQ5 is the only electronic component that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the only electronic components among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 that are mounted on the power supply substrate 630 and have the same shape. In order to make it easy to identify the components, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has a different characteristic from the others.

  Specifically, for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are electronic components that are not destroyed, as shown in FIG. Lines and white thick lines indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are printed as silk prints on the silk print TSLK1 to 4 on the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10, and on the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4. TSLK5-8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The white thick line is the side fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 190, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 need to be disposed adjacent to each other in order to fix them to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the white outline silk print on which the HS2 is arranged and the white thick line portions of the silk prints TSLK1 to 8 are connected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), for the FETQ5 which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, a white outline and a plurality of white oblique lines arranged at equal intervals within the outline are shown. Silk printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, with ad1 and a white thick line indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged as silk printing. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 have the same shape, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 By visually observing the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among TSLK1 to 9, which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is compared with other electronic components. The electronic component can be identified. This makes it possible to very easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component that is destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape.

  In addition, when a person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to a staff such as a game hall clerk by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern is displayed. By instructing to search, the staff of the game hall clerk and the like can accurately grasp the position of the FETQ5, so that the person in charge of the service center and the staff of the game hall clerk and the like can easily communicate with each other. Become.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to the staff such as the game hall clerk by telephone, the staff such as the game hall clerk will follow the instructions of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630, it is possible to identify the FET Q5 to be noted. Therefore, the notable FET Q5 among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from the other electronic components FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different electronic components as described above, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage is AC 100V higher than the AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. Is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of the power supply, as described above, the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed and the short mode is maintained, and a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Blows out. In other words, as a trace that the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, one or both of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are destroyed. Yes. Therefore, in this embodiment, printing is performed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the electronic components to be destroyed among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 can be easily identified as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630. The silk printing that has different characteristics from others is adopted.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even if the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is white. Are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk printing.

  On the other hand, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as evidence that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, are shown in FIG. 193 (b). In this way, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solid white are printed as silk, and the silk prints FSLK2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. That is, the white area solid ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are soldered to a power supply board 630, a support fitting (not shown) is soldered to the power supply board 630. The area ad2 can be visually observed, and the area ad2 which is a solid white area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is transparent inside the white outline. It can be surely seen through a transparent glass tube.

  Thus, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk prints FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By visually observing the solid-coated area ad2, it is possible to identify which electronic component of the same type of electronic component having the same shape is an electronic component to be watched as compared with other electronic components. It has become. As a result, among the same types of electronic components having the same shape, it is very easy to determine which electronic component is an electronic component that shows a trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage. Can be specified.

  In addition, when the person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 points the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 over the phone to a staff member of a game hall clerk or the like, a solid white area shown as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search for silk-printed FSLK2,3 with ad2, the staff of the game hall can accurately grasp the position of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, so the person in charge at the service center and the game hall This makes it easier to communicate with staff such as store staff.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 points the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 over the telephone to the staff of the game hall, etc., the staff of the game hall, for example, As described above, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noted can be identified. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component among the plurality of electronic components.

[9-3. Fuse blow check]
Next, fusing confirmation of the same type of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal). When the fuses are blown, the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tubes are disconnected, and the transparent glass tubes Soot adheres to the inside. Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, as described above, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show the trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet that is the commercial power supply voltage. If the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, it will melt. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the silk prints FSLK 2 and 3 described above are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk prints for the fuses FUSE 1 and FUSE 2 so that the state of the fused fuse line can be easily confirmed. As described above, the silk-printed FSLK2, 3 corresponds to a transparent glass tube except for both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, because the white area solidly ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. The presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the solid white area ad2 through the transparent glass tube.

  Thereby, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall or an operator who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) plugs a power cord for supplying a power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 by mistakenly inserting it into an AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, instead of the power outlet, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 Among them, the fuse wire accommodated in one or both of the transparent glass tubes breaks, and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Even if the plug is inserted into a power outlet, it cannot be turned on, so it may be an initial failure. Wiring errors), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as described above, silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing for the fuse FUSE3. In the present embodiment, green is used as the resist for the power supply substrate 630. In the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly applied to the region of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk print FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. In the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, no wiring pattern is laid out (that is, the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid this area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is because the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is visually observed through the transparent glass tube, so that the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3. The visibility of this state can be improved and the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse wire can be confirmed.

  Also, in the solid green resist region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, the transparent state of the fuse FUSE3 is the same as when the wiring pattern is not laid out at all even when the wiring pattern is completely laid out. The visibility of the state of the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is improved by making the solid green tube region corresponding to the transparent glass tube visible through the transparent glass tube. Thus, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

  As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power board 630 is connected to the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1 and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has a function as a means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown) in addition to a function as a means for relaying various signals. The interface board 635 has a fuse FUSE (not shown) (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), B-type fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). The silk print shown in FIG. 193 (a) for the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 is printed on the mounting surface. The area of the mounting surface of the interface board 635 corresponding to silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solidly coated with green resist. In the region of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), no wiring pattern is laid out (that is, the solid coating corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green resist region, no wiring pattern is formed in this region). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing the solid green resist region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) through the transparent glass tube. The visibility of the state of the fuse wire is improved, and it can be confirmed whether or not the fuse wire is broken. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 can be provided on one of the AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630, or can be provided on both. You can also

  Also, in the solid green resist region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), even when the wiring pattern is completely laid out, it is not shown in the same manner as when the wiring pattern is not laid out at all. The state of the state of the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE is made by visually observing the region of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE through the transparent glass tube. Visibility can be improved and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

[9-4. Capacitor capacity]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with a power line (that is, a + 5V power supply) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f Line), DC + 5V is supplied to capacitor BC0 via Schottky barrier diode D20, so that charging can be performed, while pachinko machine 1 is powered off (breaker of game hall) Including turning off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once.) When a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f In response to the fact that + 5V DC is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. To start.

  Due to the discharge of the capacitor BC0, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off all at once by turning off the breakers of the game hall), a power failure or the like. In a state where a momentary power failure has occurred, the backup power is supplied as the main VBB to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310 so that various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is retained. In addition, as the payout VBB, the backup power supply is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, thereby holding various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is like that.

  When the game hall is closed, a staff member such as a store clerk at the game hall turns off the breakers of the game hall to simultaneously shut off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. When the next business operation is started (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is kept in the ON state), a staff member such as a game hall clerk will be in charge of the game hall breaker. By turning on the power, the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned on all at once. At this time, if the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is small, the discharge of the capacitor BC0 is completed during the period from the end of the business operation of the game hall to the start of the next business operation. Various information in the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 cannot be held. As a result, when starting sales, a staff member such as a game hall clerk turns on the game hall breaker to turn on the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once, and the RAM clear switch Regardless of whether or not it has been operated, the main control MPU provided on the main control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM in the power-on process and completely erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM ( Since all the pachinko machines simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification to notify that the game has been cleared, the RAM clear notification sound flowing from the speakers of all the pachinko machines will sound in the game hall. In this case, in all pachinko machines, the payout control MPU provided on the payout control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the payout control built-in RAM during the power-on process, and the contents of the payout control built-in RAM are completely displayed. Erase (clear).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so that the RAM clear notification is not executed even when the business of the game hall is ended and the next business is started. Specifically, as the capacity of the capacitor BC0, to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB for about three days (about 72 hours) after the game hall is closed. Various information that is supplied and stored in the main control built-in RAM can be held, and is also supplied as a payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. A capacity capable of holding various information stored in the RAM is selected. The selection of this capacity is based on the fact that the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633. In comparison with the power consumption of the payment VBB supplied to the power supply, there is a case where the power consumption may be about 10 times larger. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Compared to the power consumption.

[9-5. Discontinued electronic component measures]
Next, countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for a board to be treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, and a payout control board, a lead-type electronic component is mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front side, It is necessary to solder with the soldering surface which is the side. However, while lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of pachinko machines, slots, fusion gaming machines, and other gaming machines, other general electrical equipment manufacturers are able to reduce the size of the surface-mount type ( The so-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, the production of the lead-type electronic components may be reduced and the production may be stopped. If a lead-type electronic component obtained from one electronic component manufacturer is discontinued, and there is a high probability that other electronic component manufacturers will also discontinue manufacturing. The lead-type electronic component is used with a time limit, and it becomes difficult to mount the lead-type electronic component on the substrate treated as the main substrate.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a lead-type electronic component capable of configuring an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate. . Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the Schottky barrier diode D20 is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a at positions corresponding to the anode side D20ca and cathode side D20cb that are terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are formed, and lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb are formed at positions where one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb corresponding to the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are arranged, and the SMD land pattern D20da is formed. , D20db and lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb are formed as wiring patterns D20ga, D20gb.

  The SMD land patterns D20da and D20db formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a are disposed and soldered so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb which are terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. The anode side D20ca, the cathode side D20cb and the SMD land patterns D20da, D20db are soldered, and one ends of the leads D20ea, D20eb are soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb, respectively. Then, the entire surface (mounting surface) and back surface of the substrate D20a are molded by wrapping with epoxy resin to form an electronic component body D20h that covers one end of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and leads D20ea and D20eb, The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-type electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb protrude from the electronic component body D20h. As shown in FIG. 194 (b), a symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or back surface of the electronic component body D20h. Further, although not shown, the name of the manufacturer of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h.

  As described above, since the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, even if it becomes difficult to obtain because the production number of the lead type electronic component is reduced and the production is discontinued. This can be dealt with by using SMD type electronic components used by electrical manufacturers.

  In the above-described embodiment, the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described. However, the present invention can also be applied to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, and the like. Alternatively, a plurality of identical SMD type electronic components can be arranged in an array to form a lead-type electronic component.

  Next, commercial power supply voltage countermeasures are taken when the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, described as “commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 shows the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 195, members having the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in FIG. 189 (hereinafter, described as “commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Contrast between the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power destruction circuit 630g is composed of the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power destruction from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 is activated and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are excessively connected). As a result, the FET Q5 is destroyed, so that a short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a common mode noise countermeasure circuit, and a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit. The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC and the choke coil L1 are configured. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. Yes.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, in addition to the diode D5. The signal is input to the anode terminal of D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, when AC24V from the game hall island facility is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via the power cord (not shown), the fuse FUSE1. , FUSE2 to input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a. For the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2 and 3 are mounted on the power supply board 630. It is printed on the surface. That is, the white area solid ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply board 630, respectively. However, in the region between the white outline inside and the periphery of the support bracket, white is provided. The solid area ad2 can be visually observed, and is an area inside the white outline, which is a solid white area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. ad2 can be reliably visually observed through a transparent glass tube.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, AC24V from the game hall island facility is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a through the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a as it is. Is done. For the fuse FUSE1, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solid white are printed as silk, and the silk print FSLK2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. ing. That is, the white area solid ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuse FUSE1 are soldered to the power supply board 630. However, the white region is filled with white in the region between the inner side of the white outline and the periphery of the support bracket. The region ad2 that has been solid-colored in white corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1 is transparent. It can be surely seen through the glass tube.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC 24V from the island facility in the game hall omits the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Briefly describing this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is connected to both the power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side (fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2). This is because no problem occurred even if one side (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted in the test conducted by the applicant. Thereby, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, one side of AC24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. The cost is reduced by inputting the data as it is.

  Further, the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment employs the same power switch 630a as the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment. This will be briefly described because the power switch 630a needs to be surely disconnected / connected on both the L side and the N side of the AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall. As a result, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment is similar to the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Both L side and N side can be disconnected / connected simultaneously.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195, the N side (AC24V2) of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall and the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a In between, it is electrically connected to one of the microgap type arresters AL1. The other of the microgap arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The microgap type arrester AL1 surges when a high voltage (referred to as “surge voltage”) enters the AC 24V from the island equipment in the game hall due to lightning, and surges the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a current so that no surge voltage is applied to the power switch 630a, or a high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning the power switch 630a ON / OFF is applied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing the frame ground FG2 as a surge current so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a. In addition, the microgap type arrester AL1 is used by an operator when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, and the ground terminal ECN2 (island equipment ground) of the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. And the ground connection terminal in the island facility of the game hall are electrically connected to the ground connection terminal via the island facility ground wire, as a security, electromagnetic noise is transmitted from the island facility of the game hall to the N side of AC24V (AC24V2 ), The noise immunity can be increased.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC that is a circuit for countermeasure against common mode noise, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC that is a circuit for countermeasure against normal mode noise, and a choke coil In addition to L1, a surge absorber SA1 that constitutes a power destruction circuit 630g ′, the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, power destruction circuit 630g ′ and input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power destruction circuit 630g ′ has a faster reaction speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1). One end of which is electrically connected to the L side (AC24V1) of AC24V via the power switch 630a, and the other end is connected to the N side (24V AC24 via the power switch 630a). When a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, and a short circuit is established.

  A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but here, a silicon surge absorber (also referred to as a semiconductor varistor, VRD, or the like) is used. The silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage with a steep rise compared to a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber has features such that the response to a surge is very fast, the control voltage characteristics are very good, and the leakage current is very small. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type is used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47V, which is about twice the input voltage, may be selected.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is electrically connected to the second (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to one end. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1, and is also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor correction circuit 630d. The four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i described later. Thereby, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. As its characteristics, when the vertical axis indicates the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis indicates the AC voltage, the value of the AC voltage increases. Thus, a capacitor that has a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor capacity becomes small and is not destroyed even when AC 100 V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is applied is selected.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, input to the power supply generation circuit 630f, and input to the relay drive circuit 630i. When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input, the relay drive circuit 630i creates an operating voltage (+ 24V) that can operate the coil of the relay RL1, and supplies it to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

  The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is caused by a shortage of power from the relay drive circuit 630i when the power switch 630a is turned on (relay drive circuit 630i). Relay RL1 cannot be turned on because the coil of relay RL1 is not operating due to insufficient power supply from + 630V from 630i (that is, relay RL1 remains off). The relay RL1 is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 while the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are in a non-conductive state. The As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flows toward only the thermistor TH1, and at the time when the direct current begins to flow to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value However, when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually increases due to the current flowing through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly, and the subsequent value of the thermistor TH1 is reduced. Apply a strong current to the load.

  On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned ON and the coil of the relay RL1 is switched from the non-actuated state to the actuated state by the power from the relay drive circuit 630i (by the power supply by + 24V from the relay drive circuit 630i) Is turned on, the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are brought into conduction, and the rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are respectively supplied. In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is diverted between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal (that is, between the contacts) of the relay RL1 and passes to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Is done. As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is between the terminals of the second (COM) and third terminals of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ), The current to the thermistor TH1 decreases and the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, and the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 The current passing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) increases.

  As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is the thermistor. When flowing through TH1, the current to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1 increases as the temperature of the thermistor TH1 increases and the resistance value decreases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. If this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island facilities of the game hall, and the power supply of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. If the thermistor TH1 rises in temperature when it is mistakenly inserted into the outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 will greatly exceed the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) and surge will occur due to a large current flowing through the surge absorber SA1. The absorber SA1 is destroyed and the short mode can be set.

  In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows to the fuse FUSE1 via the surge absorber SA1 in the short circuit mode in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is turned on. Fusing will occur. In addition, when the fuse FUSE1 is melted while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, the surge absorber SA1 is scattered and the surge absorber SA1 does not continue to flow a large current through the surge absorber SA1. It can be prevented from being destroyed in the open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the plug of the power supply cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply board 630 is destroyed. This can be surely prevented.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary to provide a FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting a gate signal for power supply destruction circuit and a CGND terminal for flowing a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the circuit configuration is not complicated.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power destruction circuit 630g ′ is destroyed, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with an unfused one, and the power cord plug is replaced with the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall Since the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power destruction circuit 630g ′ has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained even if it is plugged into the AC 24V power outlet, the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows through FUSE1 and the fuse FUSE1 is restored. So that the blown. That is, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ is not destroyed, Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island facilities of the gaming hall, the game cannot be started.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine having power supply means capable of creating various power sources necessary for a gaming device based on an external power source supplied from outside the gaming machine has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2014-008221). When the person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the gaming machine indicates a specific part of the power supply means over the phone to a person in charge of the shop clerk or the like of the game hall, according to the instruction from the person in charge at the service center. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult to identify a notable component among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply means.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including power supply means for generating various power supplies based on the power supply from the amusement island equipment and supplying them to the board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038]). )). The amusement island facility converts commercial AC power (AC 100 V) to gaming AC power (AC 24 V) that has been stepped down. However, when the power cord for supplying power from the island facility to the gaming machine is plugged into the commercial AC power outlet instead of the gaming AC power outlet, the commercial AC power is supplied from the gaming AC power outlet. Since it has a high voltage, an abnormal power supply is output from the power supply means, and various boards inside the gaming machine may be destroyed.

[10. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 185 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 197. FIG. 196 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 197 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control board, and FIG. 198 is a perspective view explaining the outline of wiring to the board treated as the main board. FIG. First, the power supply and input signal in the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the power supply and input signal in the circuit of the payout control board 633 and wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[10-1. Power supply and input signal in main control board circuit]
Among the power sources in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with DC + 5V from the power source generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power source board 630 and is also supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The supplied backup power is supplied as the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

  As shown in FIG. 196, DC + 5V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, DC + 5V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ′) of the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal, and the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). DC + 5V from which noise components are removed from the terminal is output. DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC0, which is grounded, so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed first. Has been smoothed.

  The DC +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By being connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed direct current + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the game hall is interrupted, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 It is applied as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded with the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, which is grounded (GND) and grounded. The backup power supply circuit 630h of the substrate 630 is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0. Thereby, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, a detection from the general prize opening sensor 2401 A signal, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), etc. are input to the main control input circuit 1310b via the panel relay board 1710, respectively, and the first start The detection signal from the mouth sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control input circuit 1310b without passing through the panel relay board 1710.

  A detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, The detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 2401 and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The empty input terminal PA7 is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

  In the present embodiment, there are four general winning ports 2001 as described above, and the general winning port sensors 3001 that detect the game balls B received in the three general winning ports 2001 included in the side unit 2200, respectively. The detection signal from each is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the game ball B received in one general winning port 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400 is detected. The detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal PB5 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the first start port sensor 3002 includes two sensors (double sensors), that is, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. Yes. The detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected electrically), whereas the first start port sensor The detection signal from the slave side 3002b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly connected electrically). The detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the first start port sensor sub side 3002b. Is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  An operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input port PB is composed of 8 bits, like the input port PA. Further, although a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is not shown, it is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and detection signals from other sensors are respectively input to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input terminals that are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals and become empty terminals are grounded to the ground (GND) as the empty terminal processing, like the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

[10-2. Power supply and input signal in payout control board circuit]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with + 5V direct current from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630, and is also supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU633aa. The supplied backup power is supplied as a payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

  As shown in FIG. 197, DC + 5V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, DC 1 + 5V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ′) of the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal, and the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). DC + 5V from which noise components are removed from the terminal is output. The DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), thereby removing ripples (AC components convoluted with voltage) first. Has been smoothed.

  The DC +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By being connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed direct current + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, when an instantaneous interruption occurs and the power from the game hall is cut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is changed after the instantaneous interruption occurs. It is applied as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Therefore, the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) is the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633. In the embodiment, the larger one is selected as compared with the capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF). As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when an instantaneous interruption occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off. Each charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 grounded to the ground (GND), and the direct current + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4, one end of which is grounded and connected to the ground (GND). The backup power supply circuit 630h of the substrate 630 is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, via the resistor PR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are respectively input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are: These are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are vacant terminals. These unused input terminals PA6 and PA7 are grounded to the ground (GND) as a free terminal process.

  The power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB (not shown) via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and detection signals from other sensors are also received. The input terminals that are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab and become empty terminals are grounded as empty terminal processing as in the case of the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA. GND).

[10-3. Wiring to the board treated as the main board]
Examples of the substrate handled as the main substrate include a power supply substrate 630, a main control substrate 1310, a payout control substrate 633, and the like. If a fraudulent act that illegally alters the wiring to the board treated as the main board is performed, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls, anxious about the operation of the board treated as the main board, and illegal game balls are illegal Since there is a possibility of being obtained by an actor, when the wiring to each of these boards is illegally modified, it is necessary to discover the modified wiring at an early stage.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), the wiring to the power supply board 630 has a connector SHG (not shown, but the connector SHG has a manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as illegal identifiers on the covering portion of each wiring connected to ()). Specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from the first pin to the 22nd pin, and the first pin has a manufacturing company name: XXX as an unauthorized identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1. And product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has the manufacturing company name: XXX as the illegal identifier SLAB on the coating portion of the wiring SCBL2, and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog). Is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the power supply substrate 630 is at least the covering portion of the wiring so that the manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring. The illegal identifier SLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white and has a color (e.g., black) that is easy to visually recognize the color of the covering portion, and the manufacturer name: XXX, and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to other pins may be other colors different from white (for example, red or gray), or a plurality (For example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or a color that is easy to see with respect to the color of the covering (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) ), The manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the unauthorized identifier SLAB.

  As for the wiring to the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), it is connected to the connector MHG (not shown, but the connector MHG has the manufacturer name and product number (the number listed in the catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as illegal identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the first pin has a manufacturing company name: YYYYY as an unauthorized identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL1. And product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has a manufacturing company name: YYYYY and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (published in the catalog) as an illegal identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL2. Number) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310 is at least wiring so that the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier MLAB in the coating portion of the wiring. The illegal identifier MLAB has a length that is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, black) as an unauthorized identifier MLAB, manufacturing company name: YYYYY, and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the coating portions of the wirings MCBL2 to MCBL30 connected to other pins may be other colors (for example, red or gray) different from white, Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and colors that are easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) The manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the unauthorized identifier MLAB.

  As for wiring to the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), it is connected to a connector HHG (not shown, but the connector HHG has a manufacturer name and product number (a number listed in the catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as illegal identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: YYYYY as an illegal identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL1. And product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has a manufacturer ID: YYYYY and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (published in the catalog) as an illegal identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL2. Number) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the payout control board 633 is at least wiring so that the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring. The illegal identifier HLAB is repeatedly printed twice on the covering portion.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is easily visible (for example, black) with respect to the color of the covering portion as an illegal identifier HLAB, manufacturing company name: YYYYY, and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the coating portions of the wirings HCBL2 to HCBL30 connected to other pins may be other colors different from white (for example, red or gray) Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and colors that are easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) The manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the illegal identifier HLAB.

  In this way, even if the wiring to the board treated as the main board is illegally altered, the name of the manufacturer and the product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to early detection of a modified wiring. Note that wiring that is difficult to obtain is preferable even if it is listed in the catalog as wiring to the substrate treated as the main substrate.

  In the present embodiment, two of the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 are provided. The wiring and the two wirings from the second start port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 provided in the game board 5 are respectively connected to the main control board via a connector (not shown). Direct electrical connection to 1310. On the other hand, the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 is provided in the game board 5. A gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a big prize port sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the big prize port 2005 provided in the game board 5, and a general prize provided in the game board 5 Two from various sensors such as general prize opening sensors 2401 and 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the mouth 2001 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting opening 2002 provided in the game board 5. Wiring is electrically connected and integrated on the panel relay board 1710 via each connector, and is connected via one connector. , It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  For this reason, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 are mistakenly supplied to the main control board 1310. There is a risk of electrical connection. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002, one is yellow and the other is pink, and the covering portions of each wire are wired as illegal identifiers. The manufacturer's name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed. As the colors of the covering portions of the two wirings from the second starter sensor 2402, one is white and the other is black, and each wiring covering portion has a wiring manufacturer name and product number as a fraudulent identifier. Number printed on each page) is printed repeatedly. As a result, the manufacturer can identify the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 at the manufacturer. In addition, in the game hall, a staff member of the game hall, such as a store clerk, identifies the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 respectively. Can be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. And a connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. As a result, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 correspond to themselves. Since it can be a physical structure that can be electrically connected, in the manufacturer, the operator of the line is the first start port sensor main side constituting the first start port sensor 3002 in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, it is possible to reliably prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called insertion error) of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from 3002a and the two wirings from the second starter sensor 2402. In the case of checking the presence or absence of fraud, a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original position, the first start port sensor 3002 It is possible to reliably prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called incorrect insertion) between the two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 to be configured. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning holes 2001 included in the side unit 2200 and the general winning hole 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400 are received. A connector having the same shape is selected as the connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710. In this embodiment, although there are four general winning ports 2001, no matter which general winning port 2001 a game ball enters, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a winning ball. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change in performance. Further, even if the configuration in which the two wirings from the general prize opening sensors 2401 and 3001 are electrically connected directly to the main control board 1310 without using the panel relay board 1710 is adopted, As the connectors for electrically connecting the two wires from the mouth sensors 2401 and 3001 to the main control board 1310, those having the same shape are selected. As described above, although there are four general winning ports 2001, no matter which general winning port 2001 a game ball enters, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a winning ball. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change in performance.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which various entrances are provided in the advantageous area of the game board, and each sensor (detection means) for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in each entrance ( For example, JP, 2006-154676, A (paragraph [0014]-paragraph [0016], Drawing 2-Drawing 4)). However, if the wiring from the detecting means that passes through the entrance with similar application is mistakenly electrically connected, there is no problem with the electrical specifications, so damage can be avoided, but the entrance detection signal is received incorrectly. Will affect the progress of the game. However, since the applications are particularly similar, there is a problem that in some cases, there is a possibility that an erroneous connection may not be noticed immediately.

[11. Each decorative board for the door frame]
Next, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 199 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decorative board provided in the door frame, FIG. 200 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. FIG. 202 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate having two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 203 is a view from the LED non-mounting surface in the D part of FIG. FIG. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decorative board provided with the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current A method for arranging the drive circuits will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a so that the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, A side window decoration part 410b of the window decoration member 412, a door frame right side decoration body 419, and a door frame top decoration body 453 are disposed, and the dish upper left decoration body 271, dish upper right decoration body 276, and dish A dish lower left decorative body 281, a dish lower right decorative body 286, and a dish center lower decorative body 312 b are respectively disposed below the center upper decorative body 312 a.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 is provided with a dish upper left decorative board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper left decorative body 271, and a plurality of dish upper left decorative boards 271 are mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273. Are illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The dish upper right decorative body 276 is provided with a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a plurality of the dish upper right decorative body 276 are mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278. Are illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). The dish center upper decorative body 312a has a dish center upper decorative board 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are decorated for light emission.

  The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed at the rear thereof in the shape of an elongated strip extending up and down along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A full-color LED (in this embodiment, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. 5 and 10 on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The side window decoration portions 410b are arranged in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window decoration members 412 and are formed on the rear side in the form of elongated strips extending vertically along the side window decoration members 412. The interior decoration part decoration board 413 in a window is arrange | positioned and light emission decoration is carried out by full color LED (this embodiment 12 pieces) mounted in the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413. FIG. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed at the rear thereof in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A full-color LED (in this embodiment, the right side upper decorative substrate 418a is mounted on the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. 4 and 10 on the right side lower decorative board 418b).

  The door frame top decorative body 453 has a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right so as to follow the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is disposed, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. Further, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip is disposed and mounted on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, respectively. Light-emitting decoration by full-color LEDs (11 in the present embodiment, 11 on the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) It is.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 is provided with a dish lower left decorative board 283 formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left and right directions along the dish lower left decorative body 281, and a plurality of dishes are mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283. Are illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided with a dish lower right decorative board 288 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. A plurality of full color LEDs (six in this embodiment) are mounted on the light. The dish center lower decorative body 312b has a dish center lower decorative board 316 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b behind the dish center lower decorative body 312b. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 are decorated for light emission.

  In addition, the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided in the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes the production operation ring decoration board 352 formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, as described above. The production operation ring decoration board 352 includes a front decoration board 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semicircular arc shape, and a rear decoration board 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a rear semicircular arc shape. , Is composed of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decorative board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board 352b ( In this embodiment, the light emission is decorated by 9).

  Thus, each decoration board with which the door frame 3 is provided is formed in the shape of an elongate strip. Thus, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distance dimensions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, and the like can also be provided.

[11-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
The dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the left side upper decorative board 402a, the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the side, which are arranged in various decorative bodies and decorative parts provided in the door frame 3. Window interior decoration part decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, dish left bottom decoration board 283, a dish lower right decorative board 288, a dish center lower decorative board 316, a front decorative board 352a, a rear decorative board 352b, and other door frame side decorative boards, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is connected to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 180 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are serially output from the door frame side, and the light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which are the door frame side second serial system are respectively input independently. Yes. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 189 via the interface board 635 and DC + 12V is inputted, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( (GND) line is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[11-1-1. Door frame side first serial system]
The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are relayed to the dish unit 200 shown in FIG. In addition to being input to the substrate 214, it is input to the handle decoration substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are a dish lower left decorative board 283, a dish lower right decorative board 288, And it is each input to the operation part relay board | substrate 392 of the production | presentation operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the dish lower left decorative board 283, are input to the dish upper left decorative board 273, respectively. That is, the dish lower left decorative board 283 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper left decorative board 273. The decorative board 283 and the dish upper left decorative board 273 are in a state where they are electrically connected to each other. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input to the dish lower left decorative board 283 serving as a bridge board, respectively. Input connector is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper left decorative board 273, respectively (not shown) An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left decorative board 273 is electrically connected to the lower left decorative board 283 (that is, the latter left stage and the final stage of the lower left decorative board 283). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively input is output. .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish lower right decorative board 288 are input to the dish upper right decorative board 278, respectively. That is, the dish lower right decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative board 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the dish upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a rosary manner. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input to the dish lower right decorative board 288 serving as a bridge board, respectively. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper right decorative board 278, respectively. An output connector is provided. In contrast, the dish upper right decorative board 278 electrically connected to the dish lower right decorative board 288 (that is, the latter stage and the last stage of the dish lower right decorative board 288) includes a dish lower right decorative board. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively output from the output connector (not shown) 288 is provided. ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the production operation unit 300 are the upper decorative board 314 in the dish center, the dish They are respectively input to the lower central decorative board 316 and the front decorative board 352a of the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decorative board 352a are respectively input to the rear decorative board 352b. That is, the front decorative board 352a serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b. And the back decoration board 352b are electrically connected in a daisy chain. The front decorative board 352a serving as a bridging board includes a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the rendering operation unit 300, respectively. An input connector (not shown) to be input is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decorative board 352b, respectively. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, an output connector (not shown) of the front decoration board 352a is connected to the front decoration board 352a electrically connected to the front decoration board 352a (that is, a rear stage and the last stage of the front decoration board 352a). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively input is provided.

  Here, for example, the dish frame lower left decorative board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the dish unit relay board 214 will be briefly described. Then, the dish lower left decoration board 283 is provided with LED constant current drive circuit 283a, heat distribution circuit 283c, and sdLED1-sdLED6 which are six full color LEDs. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can flow a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting that can set the maximum current that flows to sdLED1 to sdLED6. Circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to flow a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x is handled by the heat distribution circuit 283c, so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x can be distributed.

  Further, for example, a description will be briefly given of the upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the lower left decorative board 283. The upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current driving circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink (suction) type constant current driving circuit 273x capable of flowing a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , And a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting a maximum current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x performs control to flow a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish lower left decorative board 283. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x is handled by the heat distribution circuit 273c so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x can be distributed.

[11-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the lower left side decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. In addition to the input to the substrate 402b, the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the right side lower decoration substrate 418b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Are entered respectively.

  DC + 12V and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board. 457.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative board 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative board 455. Thus, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a rosary manner. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board includes a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. An input connector (not shown) for inputting (GND) is provided, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are arranged at the center of the door frame top. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). There are provided input connectors (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively input, which are respectively output from the output connectors that are not connected. In addition, an output connector (not shown) is provided for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decorative board 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a rosary manner. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455) includes a door. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top center decorative board 455, are respectively input. Only a connector is provided.

  Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is input. The left side lower decorative board 402b will be briefly described. The left side lower decorative board 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current driving circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current driving circuit 273a of the dish left upper decorative board 273, and allows a constant current to flow through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

  The LED constant current driving circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current driving circuit 273a of the dish upper left decorative board 273, and the hdLED 9, A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of flowing a constant current to the hdLED 10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the left It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 402bby that can set the maximum current to be supplied to the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side upper decorative substrate 402a. Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted on the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which it is mounted. Control is performed so that a constant current flows through the hdLED 9, the hdLED 10, and the huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper left side decorative board 402a.

  Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is handled by the heat distribution circuit 402bc, so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed. Further, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left side decoration board 402a. ing.

  In this way, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted (the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Heat generation from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left side decorative board 402a.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to flow a constant current through the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate across the substrate (left side lower decorative substrate 402b) on which it is mounted. Has been. For this reason, the operation | work which electrically connects between the board | substrate of the left side lower decoration board | substrate 402b and the left side upper decoration board | substrate 402a is necessarily accompanied. The worker who performs this work is the finger of the connector of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the connector of the left side upper decorative board 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b, or the heat of the left side upper decorative board 402a. In order to touch the dispersion circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a have the function of distributing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to.

  In addition, as described above, the upper left side decorative board 402a receives the + 12V DC and the ground (GND) from the lower left side decorative board 402b, and is fixed to five full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Each line through which current flows is input. As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a includes a heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the huLED1 to huLED5 which are five full-color LEDs. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity in addition to the function of distributing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

[11-1-3. Flash data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for designating the light emission mode. Key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits included in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is designated from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

[11-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, an outline of the LED constant current driving circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, since the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decoration board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, here, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the dish lower left decoration board 283 will be described. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can flow a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current that flows to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. The maximum current setting circuit 283y capable of generating

[11-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is configured for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B). , LG, and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 with respect to a maximum of eight full color LEDs with one constant current driving circuit. Can be done.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[11-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of generating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V in this embodiment) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x when DC + 12V from the + 12V power supply line is input. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. The internal power supply Verg supplies the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi. Is able to work.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 189, and independently creates + DC 5V as the internal power supply Vreg and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. Yes. This is because if the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is used, the + 5V power supply line is used by routing the electrical wiring, so that the length of the + 5V power supply line for supplying DC + 5V becomes longer and noise is generated. It becomes easy to invade. Then, when external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and + 5V DC is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED flickers due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, by eliminating the need for the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the noise resistance is extremely high compared to the + 5V power supply line, and the + 12V power supply line has a constant current drive circuit 283x. The linear power supply 283xa employs a configuration in which DC +5 V is uniquely created as the internal power supply Vreg.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg only from the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. Thereby, stabilization of internal power supply Vreg can contribute to prevention of flickering of sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the + 5V power supply line are not necessary, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[11-2-1b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs the internal reset signal RST to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. A so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are started.

  For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 180, and independently creates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x Yes. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as a “reset signal transmission line”) is used, the reset signal transmission line is used by routing electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x is reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate, and only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using it, external noise can be made difficult to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to prevention of unexpected turn-off and flickering of LED elements constituting full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. Further, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[11-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc transmits serial data (herein, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter referred to as “data line”). Is a circuit that can shape the waveform of a signal that transmits serial data and output the serial data to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line for transmitting a clock signal from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) (hereinafter referred to as “clock line”). Is a circuit that can shape the clock signal and output it to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. For this reason, the lengths of the data line and the clock line are both increased, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in this embodiment, the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd are provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the noise that has entered the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x. The logic line is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise. Thereby, signal transmission resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise.

[11-2-1d. Address setting section]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs that can identify the individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown). Be able to.

  As described above, in this embodiment, an ID that can identify an individual constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by a hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). However, it is not set appropriately by receiving data by software.

[11-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg includes serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. In some cases, the gradation information is fetched from the serial data, and the gradation level in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to become the fetched gradation information. On the other hand, if the ID information of the serial data (the light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not captured and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[11-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can perform gradation control of the brightness (gradation degree) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from gradation zero (zero) to gradation degree 127 from turning off to lighting (maximum luminance). Therefore, gradation control is performed for one output channel by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown). That is, the PWM unit 283xh includes the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When these gradation levels are set, the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 control the constant current driving unit 283xi so as to flow a current having the set gradation level.

[11-2-1g. Constant current drive unit]
The constant current drive unit 283xi includes one constant (not shown) for one output channel so as to have the gradation set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 included in the PWM unit 283xh. A constant current is passed through the LED elements constituting the full color LED by a current driver. That is, the constant current driving unit 283xi includes the constant current drivers 1 to constant current drivers 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control unit 24.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 have one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current that flows through the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes the full color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LR1 to LR8. The resistor Rr is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 has one end of a resistor Rg that sets the maximum current that flows through the green (G) LED element that constitutes the full color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current that flows to the blue (B) LED element that constitutes the full color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LB1 to LB8. The resistor Rb is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The red (R) LED element anode terminal, the green (G) LED element anode terminal, and the blue (B) LED element constituting full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and receives DC + 12V.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat distribution resistors. 1 to the constant current driver 8) are electrically connected to each other so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side, respectively. It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current driver via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors). 9 to the constant current driver 16), and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat distribution resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the red (R) LED elements constituting the individually set full color LEDs, thereby red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements constituting the individually set full color LED, and thereby the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 suck the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements constituting the individually set full color LEDs, respectively, thereby the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED. Can emit light.

  In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting light with 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. Thus, it is possible to turn off, turn on with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[11-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the resistor Rr that sets the maximum current that flows through the LED element that emits red (R) in the eight color output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. A resistor Rg for setting the maximum current to flow through the green (G) LED element constituting the full color LED in the eight output channels up to LG8, and a full color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LB1 to LB8 And a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current that flows through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 included in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). Yes. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 included in the constant current driving unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). Yes. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 included in the constant current driving unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). Yes.

[11-3. Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative substrate including an LED constant current driving circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. Here, a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit mentioned above provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. For this reason, in FIGS. 200 and 201, for convenience of explanation, the above-described output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 are indicated by the same reference numerals.

[11-3-1. Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative board having one LED constant current driving circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, a dish lower left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current driving circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

  As described above, the door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1, which are the first serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 so that + 12V DC is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( (GND) line is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the dish lower left decorative board 283 has the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC + 12V, and ground (GND) of the dish unit 200. This is input via the dish unit relay board 214. The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full color LEDs, Each is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat distribution resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. The driver 1 to the constant current driver 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full-color LEDs are respectively connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat distribution resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are respectively connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat distribution resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6 (the constant current described above). The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. Note that the output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current driving circuit 283a are not connected.

  Based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when its ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to be dimmed so as to be the captured gradation information.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (specifically, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the heat distribution resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6 that constitute the heat distribution circuit 283c. Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the constant current drive circuit 283x described above). In addition to being input to the substrate 273, DC +12 V and ground (GND) are input to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 via the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. As a result, noise that has entered the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is not transmitted to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273, which is a subsequent substrate. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a can shape the waveform (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd included in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above).

  The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and the red (R) LED element anode terminal, the green (G) LED anode terminal constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full color LEDs, and Each is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat distribution resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. The driver 1 to the constant current driver 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat distribution resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are respectively connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  Based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when its ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so that the captured gradation information is obtained.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the heat distribution resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6 constituting the heat distribution circuit 273c. Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

  In addition to the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish lower right decorative board 288, the dish upper right decorative board 278, and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are used as a decorative board having one LED constant current driving circuit. , And a door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[11-3-2. Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the left side lower decorative board 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1. -HdLED10 and heat dispersion circuit 402bc are provided.

  As described above, the door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. The light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 so that + 12V DC is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( (GND) line is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Yes. The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) LED elements constituting the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. , And blue (B) LED elements are also input to the anode terminal.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 with respect to a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current driving circuit. It can be controlled. For this reason, among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the eight constant-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two With respect to hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the light emission mode is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a which is a subsequent board across the board on which the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative board 402b). The light emission mode of the huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

  Among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the red (R) LED element cathode terminals constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 with respect to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are respectively Through the heat distribution resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, the output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are electrically connected, and the hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full color LEDs, are connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 described above) via the heat distribution resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. The above-described constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24) are electrically connected.

  Among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are the red (R) LED element cathode terminals constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10, respectively. Through the heat distribution resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10, the output channels LR1 and LR2 (the constant current driver 1 and the constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb are electrically connected, and the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are connected. The cathode terminal of the green (G) LED element is connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (the constant current driver 9 and the constant current driver 1 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through the heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. ) And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are output channels of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. They are electrically connected to LB1 and LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above).

  Further, for the huLED1 to huLED5 which are the five full color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is the substrate subsequent to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color (huLED1 to huLED5 which is a full color LED) The cathode terminals of the LED elements R) are respectively connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat distribution resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the heat distribution resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (the constant current driver 3 to the constant current driver 7 described above) and constitute the full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively, Upper left side decoration Through the heat distribution resistors huRg1b to huRg5b in the plate 402a and the heat distribution resistors huRg1a to huRg5a in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current drivers 11 to constant current described above). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the driver 15) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the heat distribution resistors huRb1b to huRb5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, and left Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the constant current driver 19 to the constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat distribution resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the side lower decorative substrate 402b. To have. Note that the output channels LR8, LG8, and LB8 of the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb are not connected.

  Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba starts from the light emission data SDAT2 when its ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2. Gradation information is taken in, and among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled to be dimmed so as to become the fetched gradation information. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. On the basis of SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and the obtained gradation information becomes 10 Of the two full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled and dimly lit, and the left side that is the substrate subsequent to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Upper decorative board 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking constant currents flowing through the eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the heat distribution resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, and hdRb1 to hdRb8 constituting the heat distribution circuit 402bc. Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current driving circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type as described above, the constant current flowing through the two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is sucked to the left. Heat is generated by sucking constant currents flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Five heat resistances hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, and hdRb10 constituting the heat distribution circuit 402bc, and five mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a that is the board following the left side lower decorative board 402b. For the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full color LEDs, the heat distribution resistors huRr1a to huRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, and huRb1a to huRb5a constituting the heat distribution circuit 402bc on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is configured by the heat distribution resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b that constitute the heat distribution circuit 402ac on the decorative substrate 402a. Heat generation can be dispersed.

  Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dissipating the heat generated, it also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  In addition to the left side lower decorative board 402b, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish central lower decorative board 316, the side window decorative part decorative board 413, the right side as a decorative board including two LED constant current drive circuits. There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, there is a right side upper decorative substrate 418a as a decorative substrate that does not include any LED constant current drive circuit.

[11-4. Arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method for arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. FIG. In this embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, the constant current drive circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit will be described as an electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of the IC package of the constant current driving circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) is used. And so-called VQFN. Of the four edges of the constant current drive circuit, one edge is the input side, and the remaining three edges are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. Note that in FIG. 203, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for easy viewing of the drawing.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the LED constant current drive circuit is arranged in substantially the same manner on each decorative board of the door frame 3, the left side formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically is provided here with two LED constant current drive circuits. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[11-4-1. Left side lower decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 202 (a), the lower left side decorative board 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b that is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are It is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the left side upper decorative board 402a and the electrical wiring is mounted on the upper side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the LED of the left side lower decorative board 402b is not mounted. A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 and the electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

  A white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is applied by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Can be increased.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs and the area indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. In addition, the board management number of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character with a white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is reduced by the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b from being lowered due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs.

  Also, the door frame left side decorative body 404 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in translucent milky white as described above, but is a game seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player moves the head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the player visually recognizes the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404 In the first place, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs and the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged. The full color LE has no relation to the game for the player because the area indicating the position is not printed at all as silk printing. Corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED are prevented from being viewed by the player and. Accordingly, the numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and the auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, full-color LEDs) It is possible to make it difficult for a player to visually recognize a region indicating a position where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, which has no relation to the game for the player.

  Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). Thus, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Also, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a board management number of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a foil-extracted character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) A letter is formed by making a letter with a pattern and removing the surrounding copper foil), and the letter without the foil is formed by a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b. Covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is not the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, but the foil removal character (that is, the wiring pattern) on the non-LED mounting face 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. In the layer (copper plane) in which the character is formed, a character is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed, and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed. Foil-free characters (that is, a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Each of them may be formed as a cut character formed by removing the copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is a letter without a foil (that is, a letter is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed. Without being formed as a blank character), and the solid surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx and the solid surface of the non-LED mounting surface 402by are formed as a blank character with characters removed on one or both surfaces. It may be.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, and various dispersions. Areas indicating the positions where electronic parts such as resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silk prints near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black). Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 203A) as silk printing, and the lower left side decorative board IC1 (see FIG. 203 (a)), which is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of the area LSLKa, is silk-printed. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. And the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions resistance Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum electric current setting circuit 402bay is yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (refer FIG. 203 (a)) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, and to the right, the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 203 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Yes.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are yellow lines as silk printing. (Or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 203A, only the chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 are respectively shown) and these areas. Part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs in the vicinity of LSLK1 to LSLK10 above or below (FIG. 203 (a) shows LED4 and LED4 that are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 that are full color LEDs). Only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a yellow chain line (not shown as silk printing) is an area indicating a position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is arranged. (Or a black chain line), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a lighting inspection is individually performed on the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, This is performed for each LED element, which constitutes one full-color LED, with respect to the LED element emitting red (R), the LED element emitting green (G), and the LED element emitting blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and reflectance that decreases in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are LEDs that emit light of the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the LED mounting surface is a region corresponding to the member disposed in the front among the LED mounting surfaces due to light emission of the full color LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) (not shown) as silk print, and an electron is located in the vicinity of this region. A part number corresponding to a part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as so-called solid earths that ground an area excluding land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). Yes.

  As described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, so that the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The width dimension from the left end side 402 beg 1 to the right end side 402 beg 2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402 bax and 402 bbx. For this reason, if the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the land of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx Since the distance between the pattern edge and the left edge 402beg1 or right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, the wiring pattern should be drawn from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the minimum distance dimension is limited in the width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns, it is difficult to draw out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the right lower end side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is input as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The terminal on the input side is the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. 201 by being arranged near the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative board 402b so as to become the terminal on the left side. ), DC + 12V, ground (GND), and resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left side, the upper left side, and the upper right side are mainly terminals on the output side 1 to the output side 3 and the output side 1 terminal to the output side 3 terminal are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which a ground (GND) is input. Yes.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being arranged as a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402 beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is limited from the respective lead pads of the land pattern arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent interval between the wiring patterns. Even all the wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically.

  Moreover, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, the group 1 is composed of four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be disposed between the group 2 composed of the hdLED5 to the hdLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, The thickness can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern leading to the group 1 and the group 2 from being unduly lengthened or shortened to either one of the group 1 or the group 2. It is possible to increase the efficiency of wiring pattern placement and routing in the work.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current driving circuit 402bax is connected to the center portion in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED in FIG. 202 (a)). The constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be disposed closer to the lower side than the disposed portion), and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx is arranged in the vertical center portion of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 202 (a)). It can be arranged above the hdLED 8, which is a full-color LED that is configured in the group 2 that is controlled to emit light by the constant current drive circuit 402 bax. . As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current driving circuit 402bax to the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 can be secured on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and from the constant current driving circuit 402bbx. Two full-color LEDs hdLED9, hdLED10 and five left-side upper decorative boards 402a shown in FIG. 201 have areas for routing the wiring patterns to the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. 402b can be secured.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and a capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) whose rectangular shape is a rectangular shape. S: 1.25 mm). That is, the size of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) is larger than the size of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Very small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb have one end side in the longitudinal direction on the left end side of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 402 beg 1 and the right end side 402 beg 2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the left end side 402 beg 1 and the right end side 402 beg 2 of the left side lower decorative board 402 b. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each end side of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx arranged such that the end side of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistance Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be non-parallel.

  In addition, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit is arranged on each decorative board of the door frame 3 so that the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 with respect to the left and right edges of the decorative board. The door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are arranged in a tilted state. Unlike the other decorative boards of the frame 3, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453. Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit is arranged on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in this embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit is not parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. Is mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative board 455 includes, in addition to 11 full-color LEDs provided therein, another central decorative board on which five full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. LED constant current drive circuit (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, The second maximum current setting circuit)) is illustrated by one LED constant current drive circuit (here, the second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)). Two heat distribution circuits provided in itself (the first constant current drive circuit is the first heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance), the second constant current drive circuit is the second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) Direct lighting control via the door frame top The left decorative board 456 includes, in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided in itself, another LED decorative current drive circuit (constant constant) provided in the left decorative board on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted. The light emission control is directly performed through one heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistor) provided in itself (current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit), and the door frame top right decorative board 457 includes six full-color LEDs provided in itself. In addition, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is attached to itself (not shown) by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided in itself (not shown). The light emission is directly controlled through one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistor) provided. The other central decorative board is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right so as to follow the central part of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative board is a left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative board is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other central decorative board, the other left decorative board, and the other right decorative board need to be provided with heat distribution circuits (heat distribution resistors), respectively. As described above, the heat distribution circuit (here, the second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) provided on the door frame top central decorative board 455 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other central decorative board are the door frame top. In addition to the function of distributing the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative board 455 itself, it prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has functions that can be done. In addition, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other left decorative board include an LED constant current driving circuit (accurately provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself). Has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity in addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit). Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other right decorative substrate include an LED constant current driving circuit (accurately provided in the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 itself). Has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity in addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit).

  Further, the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and 10 full-color LEDs are provided. When the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, they are close to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. L on lower left side decorative board 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of a sink (suction) type, and generate heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. For this reason, even in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be hardly affected by the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs.

  Further, the constant current drive circuit 402bax, 402bbx has land patterns whose end sides are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative board 402b, thereby providing a constant current drive circuit. Arranged so that the edges of the land patterns 402bax and 402bbx are parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate is one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right end sides of the decorative substrate. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be made shorter. Thereby, it can contribute to enlarging the distance dimension of the left-right direction of the game board 5. FIG.

[11-4-2. Plate on the upper center of the dish]
As shown in FIG. 202B, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, hLED1 to hLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 on the upward direction of the effect operation unit 300, whereas the LED constant current driving circuit 314a. , 314 b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper central decorative plate 314 on the side of the rendering operation unit 300 facing upward. When the dish center upper decorative board 314 shown in FIG. 202B is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the dish center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a. The connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay board 392 and the electric wiring is mounted on the right side along the upper end side 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314x on the dish center.

  A white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. In the present embodiment, the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish moves forward by the light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300). The reflectance of can be increased.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative board 314, the part number corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full color LED and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which is the full color LED are arranged are printed as silk printing at all. It has not been. Further, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 as a blank character with white resist.

  This is because the reflectivity on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is reduced by the light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, due to the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative plate 314x from being lowered due to the light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, from decreasing.

  Moreover, although the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in translucent milky white as described above, the front of the pachinko machine 1 When the player sitting on the head moves the head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the LED on the dish center upper decorative board 314 provided in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 Even if the player can visually recognize the mounting surface 314x, in the first place, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full color LED, and a full color LED. Since the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, it is completely related to the game for the player It has not full LED with the corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED is prevented from being viewed by the player. Therefore, the numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10) and the auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, full-color LEDs) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the area where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

  Note that the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has no part number corresponding to the connector HCN and a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged printed as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN that has nothing to do with the game for the player, and the region indicating the position where the connector HCN is disposed.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. As described above, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is a foil-extracted character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). A letter is formed by making a letter with a pattern and removing the surrounding copper foil), and the foil-drawn letter is formed by a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the dish center. Covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, but the foil removal character (that is, the wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In the layer (copper plane) in which the character is formed, the character may be formed as a character formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed, or the decorative plate 314 at the upper center of the dish Foil-free characters (that is, a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. Each of them may be formed as a cut character formed by removing the copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 are formed as a solid ground as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish is a foil-cut character (that is, a character is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed. Without being formed as a blank character), and is formed as a blank character with characters removed on one or both of the solid ground of the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 314y. It may be.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish has constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersions. Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silk marks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314, yellow areas (not shown as silk printing) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are shown. Are printed in the chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, and in the vicinity of these regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are not illustrated as silk printing yellow (or , Black).

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a yellow chain line (not shown as silk printing) is an area indicating a position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is arranged. (Or a black chain line), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have white, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full color LED is reduced.

  Further, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test for hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, This is performed for each LED element, which constitutes one full-color LED, with respect to the LED element emitting red (R), the LED element emitting green (G), and the LED element emitting blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 are formed as a so-called solid ground that grounds an area excluding land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 and the solid ground formed on the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). Yes.

  In the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and reflectance that decreases in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white color are due to light emission of the full color LED Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but the area corresponding to the member disposed in the front of the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED is LED mounted. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) (not shown) as silk print, and an electron is located in the vicinity of this region. A part number corresponding to a part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  As described above, since the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. 202B is rotated 90 degrees to the left. When viewed (that is, a state where the dish center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are shown. The width dimension extending up to about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx. For this reason, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper decorative substrate 314, the land of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is arranged. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper decorative board 314 in the dish center is extremely short, the wiring pattern should be drawn from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the minimum distance dimension is limited in the width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns, it is difficult to draw out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so that the edges of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper central decorative board 314. Adopted the configuration.

  In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the left lower end side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. The terminal on the input side is the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC + 12V, ground (GND), and resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left side, the upper right side, and the lower right side are mainly terminals on the output side 1 to the output side. The output side 1 terminal to the output side 3 terminal are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which a ground (GND) is input. Yes.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two end sides of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish upper central decorative board 314. While being able to arrange | position as a state, the remaining 2 edge sides can be arrange | positioned as the state which inclined 45 degree | times with respect to the lower end edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative board 314. FIG. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is limited from the respective lead pads of the land pattern arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent interval of the wiring pattern. Even all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region from which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish central decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, the group 1 is composed of four full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4, and four full color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of the hLED5 to the hLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, its length The thickness can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern leading to the group 1 and the group 2 from being unduly lengthened or shortened to either one of the group 1 or the group 2. It is possible to increase the efficiency of wiring pattern placement and routing in the work.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, when the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. 202B is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is positioned on the plate center upper). The constant current driving circuit 314ax is a semi-arc-shaped central portion (full-color LED in FIG. 202B) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center. The constant current drive circuit 314bx can be arranged on the right side as compared with the hLED 6 is arranged, and the constant current driving circuit 314bx is arranged in the semicircular arc-shaped central part (FIG. 202 (b) ) In the left side compared with the portion where the hdLED 6, which is a full color LED, is disposed, and the light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314 ax. It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Thereby, the area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx An area for routing the wiring pattern to the hLED9 and hLED10, which are two full-color LEDs, can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. Resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and a capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) whose rectangular shape is a rectangular shape. S: 1.25 mm). That is, the size of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) is larger than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Very small. For this reason, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one end side in the longitudinal direction at the upper end side of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each end of the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged such that the end of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end 314eg1 and the lower end 314eg2 of the upper central decorative board 314, and the resistance Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 so as to be non-parallel.

  In addition, the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 and ten full-color LEDs. HLED1 to hLED10 as viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, and closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative board 314, and in the semicircular arc shape of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. A configuration is adopted in which the plate is arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink (suction) type, as described above, like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. Fever. For this reason, even in the upper decorative plate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are separated from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The heat generation by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less susceptible to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are ten full color LEDs.

  Further, the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper central decorative board 314. 314ax, 314bx land pattern end edges are arranged in parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right end sides of the decorative substrate is the decorative substrate. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be made shorter. Thereby, since it can contribute to enlarging the distance dimension of the left-right direction of the production | presentation operation unit 300 and the distance dimension of the front-back direction, while being able to equip the door frame 3 with the large-scale production operation unit 300, the production operation unit The light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[11-4-3. Genus pad on the bottom of IC package of constant current drive circuit]
As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are flat as described above. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  A metal pad FP is exposed at the center of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter referred to as “EPad”) is formed. This IC package can be improved in heat dissipation and bondability by being soldered to a substrate.

  The land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with an EPad land pattern EP having a square shape in addition to each lead pad. The EPad land pattern EP is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a grid pattern. By these thermal vias TV, the EPad land pattern EP and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected. For this reason, it is impossible to draw out a wiring pattern from each lead pad in the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

  As described above, the constant current driving circuit 402bax is a sink (suction) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, heat can be radiated from the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  The relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly described. The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP is constant current. The number of thermal vias TV and the size of the diameter are selected so as to be 50% or more with respect to the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the bonding area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current driving circuit and the EPad land pattern EP are soldered is prevented from being excessively increased, and the generation of voids is prevented. The joining strength can be obtained. Note that the EPad land pattern EP can also be formed in a grid pattern, but in this case as well, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain a stable bonding strength, as described above, the constant current drive circuit The EPad (metal pad FP) must be bonded to the EPad land pattern EP by 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in contrast to the case where the end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged. When the edge side of the land pattern is arranged in a state inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge side 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect for the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP is similarly left. When arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so as to be arranged in parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the side lower decorative substrate 402b and inclined by 45 degrees The EPad land pattern EP is also arranged in a state inclined by 45 degrees. When the EPad land pattern EP edge is arranged in parallel with the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP edge and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged. The distance between the left end side 402 beg1 or the right end side 402 beg 2 of the circuit board becomes shorter and the distance to the substrate end side becomes shorter. In other words, there is less room for heat dissipation on the substrate. . On the other hand, the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b when the end side EP of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged in a state inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance between the right edge 402beg2 and the edge of the EPad land pattern EP is a portion where the distance between the edge of the EPad and the substrate edge becomes shorter, but the two edges in contact with the vertex are not parallel to the edge of the substrate. Since the room for heat dissipation on the substrate is wide, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than that in the case where the edge side of the EPad land pattern EP and the side of the substrate are parallel.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In this embodiment, as described above, as described above, for example, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically is provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, and a semicircle The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape, respectively, and the LED by light emission of the full color LED by the region indicating the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the position where the full color LED is arranged A part number corresponding to a full-color LED that can prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from being lowered and has nothing to do with the game for the player. And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player. Here, FIGS. 204 to 204 show another configuration of the present invention in which measures such as a reduction in reflectivity are taken (hereinafter referred to as “a configuration of measures such as a reduction in reflectivity according to the second to fourth embodiments”). This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 204 shows a configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, FIG. 205 shows a configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 206 shows a portion D ′ in FIG. 205 is an enlarged view as seen from the LED non-mounting surface in a portion D ″ of FIG. 205, FIG. 207 is a configuration of countermeasures such as a reduction in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a diagram of D ′ ″ of FIG. It is the enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in a part. 204 to 208 have the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 202 and 203 (hereinafter referred to as a configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment). Are denoted by the same reference numerals. In FIG. 206, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for easy viewing of the drawing. In FIG. 208, various electronic components are omitted for the sake of easy viewing.

[Contrast between the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment and the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as prints, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity of these regions, respectively. Has been.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central dish 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative board 314 on the plate center. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are located in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, regions corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown as prints, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are silk printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204A, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a hdLED1 that is a full color LED. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the region indicating the position where the hdLED 1 to the hdLED 10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are respectively printed as silk printing. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 as silk prints. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs on the left or above in the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, are yellow as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Each is printed.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed as a silk print with a yellow solid line (not shown) and corresponds to the connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this region. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspections of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are individually performed (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is yellow not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, as shown in FIG. 206, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 206A) as silk printing, and the lower left side decorative board IC1 (see FIG. 206 (a)), which is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. And the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions resistance Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum electric current setting circuit 402bay is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (refer FIG. 206 (a)) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, and to the right, the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 206 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Yes.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Be able to.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs and Corresponding part numbers and regions indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are respectively printed as silk printing. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative plate 314 of the dish center with yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 as silk prints. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs on the right side in the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, are printed in yellow as silk prints on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314, respectively. Has been.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed as a silk line with a solid yellow line (not shown), and the area near the area corresponds to the connector HCN. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test for the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is yellow not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the plate has a constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like. The area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow solid line (or black solid line) not shown, and the part number corresponding to the electronic component is shown as a silk print near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the second embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( In 314bx), the package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the second embodiment, the white color resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center reflects light forward of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED. The regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs. The number and the region indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, but in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b -The parts number (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are LEDs and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, there are part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. An area (yellow solid line) indicating a position to be arranged is different from that printed in silk printing.

  The white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. It is like that. In addition, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a reflectance to the front (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300) due to light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs. Can be increased. For this reason, in the case where the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED is printed by black printing. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, and there arises a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in milky white with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the player. Then, there is a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Accordingly, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full color LED that has no relation to the game at all for the player, and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are set as silk printing. Unlike black, by printing in light yellow, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface (that is, the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) ) Or a number identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED) can be difficult to find.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed, which is different from black and yellow. By printing with, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to light emission of the full color LED.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the same operational effects as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number that identifies the full color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, the region that indicates the position where the full color LED is disposed). In addition, the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED can be prevented from being lowered.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, unlike black, and light color. When printing in yellow), the polarity mark of the full color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full color LED.

  Further, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, which have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are emitted from the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. However, among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or connector is arranged is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk print, and a part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector is adjacent to this area. Is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

[Contrast between the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment and the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as prints, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity of these regions, respectively. Has been.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central dish 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative board 314 on the plate center. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are located in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, regions corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown as prints, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are silk printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205A, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a hdLED1 that is a full color LED. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 is a foil cut character (that is, a cut character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil ( In FIG. 205 (c), only the foil LED 7 is shown as a part number corresponding to the hdLED 7 which is a full-color LED.)), And an area indicating positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged is shown. Foil-extracted regions excluding terminals (not shown) and wiring patterns (not shown) (that is, wiring patterns are formed) In the (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, in the region formed by removing the copper foil (FIG. 205 (c)), only the foil removal region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full color LED. .)), And the foil-extracted region and the foil-extracted characters are covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are formed as the foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and to the left or above, respectively. The foil removal region and the foil removal character are respectively covered with a white resist solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is disposed is a foil-extracted region (that is, a wiring pattern) (not shown) excluding each terminal and a wiring pattern (not shown). In the layer (copper plane), the area where the copper foil is removed except for each terminal and wiring pattern is formed, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). In this way, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspections of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are individually performed (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is indicated in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern that is copper foil It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, as shown in FIG. 206, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 206A) as silk printing, and the lower left side decorative board IC1 (see FIG. 206 (a)), which is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. And the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions resistance Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum electric current setting circuit 402bay is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (refer FIG. 206 (a)) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, and to the right, the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 206 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Yes.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Be able to.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 205 (b), hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper central decorative substrate 314. Corresponding part numbers are formed as foil-extracted characters (that is, extracted characters formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed and then removing the surrounding copper foil) In addition, regions indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are not shown in the respective terminals and foil-extracted regions excluding a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, each terminal in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) And an area formed by removing the copper foil, except for the wiring pattern) WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper decorative board 314 as foil extraction areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs in the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the right side are respectively formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper central decorative substrate 314 as a letter, The foil-extracted region and the foil-extracted character are respectively covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative board 314 in the dish center, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is disposed is formed with a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). In this layer (copper plane), a region where the copper foil is removed except for each terminal and wiring pattern is formed, and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. In this way, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test for the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. In other words, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are made with the wiring pattern that is copper foil and its surroundings. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the plate has a constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like. The area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow solid line (or black solid line) not shown, and the part number corresponding to the electronic component is shown as a silk print near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the third embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 have no white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( In 314bx), the package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, the white color resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center reflects light forward of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED. The regions indicating the positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed as silk printing at all, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is a component corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs. The number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, but in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b -The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 LEDs are the letters without foil (that is, the letters formed with the wiring patterns that are copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring patterns are formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged is a foil-extracted area excluding terminals (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer on which the wiring pattern is formed) In the (copper plane), a white resist is formed as a solid region on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern. Covers the foil cutting area and the foil cutting letters, and further decorates the center of the dish. On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are indicated by foil-extracted characters (that is, the characters are indicated by the wiring pattern which is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed). The area where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, and the area where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is a foil-extracted area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (In other words, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and the wiring pattern), the LED mounting on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 The foil removal region and the foil removal letter are respectively formed by a white resist solid-coated on the surface 314x. It is different in that it is covered.

  The white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. It is like that. In addition, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a reflectance to the front (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300) due to light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs. Can be increased. For this reason, in the case where the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED is printed by black printing. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, and there arises a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in milky white with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the player. Then, there is a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all for the player is formed as a foil-letter character, and the game is completely for the player. A full color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil removal region, and covering the foil removal character and the foil removal region with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface. A wiring pattern of the LED, a foil removal region indicating a mounting position of the full color LED (that is, a region indicating a position where the full color LED is disposed), a number for identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED), Is made of copper foil and the same color, and the white color formed on the LED mounting surface By covering with the dies, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) is found, or a number for identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED) ) Can be difficult to find.

  In addition, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, a full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all for the player is formed as a foil-letter character, and the game is completely at the same time for the player. A full color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil removal region, and covering the foil removal character and the foil removal region with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface. It can prevent that the reflectance in the LED mounting surface by LED light emission falls.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the same operational effects as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number for identifying the full color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the foil removal region indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, the region indicating the position where the full color LED is disposed). In addition, the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, since a process called silk printing can be omitted on the LED mounting surface, the board cost can be reduced by reducing the printing cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing processes of the board. Manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, in the foil extraction region indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, when forming the region indicating the position where the full color LED is disposed as the foil extraction region). Alternatively, a full-color LED polarity mark may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, which have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are emitted from the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. However, among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, areas indicating positions where electronic components and connectors are arranged are not shown terminals (not shown) and foil-extracted areas (not shown) except for wiring patterns (not shown) (that is, layers on which wiring patterns are formed (copper planes) ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, a region formed by removing the copper foil), and a component number corresponding to an electronic component or connector is not shown in the vicinity of this region. That is, it is formed as a letter formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the surrounding copper foil.

[Contrast between the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment and the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as prints, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity of these regions, respectively. Has been.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central dish 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative board 314 on the plate center. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are located in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, regions corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown as prints, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are silk printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 207 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has hdLED1 that is a full color LED. -White resist-extracted characters using a white resist whose part number corresponding to hdLED10 is painted twice (FIG. 207 (c)) shows only white resist-excluded characters as part numbers corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. ) And a region indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged, a white resist removal region using a white resist painted twice (see FIG. 207 (c), hdLED7 which is a full color LED). As a corresponding area, only the white resist removal area LSLK7 is shown.) It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-colored white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of white resist. (That is, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the white resists applied twice). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is an area (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged for the second time among the white resists coated twice. 207 (c), the white resist removal area LSLK7 corresponding to the hdLED 7 which is a full color LED, the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hdLED 7 which is a full color LED is shown. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark to be designated.) Is masked as white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and to the left Or, hdLED1 to hd that are full color LEDs above In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist. By covering the whole area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are formed as white resist removed characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. As a result, the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist are shaded, and the second layer white resist passes through the second layer white resist to form the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. When the base (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter) is seen, the white resist of the first layer appears pale. That is, when the background of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist-extracted characters in the first layer of white resist. ing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is disposed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this region. Numbers are formed as white resist-extracted characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. When the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer The white resist of the eyes will appear pale. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removal region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. It has become.

  In addition, since the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is coated with white resist twice, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist, The light refractive index of the white resist layer changes. Accordingly, when the background of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist extracted characters and the white resist extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. Be able to.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). Thus, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a lighting inspection is individually performed on the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, as shown in FIG. 208, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, A region indicating the position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged is formed as a white resist removal region using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are formed in the vicinity of these areas as white resist-extracted characters using a white resist that is painted twice in the same manner as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-colored white resist, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. The resist is covered (that is, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the white resists applied twice). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, an area indicating the position where the constant current driving circuit 402bax is to be disposed (second pin arrangement) as the second of the white resists coated twice. 208. The white resist removal region LSLKa corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in Fig. 208 includes the first pin and the 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark for instructing the arrangement.) Is masked as a white resist removal region LSLKa, and in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions LSLKa, a constant current is applied upward. IC1 (see FIG. 208A), which is a part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax, is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, two white resists are formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as with the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The whole area is covered with the white resist and the whole area is covered except for the area masked with the white resist of the second layer, so that the masked area is recessed as a concave portion, and corresponds to the constant current driving circuit 402bax. A white resist removal region LSLKa is formed as a region to be processed, and IC1 which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removal character.

  The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b is a white resist (not shown) indicating a region where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged. In the vicinity of this region, white resist-extracted characters R1, R2, not shown are part numbers corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A part number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor such as various dispersion resistors (not shown) or a capacitor formed as R3 is formed as a white resist letter not shown. In addition, the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b is formed as a white resist removal area (not shown) indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is formed in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a white resist removal character (not shown).

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same in the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist are shaded, and the LED non-mounting surface of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is passed through the second layer white resist. When the base of 402 by (a copper foil portion and a region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter) is seen, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the background of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters formed in the first layer of white resist are identified. And a white resist removal region can be identified.

  In addition, since the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with white resist twice, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer of white resist, The light refractive index of the second layer of white resist will change. As a result, when the background of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer white resist are identified. Can be done.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Be able to.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 207 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist painted twice, and the region indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged uses a white resist painted twice It is formed as a white resist removal region. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is the first of the two-colored white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 is made of white resist. (That is, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish as the first of the white resists applied twice). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the dish is the second area of the white resist that is painted twice, and is an area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers). For example, in the white resist removal area HSLK7 as an area corresponding to the hLED 7 that is a full-color LED, a notch mark that instructs the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED 7 that is a full-color LED is included. Are cut out as white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full color LED in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10. LED which is the part number corresponding to hLED10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. Thus, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center, the whole is covered with the first layer of white resist, and the second layer of white resist is covered. By covering the whole area except for the area masked by the resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are white resist removed areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are formed as white resist-extracted characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 of the dish are the same. As a result, the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist are shaded. When the base is viewed, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist-extracted characters in the first layer of white resist. ing.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is provided in the vicinity of this region. Numbers are formed as white resist-extracted characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. When the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second white resist, the first layer The white resist of the eyes will appear pale. Accordingly, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removal region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. It has become.

  In addition, since the white color resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of the white resist, The light refractive index of the white resist layer changes. As a result, when the background of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed regions in the first layer of white resist are identified. Be able to.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test for the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314, constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors not shown The areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are arranged are formed as white resist removal areas using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314. In the vicinity, the part number corresponding to the electronic part is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist painted twice, like the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer in the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 of the dish are the same. Therefore, the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist are shaded, and the second layer of white resist passes through the second layer of white resist and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish When the substrate of 314y is seen, the white resist of the first layer appears light. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 of the dish center is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters formed on the white resist of the first layer are identified. And a white resist removal region can be identified.

  In addition, since the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 is coated with white resist twice, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted regions in the first layer of white resist, The light refractive index of the second layer of white resist will change. As a result, when the background of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed regions in the first layer of white resist are identified. Can be done.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have white, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center reflects light forward of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED. The regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs. The number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, whereas in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b -The part numbers corresponding to the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed as white resist-extracted characters using a white resist painted twice, and the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is twice It is formed as a white resist removal area using a painted white resist, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is painted twice with the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. Are formed as white resist-extracted characters using white resists, and regions indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as white resist-extracted regions using twice-painted white resists. Is different in that .

  The white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. It is like that. In addition, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a reflectance to the front (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300) due to light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs. Can be increased. For this reason, in the case where the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED is printed by black printing. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, and there arises a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in milky white with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the player. Then, there is a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-extracted character using a white resist that is painted twice with a full-color LED that does not have any relation to the game for the player and the corresponding part number. In addition, the area where the full color LED having no relation to the game is arranged is formed as a white resist removal area using a white resist that is painted twice, so that the mounting position of the full color LED is formed. It is difficult to find a white resist removal region (that is, a region indicating a position where a full color LED is arranged) indicating a color, or a number that identifies a full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED). Can do.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-extracted character using a white resist that is painted twice with a full-color LED having no relation to the game at all for the player and the corresponding part number. By forming the area indicating the position where the full color LED, which has no relation to the game at all for the player, is formed as a white resist removal area using a white resist painted twice, the light emission of the full color LED It can prevent that the reflectance in a LED mounting surface falls.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the same operational effects as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, a white resist removal region (that is, a position where a full color LED is arranged) using a number that identifies a full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED) and a white resist that is painted twice indicating a mounting position of the full color LED. Can be made difficult for the player to see, and the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED can be prevented from decreasing.

  In addition, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a step of silk printing can be omitted for the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface, respectively, so that the printing cost for silk printing and the manufacture of the substrate Reduction of the number of processes can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  Note that in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, which have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are emitted from the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. However, among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, regions indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors mounted on the LED mounting surface are arranged are formed as terminals (not shown) and white resist removal regions (not shown), and in the vicinity of these regions. In addition, part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as white resist-excluded letters (not shown).

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist. By covering the whole area except the area masked by the second layer of white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED and connector are arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted area. In addition, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and connectors are formed as white resist-extracted characters, but other methods may be used to form white resist-extracted regions and white resist-extracted characters. . For example, an area indicating the position where a full color LED or connector is placed before the white resist is dried after the white resist is solid-coated once or a plurality of times on the LED mounting surface and non-LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate A white resist removal region by pressing the plate, and a method of forming a white resist removal character by pressing a plate showing a part number corresponding to a full color LED or connector, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and After the white resist is solidly applied to the non-LED mounting surface once or a plurality of times, the white resist is dried, and then the region indicating the position where the full color LED or connector is arranged is set as a white resist removal region by laser irradiation. The part number corresponding to the full color LED and connector And a method of forming as outline characters.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes various substrates that are supplied from a power source from a power supply substrate and that can control electrical decoration (for example, JP-A-2006-199298 (FIG. 8)). By the way, inside the gaming machine, lines that transmit power to various boards and lines that transmit control signals are routed, and the length of the lines increases, which may cause various boards to malfunction due to the effects of external noise. was there.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a front frame configured to cover a window that opens back and forth with a fluoroscopic protective plate on the game board (see, for example, JP-A-2006-199298 (paragraph [0014]). And FIG. 1)). By the way, by increasing the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame is reduced, so that the decorative board accommodated in the left and right sides also has a band plate shape. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body in the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board is increased, so that the decorative board provided in the game board also has a band plate shape. However, in the case where the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a region for drawing the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emission means.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine that is arranged waiting in front of the display screen of an effect display device and includes a movable accessory device that operates at the time of the effect (for example, JP-A-2015-058064). Publication (paragraph [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9)). In the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate is mounted on which light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted. However, there is a possibility that the player can visually recognize the number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board that has no relation to the game for the player, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, etc. through the light emitting portion.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine to which a decorative board on which a light emitting means is mounted has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with a variety of effects using the light emission effects by the light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance decreases due to the number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, etc. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

[12. Each decorative board in the game board]
Next, among the decorative boards included in the game board 5, in particular, a decorative board on which a magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative board including a magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like.

  First, among the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, as the decorative board provided with the magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit, as described above, the back left upper movable decorative body in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000. A back upper left front stage decoration board 3311a on which a magnetic back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotational position of the front stage decoration portion 3312 of 3310 is mounted, and the back left effect of the back unit 3000 A back left bottom front stage decoration board 3321a on which a magnetic back bottom left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front stage decoration portion 3322 of the back left bottom movable decoration body 3320 in the unit 3300 is mounted; The rotational position of the front decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 The back upper right front decoration board 3411a on which the magnetic back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab for detecting the standby position (original position) is mounted, and the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 in the back right production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. There is a back lower right front stage decoration board 3421a on which a magnetic back lower right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front stage decoration unit 3422 is mounted.

  In this embodiment, the back upper left front stage decorative board 3311a, the back left lower front stage decorative board 3321a, the back upper right front stage decorative board 3411a, and the back lower right front stage decorative board 3421a have the same circuit configuration, and the LED mounting surface. The arrangement of the non-LED mounting surface is the same (the same type of electronic components and the same package), and the countermeasures for reducing the reflectance on the LED mounting surface and the non-LED mounting surface are the same. The upper left front decorative substrate 3311a will be described.

  The back upper left front decoration board 3311a receives the light emission data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1 which are serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the panel drive board 1720 and the door frame side serial system. ing. Further, the back upper left front decoration board 3311a is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 via the panel drive board 1720 and DC + 12V is inputted, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. ) Electrically connected to the line and grounded to the ground (GND). Note that the back upper left front decoration board 3311a may be configured to be directly connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. It may be configured to be electrically connected directly to the ground (GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

  The back upper left front decoration board 3311a includes a back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, an LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac, a heat distribution circuit 3311ad, and eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8).

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab can detect a change in magnetic pole, and mainly includes a linear power supply 3311ab, a Hall element 3311abb, an amplifier circuit 3311abc, a Schmitt circuit 3311abd, an output current limiting circuit 3311abe, and an FET 3311abf. It is configured as an open drain output.

  The linear power source 3311aba is a circuit that generates and supplies an internal power source that is used in the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab when DC + 12V is input from the + 12V power source line. This internal power supply is supplied to the Hall element 3311abb, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, and the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, respectively, and can operate. The source terminals of the linear power supply 3311aba, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and the FET 3311abf are grounded to the ground (GND) line.

  The Hall element 3311abb can detect the strength of the magnetic flux density, and outputs an analog signal whose voltage changes according to the strength of the magnetic flux density to the amplifier circuit 3311abc. The amplifier circuit 3311abc amplifies the analog signal from the Hall element 3311abb and outputs it to the Schmitt circuit 3311abd. The Schmitt circuit 3311abd prepares the waveform of the signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 3311abc and outputs it to the gate terminal of the FET 3311abf which is the final stage. The FET 3311abf outputs the logic of the detection signal ULORG from its drain terminal in accordance with the signal from the Schmitt circuit 3311abd input to its gate terminal. Since the FET 3311abf is used as an open drain output, the drain current to the drain terminal of the FET 3311abf is limited by the output current limiting circuit 3311abe.

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab switches the logic of the detection signal ULORG from HI to LOW when the magnet approaches the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the Hall element 3311abb becomes larger than the operating point (Bop). When the magnet moves away from the surface of the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density becomes smaller than the return point (Brp), the logic of the detection signal ULORG is switched from LOW to HI.

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is arranged so that the Hall element 3311abb is positioned immediately below the trajectory of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312 shown in FIG. Has been.

  In the present embodiment, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip, and the type of the IC package is a rectangular shape (horizontal length: 2). This is a surface mount type (SMD, height: 1.1 mm) having a height of .9 mm and a vertical length of 1.6 mm, which is a so-called SOT. Since the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component, the back left upper front stage decoration board 3311a (that is, the back upper left) of the front stage decoration part 3312 attached to the right side surface of the base stage decoration part 3311 shown in FIG. The distance dimension (this distance dimension (clearance) between the front surface of the IC package of the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab) and the left surface side of the front decoration part 3312 serving as the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid front decoration part 3312 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is about 1.5 mm.)) Can be reduced.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (the same applies to the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420) is a small movable decorative body. An optical back under rotation detection sensor 3120 for detecting a standby position (original position) between the rear decoration part 3116 and the middle decoration part 3118 of the back lower movable decorative body 3110 in the back lower stage production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 shown. As described above, a large-sized optical sensor is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the first-stage decoration portion 3312 (the same applies to the first-stage decoration portions 3322, 3412, and 3422) that is a movable body. This is structurally difficult.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a small electronic component (the same applies to the back left upper front decorative substrate 3321a, the back upper right front decorative substrate 3321a, and the back right lower front decorative substrate 3421a). A magnetic sensor) is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front decoration part 3312 (the same as the front decoration parts 3322, 3412, and 3422), which is a movable body. Although this magnetic sensor has a large variation in detection as compared with the above-described optical sensor, in the present embodiment, the first-stage decoration portion 3312 that is a movable body (the first-stage decoration portions 3322, 3412, and 3422 are also the same). .)), Even if there is a variation in the standby position (original position), the deviation is small, and the probability that the player feels uncomfortable is low.

  The back upper left movable decoration body 3310 (the same applies to the back lower left movable decoration body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration body 3420) can be moved left and right, moved up and down, Since the step decoration portion 3312 (first step decoration portions 3322, 3412, and 3422) rotates, such a back upper left movable decoration body 3310 (back lower left movable decoration body 3320, back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and back lower right portion) (The same applies to the movable decorative body 3420.) During the operation of the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the same applies to the back left lower front decorative substrate 3321a, the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a, and the back right lower front decorative substrate 3421a). In some cases, light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 may enter the LED mounting surface from multiple directions.

  For this reason, the above-described optical is mounted on the LED mounting surface of the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the same applies to the back lower left front decorative board 3321a, the back upper right front decorative board 3411a, and the back lower front front decorative board 3421a). When a sensor of the type is mounted, light from various light sources (plural light sources) provided on the game board 5 may be detected as disturbance light (light damage) and erroneously detected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described magnetic sensor is also used for this reason. Therefore, erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) of the front decoration part 3312 (first decoration parts 3322, 3412, 3422) by light emitted from various light emission sources (a plurality of light emission sources) provided in the game board 5 is performed. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the optical sensor provided in the various effect units described above is configured such that light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 is blocked by other members (or disturbance light). Therefore, there is no possibility of erroneous detection due to the light.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 200, and sends a constant current to the full color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). A sink type constant current drive circuit 3311acx and a maximum current setting circuit 3311ac capable of setting a maximum current flowing in the full color LED 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). It is configured. The constant current drive circuit 3311acx is the same circuit as the constant current drive circuit 283x in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 200, and is a serial system (light emission) from the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1), control is performed so that a constant current flows through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Since the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is a sink (suction) type as described above, the constant current drive circuit 3311ac generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is handled by the heat distribution circuit 3311ad, so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 3311ac can be distributed. The heat distribution circuit 3311ad is the same circuit as the heat distribution circuit 283c in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG.

  The light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating a light emission mode, and includes ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit is designated from among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is designated from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG. 200, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a has eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8), a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab and the like mounted on the LED mounting surface. The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac and the like are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface. The upper left front decorative substrate 3311a is configured as described above, such as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, and the reflectance according to the third embodiment. Any of a configuration of countermeasures such as a reduction and a configuration of countermeasures such as a reduction in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment can be adopted.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine in which the presentation operation of a display device or a decoration device provided on the game board is controlled by an effect control device (control means) has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [ FIG. 3 and FIG. 22)). By the way, the game board has an environment that is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. Due to the structure of the game board, the environment that is affected by electromagnetic noise among various wiring connected to the production control device (control means). When electromagnetic noise enters other wiring via the routed wiring, there is a possibility that the production control device (control means) malfunctions due to the influence of electromagnetic noise from the other wiring.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine having a movable body on a gaming board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-154676 (paragraph [0067], FIG. 18 and FIG. 19)). The movable body has a protruding detection piece, and the detection piece is detected by an optical detection switch provided separately from the movable body, thereby specifying the position of the movable body. By the way, when the movable body is provided with an optical detection switch to detect a specific position of the movable body, the light is emitted by a plurality of light emitters provided on the game board while the movable body is in operation. There was a possibility that the ambient light would be incident on the optical detection switch, and the detection switch could be erroneously detected.

[13. Brightness settings for indirect and direct light]
The panel plate 1110 in FIG. 143 and the light guide plate 2601 and the like in the table effect unit 2600 in FIG. 155 have a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line from the end face (toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 in FIG. 143). A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that irradiate light, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 that is decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 of FIG. 155, and light from the right side of the light guide plate 2601 , A plurality of LEDs 2621 for the second pattern 2620 decorated to emit light, hereinafter referred to as “LEDs used as indirect light”) are received and indirect light from the inner surface of the light guide plate. Is irradiated.

  Various operation LEDs 300 provided in various door frame side units such as the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 in FIG. 23, the game in FIG. Other LEDs not used for the light guide plate such as various LEDs provided in various units on the game board side such as the lower back effect unit 3100, the upper rear effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400 provided in the board 5 (Hereinafter may be referred to as “LED used as direct light”) is irradiated as direct light. For this reason, if the brightness | luminance of LED used as indirect light and the brightness | luminance of LED used as direct light are made the same, the indirect light by a light-guide plate will become dark compared with direct light. The player wants to adjust darkly when the current brightness of the various LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is too bright, and adjust brightly if the current brightness is not too dark.

  By the way, various LEDs are mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and one or a plurality of LED constant current driving circuits are mounted. As described above, the LED constant current driving circuit controls the brightness (gradation level) of the LED in 128 steps from gradation level 0 (zero) to gradation level 127 from turn-off to lighting (maximum brightness). Is something that can be done.

  Further, as described above, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are data for designating the light emission mode, and are composed of ID information and gradation information. Yes. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits included in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is designated from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

  Further, the light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating the light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit is designated from among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is designated from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

  The gradation specified in the gradation information described above is determined in the rendering operation unit monitoring process in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process described later performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a and the lamp palette setting process in the reception command analysis process. Is set. In this lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. And are set respectively. Peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from main control board 1310, and reads (extracts) light emission mode generation schedule data from control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes lamp palette setting processing. Thus, the above-described gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and during the demonstration (demonstration performed while waiting for the player) or during the production ( For example, the above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated by executing lamp palette setting processing (within a predetermined period in a specific effect).

  Here, the brightness designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the specified brightness value, one specified brightness value can be set in a 32-step range from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st specified brightness value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), and the 31st luminance that becomes the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. One luminance designation value can be set up to the designated value.

  For example, a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the clockwise direction, and the current luminance is temporarily set to the minimum luminance (lights off). When the first luminance designated value is set to the next highest luminance level after the value, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear) from the first luminance designated value toward the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance is set. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light change along the tone curve or the spline curve tone curve), while the rotation operation unit 302 is turned off. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness when rotating clockwise, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness) toward the first brightness specified value (for example, Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. In this embodiment, a case where a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) can set the brightness during a demonstration (demonstration performed while waiting for the player) or during the production is prepared in advance. At this time, a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the demonstration or the effect, the first luminance designated value to the first luminance value. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the 31 brightness specified value, it is visually indicated as an image how much the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) has a desired brightness. Be able to. In the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

  The normal palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of the 17 levels is selected in steps of 5% from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve) in which a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is a designated value. , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is the luminance designated value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance designated value that is the luminance designated value described above. Of the 32-step range up to the 31st luminance designation value, the value corresponds to the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation.

  In this embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance as the normal pallet value for various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Among various decorative boards that are set as the above-described gradation information and are provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light, a palette for a specific decorative board (LED that feels dazzling to the player) (not shown) A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  In the special palette value, the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the gradation information described above. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32-level ranges from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value to the 31st luminance specified value, which are the luminance specified values described above. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the gradation information described above along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance (lights off) is obtained. The lowest possible brightness is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While being set along the normal palette value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) rotates the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set in accordance with a special palette value corresponding to the luminance designation value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, as direct light, The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value at which the minimum brightness (lights off) is set), and this is linked. Thus, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance is turned off). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  Moreover, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of production is set, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can exert a more effect), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the entire light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to change the first luminance from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance. Even if one luminance designation value is set over the luminance designation value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one luminance designation value is set for a specific decorative board. For other decorative boards, one specified brightness value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set, so the relationship between the light emission modes set to each other (bright or dark) The luminance adjustment can be performed very easily without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although indirect light from the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the brightness compared to direct light, the special pallet value that is different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) for LEDs used as indirect light. Thus, the brightness can be set. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually managed by the palette value, so that the LED used as indirect light And the brightness of an LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect member provided on a game board is provided with a light emitting means, and the light of the light emitting means can be used as a direct light to perform light emission decoration (for example, JP-A-2006-154676). Publication (paragraph [0021], FIG. 2 and FIG. 5)). However, when the light of the light emitting means provided on the effect member is used as indirect light, the light emitted from the light emitting means provided on the effect member is darker than when the light of the light emitting means provided on the effect member is used as direct light. There is a problem that it is difficult to adjust the luminance between the light emitting means used as the direct light and the light emitting means.

[14. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.136, FIG.137, etc. FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously per minute. That is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N. Thus, the flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact with the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position in the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the portion is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side ball 2300 and the obstacle nail N move toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 is obtained. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the first start port 2002, the general winning port 2001, etc. of the start port unit 2100 may be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit). Then, it enters the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505 of the center accessory 2500 and passes through the gate portion 2003 disposed in this space with a certain probability. The game ball B that circulates in the space where the gate portion 2003 is arranged is discharged from the right guide passage 2510 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400.

  Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, a general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged. When the game ball B is received in the general winning port 2001 and detected by the general winning port sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

  By the way, when the game ball B hit to the right passes through the gate part 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit” The closed second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. . Then, when the game ball B is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are transferred to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 or the sub function display unit 2520 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “per probability fluctuation (probability change)” and “per time reduction (short time)” is performed, and the lottery special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360). It is suggested to the player over the second starting time 2002. Also, the special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball B is received at the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is “lost”. , “4R big hit”, “16R big hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “shorter time (time reduction)”, “shorter per probability change”, and the like.

  The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special variation time has elapsed, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Accordingly, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B and entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the winning prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received, or the predetermined winning opening 2005 is given. When any of the conditions for accepting the number of game balls B (for example, 10) is satisfied, an open / close pattern that closes the game balls B in an unacceptable state (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) Repeat a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated by repeating 4 rounds for “4R big hit” and 16 rounds for “16R big hit”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  When the special lottery result is “big hit”, it is possible to generate ST (special time) as an advantageous gaming state after the big winning opening 2005 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern. This ST is to maintain a certain change or short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2520 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time and blinked for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by a combination of the lighted LEDs.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed in order, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern string fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until the display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2520 are set to have a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the special lottery. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, and the back bottom effect unit 3100 of the front effect unit 2600 and the back unit 3000, the upper back Using the effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, the back right effect unit 3400, etc. as appropriate, it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, It can suppress that the interest with respect to a player's game falls.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the front effect unit of the front unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the selected lottery result. 2600, a back lower stage production unit 3100, a back upper production unit 3200, a back left production unit 3300, a back right production unit 3400, and the like can be used as appropriate to perform a light emission production, a movable production, a display production, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

[15. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 185 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 210, and FIG. 212 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[15-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not to generate a reach (reach out) when no big hit gaming state is generated Reach determination random number for use in determination, and variable display pattern for use in determination of variable display pattern of special symbol that is variably displayed on first special symbol display and second special symbol display of function display unit 1400 Random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbols for use in determining the jackpot symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 when generating the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot Random number for determining the initial value of the big hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol, function display unit when generating a small hit gaming state 400 random numbers for small hits to be used for determination of small hits symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display, and for use in determining initial values of random numbers for small hits A random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol is prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol determination for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece that can accept the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and determination for this normal symbol per unit Normal value for determining the initial value of the normal symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal value for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A random number for symbol variation display pattern is prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main random number built-in main random number circuit incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values within the specified numerical range one after another, and once all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value within the predetermined numerical range and Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining the big hit It is supposed to be set as.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 14 when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on or in the main control side power-on process described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the various information stored in the memory as a numerical value is the checksum value stored in the main control power-off process (at power-off) When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when it does not match (sum value), the main control MPU 1310a uses the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol from the built-in nonvolatile RAM. The ID code is taken out, and the same fixed value is always obtained from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code. Perform initial value derivation to output a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. If the ID code is stored in the ID code, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the ID code is executed by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are given, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if a momentary power failure occurs at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 at every predetermined interval, the movable ball can be opened and closed and the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. A gaming state cannot be generated.

[15-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 210 and 211, main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). The main control built-in RAM can be updated by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 1310a”). The timer setting value is set in the “WDT control register”), the main control built-in WDT is started, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a) reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and timing is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) This is a flag indicating whether or not various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing various information and a value of 0 when not erasing various information . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on process again. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, it determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing various information and a value 0 when not erasing various information. In step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete various information (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a uses the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  In step S32, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control built-in RAM of the main control built-in RAM is in the power recovery state. A work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery time information is read from a ROM (that is, main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high-frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter. Therefore, the main control-side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, or in the determination in step S30. When the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0). That is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a is used when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f instructs the RAM clear, and when various information is erased, the sum values do not match, or the main control side When the power-off process is not normally terminated, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a random number for normal symbol determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol per-determining random number. Set to a random number for decision.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main winning ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 are incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating by hardware. In addition to setting to acquire a random number by latching it, the hard random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at a high speed one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and determined in advance. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The other values are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information by creating a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command To remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various commands are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning voltage as described above. Is done. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When determining in step S54 that the main control MPU 1310a has not received the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs non-winning random number update processing (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Step S54 to Step S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including game information and other information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops, for example, the drive signals output to the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets a RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on process again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power-off process. Therefore, when a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and again executes the main control-side power-on process. . That is, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control side power-off process at the time of power-off and the checksum calculated in step S28 when a forced reset is applied by the built-in reset circuit. Value (sum value) cannot match, and a check sum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charged electric charge is applied as + 5V DC for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. That is, even when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island in the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power supply to the facility is cut off until a time of about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process described later is being performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the island facilities of the game hall In the case where the power supply from is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery. If a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the electric charge charged to is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within the period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, whereby the main control side described later Even if timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or a power failure. Thereafter, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated in the checksum based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no indication by the staff such as a game hall clerk such as RAM clear, it is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the game backup information described above is erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24. If the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. The game information and other information (for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is displayed. Various information including the information) can be prevented from being updated, so as never change occurs in the checksum calculation result. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation value stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the pachinko machine Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the game information by the progress of this game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) are supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by supplying the power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2. Backup information for storing various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter). Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control-side power-off processing composed of the processes of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a When the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation value stored in step S64). Therefore, the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby allowing the contents of the main control built-in RAM to be reset. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in this embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the island facility of the game hall is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control side The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as a direct current + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power outage or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, the determination in step S24 is performed. As long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated, so that the timer clear is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT by setting a value and clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT and starting the time measurement again.

  The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by such software built-in main control WDT so that the step after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, the number of main winning balls) are set by interrupt permission to prevent progress to the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A mechanism is adopted in which it is possible to avoid updating various information) including information indicating information output determination counter values). Thus, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment in the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) The various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for the counter), etc.) is completely covered by software so that the main control side power-off process is reliably completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and By configuring it in two parts, such as various pieces of information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter), etc., so that it is not changed at all. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are reliably prevented from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and main control is built in as transmission information Store in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, a problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the start solenoid 2412 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, A problem will be described in the case where the reservation setting of the command transmitted when the power is turned on in the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the special prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs main control in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored, so that the attacker solenoid 2414 starts to be driven and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes. It will transfer from the state closed by the member to the open state.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the That is, for example, a main winning board 1 count display command that indicates the number of game balls that have been entered into the big winning opening 2005 and detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the main control board. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2414 is stopped and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. The main winning circuit 1 close display command from the main control board 1310 for instructing that the state shifts from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 starts). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) in the big hit gaming state, the attack solenoid 2414 is started to open from the state where the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member. To move to the current state (that is, the fifth round of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the five rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time reduction state, and displays it on the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, a screen (for example, a player indicating that the movable piece is open) that indicates that the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. When the peripheral control board 1510 performs display control on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start opening solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece, and the second start opening is displayed. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while 2004 is open, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored to start driving the start port solenoid 2412 and close the movable piece. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the gaming state is such that the gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the game instruction screen for entering the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed. There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game he played.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for main prize ball number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2414 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening / closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be informed of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the game is in the big hit gaming state and the attacker solenoid 2 14 is started and a screen is displayed to indicate that the grand prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. A game ball is inserted into the big prize opening. The screen that tells the player the message “Please play the game to play a ball” is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will receive the grand prize opening 2005 after power is restored. In the above example, for example, a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. When a power failure occurs after a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, driving of the start port solenoid 2412 is started to open the movable piece as a return destination of the main control board 1310. Screen indicating that the second starting port 2004 is open (for example, “A movable piece is open. Please play a game so that a game ball enters the second starting port.” Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine enters the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. A game of making a ball can be instructed.

  As a result, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers after power failure, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

  Thereby, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In these main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, first, a power-on state command is transmitted, followed by a power-on main control return destination command, followed by a power-on main prize ball number. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). When RAM is to be cleared, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), Information indicating which state (probability and time-short state) to return from among the low-probability time-short state, high-probability time-short state, low-probability non-time-short state, and high-probability non-time-short state, and the model code of the pachinko machine And information to be displayed. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), What kind of game specifications (for example, when the probability variation occurs, the state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of special symbol variations (for example, 30 times or 70 times) ), It is possible to specify whether the game specifications (such as so-called ST machines) in which probability fluctuations occur in a state of being played.

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). The main control board for the one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is lost, or it is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing in the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310 The main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the comic F), even though the main control board 1310 flows on the production line to manufacture 1310. There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 corresponding to the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line can use the manufacturing line. It is impossible to confirm which copyright of the work the produced main control board 1310 belongs to, and for any copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what type of game it is (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next jackpot gaming state occurs when probability changes occur).

  As a result, when the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of types of works is mixed. While 1310 is mixed, it is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs.

  Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[15-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 210 and 211.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 212 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits in addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol and normal electric symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process described later. Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a detects, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, and a detection from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002. Signal, detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first start port sensor 3002, detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, detection signal from the big winning port sensor 2403, general winning port sensor 2401 That the payout control board 633 has successfully received a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process to be described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys the information is read, and the main information is read as input information. Is stored in the input information storage area of the built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command classified into the other corresponding to this is transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal, a corresponding start opening command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal processing) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice in total, that is, the twice reading to be compared and the twice reading to be compared for the second time to the fourth time, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering or noise. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002, the first A detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the start port sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, The detection signal from the sensor 2403, the detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the prize ball transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has received the command normally can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal failure monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal trouble monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 whether or not the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal process among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is classified into a notification display that indicates that a failure has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number that is updated by the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby increasing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update processing. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are stored in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. 211 in step S56. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol Also, a mechanism for updating the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Or create a self-check command to check the connection state between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. Therefore, the output of the main award ball number information output signal is set in order to convey the fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the award ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or the award ball When the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. Created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on this input information. In order to notify that, a main prize ball number information output command classified into others is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and based on this input information, that is, the general winning port 2001 and the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5. Based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports (hereinafter referred to as “various winning ports provided on the game board 5”) such as the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005, etc. The number of game balls to be released is counted, and is stored and updated in the award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number is 10 When the number of game balls is over (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the fact, and as transmission information The award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of balls exceeding the value is used as the main prize ball number information output determination counter value. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a reformats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16 bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error canceling navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, the logic of the detection signal from the first starter sensor main side 3002a is compared with the logic of the detection signal from the first starter sensor slave side 3002b, If the logic is different, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having approximately the same diameter or a ball having approximately the same diameter) with a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire, or catheter) attached. It is judged that fraudulent acts (hereinafter referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) by radio wave irradiation using a synthetic resin ball having a diameter are added, and the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment) To do. The value of the radio wave counter is incremented every time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in the fraud detection process. When the RAM is cleared, a value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) ), A radio wave irradiation gossip command that is classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave got is being performed is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Here, the radio wave irradiation goat will be briefly described. An illegal ball (a game ball or a metal having almost the same diameter as it) attached with a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter). A ball or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as the ball) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 to enter the first start port 2002, and the first start Radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is stopped in a region where the game ball passing through the mouth sensor is detected (the ball passage detection region of the first start port sensor). Thus, when radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor (that is, when radio wave irradiation is turned on), the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor is While the logic is that the game ball is not detected, when the radio wave irradiation is not performed (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned off), the logic of the detection signal from the first start sensor becomes the logic that the game ball is detected. . In other words, in the state where the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor, the ball passage detection of the first start port sensor is repeated by repeatedly performing radio wave irradiation ON or radio wave irradiation OFF. A signal indicating that a plurality of game balls have passed through the area can be created in a pseudo manner and output from the first start port sensor to the main control board 4100.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starter sensor main side 3002a and the first starter sensor slave side 3002b are larger than the false detection prevention distance dimension so that such a radio wave irradiation spot can be found. They are spaced apart by a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). As a result, an illegal ball with a flexible string-like operation line attached is struck into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and enters the first starting port 2002. An area for detecting a game ball passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a (a ball pass detection area of the first start port sensor main side 3002a) or a game ball passing through the first start port sensor sub side 3002b Even if a stopped state can be formed in the area where the movement is detected (the ball passage detection area of the first starter sensor slave side 3002b), the player who performs the fraudulent action turns on the radio wave irradiation or the radio wave irradiation. The logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a are always different by turning OFF or repeating the operation. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value, a radio wave irradiation goto notification command that is classified into a notification display informing that radio wave irradiation got is performed is created, and the transmission information is described above. It can be stored in the transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the radio wave irradiation got by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall can find the radio wave got at an early stage. It is like that.

  Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, when input information is read from the input information storage area described above and a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403 is input when not in the big hit gaming state (big prize opening) For example, when a game ball enters in 2005), a winning abnormality display command that is classified into an alarm display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main random number circuit with built-in main control, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control when the latch signal is input Obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, the obtained random number value is set as a jackpot determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as “special lottery”)) or taking out the value of a counter for updating the big hit symbol random number and determining the probability variation hit stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches the value (determination of whether or not probability fluctuation is generated).

  Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) set higher than that at the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM are stored in advance. When determining whether or not the stored jackpot determination value matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range. Depending on whether or not.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. If it is based on the above, a variety of commands related to special figure 2 tuning effects are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so that the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a big hit gaming state is entered, various commands classified as jackpot related (a big hit opening command, a big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, a big winning opening 1 closing display command, a large winning combination, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open / close the opening / closing member When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400 The lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp is turned on so that the round indicator lamp is lit. The power is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp is turned on to light the 15 round display lamp of the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 And setting the output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 so that the presence / absence of the probability variation is lit in a predetermined color. Or stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the counter value or the like for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol determination random number is extracted and gate information of the main control built-in RAM is used as gate information. Store in the information storage area.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the third gate information storage. Store in the parcel.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on with the total number of stored gate information as the hold ball. Based on the gate information, the output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the opened state, so that a gaming state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 is obtained, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information In the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol taken out matches the judgment value per ordinary symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect production are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece. When the random number for determination per symbol does not match the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. , Create various commands that are classified as related to the usual figure synchronization production, and store it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as output information To remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU 1310a, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening / closing member of the winning prize opening 2005 or a starting opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes a movable piece. 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize Various information (game information) signals related to games such as information output signals are sent to the payout control board 633. A force to or.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, and classified as related to the jackpot. Various commands to be executed (for example, a winning prize 1 count display command corresponding to a winning prize count command based on a detection signal from the winning prize sensor 2403 when a game ball having entered the winning prize opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric character effects, various commands categorized as notification displays, various types categorized as status displays Commands, various commands classified as test-related, and other various commands classified as other (for example, the main control board 1310 is attached to the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 on the basis of the game balls entered in the various winning openings, the main prize ball number information output signal is used as the main prize ball number information. The main prize ball number information output command for instructing transmission to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 is stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are configured as main peripheral serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and completes transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register. Can be done. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure after the power is turned on, this message is sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In order to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be performed, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, as the main peripheral serial data, the power-on state command is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value that are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and then constitute the main control return destination command when the power is turned on Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read out from the game backup information and the various information is Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine is output to the peripheral control board 1510. Be able to. In other words, the main control board 1310 uses the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. In the setting of the work area, a power-on state command classified as power-on in order to notify that the power was turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, configure the power-on status command as the main peripheral serial data. Send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value constituting the main control return destination command at power-on, Subsequently, the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command upon power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and thumb value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to display effects. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, that is, in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the player has failed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  In the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. 211, when the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on When the power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on and a main notification ball count information output judgment counter notification command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As peripheral serial data, configure the power-on status command, send it to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, then configure the power-on main control return destination command, Status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process, followed by the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command when the power is turned on. Status, mode, and sum value In order, it transmits to the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[16. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 185 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process of the payout control unit, FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 213, and FIG. 215 is a payout control unit following FIG. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[16-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control unit performs power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 under the control of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 by the payout control MPU 633aa. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 633aa. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU 633aa performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU 633aa performs the wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power interruption (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. The Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and does not instruct to perform the RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI. It is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

  If the payout control MPU 633aa determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU 633aa is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa does not operate the RAM clear switch 1310f, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, a prize ball information storage area) The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. This is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 633aa.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU 633aa performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete the payout information (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (at power-off) described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that they match, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG determines whether or not the value is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  In the determination of step S528, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is set as the power recovery. Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 633aa (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, determines that the payout information is to be erased, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination in step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is sent from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Entered. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  In the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 when determining that there is no input of a power failure notice signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

  In the determination of step S542, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU 633aa returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU 633aa receives a power failure notice signal. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 2 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when it is determined that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as driving information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 633c are stored, and payout is based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 633aa, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as an award ball number information output signal. And outputs to the terminal plate 558 (in this embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. The prize ball number information output determination counter is provided by the payout motor 584. The number of game balls that have been paid out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later. Is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the payout.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process in step S550 described later, and the stored value is updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10 balls, the award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls exceeding the number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display 633c.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit , A BRDY signal, a CR connection signal, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, respectively, as input information Store in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU 633aa performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, a ball bite determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball bite state caused by the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout vane 589 is not performed, and the determination condition is set when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual number It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistent with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 are repeatedly paid out. At this time, time management of the judgment condition and the mismatch counter reset judgment time set is performed. For example, when the ball scratch determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball scratch determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gummy judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU 633aa performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit, while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery By restoring the values to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit immediately before stopping or power failure It is possible to continue from, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Thus, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 633aa to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball play operation determination setting process, For example, if you are not communicating with the CR unit, pay a rental ball as an error status output setting to the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication processing, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before an instantaneous stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, and the payout device 580 is supplied to the CR unit. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless rental request signal from the CR unit, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, in order to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible, PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. To convey the fact is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU633aa to CR unit logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 The number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above based on the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, and the full tank and the ball shortage check process from the full tank detection sensor 154. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and ball shortage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information for notifying that the game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is full is stored in the state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full information that informs the fact that the lower ball 202 is not full is stored in the state information storage area area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, the above-described ball breakage determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the ball breakage determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball breakage determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball breakage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball break is transmitted to indicate that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than a predetermined number. The ball breakage information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU 633aa performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball play are performed, a retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (award ball stock number) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU 633aa performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 633c of the payout control board 633 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, the above-described ball break information is read from the state information storage area, and when the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this ball break information Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays based on the various information are created. To the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball break information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not greater than a predetermined number based on the ball break information, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S540, and this power failure warning If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552. In step S5, timer update processing is performed in step S5. 4 performs a CR communication process, performs a full tank and out of ball check process in step S556, performs a command reception process in step S558, performs a command analysis process in step S560, performs a main operation setting process in step S562, In step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed. In step S566, command transmission processing is performed. In step S568, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 633aa varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 633aa preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 633aa secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU 633aa has received a power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU 633aa stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU 633aa performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a setting for prohibiting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU 633aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU 633aa is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a power-on process of the payout control unit by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[16-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 213 to 215.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 216 (step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, a value of 1 when 2 ms elapses, and a value of 0 when 2 ms elapses. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU 633aa switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU 633aa sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[17. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 185 will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 221. FIG. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 219 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 220 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 221 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

  As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on a single semiconductor chip.

[17-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIG. 217 under the control of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting processing, processing for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, determination processing for hot start / cold start, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, processing for transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a very short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, for example, a command related to control of game effects that is output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. Current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing this current time information acquisition process so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to notify that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

  In step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is to be executed, first, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the steady process flag SP-FLG. Value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a rendering operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, and a press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. Based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382, the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and Various information obtained by operating the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and the press operation) Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set). Monitors operation whether the rotational direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is set according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the presentation proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And are set respectively. During demonstrations (demonstrations performed in a player waiting state) and productions, a lamp palette setting process is executed, and a player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation). When the one specified brightness value ranging from the first specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value that is the maximum brightness is set by operating the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303), the set brightness The above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated so that the specified value is obtained.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, in the display data creation processing described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is performed, outputting the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. Yes. This can prevent a delay in processing time, but a so-called frame drop occurs. However, a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a main body frame by sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to effects such as music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as “various speakers”).

  Subsequent to step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs to the various speakers from the set output channel. Output. Thereby, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate what screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. The pointer is updated.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate the number of light emission data to be output from the head light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound command data for instructing sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The pointer is updated in order to instruct what sound command data from the command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data is output. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to do so. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even when other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process to be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to holding prefetching) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis process, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyzes various commands. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands ( (Extract) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And are set respectively. Peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from main control board 1310, and reads (extracts) light emission mode generation schedule data from control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), and the first luminance specified value becomes the maximum luminance. When one luminance designation value up to 31 luminance designation values is set, the above-described gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a so as to become the set luminance designation value. It is like that.

  In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a indicates that the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start opening start winning effect, or a normal symbol. Normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start pending changes, big prize opening It is analyzed whether or not it is a special winning opening 1-count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted in 2005, and it is recognized which game state it is currently in.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyzes various commands. The various commands include various commands classified as related to Special Figure 1 tuned effects, various commands classified as related to Special Figure 2 tuned effects, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Various commands categorized in relation to figure production effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in notification display, various commands categorized in status display, various commands categorized in test relation, and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Thereby, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning processing, when various commands classified into notification display are included in the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is obtained from the control ROM 1510b. Read (extract) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  When the screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data is It is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and outputs sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the sound command data. At the same time, set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d performs the sound volume adjustment operation signal based on the sound volume adjustment operation signal. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and is set in this sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018 Sound data is output to various speakers from the output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the sound volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a game hall clerk slides the volume adjustment switch 1510d to set the volume to a low level, although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from various speakers is reduced, the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs in the player, or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the attendant such as the store clerk of the game hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of the malfunction or the player's fraud by the notification sound. Further, based on the current volume set by the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or sound effect. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen (image) unfolded on the effect display device 1600 may be rendered more powerful, or may be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the content stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the content stored in the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 is copied to the SDRAM 1510c1, Copy and backup to the steady processing backup area provided in 1510c2.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes in steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1008, and the value 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is started. , Step S1014,..., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0. Become. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to the peripheral control IC 1510a. A value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[17-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 218 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, End the routine. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1045 that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB. -A value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the process is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit of FIG. In step S1008 in the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process), a value of 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. V blank signal interrupt processing is performed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. To have. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[17-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 217 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. 219 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the routine of the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU adds the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) ) Is driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 are input, thereby history information (for example, original signals) of detection signals from the various sensors. Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is based on the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The movable position is grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, a rotation operation unit) 302 (rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 by operating the performance operation unit 301. And the brightness of various LEDs (LEDs 1130a, 3311aa, 3321aa, 3411aa, 3421aa, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are backed up. Copy and backup to a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In the present embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are set in different areas, and the SDRAM 1510c1. , 1510c2 is set to a different area from the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided to SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes relating to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 217, various processes related to the effects in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. Yes. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to happen before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  As described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[17-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a takes the main peripheral serial data as 1 byte (8 bits) from the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a. ) Is received in the reception buffer, and when this acquisition is completed, an interrupt is generated at this timing, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 220 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the receivable period, 1-byte information received from the serial I / O port reception buffer of the peripheral control IC 1510a is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented). Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is still in the second byte of the main circumference serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a mode in which the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the reception counter SRXC has a value 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, at the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and generates noise. The environment is susceptible.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to main peripheral serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a matches the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212. Is determined, the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), This routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a obtains the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 When it is determined that the sum calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated.

[17-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 221, and whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. Is determined (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1302 that a power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has not passed 2 macroseconds, the CPU returns to step S1302, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and if a power failure warning signal is not input. When the determination is made, the routine is terminated as it is, while when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds has elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  In step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, power saving processing is performed. This is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off excitation of motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing the power, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive at least the period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to the steady process backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, returns to step S1312, and whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Determine whether. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. By continuing to make an infinite determination in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a cannot output a clear signal to the external WDT when determining that the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination of step S1312. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU performs the WDT clear process in step S1314, and the peripheral control IC 1510a The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 217 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It does not take. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted because the WDT clear process is not executed. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. When the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[18. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2610, the second pattern 2630, etc. of the light guide plate 2601 in the table effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 are not light-emitting displayed, and in the gaming panel 1100, In a state where the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is not illuminated and decorated by the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 (normal state), the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is formed so as to be always visible from the front. The visibility is assisted by the back left back decorative plate 3360 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right back decorative plate 3460 of the back right rendering unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 disposed behind the panel plate 1110. , In the game area 5a for the player It is possible to recognize that the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on the outer part of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and the light guide plate 2601 is in a transparent state. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the effect display device 1600 and the like capable of displaying the effect image arranged in the rear in a good state. At this time, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 is transparent so that the decoration pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the front. The part located behind the center accessory 2500 can also be visually recognized, and the entire decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized.

  Since the decoration pattern 1150 is emitted from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and can be illuminated by light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110, light from other than the side surface is also appropriately directed. Because it can be reflected, the light from the LED such as a decorative body or a movable decorative body provided in the pachinko machine 1, the illumination light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the like Depending on the light from other installed pachinko machines and the position of the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, etc. The appearance of the pattern 1150 changes variously, which is clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine with a decorative sheet attached to the game panel (panel board). The inside of the elephant (atmosphere) game area 5a can be shown to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be obtained. It is possible to make the player enjoy the decoration of the board 1110 and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In this normal state, light is incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 by light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 provided at the corners (upper left corner and lower left corner) of the square panel holder 1120. When the decoration pattern 1150 is decorated with light emission, the entire decoration pattern 1150 appears to shine. Therefore, the decoration pattern 1150 can be made conspicuous, and the appearance of the portion outside the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. In addition, by decorating the decorative pattern 1150, the appearance of the decorative pattern 1150 can be made different from that when the decorative pattern 1150 is not light-decorated, so that the decoration of the panel board 1110 that could not be seen with a conventional pachinko machine is possible. Since the decoration pattern 1150 is decorated with light emission, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, such as the arrival of a chance. The expectation can be raised and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, when the decoration pattern 1150 is light-decorated and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the table effect unit 2600 is light-displayed, the outer side of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 inside the game area 5a. The portion is light-decorated by the decoration pattern 1150, and the portion in the frame of the center accessory 2500 is light-emitting displayed (light-emitting decoration) by the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601. Since the first design 2610 and the second design 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are design designs that are continuous with each other, the entire game area 5a is a single design (here, a geometry composed of contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles). The overall appearance of the game area 5a is enhanced by the light emission decoration by the decoration of the (student pattern). It is possible to improve, it is possible to entertain the decoration in the game area 5a to the player. At this time, since the portion of the center accessory 2500 that contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 is formed transparently, the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 has the Since the part located behind the part in contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 can be visually recognized from the front through the center accessory 2500, the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 and the second pattern The discontinuity between the pattern 2630 and the pattern 2630 can be made as small as possible, and for the player, the decoration pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are integrated and integrated. It can be made easy to recognize. Therefore, a huge light-emitting decoration can be shown to the player with the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, which has a strong impact on the player. It is possible to convince the player that something good will happen, and to further increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, a panel decoration board 1130 is arranged at the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 having a square outer shape, and LEDs as back light emitting means are mounted behind the panel board 1110 and far from the panel decoration board 1130. In the decoration pattern 1150, the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 is placed on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 because the back upper right base decoration board and the back lower base decoration board of the back right rendering unit 3400 are arranged. Since it is possible to decorate the portion of the incident light that is difficult to reach by the back light emitting means, the entire decoration pattern 1150 can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness, and the pachinko machine having the above-described effects can be obtained. 1 can be realized reliably.

  In addition, with respect to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110, the center pattern 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 emits the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630. Since the displayable transparent light guide plate 2601 is provided, the front-rear direction positions of the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 can be made as close as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity when the decoration pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are decorated with light emission, and the above-described operational effects can be more easily achieved. .

  Furthermore, a transparent light guide plate 2601 capable of emitting and displaying the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 is provided in the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. When the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 is displayed with light emission, it is displayed on a member (for example, the effect display device 1600) arranged in the frame of the center accessory 2500 (behind the opening 1112). Effect image, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110 of the back bottom effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back top movable decorative body 3210 of the back top effect unit 3200, the back top left movable decorative body 3310 of the back left effect unit 3300, and the back bottom left The movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420) of the back right rendering unit 3400 are guided. The first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 on the board 2601 becomes difficult to see, and the player can notice the light-emitting display of the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 on the light guide plate 2601. The first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 can be attracted to the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 and can be enjoyed.

  Further, as described above, the inside of the frame of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a can be decorated with light emission by the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 and the center character in the game area 5a. Since the outside of the frame of 2500 can be decorated with the decoration pattern 1150, the timing for decorating the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 and the timing for decorating the decoration pattern 1150 with light emission are appropriately combined. As a result, various light-emitting effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to make the player difficult to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Moreover, since the part which contact | abuts the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the center accessory 2500 is formed transparently, compared with the case where a notch is provided so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the front, Since the surface (front surface) of the part can be made smooth, it is possible to make it difficult to affect the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a, and the game balls B can move unintentionally. It can be suppressed, and the movement (flow) of the game ball B within the game area 5a can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the panel holder 1120 is formed in substantially the same shape as the front component member 1000 whose outer shape is a quadrangle and whose inner shape is substantially circular, the width between the inner periphery and the outer periphery of the panel holder 1120 is the four corners. Becomes the widest. Since the panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the four corners of the panel holder 1120, a space for attaching the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be easily secured and, Since the panel decoration board 1130 is positioned outside the panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is held by the panel holder 1120 in the front view, the panel decoration board 1130 is not seen in the game area 5a in the front view. The appearance in 5a can be improved.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the front of the panel decoration board 1130 provided on the panel holder 1120 can be covered with the front component member 1000. The panel decoration board 1130 can be made difficult to see from the side), and the appearance of the outside of the game area 5a can be improved. Further, since the front decorative member 1000 can make the panel decoration board 1130 difficult to see from the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the panel decoration board 1130. When the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is hardly considered to be light-emitting decorated, and when the decoration pattern 1150 is decorated with light emission, a strong impact can be given to the player. It is possible to entertain the decoration and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the back lower movable decorative body 3110 of the back lower direction rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper direction rendering unit 3200, The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400 are respectively near the outer periphery of the game area 5a. Are in a standby position in which they are spaced apart from each other, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body. The body 3410 and the back lower right movable ornament 3420 can decorate the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and the front unit. The first design 2610 and the second design 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 of the front effect unit 2600 in 2000 are not lit and displayed, and the light guide plate 2601 is in a transparent state and is arranged in the center of the game area 5a. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed in a good state.

  In this standby position state, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body. Since the body 3420 is separated from each other, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back left bottom movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable The player that the decorative body 3420 gathers at the first combined position or the second combined position as the specific position to form a predetermined decorative aspect (a hexagonal first decorative aspect or an annular second decorative aspect). Can be made difficult to recall, and the impact when assembled can be increased. In this normal state, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are arranged. When moving from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position, in the vicinity of the center of the game area 5a, the first decorative mode and the second decorative mode are formed. The appearance can surprise the player and attract the player's attention strongly.

  Then, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are first combined positions. When the first pattern 2610 as the specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 is caused to emit light while being moved to the second combined position, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back upper left The decorations of the movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be changed, and the light emitting portion of the first pattern 2610 (first By changing the pattern part 2610a, the second pattern part 2610b, the third pattern part 2610c, and the fourth pattern part 2610d), the lower back movable decorative body 311 , A back upper movable ornament body 3210, a back upper left movable ornament body 3310, a back lower left movable ornament body 3320, a back upper right movable ornament body 3410, and a back lower right movable ornament body 3420. Since the decoration of the aspect can be variously changed, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back The pattern of performance by the lower right movable ornament 3420 can be varied, which can make the player hard to get tired and can give a strong impact to the player. It can be thought that there is a good thing, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, in the light guide plate 2601, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d of the first pattern 2610 are caused to emit light in order, thereby emitting a moving pattern. Since the first pattern 2610 moves, the player can feel strange, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the movement of the first pattern 2610 allows the player to move. It is possible to entertain the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  On the other hand, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are combined together. When the second pattern 2630 is caused to emit light as the specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 while being moved to the position or the second combined position, the back pattern movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left top are displayed by the second pattern 2630. The outer periphery of the movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be emphasized, and the second decorative pattern 2630 makes the movable decorative body larger. In addition to being able to show, the second pattern 2630 allows the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back lower left movable decorative body. 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be connected to each other, so the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310, and the back lower left movable decorative body. The body 3320, the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 and the second pattern 2630 can form one large decoration to give a strong impact to the player. It can raise the expectation for the game by thinking that there is something good.

  Also, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are in the standby position. At that time, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are caused to emit light as the specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601, and the first merged position and the second merged position are set near the center of the game area 5a. Decorate the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 at the second combined position. Since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 that are to be displayed are displayed near the center of the game area 5a, the first pattern 2 is displayed from the player side (front). 10 or the second pattern 2630 can be visually recognized in a good condition, it is possible to entertain the first pattern 2610 and second pattern 2630 to the player. Then, with the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 lit, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body. When the body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 Because the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be shown to the player in an integrated manner with the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are arranged in the first combined position. In the state where it is moved to the second combined position, the back lower back decorative board 3121, the back lower front decorative board 3122, the back upper rear decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back upper left base decorative board, the back left upper front decorative Mounted on the board, back bottom lower base decoration board, back left bottom front decoration board, back top right base decoration board, back top right top decoration board, back right bottom base decoration board, back right bottom front decoration board When the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are displayed with light emission, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are indirect light, whereas the LED is light that is close to direct light. Because there is a first pattern 26 Since the brightness of the LED portion becomes high at 0 or the second pattern 2630, the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 and the LED can show the player a light-emitting effect that could not be seen with a conventional pachinko machine. It can give a strong impact to the player, and can make the player think that there is something good about it, and raise the expectation for the game to suppress the decline of interest Can do.

  Furthermore, the back bottom back decoration board 3121, the back bottom front decoration board 3122, the back top back decoration board, the back top front decoration board, the back top left base decoration board, the back top left top decoration board, the back left bottom base decoration board, back Lower left front stage decorative board, back upper right base stage decorative board, back upper right front stage decorative board, back lower right base stage decorative board, back lower right front stage decorative board Since the movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be illuminated. The back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 shine brightly. Lower movable ornament 3 10. The back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be made conspicuous. Similarly, the light emitting decorations of the back bottom movable decoration body 3110, the back top movable decoration body 3210, the back top left movable decoration body 3310, the back bottom left movable decoration body 3320, the back top right movable decoration body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decoration body 3420 are played. Can entertain.

  In addition, since a plurality of movable decorative bodies that move from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position are provided, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back left upper movable decorative body 3310. And a plurality of movable decorative bodies including the lower left movable decorative body 3320, the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420 are separately moved from the standby position to the first combined position and the second combined position. Therefore, after moving one movable decorative body to the first combined position or the second combined position, whether or not the next movable decorative body moves to the first combined position or the second combined position, By combining the timing when each movable decorative body moves to the first combined position or the second combined position, the player can be excited and excited, and the player can be entertained. The movable effects by a plurality of movable decorative body can be made more versatile, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest and hardly get bored the player.

  Further, as described above, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420. Movement, light emission of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 on the light guide plate 2601, and the back lower back decorative substrate 3121, the back lower front decorative substrate 3122, the back upper rear decorative substrate, the back upper front decorative substrate, the back upper left base Corrugated board, back upper left front corrugated board, back lower left base corrugated board, back lower left front corrugated board, back upper right base corrugated board, back upper right front corrugated board, back lower right base corrugated board, back lower right By appropriately combining the light emission of the LED mounted on the front decoration board, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, by the light emission display of the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, And the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are complemented, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back Even if the upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are not in contact with each other and there is a gap, the gap can be hidden by the second pattern 2630. The back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in contact with each other. Thus, there is no need to increase the movement accuracy of each, and the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and The movement accuracy of the lower right movable ornament 3420 can be lowered, and the lower lower movable ornament 3110, the rear upper movable ornament 3210, the rear upper left movable ornament 3310, the lower left lower movable ornament 3320, the rear upper right movable The increase in the cost concerning the moving mechanism of the decoration body 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110 of the back bottom rendering unit 3100 and the back top movable decorative body 3210 of the back top rendering unit 3200 as a pair of first movable decoration bodies, The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300 as the second movable decorative body, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400, Each of them is in a standby position, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 face each other in the vertical direction around the effect display device 1600 disposed in the center of the game area 5a in front view. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right Since the moving decoration bodies 3420 are opposed to each other in the left-right direction around the effect display device 1600, they are in a state of being separated from each other. The body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 decorate the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 5a. In addition, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed in a good state from the player side, and the player can enjoy the effect image.

  In the standby position, the pair of back left moving arm 3330 and back right moving arm 3430 and the pair of back bottom moving arm 3130 and back top moving arm 3230 are spaced apart from each other and the back bottom movable decorative body 3110. The game area 5a in the front view together with the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 (effect display device) 1600), the back left moving arm 3330, the back right moving arm 3430, the back bottom moving arm 3130, and the back top moving arm 3230 are displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to make the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 easily visible from the player side (front) without being blocked. It is possible to entertain an effect image in the state.

  Then, the pair of lower back moving arm 3130 and back upper moving arm 3230 are moved closer to each other to move the pair of lower back movable decorative body 3110 and back upper movable decorative body 3210 to the first combined position as a predetermined position. The back left movable arm 3330 and the back right movable arm 3430 are moved closer to each other, and the pair of back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and rear lower left movable decorative body 3320 and back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are back lower. When the movable decorative body 3110 and the backside movable decorative body 3210 are moved to the first combined position, they are gathered densely in the center of the game area 5a in front view and in front of the effect display device 1600. One large first decorative aspect is formed. Accordingly, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable so as to block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since the decoration body 3410 and the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 move to form a large hexagonal first decoration aspect, the back bottom movable decoration body 3110 and the back top movable decoration body are provided to the player. 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be noticed, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable movable body A decorative body 3210, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back lower right movable decorative body 3420 (a plurality of movable decorative bodies). Can be entertained, and the player can be surprised by the appearance of a large first decoration aspect in the center of the game area 5a in front of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by thinking that there is.

  In addition, the pair of lower back moving arm 3130 and back upper moving arm 3230 allows the pair of lower back movable decorative body 3110 and back upper movable decorative body 3210 to be moved between the standby position as the predetermined position and the first combined position. A pair of back left moving arm 3330 and back right moving arm 3430 are used to move to the combined position, and a pair of back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body. When 3420 is moved to the second combined position between the standby position and the first combined position as a position for connecting the pair of back movable movable body 3110 and back movable movable body 3210 to each other, the back movable movable decoration Body 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 342 Is formed in a ring shape so as to follow the hexagonal periphery, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310, and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320. The upper right movable ornament 3410 and the lower right movable ornament 3420 can be shown to the player with a decoration that is clearly different from the large hexagonal first decorative form in which the back lower right movable ornament 3420 is densely assembled. , The back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 enable various effects, and the player can It is difficult to get tired of, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Also, from the standby position, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body. In the effect of moving 3420 to the first coalescence position via the second coalescence position, whether to move from the standby position to the second coalescence position, whether to move from the second coalescence position to the first coalescence position, The player can be thrilled and excited in each scene, and the player can be entertained by multi-stage production and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  By the way, the six back bottom movable decorative bodies 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back left bottom movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are in the standby position. When moving from the first combined position to the second combined position, in the standby position, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, Since the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are separated from each other, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recall that the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 gather to form the first decorative aspect and the second decorative aspect. . Further, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are moved from the standby position. When moving to the combined position or the second combined position, the back lower movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 move without changing their orientations, and the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body. 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved in such a direction that the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body. In 3410 and the back lower right movable ornament 3420, since the direction is different between the standby position and the first combined position, the back lower movable ornament 3110 and the back upper possible The decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 move to the first combined position to form the first decorative form. Can be made difficult to recall to the player.

  More specifically, in the normal state, the back lower movable decorative body 3110 has one vertex directed upward, and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 has one vertex directed downward, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and In the back lower left movable ornament 3320, one vertex (tip) is directed rightward, and in the back upper right movable ornament 3410 and the back lower right movable ornament 3420, one vertex (tip) is directed leftward. Then, in the back lower movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210, they are moved upward and downward in the same posture, and are positioned at the first combined position and the second combined position, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310. And the lower left movable ornament 3320 moves to the first combined position and the second combined position while changing the posture so that the tips facing rightward are directed to the lower right and upper right, respectively. In 3410 and the lower right movable ornament 3420, the tips facing leftward move to the first merged position and the second merged position while changing their postures so as to face the lower left and the upper left. Moveable decorations arranged vertically and horizontally in different directions move to the first merged position so that their vertices converge at one point, or move to the second merged position so that they are arranged in a ring, and one large decoration body That is intended to form, it can be difficult to occur to the player.

  Therefore, the six back bottom movable decorative bodies 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body. When the 3420 is moved from the standby position to the first merged position or the second merged position, the player can be surprised by the movement that the player does not expect, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in each of the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, respectively. Is different from the movement between the standby position and the first merged position (second movement, more specifically, a movement that rotates around an axis extending in the back and forth direction in the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210. , The back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction). Lower movable ornament 3110, back upper movable ornament 3210, back upper left movable ornament 3310, back lower lower movable ornament 3320, back upper right movable ornament 3410, and back lower right movable ornament 34 By making the second movement at an appropriate position between the standby position and the first combined position, 0 is shown to the player in the first decorative mode at the first combined position and the second decorative mode at the second combined position. It is possible to show an effect different from the effect, to make the player hard to get bored by various effects, to make the player more entertaining, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are respectively connected to a triangular pyramid. Specific apex of acute angle (vertex facing upward of the back lower movable decorative body 3110, apex facing downward of the back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and back lower movable Since it has a vertex (tip) facing the right side of the decorative body 3320 and a vertex (tip) facing the left side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420), The back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3410, and the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 are in the standby position. When moving to or from the combined position or when making a second movement, the player can move the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back lower left movable It is possible to easily recognize that the decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moving. The back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, and the back left upper movable The movement of the decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 are a pair of rear left movable decorative body 3210. Since the moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3430 and the pair of back bottom moving arm 3130 and back top moving arm 3230 are respectively provided, the back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, and the back left top movable decoration. Since the body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be moved separately when assembled to the first combined position and the second combined position. The back bottom movable decorative body 3110, the back top movable decorative body 3210, the back top left movable decorative body 3310, the back bottom left movable decorative body 3320, the back top right movable decorative body 3 By appropriately selecting the order of moving (moving) 10 and the lower right movable ornament 3420, it is possible to make the variation of the movable effects more diverse, making it difficult for the player to get bored with the various movable effects. Can be suppressed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 132 as the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the above, the game can proceed, and various light emitting sources (plural light emitting sources) provided in the game board 5 of FIG. 135 as a plurality of light emitters, and the front decoration portion of FIG. 163 as a movable body 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422, and the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the back left bottom magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the back top right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the back right bottom magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab shown in FIG. ing.

  Various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided in the game board 5 can emit light. The first-stage decoration portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are magnet bodies, including a magnet 3312a of the first-stage decoration portion 3312, a magnet 3322a of the first-stage decoration portion 3322, a magnet 3412a of the first-stage decoration portion 3412, and a first-stage decoration portion 3312. A magnet 3422a of the decoration part 3422 is provided. The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab include the magnet 3312a of the front decoration part 3312 and the front decoration part 3322. The magnet 3322a, the magnet 3412a of the front decoration portion 3412, and the magnetic surface of the magnet 3422a of the front decoration portion 3422 are arranged separately from the front decoration portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 so as to face each other. Detection of the magnetic poles of the magnet 3312a of the step decoration unit 3312, the magnet 3322a of the step decoration unit 3322, the magnet 3412a of the step decoration unit 3412, and the magnet 3422a of the step decoration unit 3422 is performed to detect the step decoration units 3312, 3322, and 3412. , 3422 as a specific position It is capable of detecting the location (in situ).

  While the front decorations 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are operating, light emitted from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided in the game board 5 is detected on the back left top magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab It can be incident on the circuit 3321ab, the back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab.

  In this way, when the front decorations 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are in operation, the light emitted from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided in the game board 5 is the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab Although it can enter the lower left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab, this light is not affected at all as disturbance light. A magnet 3312a of the front decoration part 3312, a magnet 3322a of the front decoration part 3322, and a magnet 3322a of the front decoration part 3322 by the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, The magnet 3412a of the front decoration part 3412 and the magnet of the front decoration part 3422 A specific position standby position Sakidan decoration 3312,3322,3412,3422 detects the magnetic poles of the net 3422a can be detected (original position). Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the standby position (original position), which is a specific position of the front decorations 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422, by light emitted from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5. can do.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, an effect is produced based on a command from the main control board 1310 included in the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 as a main control board that can control the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 included in the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 13 is provided as an effect control board capable of controlling the progress. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 of FIG. 180 as a ROM substrate and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 of FIG. 180 as a video signal output substrate. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a shown in FIG. 180 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) related to effects based on game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can output to the effect display device 1600 a signal that matches the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 130 as a display device.

  Between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as a first connector, a plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 180 and a special connector provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in FIG. It is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector that can be connected between boards by a socket of SCN3. Between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, as a second connector different from the first connector, the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 180 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 of FIG. The board is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector that can be connected between boards by a socket of a special connector SCN4 provided in the board.

  The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the presentation by the control information (peripheral data) read from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and can output the video signal to the liquid crystal output board 1530 in a plurality of types. . Examples of a plurality of types of video signal systems include RGB system, LVDS system, MIPI system, eDP system, and clockless system. In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of video signal systems, there are four systems (four systems in total): one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system and second LVDS system), and MIPI system. ) Is adopted.

  The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 of FIG. 180 as the same board box.

  As described above, the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which control information (peripheral data) relating to the presentation based on the game specifications is stored in advance is provided on a dedicated board called the peripheral data ROM board 1520 which is a separate board from the peripheral control board 1510, and the presentation display device A substrate that outputs a signal that matches the method of the video signal input to 1600 is provided on a dedicated substrate called a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that is a separate substrate from the peripheral control substrate 1510. That is, the peripheral control board 1510 is adapted to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 unless it is modified and newly manufactured according to control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specifications. Since it is not modified and newly manufactured, it can be configured as a common substrate that does not depend on the game specifications or the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is not necessary to manufacture a plurality of types of peripheral control boards 1510 according to the game specifications and the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and the cost can be reduced by manufacturing only the same peripheral control boards 1510. Can contribute. Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout device 580 of FIG. 93 is provided in which one payout passage 580a to which the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 of FIG. 93 are supplied is formed. ing. The payout device 580 includes at least a payout motor 584 in FIG. 105 and a payout blade 589 in FIG. The payout motor 584 is capable of rotating the rotation shaft by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle in accordance with step driving. The payout blade 589 rotates via a drive gear 585, a first transmission gear 586, a second transmission gear 587, and a payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, in which rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 constitutes a rotation transmission member. Thus, a plurality of ball receiving portions 589b are formed at equal intervals (three at equal intervals of 120 degrees) as ball receiving recesses that can receive and send out game balls B one by one. .

  The reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance so that the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Specifically, the reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation based on the mechanism. The rotation angle of the payout vane 589 can be detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 as a light shielding piece provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout vane 589. Specifically, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 can detect the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

  Thus, since the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member that is not an integer is determined in advance, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout vane 589 is determined in advance. Each time the ball is paid out, the positioning position is different. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the positions where dust and dust are attached can be dispersed. Of course, if the reduction ratio n of the rotation transmitting member described above that causes such a positioning error is set, the error accumulates, but even if the error accumulates every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is reset when the accumulated error is accumulated to some extent by detecting it with a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is ensured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotational position of the ball feed rotating unit that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, and the positions where the dust and dust adhere are distributed to the dust and dust. On the other hand, a strong dispensing device 580 can be provided.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the progress of the production based on the normal lottery result, the first special lottery result, or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. 180 is provided as an effect control means capable of controlling the above. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540 of FIG. 180 is used as the first shield, and the metal back cover and the conductive cover in the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 184 are shown as the second shield. 184 conductive elastic members 1545 are provided. The metal shield plate 1540 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The metal back cover in the effect display device 1600 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The conductive elastic member 1545 is formed by covering the surface of the foam 1545b of FIG. 184 as a core formed of an elastic member with the conductive coating portion 1545a of FIG. 184 as a conductive member.

  A peripheral control board 1510 is arranged between the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are conductive. Electrical connection is made via an elastic member 1545.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is disposed between the metal shield plate 1540 formed of the conductive member and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 1545, so that the influence of electromagnetic wave noise on the peripheral control board 1510 is reduced. This can be reduced by the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the influence by electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 of FIG. 126, the ball tank 552 of FIG. 126, and the tank rail 553 of FIG. 126 are provided. The game board 5 includes a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 in FIG. 126 on the rear side as a box to which the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 126 is attached as a board box. The ball tank 552 can store game balls. The tank rail 553 can flow the game ball stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side.

  The peripheral control unit 1500 as a board box is accommodated in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. The tank rail 553 is formed with a notch 553aa in FIG. 126 as a hole through which foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) generated by the flowing game ball B can fall. When the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, an upper wall 3010 a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. In this pachinko machine 1, foreign matter falling from a notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received on the upper wall 3010a as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. .

  As described above, since the foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5, the foreign matter Even if it falls from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the falling unit from entering the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5 due to the fallen foreign matter. Thereby, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling on the peripheral control unit 1500 as a substrate box accommodated in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. The power supply board 630 in FIG. 189 is provided as a power supply means that can produce various voltages based on the power supply voltage from the game hall outside the gaming machine. Yes.

  The power supply substrate 630 includes, as a plurality of parts having the same shape, FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, and D9 of FIG. 189 having the same package type (TO-220F). , D10. On the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, silk printing TSLK9 of FIG. 192 (b) as a silk printing for a specific component among a plurality of components having the same shape is another component excluding this specific component. Silk-printed so that it can be distinguished from the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 in FIG.

  Specifically, the silk print TSLK9 of FIG. 192 (b) is silk-printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, except for the specific parts, as the silk print of the FETQ5 which is a specific part. The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 of FIG. 189 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 of FIG. 189 are respectively silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8 of FIG. 192 (a) on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. Silk-printed. In the silk print TSLK9, a white oblique line ad1 that does not exist in the silk prints TSLK1 to TSLK8 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, as a plurality of parts having the same shape, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 of FIG. 189 having the same package type (TO-220F) and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, Even if D10 is provided on the power supply board 630, among the plurality of parts having the same shape, the silk print TSLK9 for the FETQ5 which is a specific part is the FETQ1, Q2, which is another part excluding the specific part Since it is silk-printed so that it can be distinguished from Q3, Q4, and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, FET Q5 which is a noticeable part is replaced with FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 which are other parts. Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 can be identified There. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish a notable part from other parts among the plurality of parts.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the above, the game can be advanced, and light emission control can be performed on the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs provided on the left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. As a possible light emission control means, there are a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba provided on the lower left side decorative board 402b of FIG. 201 and a constant current drive circuit 402bbx constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. The left door frame in FIG. 201 as a strip-shaped decorative board formed in a predetermined shape And a left side under the decorative board 402b which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the Id decorative body 404.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx are formed so that the planar shape thereof is substantially rectangular, and each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx extends along both longitudinal sides of the strip-like left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is arranged so as to be non-parallel. Specifically, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx shown in FIG. 203 are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is arranged as.

  As described above, the strip-shaped left side lower decorative substrate 402b includes the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx whose planar shape is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, the constant current driving circuit 402bax, and the constant current driving circuit 402bax. Each side of the current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged so as to be non-parallel along both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, compared with the case where each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged so as to be parallel along both longitudinal sides of the strip-like lower side decorative substrate 402b. Since a region sandwiched between both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped left side lower decorative substrate 402b and each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be formed large, Wiring can be drawn from each side of the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx and electrically connected to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full color LEDs. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring is drawn from each side of the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx in the strip-shaped left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the above, it is possible to proceed with the game, and LED mounting in which hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs provided on the left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. A left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 202 (a) having a surface 402bx and an LED non-mounting surface 402by on which no light emitting means is mounted is provided.

  The left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a white resist as a white coating film, and chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 of FIG. 203 (a) as mounting auxiliary symbols (FIG. 203 (a) is a chain line corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs. LSLK4 and LSLK5 are shown respectively.) And the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs in FIG. 203 (a) (in FIG. 203 (a), there are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs). Only certain LEDs 4 and 5 are shown.) The white resist is formed on the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The auxiliary mounting symbols specify chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 and auxiliary LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 as auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. The part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are yellow as the paint of a predetermined color different from the white resist on the white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Or black).

  Thus, auxiliary lines (that is, chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. The numbers identifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are the full-color LEDs 203 (a) (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are the full-color LEDs) are the non-LEDs on the left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. 203 (a). It is formed in yellow (or black) as a paint of a predetermined color different from the white resist on the white resist on the mounting surface 402by. That is, a white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202A, and the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs in FIG. Auxiliary lines to be shown (that is, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) and numbers identifying hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are the full color LEDs in FIG. 203A (that is, hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs) No corresponding yellow (or black) part number) is formed. Therefore, the numbers specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are the full-color LEDs of FIG. 203 (a) (that is, the yellow (or black) part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are the full-color LEDs) and the full-color of FIG. 203 (a). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize auxiliary lines (that is, yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are LEDs.

  In addition, the white resist formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202A is the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which is the full color LED in FIG. 202A. ) Of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b on the LED mounting surface 402bx can be increased, so that the numbers specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. 203A (that is, hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs). And the auxiliary line (that is, the yellow chain line (or black chain line) LSLK1) indicating the mounting positions of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are the full color LEDs of FIG. 203 (a). LSLK10) enables full color in Fig. 202 (a) It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance in the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 202 (a) of light emitted hdLED1~hdLED10 is ED. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b of FIG. 202A from being lowered due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full color LEDs of FIG. 202A.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 13). 195, etc.) is provided as power supply means for supplying power to the power supply board 630 of FIG. The power supply board 630 includes a fuse FUSE1 of FIG. 195 as a fuse, a surge absorber SA1 of FIG. 195 as a surge voltage absorbing element, a rectifier circuit 630c of FIG. Yes. The fuse FUSE1 can be supplied with AC power from an island facility in the game hall as an outside of the gaming machine. The surge absorber SA1 can absorb the surge voltage of the AC power input through the fuse FUSE1. The rectifier circuit 630c can rectify the AC power input through the surge absorber SA1 into a DC power. The power generation circuit 630f 'is capable of supplying power to various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 based on a DC power input via the rectifier circuit 630c.

  When the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for the gaming machine (AC24V) is input through the fuse FUSE1 as the AC power supply from the island equipment of the game hall, the surge absorber SA1 is allowed to have a surge voltage. As a result, it is possible to form a circuit in which the fuse FUSE1 is blown by passing a large current through the fuse FUSE1.

  As described above, when a commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines (AC24V) is input to the surge absorber SA1 through the fuse FUSE1 as an AC power supply from the island facility of the game hall, the surge voltage When the voltage exceeds the allowable voltage, the circuit is short-circuited and a circuit is formed to blow the fuse FUSE1 by passing a large current through the fuse FUSE1. As a result, even if the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power voltage (AC 100V), the power board 630 is destroyed. However, it is possible to reliably prevent various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply substrate 630 from being destroyed. Therefore, when the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V) having a voltage higher than the gaming machine power supply voltage (AC24V) is supplied, it is possible to prevent the various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 as the lottery result by the lottery means. Based on the above, the game can proceed, and hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs provided on the left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. 202 (a) as light emitting means are provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx. The left side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. 202 (a) to be mounted is provided.

  The left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist solidly applied as a white coating film, and a connector LDUCN shown in FIG. 202A as a connector. The white coating film is formed on the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs having a color package that can be distinguished from the same color or the same color as the white coating film, and the same color or the same color as the white coating film. A connector LDUCN having a housing of a distinguishable color is mounted. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is solid-coated with a white resist, and the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are recognized as white (the same color as white). The connector LDUCN is made of a resin whose housing is white (also referred to as a natural color and recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). A full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated) are mounted. An electronic component such as a resistor or a capacitor (not shown) that does not have a connector and a connector that does not have a white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b.

  As described above, a white coating film (that is, a white resist) is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. A full color LED having a package of a color that can be distinguished from the same color or the same color as the first resist), and a housing of a color that can be distinguished from the same color or the same color as the white coating (that is, the white resist). Since the connectors LDUCN are respectively mounted, the LEDs of the left side lower decorative board 402b are mounted even if the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs and the connector LDUCN are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. The entire mounting surface 402bx is a white coating film (that is, a white resist). It has the same color or colors that can be identified as the same color. Thereby, it can contribute to making the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b a bright light emitting surface. Therefore, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can be a bright light emitting surface.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the gate portion 2003 of FIG. 130 in the game area 5a of the game board 5 of FIG. 130, the four general winning ports 2001, the first start port 2002, the second start. The gate sensor 2506, the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the large winning opening sensor 2403, etc. The detection means can be provided, and the game can be advanced based on the detection signal from the detection means.

  Of the plurality of entrances, for example, as the entrances having similar uses, the first starter 2002 and the first starter sensor 3002 that are detection means corresponding to the second starter 2004, and the second starter sensor 2402 Are provided differently. Specifically, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. In addition, a connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. Further, as described above, the gate sensor 2506, which is a detecting means corresponding to the gate unit 2003 as a entrance opening similar in use to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, is provided on the game board 5 as described above. A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005, a general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the game board 5 Together with various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start opening 2002 provided in the panel, and connected and aggregated at a panel relay board 1710, via a single connector, the main control board 1310 is electrically connected.

  As described above, for example, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are detection means corresponding to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the second start port, among the plurality of entrances. Since the shape of the connector of the start port sensor 2402 is provided differently, for example, the first start port 2002 and the first start port which are detection means corresponding to the second start port 2004 as a ball entrance having a similar application. The erroneous connection of the connectors of the sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 can be prevented. Further, a gate sensor 2506, which is a detection means corresponding to the gate unit 2003 as an entrance similar to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, includes a grand prize port sensor 2403, a general prize port sensor 2401, Together with various sensors such as 3001 and the magnetic sensor 3003, the panel relay board 1710 is electrically connected and integrated, and is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector. In other words, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate unit 2003, which are similar entrances, are used as detection means corresponding to the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate. An erroneous connection of the connector of the sensor 2506 can be prevented. Accordingly, erroneous connection can be prevented.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 132 as game control means, the ball tank 552 of FIG. 13 as a ball tank, and the ball guide path of FIG. The ball guiding unit 570 and the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 13 are provided as the payout device.

  The main control board 1310 is mounted with the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 154 as a game control microprocessor. The main control MPU 1310a is based on the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the lottery means. The game can be progressed and the lottery result can be derived and displayed by controlling the function display unit 1400 as a display unit provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 5 in FIG. is there. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a, and the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, when the lottery result is from the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created as the first special lottery result. When the lottery result is based on the second start port sensor 2402, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created as the second special lottery result, and stored in the transmission information storage area as the transmission information. The variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the variable display pattern of the determined special symbol is determined. The lighting signal output to the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is lit. The output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  The ball tank 552 is disposed above the game board 5 and can store game balls. The ball guiding unit 570 is arranged in the vicinity of the game board 5 and can guide the game ball stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side via the tank rail 553 of FIG. The payout device 580 is arranged in the vicinity of the game board 5 and is based on a payout instruction (instruction for paying out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633) guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Can be paid out.

  A wiring FCBL in FIG. 154 as a wiring for electrically connecting the function display unit connector MFCN in FIG. 154 as a connector provided on the main control board 1310 and a connector (not shown) in the function display unit 1400 is a , Passing through the vicinity of at least one of the ball guiding unit 570 and the payout device 580. The game balls are ground in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 can be stored. That is, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 and the connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400 is in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise. .

  A main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 and a function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 are spaced apart by a predetermined distance dimension. Specifically, the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line of the main control MPU 1310a passing through the middle points of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. By disposing the main control MPU 1310a above, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 and the connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400 is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 and the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 are spaced apart by a predetermined distance dimension (that is, the above-described case). The function display unit connector MFCN is disposed below the center line, whereas the main control MPU 1310a is disposed above the center line), and electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring FCBL. Can be attenuated so as not to affect the main control MPU 1310a. It has been cut way. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 132 as the lottery result by the lottery means. 23. As the operation means that allows the game to proceed based on the game operation and that can be operated by the player, the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) of the production operation unit 300 in FIG. As the effect member, various door frame side units such as the effect operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. The lower back effect unit 3100, the upper back effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3 provided in the game board 5 As the first type light emitting means used for light emission of various units on the game board side such as 00, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. Various LEDs provided in various door frame side units such as the frame top unit 450, the back bottom effect unit 3100, the back effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400 provided in the game board 5 of FIG. 143 used in various units of the game board side and other effect members different from the effect members are used for light emission of the light guide plate 2601 in the panel plate 1110 in FIG. 143 and the table effect unit 2600 in FIG. 155. A plurality of panel decoration LEs that emit light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 in FIG. 1130a, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 that is decorated by making light incident from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 of FIG. 155, and a light that is decorated by making light incident from the right side of the light guide plate 2601. Various LEDs 2621 for the two-pattern 2620, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, which are the second type light emitting means, a plurality of LEDs 2611, and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs 2621 and the door frame side various units which are the first type light emitting means. Brightness adjustment means capable of adjusting the brightness of the LEDs and the brightness of various LEDs provided in the various units on the game board side based on operations by the effect operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) as operation means. As shown in FIG. 217, in step S1014 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process. And a lamp palette setting process performed as one process of the outgoing operation unit monitoring process and the received command analysis process of step S1022.

  The lamp palette setting process, which is the brightness adjusting means, is demonstrated within a predetermined period of the demonstration operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, pressing operation section 303), which is the operation means (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). As a normal luminance setting value corresponding to one of the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value as a plurality of luminance designation values based on being operated during or during the production. Various LEDs provided in various units on the door frame side which are first type light emitting means by selecting a normal palette value set for the luminance of the LEDs used as direct light, and various LEDs provided in the various units on the game board side Can be set as the brightness of the LED, and is set for the brightness of the LED used as indirect light as a special brightness setting value different from the normal brightness setting value Select special pallets value of the second kind light emitting means is a plurality of panels decorative LED1130a, thereby making it possible to set the brightness of the plurality of LED2611, and a plurality of LED2621.

  Specifically, in the lamp pallet setting process, for example, a player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the clockwise direction, and the current luminance is temporarily set to the minimum luminance ( When the first luminance designated value is set to the next highest level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value that is turned off), the first luminance designated value goes to the 31st luminance designated value that is the maximum luminance. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are increased along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve). On the other hand, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the first brightness is changed from the 31st brightness specified value that is the maximum brightness. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) toward a fixed value, It changes to lower. When a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined.

  In this way, the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), which is the operation means, is operated during the demonstration (demonstration production performed in a player waiting state) or during the production of the production. Based on this, the luminance of the LED used as direct light, which is the normal luminance setting value, corresponding to one of the plurality of luminance designation values from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value. The normal pallet value set for is selected and set as the brightness of the various LEDs provided in the door frame side various units that are the first type light emitting means, and the various LEDs provided in the game board side various units, A plurality of panel decoration LEDs 11 serving as the second type light emitting means by selecting a special palette value set for the luminance of the LED used as indirect light, which is the special luminance setting value. 0a, it is adapted to be set as the luminance of the plurality of LED2611, and a plurality of LED2621. As a result, the player uses the demonstration operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, press operation unit 303), which is an operation means, for demonstration within a predetermined period (demonstration production performed while waiting for the player) and progress of production. The brightness of various LEDs provided in the various units on the door frame side, which is the first type light emitting means, and the various LEDs provided in the various units on the game board side, so that the desired luminance is obtained by operating in the second, The brightness of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, the plurality of LEDs 2611, and the plurality of LEDs 2621, which are seed light emitting means, can be set. Therefore, the brightness adjustment can be easily performed.

[19. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the back lower movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body. Although the shape of each front view of 3420 is an equilateral triangle, it is not limited to this. For example, “square”, “hexagon”, “octagon”, “fan”, “star” “Shape”, etc.

  In the above-described embodiment, the back lower moving arm 3130 and the back upper moving arm 3230 are each provided with one movable decorative body. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The back upper moving arm 3230 may be provided with a plurality of movable decorative bodies.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back left moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm are each provided with two movable decorative bodies. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the back left moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3330 are provided. The right moving arm 3430 may be provided with one or more movable decorative bodies.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative bodies (the back lower movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper movable decorative body 3210) of the lower back effect unit 3100 and the upper upper effect unit 3200 are in the same position as the standby position. Although the thing which moves between positions was shown, it is not limited to this, In the back lower direction production unit 3100 and the back upper production unit 3200, the movable body whose posture changes between the standby position and the first combined position It may be a decorative body.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative bodies (back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable body of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400 are movable. Although the decorative body 3420) moves between the standby position and the first combined position by changing the posture, the present invention is not limited to this. In the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400, A movable decorative body that moves without changing the posture between the standby position and the first combined position may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, you may arrange | position so that the direction through which information and a signal flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information and signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information and signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the embodiment described above, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket), and correspondingly, when the socket is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector (or plug and plug) is provided. A special connector). In the above-described embodiment, since a plurality of types of video signal systems are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmission side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket), and correspondingly, when the socket is provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, it becomes a special connector (or plug). A special connector).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are configured by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, but are made of a conductive material containing carbon in polycarbonate. It may be configured by being molded in opaque black as a resin, or if it is made of conductive resin, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are molded in a translucent color. May be. Even in this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the peripheral control board described above is provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). By fixing various substrates such as 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with metal pan-head screws, as described above, circuit grounds are provided to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. Can be configured. As a result, noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be caused to flow as a circuit ground to the ground (GND) of various substrates, thereby removing the noise.

  In the embodiment described above, the payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. However, four may be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 222 is a modified rear view of the payout device, and is a cutaway rear sectional view of the payout device provided with the payout blade 589 including the four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape and provided with the radio wave sensor. FIG. 222 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit corresponding to FIG. 105 described above, cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade, and is given the same reference numerals as in FIG. When the dispensing blade 589 includes four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, the above-described dispensing gear member 588 has a flat plate-shaped detection piece having an arc shape extending outward, although not shown in FIG. Four 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90-degree area in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is defined as the light-shielding range as the 45-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed. It is managed by an 18-step rotation including a 9-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and a 9-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 with the 45-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed as a light receiving range. As described above, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 18 steps for paying out one game ball B. In other words, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, and the second transmission so that the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 can rotate 90 degrees. The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, respectively.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 includes the payout detection sensor 591 that is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a and detects the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor that detects radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch and detects the passing of the game ball B. When the game ball B is affected by the radio wave, the game ball B actually passes. Nevertheless, it is possible to make it appear that the game ball B is not passing due to malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the payout motor By controlling to rotate the 584 rotation shaft excessively, a large amount of the game ball B is paid out. In order to detect such an illegal act of acquiring the game ball B illegally (referred to as “radio wave”), as shown in FIG. 222, a radio wave sensor 594 is disposed near the upper part of the payout detection sensor 591. And can be configured. When the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633, the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is irradiated based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594. The rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is urgently stopped, and a radio wave notification command that notifies that is transmitted to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit wide radio goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the radio goto notification command is changed from 8-bit width to 16-bit width, and the radio goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume. While flowing from various speakers, various LEDs are set in a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red), and are shaped into a content that can be notified of a radio wave failure and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio wave notification command having a 16-bit width, the peripheral display board 1600 displays a large message “abnormality has occurred” on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs in the warning notification light emission mode. To do.

  Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact type ball passing sensor 594 'which is a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch may be used. A detection signal from the contact ball passing sensor 594 ′ is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 receives a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and a detection signal from the contact ball passing sensor 594 ′. Based on this, it can be configured that it can be determined that some fraud has been made when the number of game balls B paid out does not match. When the payout control board 633 determines that any fraud has been made, the payout motor 584 stops the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 in an emergency and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit wide goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 sets the goto notification command from 8 bits wide to 16 bits wide and sets the goto warning sound to the maximum volume and from various speakers. While flowing, various LEDs are set in a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red), and are shaped into a content that can be notified of a goto and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the peripheral display board 1600 displays a large message “abnormality has occurred” on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs to the warning notification light emission mode. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotation shaft is configured to step-rotate by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to the step drive. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation shaft by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is connected to the rotation gear via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. , The delivery blade 589 can be rotated, and the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 584 is rotated at a low speed to rotate the rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586 ′, The speed may be increased via the second transmission gear 587 ′ and the payout gear 588a ′)) of the payout gear member 588 so that the payout blade 589 can be rotated. By doing so, the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance so that the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Each time one ball is paid out, the positioning position is different. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the positions where dust and dust are attached can be dispersed. Of course, when the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmitting member described above that causes such a positioning error is set, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is reset by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light-shielding pieces) of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotary shaft of the payout blade 589, and the accumulated error is accumulated to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is ensured. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increasing ratio of such a rotation transmission member is determined in advance, the rotational position of the payout vane 589 that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, so By dispersing the position where the water adheres, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is strong against dust and dirt.

  In the embodiment described above, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, a predetermined amount is provided between the surfaces of the various substrates (the surface opposite to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a height distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging a metal shield plate 1540 in this space, and this 2 The two spaces are the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the metal shield plate A first space 1505a having a distance of a first predetermined height (12 mm in this embodiment) between the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of 540, and the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540; And a second space 1505b having a distance of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present embodiment) between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. This is a case where a large-scale production unit (an electrical drive source or drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production body and various sensors for detecting an origin position or an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5 in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as a distance dimension of the same predetermined height, The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, and heat in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating the various electronic components that emit light, heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540 is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the peripheral control board 1510 And the model (or management number), the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized. In addition, the product number and model printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, Part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data ROM base The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk-printed. The contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually confirmed, but the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a are made of metal. A rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the shield plate 1540. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the periphery can be seen. . Also, the shape of the board-to-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area, or the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the board-to-board connector (a shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector with 1530 can be confirmed. At the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide an opening in the shape.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining one or a combination of them except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of 1501e. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even if configured in this way, the foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. The foreign matter generated by the game ball B toward the inside (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) drops and enters, so that the electrical due to the fallen foreign matter on the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505 This is because the probability of occurrence of trouble increases.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. In this way, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501az provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is interposed via the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) falls and enters the peripheral control board box 1505, the peripheral control board box 1505 drops onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that an electrical trouble due to a foreign object will occur.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated due to wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, the same cutout portion, hole, or groove as the cutout portion 553aa may be formed in the ball passage where the game ball B rolls. More specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having one guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner as shown in FIG. 110, the metal of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a. A notch, hole, or groove through which powder can be removed from the guide passage 570a can be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the ball guide unit 570 shown in FIG. Below the ball guiding unit 570, as shown in FIG. 110, a payout device 580, a substrate unit 620, and the like are arranged. The payout device 580 includes a substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 includes the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. Therefore, when a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates arranged below the ball guiding unit 570. Therefore, a hook-shaped member can be formed so as to protrude rearward along the upper side of the payout device rear cover 582 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 103, or formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves to be formed and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be configured to be shifted. It can also be configured. Also, the hook-shaped member is moved backward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. The position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be formed. It is possible to configure by shifting the positions of these, and it is also possible to employ both. 111, the vent hole is not formed on the side wall of the cover provided on the upper side of the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635 and the power supply board cover 631 of the power board 630 shown in FIG. Can prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering to various substrates. In the main control board 1310 arranged below the peripheral control board box 1505, the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 is arranged at a position where the peripheral control board box 1505 becomes a ridge, or the main control unit It is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering by disposing a bowl-shaped member corresponding to 1300 or by not forming a vent hole in the cover side wall provided on the upper side of the main control unit 1300.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the power destruction circuit 630g are provided on one board called the power board 630. Although various electronic components and the like have been provided, it may be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuits of the second power supply substrate 630B include the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. The fuse FUSE3 and the wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, the input is input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, the output is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power supply generation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC voltages, such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc., created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 excluding the first power supply board 630A. The

  Further, the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 195 in the above-described embodiment can be divided into two substrates, a first power supply substrate 630A and a second power supply substrate 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap type arrester AL1, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B mainly composed of the connector A is the rectifier circuit 630c, power factor correction circuit 630d, smoothing circuit 630e, power generation circuit 630f, relay drive circuit 630i, relay RL1, shown in FIG. The thermistor TH1, choke coil L2, fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Various DC voltages, such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc., created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 excluding the first power supply board 630A. The

  In the embodiment described above, the LED constant current drive circuit is arranged in substantially the same manner on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is set as shown in FIG. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into group 1 and group 2. The configuration in which the constant current driving circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, but the present invention can also be applied to a slender plate-like decorative board provided in the game board 5. Examples of the long and slender board-like decorative board provided in the game board 5 include a decoration board provided in various effect units of the game board 5.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current driving circuit in each decorative board of the door frame 3 controls the light emission by supplying a constant current to the eight full color LEDs. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green, and other single color LEDs may be used. A monochromatic LED can also be used. In this case, light emission control of a maximum of 24 single color LEDs can be performed with one LED constant current drive circuit.

  In the above-described embodiment, the + 12V DC from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, but the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit is used. The internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply (linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 200) is used for LED lighting within the current allowable range of the linear power supply. It may be used as a voltage. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, a maximum of one single-color LED (for example, within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel (for example, When an LED other than the red LED) is electrically connected, an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by a linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the single color LED and the single color LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. In addition, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current driving circuit described above, a maximum of two single-color LEDs (for example, within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel (for example, When the red LEDs are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is inputted to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, DC 12V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 of the constant current driving circuit. ˜LG8, LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full color LED is electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. However, a plurality of full color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is 2 to 3. If it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, DC +35 V from the power supply board 630 is used as the LED lighting voltage instead of DC +12 V from the power supply board 630. May be. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door. Since the frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative substrate is large. The edge of the land pattern is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper edge and the lower edge of the door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457. Any one of the frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and any two decorative substrates The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. The door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of the other right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs are mounted, for example, by the LED constant current driving circuit provided in the door frame, in addition to the full-color LED provided in the door frame. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456 may be directly connected to, for example, another left decorative board on which one full-color LED is mounted in addition to the full-color LED provided therein by an LED constant current driving circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456. You may control light emission.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the LED non-mounting surface 314y are provided on the door frame 3. Although the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided in each decorative body are solid-coated with white resist, they may be printed by white silk printing instead. In this case, after printing the entire LED mounting surface and non-LED mounting surface of various decorative boards with white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are set as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, various decorative boards included in each decorative body provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are provided. On the LED non-mounting surface, the area corresponding to the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards was printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) as silk printing, but the mounting position of the full-color LED Auxiliary line indicating the position of the full color LED (i.e., when printing with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) as an area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) You may comprise so that mounting direction may be specified.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and the lower substrate holder 1200. However, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are arranged in a state separated by at least a false detection prevention distance dimension. You may be comprised from two sensors (double sensor). In this way, similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402 configured by two sensors (double sensors), the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. By adopting, it is possible to reliably detect the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interruption process of FIG. 212, so that a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is first detected by the second start port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second start port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second start port sensor slave side. After being detected by the second starter sensor slave side 2402b by passing through 2402b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected electrically), whereas the second start start sensor The detection signal from the mouth sensor slave side 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly connected electrically). A detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor sub side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  This panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above, in addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. A first start port sensor slave side 3002b that constitutes one start port sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2506 that detects a game ball B that has passed through a gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a big prize opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 A big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and a first provided in the game board 5. Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of one start port 2002 are electrically connected via respective connectors. While being aggregated is connected, via one of the connectors is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  Further, the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. ing. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b to the panel relay board 1710, and the second start port sensor slave side is connected. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the side 2402b to the panel relay substrate 1710. As a result, the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. In the manufacturer, the line operator can connect the two wires from the first starter sensor slave side 3002b and the second starter sensor slave side in the manufacturing process. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work mistakes (wiring mistakes of incorrect insertion) between the two wires from 2402b, a staff member such as a store clerk at the game hall can check whether there is any fraud. When confirming, in the case of temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b Two and wiring al, miswiring that operational error (wiring that insert mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200 and the one general winning opening 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400, respectively. The connector for electrically connecting each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710 has been selected to have the same shape. In the case where it contributes to the progress of the game and the change in the performance as the ball enters the winning opening 2001, a general winning opening sensor 3001a that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200, respectively. , 3001b, 3001c, and two wires from the general prize opening sensor 2401 General winning hole sensors 3001a, 3001b, respectively and two wiring from 3001C, connector shape may be respectively different. By doing so, it is possible to have a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from the general prize opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. In the manufacturer, the line operator ensures that a mistake in the wiring of each of the two wirings from the general prize opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c (wiring mistake of incorrect insertion) in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall checks the presence or absence of fraud, temporarily removes the wiring for maintenance, and returns it to the original prize opening sensor 2401, Work mistake of miswiring of each two wires from 3001a, 3001b, 3001c Wiring errors) that inserted mistake can be reliably prevented. In addition, when adopting a configuration in which each of the two wires from the general prize opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c is electrically connected directly to the main control board 1310 without using the panel relay board 1710. Are selected with different connector shapes. As described above, this has a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from the general prize opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. Therefore, in the manufacturer, the line operator can make an error in the manufacturing process, such as miswiring of the two wirings from the general prize opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c (wiring mistake of incorrect insertion). ) Can be surely prevented, and in the game hall, the staff of the game hall, such as a store clerk, confirms whether there is any fraud, or temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance and return it to the original prize. Incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from the mouth sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, 3001c Cormorant work miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2506, but the gate sensor main side 2506 a and the gate sensor subordinate side 2506 b are similar to the first start port sensor 3002. May be composed of two sensors (double sensors) that are arranged in a state of being separated by at least the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. In this way, similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, by adopting a gate sensor 2506 composed of two sensors (double sensors), that is, a gate sensor main side 2506a and a gate sensor subordinate side 2506b, the gate portion 2003 is provided. The game ball B that has passed through can be reliably detected. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interruption process of FIG. 212, so that a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is first detected by the gate sensor main side 2506a by passing through the gate sensor main side 2506a, and then detected by the gate sensor subordinate side 2506b by passing through the gate sensor subside 2506b. Will be. The detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor subordinate side 2506b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly connected electrically). Have been). The detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2506a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the gate sensor sub side 2506b is the main control input circuit 1310b. Is input to the input terminal PC0 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a (this input port is composed of 8 bits).

  Further, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the detection signal from the gate sensor subordinate side 2506b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2506a to the panel relay board 1710, and two from the gate sensor subordinate side 2506b. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the wiring to the panel relay board 1710. Thus, the physical structure in which the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the two wirings from the gate sensor subordinate side 2506b can be electrically connected to the corresponding ones. Therefore, in the manufacturer, the operator of the line makes an incorrect wiring between the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the two wirings from the gate sensor subordinate side 2506b in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, the staff of the game hall, such as store staff, can temporarily remove the wiring during maintenance when checking for the presence of fraud. In the case of returning to the original state, there is an error between the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the two wires from the gate sensor subordinate side 2506b. Work that line Miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Moreover, in embodiment mentioned above, it has a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector which electrically connects two wiring from the 1st starting port sensor main side 3002a which comprises the 1st starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. The four wires, which are the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the mouth sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402, are configured as one connector. Alternatively, one connector composed of these four wires may be electrically connected to the main control board 1310. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310, and 2 from the second start port sensor 2402 Since the connector that electrically connects the two wirings to the main control board 1310 can be made into a single connector composed of four wirings without being separated, the manufacturer can In the manufacturing process, the line operator has two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start port sensor 2402. In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent mistakes such as wiring mistakes (wiring mistakes that are mistakenly inserted). In the case where the wiring is temporarily removed and returned to the original state due to maintenance, two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are used. It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (wiring mistake called insertion mistake) of erroneous wiring of these two wirings.

  Further, this embodiment is adopted, and the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100, so that the lower substrate holder 1200 is placed. However, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are arranged in a state separated by at least a false detection prevention distance dimension. You may be comprised from two sensors (double sensor). In this way, similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402 configured by two sensors (double sensors), the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. By adopting, it is possible to reliably detect the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. ) Is reliably detected and notified in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interruption process of FIG. 212, so that a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is first detected by the second start port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second start port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second start port sensor slave side. After being detected by the second starter sensor slave side 2402b by passing through 2402b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Also, two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start port sensor main side 2402a constituting the second start port sensor 2402 Are configured as one connector, and one connector composed of the four wirings is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The detection signal from the second starter sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected electrically), whereas the second starter sensor The detection signal from the slave side 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly connected electrically). A detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor sub side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  This panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above, in addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. A first start port sensor slave side 3002b that constitutes one start port sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2506 that detects a game ball B that has passed through a gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a big prize opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 A big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and a first provided in the game board 5. Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of one start port 2002 are electrically connected via respective connectors. While being aggregated is connected, via one of the connectors is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  Further, by adopting this aspect, the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. Since the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are combined, four wires are combined. The connector may be configured as one connector, and one connector including the four wires may be electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the panel relay board 1710 and the second start port sensor 2402 are configured. Physically forming a connector that electrically connects the two wires from the second starter sensor slave side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710 and a single connector constituted by four wires without being separately provided. In the manufacturing process, the manufacturer of the line has two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and two from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b. It is possible to reliably prevent mistakes in the wiring between books and wiring (wiring mistakes that are mistakenly inserted). When confirming the presence or absence of fraud, when removing the wiring temporarily for maintenance and returning it to the original state, the two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (wiring mistake called insertion mistake) of erroneous wiring of these two wirings.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning ports 2001 included in the side unit 2200 and the one general winning port 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400 are received. The connector for electrically connecting each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710 has been selected to have the same shape. In the case where it contributes to the progress of the game and the change in the performance as the ball enters the winning opening 2001, a general winning opening sensor 3001a that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200, respectively. , 3001b, 3001c, and two wires from the general prize opening sensor 2401 The eight wirings including the two wirings from the general prize opening sensors 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c are configured as one connector (single connector), and the eight wirings 1 One connector may be configured to be electrically connected to the panel relay substrate 1710. In this way, a physical structure is adopted in which each of the two wirings from the general prize opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c is not a separate existence, but a single connector composed of eight wirings. Therefore, in the manufacturer, the line operator, in the manufacturing process, mistakes in wiring of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c (wiring mistakes of incorrect insertion). In the game hall, a staff member such as a store clerk at the game hall can confirm the presence of fraud, temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance, and return it to the original prize opening. Work of incorrect wiring of the two wires from the sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c Vinegar (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented. It should be noted that eight wirings including the two wirings from the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c are combined into one connector (single connector). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one connector constituted by these eight wires is directly electrically connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the panel relay board 1710. Even if configured in this way, as described above, one connector constituted by eight wirings without the two wirings from the general winning award opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c being separately provided. Therefore, in the manufacturer, the line operator refers to erroneous wiring of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c in the manufacturing process. Work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as incorrect insertions) can be reliably prevented, and in the game hall, staff members such as store staff at the game hall temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance when checking for fraud. In the case of returning to the original, each of the two from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, 3001c. Mis task of wiring errors of wiring (interconnection of cuttings mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL that is electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is provided from the upper right corner of the game board 5 as shown in FIG. When drawn to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent toward the lower side of the rear side of the back box 3010 and formed in a plurality in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wiring processing pieces 3011 are arranged together, but when drawn from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear side of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side. Are bent again downward on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and are vertically moved along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The main control unit 1300 is bent and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 that is collected by the wiring processing pieces formed and attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100. When it is drawn downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and is connected to the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. May be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  In this way, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the package left side of the main control MPU 1310a can be set to a distance dimension larger than the first wiring separation distance described above. Can be prevented from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the main control MPU 1310a to the left side of the package. This is because, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the ball frame 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 By being arranged, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the region where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached. When electromagnetic noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 This is because the wiring FCBL that is electrically connected between the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 disposed below may enter.

  In the case where the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being affected by electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit is larger than such a waveform width. Designed to pass a signal having a waveform width.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., as mentioned above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be cited as described above. The capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL, and when capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor Circuits configured by combining these may be inserted.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL that is electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is provided from the upper right corner of the game board 5 as shown in FIG. When drawn to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent toward the lower side of the rear side of the back box 3010 and formed in a plurality in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Although the wiring FCBL collected by the wiring processing pieces 3011 is bent toward the left side on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 is temporarily collected. The gaming panel 1 is drawn along the side and is gathered together by a lower wiring processing piece provided on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of 00, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. When it is drawn around, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and is drawn along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. When electrically connected to the connector MFCN, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may affect the peripheral control unit 1500.

  Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, as shown in FIG. 182, connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged. . Various corresponding wirings are electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, when various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL cross or contact each other (arrangement), electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When entering the various wirings connected to the cable, for example, the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 is disturbed due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL (for example, the black screen or the like is disturbed). Occur).

  Therefore, the wiring FCBL crosses the wiring FCBL so as not to be routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500) (the wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9). It is preferable to configure such that the arrangement (contact arrangement) does not come into contact. For example, an illustration provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 as a method of routing the wiring FCBL that does not have an arrangement in which the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL cross or contact each other (arrangement). The wiring FCBL that is electrically connected through the connector that is not connected is bent from the upper side to the left side of the game board 5 when it is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. On the left side of the rear side of the back box 3010, the game is again bent downward toward the lower side of the back side of the back box 3010 and collected together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed vertically along the left side of the back side of the back box 3010. The substrate holder 1200 is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the panel 1100. When drawn downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the 1200, the main control board box 1320 is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side, the function display unit connector MFCN may be electrically connected.

  In this way, the distance between the wiring FCBL and the package control left side of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the first wiring separation distance described above. It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the wiring FCBL to the package left side of the main control MPU 1310a. This is because, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the ball frame 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 By being arranged, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the region where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached. When electromagnetic noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 This is because the wiring FCBL that is electrically connected between the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 disposed below may enter.

  In the case where the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being affected by electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit is larger than such a waveform width. Designed to pass a signal having a waveform width.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., as mentioned above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be cited as described above. The capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL, and when capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor Circuits configured by combining these may be inserted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is above the center line. The main control MPU 1310a is disposed at the same position, but the positional relationship is reversed, and the main control MPU 1310a is disposed below the center line, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed above the center line. Thus, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a may be arranged to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310. Even with this configuration, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is generated for the function display unit. It is possible to prevent the connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space separating the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL that is electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is provided from the upper right corner of the game board 5 as shown in FIG. When drawn to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent toward the lower side of the rear side of the back box 3010 and formed in a plurality in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 Of the main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 that is collected by the wiring processing pieces 3011 and attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. It was routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320. Thus, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Had been placed in. As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full path path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. In other words, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is in front of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the lower full ball path unit 610 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Had been placed. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter, in addition to the routing of the wiring FCBL, the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 are provided. Are formed so as not to be routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (or on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200). After being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. May be connected to each other.

  In the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. In this area, instead of the function display unit 1400, a plurality of full-color LEDs are provided. A decorative board to be mounted may be attached. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter simply referred to as “wirings”) that are electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the decorative substrate are shown in FIG. 132, for example. To explain, when being drawn from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the back surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downwardly on the rear surface of the back box 3010, A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in a vertical direction along the right side are respectively bent and bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500, and a connector of the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510). Can be mentioned as a wiring routing method of being electrically connected to this connector after being routed to the lower side of When it is drawn from the upper corner to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, and below the rear side of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear side of the back box 3010. Are bent again toward the right side at the bottom of the peripheral control unit 1500 by being combined together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear side of the back box 3010. An example is a wiring routing method in which the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) is routed to a position below the connector and then electrically connected to the connector.

  The area where the wiring is routed by such a wiring routing method is a payout attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Since it is disposed in front of the unit 560 or in the vicinity (downward) of the ball tank 552, there is a possibility that electromagnetic wave noise may enter the wiring as described above.

  Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged with a connector below the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510. By disposing the peripheral control IC 1510a above, the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a are arranged to be separated from each other on the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected. Therefore, electromagnetic noise entering the wiring causes the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a to be connected to the peripheral control board. It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins of the peripheral control IC 1510a through a space separated in 1510. Accordingly, it is possible to protect the peripheral control IC 1510a from the wiring through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. Electromagnetic wave noise that enters through this wiring can be attenuated on the control board 1510 or in a space where the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other in the peripheral control board 1510. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Although the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are directly electrically connected by wiring, the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to be connected. In this case, it is preferable that the panel relay substrate 1710 is provided with an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise that has entered the above-described wiring (that is, a plurality of wirings that transmit control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the decorative board). On the other hand, it is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise. As a result, electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring can be prevented from affecting the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, it is possible to protect the peripheral control IC 1510a from the wiring through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs). As a filter circuit, a signal having a waveform width larger than the waveform width is used. Designed to pass.

  In addition to resistors and filter circuits, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be cited as such elements. Are inserted so as to be connected in series, and when a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings. In addition, when a steep attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wirings, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. A circuit configured in combination may be inserted.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400, and the wiring UPCBL is electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131. 132, when bent to the upper rear side of the gaming panel 1100, as shown in FIG. 132, the upper side of the front side of the back box 3010 is bent toward the rear side of the back box 3010, and is close to the wiring FCBL described above ( Or in the contact state), when it is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality is formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wiring processing pieces 3011 are grouped together, but from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back box 3010 When drawn to the upper side of the surface, it is bent from the upper side toward the left side, and is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When a plurality of wiring processing pieces are formed in the vertical direction along the side and are routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side, the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 is moved to the right side. After bending toward the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 and being routed to above the predetermined connector of the panel drive substrate 1720 in the drive substrate unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector. You may make it do. In this case, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 shown in FIG. 182 are separated from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 by being routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500. . As a result, the wiring FCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not intersect (contact) with the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. With this configuration, peripheral control of the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 As a positional relationship with the mounting position of the IC (peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 154), the peripheral control IC 1510a may be disposed above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510. it can. That is, the peripheral control IC 1510a is disposed above the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other. can do. Thus, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged away from the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 through the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the above-described embodiment, the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (back left lower front stage decorative board) is used as a sensor that detects the standby position (original position) of the front stage decorative part 3312 (first stage decorative parts 3322, 3412, 3422). 3321a, back upper right front stage decorative board 3411a, back lower right front stage decorative board 3421a) using small electronic components (magnetic sensors), a front stage decorative section 3312 (front stage decorative section 3322, 3412, 3422) as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position), and the magnet 3312a of the front decoration part 3312 (the magnet 3322a of the front decoration part 3322, the magnet 3412a of the front decoration part 3412, the front decoration part) By detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3422a of the 3422, the pre-decoration part 3312 (pre-decoration parts 3322, 3) Identify and standby position the rotational position of 12,3422) (but had set situ), it can also be used as a sensor for detecting the approach of a magnet by the magnet Goto. This is because a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) called a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (a back lower left front decorative substrate 3321a, a back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a, a back lower right front decorative substrate 3421a) In a situation where the step decoration unit 3312 (first step decoration units 3322, 3412, 3422) is continuously rotated, the magnet 3312a of the first step decoration unit 3312 (the magnet 3322a of the first step decoration unit 3322, the first step decoration unit) is intermittently generated. The magnet 3412a of the 3412 and the magnet 3422a of the pre-decoration portion 3422) should be detected. However, when the magnetism is continuously detected, the approach of an unauthorized magnet can be detected as a magnet goto. is there.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 132 are used as the wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 as specific rendering means among the plurality of rendering means. The wiring UPCBL among the wirings (not shown) that electrically connect the board and the panel drive board 1720 is in the vicinity of the sphere supply means (the vicinity of at least one of the sphere tank 552, the sphere guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580). I was supposed to go through. Of the wires forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL is the door frame side various decorative boards 184, 273, other than the upper left panel decorative board 1131. They are arranged so as not to cross or contact the wiring forming the transmission path between the etc and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, such a configuration can also be adopted for various wirings that are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. For example, among various wirings that are electrically connected to the main control board 1310, wiring that passes under an environment that is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise and other wiring other than this wiring are arranged so as not to cross or contact each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a (main control board 1310) that can be operated by the high-frequency circuit of the crystal oscillator can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit described above. Therefore, malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game balls supplied from the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580, which are ball supply means, are paid out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. The game balls received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005, which are the receiving ports provided in the gaming area 5a formed in the gaming area 5a, and the gaming board 5 are partitioned. A ball collecting device having a collecting port for collecting together with the game balls collected in an out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a is provided, and the game balls collected by the ball collecting device are collected into a ball launching device 540. The ball launcher 540 and the game board 5 are divided into sections without supplying the game balls to the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200. It is also possible to form a game ball circulation path by the game area 5a, the ball collecting device, and the ball transfer device, and to play a game by configuring a predetermined number of game balls to circulate in a closed manner. .

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the back left upper base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that emit light toward the inner wall of the base decorative part 3311 to which the back upper base decorative board is attached. 3311a was mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the front decoration portion 3312. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the upper left base decoration substrate are of the side view type. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back left upper front decorative board 3311a may be selected as a side view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decorative board may be selected. A plurality of full-color LEs to be selected on the view type and mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a 3311aa may be selected as a top view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decoration board are selected as a top view type and mounted on the back upper left front decoration board 3311a. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa may be selected as a top-view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on a back upper-left base decoration board are selected as a top-view type and the upper left-front step A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3311a may be selected as a side view type.

  In the above-described embodiment, the back left lower base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3321 to which the back lower base decorative board is attached. 3321a was mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the front decoration portion 3322, but the side-view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower left base decoration substrate A plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa mounted on the lower left lower front decorative board 3321a may be selected as a side view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the lower left lower base decorative board may be side-selected. A plurality of full-color LEs to be selected on the view type and mounted on the back left lower front decorative board 3321a 3321aa may be selected as a top view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower left lower base decorative board are selected as a top view type and mounted on the lower left lower front decorative board 3321a. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa may be selected as a top-view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on a back lower left base decoration board are selected as a top-view type and a lower left lower front stage A plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3321a may be selected as a side view type.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back upper right base decoration board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration section 3411 to which the back upper right base decoration board is attached. 3411a was mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa that irradiate light toward the right side of the front decoration unit 3412, but the side-view type of a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decoration board A plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a may be selected as a side view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decoration board 34 A plurality of full-color LEs to be selected on the view type and mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a 3411aa may be selected as a top view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decoration board are selected as a top view type and mounted on the back upper right front decoration board 3411a. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa may be selected as a top-view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decoration board are selected as a top-view type and the upper right front stage A plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa mounted on the decorative board 3411a may be selected as a side view type.

  In the embodiment described above, the back lower right base decoration board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration portion 3421 to which the back lower base decoration board is attached. The decoration board 3421a is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa that irradiate light toward the right side of the front decoration part 3422. However, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower right base decoration board are side view type. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa mounted on the back lower right front decorative board 3421a may be selected as a side view type, or plural mounted on the lower right lower base decorative board. The side-view type full-color LEDs are selected and a plurality of full-color LEs are mounted on the back lower right front decoration board 3421a. 3421aa may be selected as a top view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back lower right base decoration board are selected as top view type and the back lower right front decoration board 3421a. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa mounted on the top-view type may be selected, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower right base decoration board may be selected as a top-view type. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa mounted on the lower right front stage decorative substrate 3421a may be selected as a side view type.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring (the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 as a specific presentation means among the plurality of presentation means. The wiring UPCBL in FIG. 132 and the wiring (not shown) that electrically connects between the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel drive board 1720 are used as the wiring that forms a transmission path for electrical connection) The wiring UPCBL ′, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131, is directly routed so as to be electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Also good. In this case, the wiring UPCBL ′ is a wiring that forms another transmission path that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (except for the upper left panel decoration board 1131, as various other decoration means 184 on the door frame side. 273, etc, etc. and the peripheral control board 1510) are arranged so as not to cross or contact each other. As a result, the wiring that forms the transmission path between the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, that is, the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 are directly electrically connected. Electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL ′ to jump out and form wirings that form other transmission paths that are electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (the transmission paths between the control means and other presentation means other than specific presentation means) It is possible to prevent intrusion into various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 of the peripheral control unit 1500, which are wirings to be formed. Therefore, malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the lower back effect unit 3100, at least when electrostatic discharge is performed, the various boards provided in the game board 5 may be affected and may malfunction. For example, underneath a metal back surface, the conductor itself is structurally contacted, fixed, and conductive, as the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area. The reinforcing plate for the moving arm and the metal back rail moving arm slide rail 3151ns are attached and structurally brought into contact and electrically connected, and these conductors are used for the back side effect unit. 1 conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc, a metal casing of the lower back raising / lowering drive motor 3151, a second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc for the lower back effect unit, Then, the path is grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive board 1720, but instead of the metal casing of the back / up lift drive motor 3151, a metal screw is provided. This may be performed through the metal screw alone, or may be performed through the lug plate by providing a lug plate (a metal lug terminal fixed to the insulating substrate). Good. That is, these conductors are the back conductor effect unit first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc, the metal screw (or lug plate), the back conductor effect unit second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc, and the panel drive board 1720. A path that is grounded to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0 may be used. The plurality of conductors provided in the back effect unit 3200 can be similarly configured.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left effect unit 3300, at least when electrostatic discharge is performed, the various boards provided in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunctioned. For example, the conductor of the slide rail 3351 ns for the back left moving arm made of metal is used for the back left effect unit. 1 conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351nc, metal housing of the back left traversing drive motor 3351, second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351fc for the back left effect unit, and resistance Rs2 of the relay board 3351a provided in the back left effect unit 3300 The ground is connected to the ground (GND) via the Instead of this, a metal screw may be provided and this metal screw alone may be used, or a lug plate (a metal lug terminal fixed to the insulating substrate) may be provided, You may make it carry out via this lug board. In other words, the conductor of the metal back left moving arm slide rail 3351 ns is the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3351 nc for the back left rendering unit, the metal screw (or lug plate), the second conductor potential for the back left rendering unit. A path that is grounded to the ground (GND) may be provided via the fluctuation preventing wiring 3351fc and the resistor Rs2 of the relay board 3351a provided in the back left effect unit 3300. The plurality of conductors provided in the back right effect unit 3400 can be similarly configured.

  In the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of conductors provided in the back left effect unit 3300, at least when electrostatic discharge is performed, the various boards provided in the game board 5 may be affected and may malfunction. For example, the conductor of the slide rail 3351 ns for the back left moving arm made of metal is used for the back left effect unit. 1 conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351nc, metal housing of the back left traversing drive motor 3351, second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351fc for the back left effect unit, and resistance Rs2 of the relay board 3351a provided in the back left effect unit 3300 The ground is connected to the ground (GND) through the relay board 3351a. In the case where no resistor Rs2 is provided and the resistor Rs2 is not provided, the resistor Rs2 ′ is provided on the panel drive substrate 1720 which is the upper substrate of the relay substrate 3351a, and one end of the resistor Rs2 ′ is grounded (GND) of the panel drive substrate 1720. And the other end of the resistor Rs2 ′ is provided as a part of the third conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring for rear left rendering unit (electric wiring (harness) for electrically connecting the relay board 3351a and the panel driving board 1720). Or may be electrically connected via In this case, the conductor of the metal back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns is the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351nc for the back left effect unit, the metal casing of the back left traversing drive motor 3351, and the back left effect unit. Panel drive board 1720 via second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3351fc, relay board 3351a provided in back left rendering unit 3300, third conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring for back left rendering unit, and resistance Rs2 ′ of panel drive board 1720. It becomes a path grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal conductor of the back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns is made of the metal of the back left traversing drive motor 3351 via a transition wire called the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wire 3351nc for the back left effect unit. Although it is electrically connected to the housing made of metal, the conductor of the metal back left moving arm slide rail 3351ns and other conductive members (for example, structures used for improving rigidity, driving mechanisms Mechanical parts, electrical parts (including housings of electrical parts), conductive plating applied to decorative structures, and structures molded by conductive resin (including decorative structures) A plurality of conductors such as one conductor) may be electrically connected by other crossover wiring. That is, it is good also as a structure electrically connected by two or more steps of crossover wiring. In this case, a plurality of conductors may be electrically connected in a daisy chain with crossover wires, or a plurality of conductors may be connected in series and in parallel with crossover wires, and metal screws may be provided. In addition, the transition wiring that electrically connects one conductor and another conductor may be relayed through the metal screw alone, or the lug plate (the metal lug terminal may be connected to the insulating substrate). May be provided via the lug plate. It is preferable that the length of each of the plurality of crossover wirings is shortened.

  In the above-described embodiment, the various drive motors provided in various effect units such as the front effect unit 2600, the back lower effect unit 3100, the back upper effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400 are stepping. Although it is a motor, you may use the motor (servomotor) provided with rotation detectors, such as an encoder. In this case, the rotation angle of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the servo motor is detected by a rotation detector, and the drive pulse is controlled by feedback control. Thereby, the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the servo motor can be set to a predetermined rotational speed.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, driving to various drive motors provided in various effect units such as the front effect unit 2600, the back lower effect unit 3100, the back upper effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400. A power supply line (for example, a + 35V power supply line from the power supply board 630 or a + 12V power supply line from the power supply board 630) is a board to which wirings from various drive motors are directly connected (for example, the back and bottom raising / lowering of the back bottom effect unit 3100) In the drive motor 3151, the panel drive board 1720, and in the back left traverse drive motor 3351 of the back left effect unit 3300, a fuse (may be a chip fuse) or poly A switch may be provided, or A fuse (may be a chip fuse) or a polyswitch for a substrate 630 supplied as a drive power line (for example, a + 35V power line from the power board 630 or a + 12V power line from the power board 630) May be provided.

[20. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 224, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 is on (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being controlled is set (step S235). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S239) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “16R big hit”, A process for controlling opening / closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the big hit gaming state is executed. In addition, when the mode suggests “4R jackpot”, a process of controlling opening / closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 4R jackpot gaming state is executed.

  In the big hit control process (step S241), after performing the opening control of the big prize opening 2005, each set process of the high probability flag, the short time flag, and the short time counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and a big hit gaming state based on a big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit) which is controlled to a high probability state (high probability short-time state) after the big hit gaming state ends. Set when exiting. When the high probability flag is set, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 235, which will be described later, when the next big hit or when the counter value of the hour / hour counter becomes “0” or The high probability flag is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The time-short flag is a flag indicating that the time-short state is reached, and the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit) which is controlled to the short-time state (high probability short-time state) after the big hit gaming state ends. Set when The hour / short flag is the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 235, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop (not shown) when the next big hit or the counter value of the hour / hour counter reaches “0”. Reset by processing.

  In addition, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed as the number of times the time reduction state continues. When the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (16R big hit, 4R big hit) controlled in the short-time state) is ended, the number of times of the short-time state is set. The time-count counter is counted down every time the special symbol fluctuation display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes “0”. In some cases, the counter is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 235 described later or a second special symbol stop process (not shown) (returns the counter value to “0”).

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S236), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S237), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S236), the second special symbol including the lottery process concerning the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S238). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S232).

  If it is determined in the process of step S231 that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, the process is shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is “4”, which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to S3 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S244, the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the random number acquired in step S241. To store.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not the game is a big hit, if the big win is reached, the type of the big hit, otherwise the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S245), the process ends.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S242 that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S243 to S245, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first held state. While updating to correspond to the stored number, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the first reserved stored number and performs peripheral control. The data is transmitted to the substrate 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

  Then, the specified prior determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, the reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or execution According to the type of game effect to be performed), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored (the value of the reserved number counter) corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the prior judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the first reserved memory number (first 1 special reserved number counter value) and a first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the value (step S262).

  Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 where the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the special symbol variation display based on the generated start winning is a big hit, if the big hit, the type of big hit, if not, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the start of variable display according to the start winning is performed on the advance determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed or the type of game effect to be executed. The IC 1510a can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information relating to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC 1510a stores the first determination information indicated by the received previous determination command as the first (first) storage area. Store sequentially from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (to the reserved storage area) Shift the stored prior decision information). Thereby, the prior determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest prior determination information.

  In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, the big display expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). )) In advance, for example, can be notified at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold display. .

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S234).

  Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, then FIG. As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second reservation storage number is based on this counter value. ) Is “4” (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S3 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S254, the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the random number acquired in step S251. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S252 that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S253 to S254, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second on-hold state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed. While updating to correspond to the stored number, peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120) sets a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 4) instructing the second reserved stored number to control the periphery. The data is transmitted to the substrate 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S237). The first special symbol process executed in step S237 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S237 of the special symbol process is described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S282)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283).
5. The first special symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop mode. The first special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S284).

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 210).

  FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 229, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S301. As a process of, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first control symbol stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in the first storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S305, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process about the big win is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S305).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state) (step S311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the high probability jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 181 (A). (Step S312) If the current gaming state is a low probability state (Step S311), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 231 (A) is selected (Step S313). The first special random number read in step S302 of the one special symbol normal process is compared (step S314).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 231 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the jackpot determination at low probability is used when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time short state)). A table, and a jackpot determination table for a high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability (high probability short time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot, and 299 types of first jackpot determination values. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the special random numbers coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that the special random numbers are out of place (a jackpot probability at low probability: 1/300). In the special symbol and special electric utility control process, in the second special symbol process executed in step S138, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first Similar to the jackpot determination table at low probability, which is referred to for comparison with the special random number, 299 types of second special random numbers that coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that the loss is the above-mentioned loss (a big hit probability at a low probability: 1/300).

  In addition, the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number includes 10 types including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the low probability jackpot determination table. The first special random numbers are associated with the jackpot determination value, and the first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 290 types of first special random numbers match with the loss determination value (the probability of hitting with a high probability: 30 minutes) 1). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won is 10 times that in the low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state)). Enhanced. In the second special symbol process executed in step S138 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number 10 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random numbers as the second special random numbers set in the low probability jackpot determination table as well as the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the special random numbers The second special random number is associated with each other so that the special random number matches the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won, and the 290 kinds of second special random numbers are coincident with the loss determination values indicating that they are out of place. (Big hit probability at high probability: 1/30).

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S315). ), The jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation is won is set and the process ends (step S316), and the first special read out in step S302 of the selected jackpot determination table and the first special symbol normal process. As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that they are out of place, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317). As a result of comparing the reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302, if it is determined that the reach is shifted (step S318), a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set. The process ends (step S319).

  FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 232, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 231 (B). (Step S322) The jackpot type is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (Step S323). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S321, the first special symbol is determined to be an off symbol as a mode when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S324).

  As shown in FIG. 231 (B), the symbol determination table stores symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) in association with each determination result (16R big hit, 4R big hit). . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1.16R The big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the big hit game state, and after the big hit game state is finished, the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times. 16R jackpot that controls to a high-probability time-short state until the next big jackpot is reached or until the next symbol is displayed 50 times until the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed. 2.4R jackpot 2005 is controlled to open / close in accordance with the 4R jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state, the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is displayed 50 times. 4R large that controls to a high probability time-short state until the next big hit or until the next big hit is displayed 50 times until the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 50 times This One of the two types of jackpots is determined.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. The symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol is set so that the judgment value distribution is different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 231 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, out of 16R big hit and 4R big hit, 100 determinations are made for 4R big hit which is less profitable to the player. Value distribution is set. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, among the 16R jackpots and 4R jackpots, 55 judgment value allocations are set for the 16R jackpot which is profitable to the player. 45 decision value distributions are set for 4R jackpots that are less profitable to the player. As described above, in the normal state (non-short-time state), the lottery on the first special symbol side is performed by causing the game ball B to enter the first starting port 2002, but at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side (initial At the time of big hit), 4R big hit that has little profit to the player is surely determined. On the other hand, in the short time state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and by entering the gaming ball B into the second starting port 2004, The lottery on the second special symbol side will be held, but at the time of big hit on the second special symbol side (at the time of consecutive resorts), the player's profit will be determined as either 16R big hit or 4R big hit, so how It can be noticed whether the type of big hit is determined. Therefore, since the game characteristics change between the first big hit and the consecutive time, the game does not become monotonous.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when 4R jackpot is determined, the 4R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 16R jackpot is determined, the 16R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 4R jackpot is determined, the 4R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this way, as the process of step S325, these lottery results (indicating either the type of jackpot, reach losing or losing (the stop symbol pattern of the first special symbol) A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that it may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S326, the process is terminated. The peripheral control IC 1510a starts the left / middle / right decorative symbol variation display based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops and displays the left ornament symbol → right ornament symbol → middle ornament symbol order. Thus, the display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

  Specifically, peripheral control IC 1510a determines 16R big hit out of big hits related to the special symbol from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on effect display device 1600 is stopped. If specified, the 16R jackpot symbol (the combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all “7” symbols from “1” to “9”) is determined. The jackpot symbol (the combination in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same symbols except “7” out of “1” to “9”) is determined, and when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed ( At the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this way, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped variably in either the 16R big hit symbol or the 4R big hit symbol, it can be determined that the decorative symbol is a big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, Further, since different symbols are used as the 16R jackpot symbol and the 4R jackpot symbol, it can be determined whether the 16R jackpot or 4R jackpot.

  In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a, as an aspect (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, when the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command, the symbol that is accompanied by the reach. (The combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs are the same.) If the outlier is specified, it is a detachable design that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs. Are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 233, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S341), the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S341). S342) If the reach flag is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S344), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag are selected. If it is not set, that is, it will be a normal off-line (a non-reach effect is not executed) To selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S345).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S346), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S347). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S348). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, the super reach effect of the reach effect is higher in the big hit expectation level than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol variation process (step S283) as the process of step S349. At the time of updating, this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol random time (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is associated with the special symbol random time information set to about 1 second when the time is short. When the time is short, the variation pattern of the special symbol is set such that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected at the time reduction is compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-time reduction so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short. Symbol variation time information is set.

  FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 234, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S371. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variation pattern is set. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process ends.

  FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 235, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S381. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time-shortage counter is set to “0” while the time-shortage flag is set and the time-short state continuation count is set. (Step S383). If this counter value is not “0”, after the time-short counter is counted down (step S384), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-time counter is “0” (step S385). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, the time reduction flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S386). If it is determined in the process of step S383 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S385 that the time reduction counter is not “0”. At that time, the process proceeds to step S387.

  When the jackpot flag is set (step S387), a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started is set (step S388), and the jackpot gaming state is started (the jackpot round start command is set). A waiting time until the game is started (a period during which display indicating that the big hit gaming state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S389). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset, and the counter value of the time reduction counter is further set. If it is not “0”, the counter value is reset (returned to “0”), then a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S390), and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S391), this process is terminated.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (16R jackpot, 4R jackpot). In step S388, a jackpot start command (16R jackpot start command, 4R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. Thereby, the presentation according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S239).

  In step S389, the waiting time until the big hit gaming state is started is set in the interval timer. However, in the process of step S401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, FIG. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the opening / closing of the big winning opening 2005, and sets the high winning / shortening state as the gaming state after the end of the big winning gaming state (step S402) is executed.

  FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the special winning opening / closing process (step S402).

  If it is determined in step S411 that the big prize opening 2005 is open, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. When a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when opening for a long time, 0.5 seconds when opening for a short time) has elapsed since the open state of the game (step S412), or when the game is entered in the large winning opening 2005 in the open state. When the ball B has won the maximum number (for example, 9) (step S413), the open large winning opening 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to be closed (step S415), the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds are transmitted as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. A big hit round end command is set according to (step S416), and the process proceeds to step S428.

  If it is determined in step S411 that the big prize opening 2005 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. When it is determined that a new round is to be started by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the open state (step S418), the peripheral control board 1510 is reached. A jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the new number of rounds is set as a command to be transmitted to (step S419). Then, the closed winning prize opening 2005 is controlled to be in an open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. If it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the winning prize opening 2005 to be in an open state (such as the second open in the same round) (step S418), the closed state is closed. The special winning opening 2005 is controlled to be in an open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. Thus, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like can execute an effect in accordance with the type of jackpot designated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command and the current number of rounds.

  Further, if it is determined in the process of step S428 that the game ball B has been received in the special winning opening 2005, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. As a command to be transmitted to 1510, a winning prize entry command is set (step S429), and this process is terminated. As a result, when the winning prize entry command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the presentation display device 1600, lamp / LED, speaker, etc. produce an effect corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball B to the winning prize opening 2005. Can be executed.

  If it is determined in step S417 that it is not time to open the special winning opening 2005, as shown in FIG. 237, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 When the number of rounds is completed by repeating the open state and closed state of the winning opening 2005 (step S423), the big hit execution flag is reset (step S424). Then, when the high probability flag is set (step S426), the time reduction flag is set and the initial value (for example, 50 times) is set as the number of times of the time reduction state in the counter value of the time reduction counter (step S427), This process ends. Thus, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the high probability flag and the short time flag are set, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is controlled to the high probability short time state.

  FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the on state and the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate section passing process such as obtaining a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol storage area of the RAM. Run.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the ordinary symbol random number (step S804).
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 is displayed so that the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display. Normal symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode suggesting “per symbol”, the upper second start port door 2411 moves backward to play the game ball to the second start port 2004 Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of B (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 210).

  FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the on state and the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S811, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the normal random number and the normal variable random number from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and based on this counter value, the holding number of normal symbols is the maximum value “4”. Is determined (step S812). In the process of step S812, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S813 to S814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control in the hold state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing in step S813, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S814, each random number acquired in step S811 is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. .

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S812 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S813 to S814, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 240, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S821. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbols of the normal symbol stored in the storage areas of the normal reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 are counted from the first (first) area. Store in order. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random numbers extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area And when the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage is read out. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal time figure determination table (not shown) if the current gaming state is a short time state (high probability short time state) (step S826) ( In step S826), if the current gaming state is a non-short-time state (low probability non-short-time state) (step S825), a non-time-short normal figure determination table (not shown) is selected (step S827) and selected. The normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process (step S828).

  It should be noted that the common figure determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the normal figure determination table used when the gaming state is short time (high probability short time state) and the gaming state is non-short time. A non-time / short-time normal figure determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-time / short state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball B passes to the gate portion 2003 in the time reduction, the player always wins by the usual figure, and the upper second start opening door 2411 moves backward to the second start opening 2004. The game ball B is controlled to be received.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving common figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all the 251 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the common figure determination values indicating that each common figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, at the time of non-time saving, even if the game ball B passes to the gate part 2003, the upper second start door 2411 is moved backward due to the fact that it is not won per the usual figure. There is no control that allows the game ball B to be received at the start port 2004.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that the symbol is normal (step S829). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won for the normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol is stopped) The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected regular symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-standard symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process ends.

  In this example, in the control in the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a win, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extremely reduced. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). When the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the second start port 2004 is controlled with an open / close pattern that is closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the time-short state control, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is very high, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is constant and short, and the open state of the second start port 2004 is It is much easier to win the game ball B in the second start port 2004 due to the long time of the game, and the game ball is more efficiently aimed at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. B can be awarded. In the non-time-short state control, it is assumed that the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always hit, and the second start port 2004 is aimed. Also, the game ball B cannot be won at the second starting port 2004.

  As described above, during the non-time-short state control, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed, the second start port 2004 cannot win the game ball B. The game ball B must be launched (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B wins. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B is the obstacle nail. By contacting N, various movements are imparted to the game ball B and flow down. For this reason, even if the game ball B is hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first start opening 2002, it does not necessarily win the first start opening 2002 but wins the first start opening 2002. The game ball B that has not been discharged is discharged to the outside through an out port 1008 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during the time-short state control, the game ball B can be won more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. In order for the ball B to win, the game ball B must be fired (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center bonus 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is The passed game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability. For this reason, during the time-short state control, the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the non-time-short state control is performed. Compared to the first start opening 2002 in the middle, the game ball B wins the second start opening 2004 with extremely high efficiency.

  In addition, during the control of the short time state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is very high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the time when the second start port 2004 is opened is long, etc., so that the game ball B can easily win the second start port 2004, and further to the second start port 2004. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable symbol display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely short compared with the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the non-time-short state control. The special symbol variation display control (the suspension of the special symbol variation display control) can be digested. That is, when the time-short state is controlled after the big hit gaming state, the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the second starting port 2004, so that the big hit is made again in a short time. It is possible to expect a large number of game balls B by controlling to the big hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls B paid out by winning the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is one, so that the game to the second start port 2004 is Even if the winning of the ball B frequently occurs, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[21. Hold notice effect and hold change effect]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Until the hold display is consumed, the display mode of the hold display is displayed. Is changed, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot for the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) based on the hold display. Further, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes.

  Specifically, a hold number designation command and a pre-determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the winning of a game ball (a start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. . Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the pending number designation command and the advance determination command are received in the command analysis process of step S601, the pending number specified from the pending advance notice determination table corresponding to these commands, that is, the pending number designation command. (Pending memory count) and pre-judgment information specified from the pre-judgment command (one of jackpot, reach lose, or lose) is selected, and the judgment value set in the hold notice decision table is acquired. The type of the hold notice pattern set in the hold notice determination table is determined by comparing the random number for determining the hold notice. In addition, in the hold notice determination table, the distribution of the judgment value for each hold notice pattern is different for each pre-judgment information specified by the pre-judgment command (one of big hit, reach lose, or lose). Appearance rates are different.

  Further, when a game ball wins (start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified from the hold number designation command is increased, thereby producing an effect display. One hold display is added to the device 1600 and displayed. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold number (holding memory number) specified by the hold number designation command is decreased. Then, the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is erased. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold notice pattern. Each time the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on another hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display can be changed. In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display is deleted. Even after the start of variable display (variable display of special symbols), the hold display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the hold display may be changeable.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 241 and 242, a description will be given of a hold notice determination table in which a plurality of types of hold notice patterns are set for each number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified from a hold number designation command. The pending notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. 241 (A) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 1 is lit (hold number = 1), and FIG. 241 (B) is a hold notice decision table used when hold 2 is lit (hold number = 2). 241 (C) is a hold notice determination table used when hold 3 is lit (the number of holds = 3), and FIG. 242 (D) is used when hold 4 is lit (the number of holds = 4). This is a pending notice determination table.

  As described above, a plurality of types of holding notice patterns are set in the holding notice determination table corresponding to the number of holds (the number of stored memories). It is set how the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 changes every time the hold storage is digested by the number of storages). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 241 (A), the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 changes in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 1 is lit (the number of holds = 1). No (that is, only digesting the hold display) is associated with the hold notice pattern in which only the display mode of the hold display for one time is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (B), the display mode of the hold display can be changed once in the hold notice determination table used when the hold 2 is lit (the number of holds = 2). For this reason, a hold notice pattern in which a display form of hold display for two times is set is associated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 241 (C), in the hold notice determination table used when hold 3 is lit (hold number = 3), the display mode of the hold display can be changed twice until the hold display is exhausted. For this reason, a hold notice pattern in which a display mode of hold display for three times is set is associated. Further, as shown in FIG. 242 (D), in the hold advance notice determination table used when hold 4 is lit (the number of holds = 4), the display mode of the hold display can be changed three times before the hold display is exhausted. For this reason, a hold notice pattern in which the display mode of hold display for four times is set is associated.

  Further, as the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 set to the hold notice pattern, four displays are displayed so that the hold display is displayed in one of white (basic color), blue, red, and rainbow color. An aspect is provided. Then, when determining the hold notice pattern from the hold notice determination table, as a result of the change of the display form of the hold display to the end, the expectation of jackpot is high in the order of white (basic color) → blue → red → rainbow color. It is set to be. That is, when the lottery result is identified as a big hit as the prior determination information, a hold notice pattern that has a high jackpot expectation display mode (for example, rainbow color) is determined with a high probability as a final hold display mode. When the lottery result is specified as the determination information, it is determined with a high probability a holding notice pattern that is a display mode (for example, white) with a low expectation degree of jackpot as the final holding display mode. Therefore, when the final hold display mode is displayed in a display mode with a high degree of jackpot expectation, the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increased.

  In the hold notice pattern, the display mode of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of the order of white → blue → red → rainbow color, and the display mode of the hold display is maintained when the hold display is digested. Alternatively, the next display mode is set to be a display mode with a high expectation degree of jackpot. For this reason, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation level, there is still a possibility of changing to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation level when digesting the hold display. The aspect can be noticed with expectation to the end.

  In addition, the hold notice pattern does not necessarily change in the order of blue → red → rainbow after the display mode of the hold display is displayed in white (basic color). Starting from a mode (for example, suddenly starts in rainbow color by the holding notice pattern number 4 when the hold 1 is lit), or changes to the next display mode by skipping one or more display modes (for example, when the hold 2 is lit) Is set to change from white (basic color) to rainbow color). For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (the number of holding | maintenances) that the display mode of a hold display changes, the display mode of a hold display can be displayed with a display mode with high expectation degree of jackpots. Moreover, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low expectation degree of jackpot, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change to the next display mode, and the display mode of the hold display until the end You can get attention with your expectations.

  Also, in the hold notice determination table, only when a jackpot is specified as pre-determination information from the pre-judgment command, a hold notice pattern that becomes a rainbow color as a final hold display display mode (hold notice pattern number when hold 1 is lit) 4. Hold advance notice pattern numbers 4, 7, 9, 10 when hold 2 is lit, hold advance notice pattern numbers 4 and 7 when hold 3 is lit, etc. Is set to be possible. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in rainbow color, it is determined that the lottery result will be a big hit when the hold display is digested, and the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased. .

  Also, in the hold notice determination table, when a loss is specified as the pre-determination information from the pre-judgment command, the hold notice pattern (when the hold 1 is lit) is displayed in white (basic color) or blue as the final hold display display mode. (Pending notice pattern numbers 1, 2 when hold 2 lights up, hold notice pattern numbers 1, 2 when hold 3 lights up, hold notice pattern numbers 1, 2 when hold 3 lights up, hold notice pattern numbers 1, 2 when hold 4 lights up, etc.) Is determined as a prior determination information from the prior determination command, and when the reach is specified, the reservation display pattern that becomes red as the display mode of the final hold display (hold notification pattern number 3 when hold 1 is lit) Hold notice pattern number 3 when hold 4 is lit, such as hold notice pattern numbers 3, 6, and 8 when hold 2 is lit, hold notice pattern numbers 3 and 6 when hold 3 is lit 6, etc.) are also set to be able to determine. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in red, it is determined that the reach effect is executed at least when reaching the hold display, and the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, by determining the hold notice pattern at the start of display of the hold display, a series of contents in which the display mode of the hold display changes until the hold display is digested are determined. However, as the determination method, at the start of the display of the hold display, only the display mode of the hold display at the start and the display mode of the final hold display may be determined. And, when the display mode of the hold display at the start time and the display mode of the final hold display are different, at least the display mode of the final hold display before the target hold display is digested So that the display mode of the hold display changes every time when the timing at which the display mode of the hold display can change is reached. Even with such a determination method, the display mode of the hold display can be sequentially changed until the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is consumed.

  Next, a hold change effect that suggests a possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes during the hold display period will be described below. In the above-described hold notice effect, the display mode of the hold display can be changed every time the change display of the decorative symbol (the change display of the special symbol) is started (the start condition is satisfied) during the display period of the hold display. At the timing when the display mode of the hold display can be changed, the hold change effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the hold display is changed can be executed.

  Specifically, on the peripheral control board 1510, at the time when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) starts (start condition is established), whether the display mode of the pending display changes based on the pending notice pattern By determining whether or not, selecting the hold change effect determination table corresponding to the determination result, and comparing the determination value set in the hold change effect determination table and the read random number for determining the hold change effect, The type of the hold change effect pattern set in the hold change effect determination table is determined. That is, whether or not to execute the hold change effect and, when executing the hold change effect, determine the type of the hold change effect.

  Here, a plurality of types of hold change effect patterns are set in the hold change effect determination table, and a hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the hold change effect is used as a hold change effect. Hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) for executing the first hold change effect, hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 3) for executing the second hold change effect as the hold change effect, hold change A hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) for executing the third hold change effect is set as the effect. The hold change effect determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Moreover, in the hold change effect determination table, the distribution of the determination values for each of the hold change effect patterns (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change effect is the same, and the appearance rate of each hold change effect is However, it is also possible to vary the distribution of the judgment values so that the appearance rate of each hold change effect is different.

  Further, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display changes, the determination value is distributed only to the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern numbers 2 to 4) for executing the hold change effect. On the other hand, in the hold change effect determination table used when it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change, many determinations are made for the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) that does not execute the hold change effect. The value is distributed. Thus, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the hold change effect is always executed. When the hold change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes with high probability. For this reason, it can be noted with an expectation whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes due to the execution of the hold change effect.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit is four as the number of holds on the first special symbol side (the number of stored memories), but the number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds can be displayed in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600. Yes. Similarly, although the upper limit is four as the number of holds on the second special symbol side (the number of reserved memories), the number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds can be displayed in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600. . In the lower left area or the lower right area of the effect display device 1600, hold 1 (hold number = 1), hold 2 (hold number = 2), hold 3 (hold number = 3), hold 4 (hold number = 4). When the is lit, one hold display is added in order from the left to the right. In addition, when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display of the hold 1 displayed on the left side of the lower left area or the lower right area is deleted. Accordingly, the other hold indications of hold 2 to 4 are displayed so as to move to the left while being displayed in the display area. In the case of the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 1) in which the hold change effect is not executed, after the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 moves, the display mode of the hold display Is not changed, and a hold change effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the hold display is changed is not executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold notice effect and the hold change effect are performed during normal fluctuation, which is a stage of whether or not a reach state is formed when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. For this reason, it can be expected with the expectation that the hold notice effect and the hold change effect are performed with respect to the hold display, regardless of whether or not the reach state is formed after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. .

[21-1. Countdown production after non-confirmed production (first pending change production)]
First, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 2) in which the first hold change effect is executed as the hold change effect, the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. After moving, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears and moves in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in such a trajectory that the character comes into contact with the hold display whose display mode changes. One of the determined effect to be performed and the non-determined effect to move in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a trajectory where the character does not touch the hold display is executed. When this finalized effect is executed, when the character touches the hold display, the display mode of the hold display touched by the character changes. Since the character does not touch the display, the display mode of the hold display does not change. That is, it suggests whether the display mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the character touches the hold display. In addition, when either a confirmed effect or a non-determined effect is executed, after the character moves within the display area of the effect display device 1600, the character is erased outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this example, the effect of whether or not the character touches the hold display is executed as the confirmed effect and the non-determined effect. However, the confirmed effect is an expression mode in which the display mode of the hold display can be changed. However, it is only necessary to execute a non-deterministic effect in a display mode in which the display mode of the hold display cannot be changed, as long as each display mode is distinguishable by the player.

  In addition, the item which a character has is displayed in any one of blue, red, and a rainbow color like the display mode of the hold display which may change. When the display mode of the hold display touched by the character changes when the character touches the hold display, the display mode of the hold display changes to the display color of the item that the character has. ing. For this reason, what kind of display mode the hold display may change, that is, what kind of expectation of jackpot expectation that the hold display may suggest is more than whether the display mode changes. Can grasp before.

  In addition, when a non-confirmed effect is executed, a character having an item with a predetermined display color appears again in a predetermined period after the end of the non-conclusive effect, and the display mode changes to a hold display. On the other hand, there may be a case where a definite effect of moving in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed in a trajectory where the character touches. On the other hand, if the character does not appear again within a predetermined period after the end of the non-deterministic effect, the confirmed effect is not executed. That is, it indicates whether or not the on-hold display mode changes depending on whether or not the character appears again in a predetermined period after the end of the non-definite effect.

  FIG. 243 shows a timing chart during execution of the effect pattern set as the first reserved change effect. First, the confirmed effect pattern is a display of a hold display in which the character touches when a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears and the character comes into contact with the hold display whose display mode changes. This is an effect pattern in which the display mode changes.

  The non-deterministic effect pattern is a non-deterministic effect in which a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears and the display mode of the hold display does not change when the character does not touch the hold display. The countdown effect is executed for a predetermined time after being executed for the same time as the confirmed effect, but the confirmed effect is not executed during the execution of the countdown effect, and the display mode of the hold display changes as a result. There is no production pattern.

  Further, in the confirmed effect pattern after the non-determined effect, a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears, and the display mode of the reserved display does not change when the character does not touch the reserved display. After performing the confirmed effect for the same amount of time as the confirmed effect, the countdown effect is executed for a predetermined time, the character appears again during the countdown effect, and the confirmed effect is executed. As a result, the hold display is displayed. It is an effect pattern whose aspect changes. Further, the confirmed effect patterns A to C after the non-defined effect are effect patterns having different timings at which the character appears again and the confirmed effect is executed during the execution of the countdown effect. More specifically, the confirmed effect pattern A after the non-confirmed effect is an effect pattern in which the character appears again at the remaining 2 seconds of the three seconds of the countdown effect and executes the confirmed effect. Pattern B is an effect pattern in which the character appears again at the remaining 1 second of the 3 seconds of the countdown effect, and the finalized effect pattern C is executed after the non-deterministic effect. This is an effect pattern in which the character appears again at the time of the remaining 0 seconds and executes the confirmed effect. In the confirmed effect patterns A to C after the non-confirmed effect, the display color of the item that the character has when executing the non-confirmed effect may be different from the display color of the item that the character has when executing the confirmed effect. When the confirmed effect is executed rather than the non-determined effect, the display color of the item may be changed to a display color that suggests that the big hit expectation is high when the display mode of the hold display is changed. For example, the item display color is displayed in blue when the character appears for the first time when the non-confirmed effect is executed, and the item display color is displayed in red when the character appears for the second time when the confirmed effect is executed. Even if the display color of the item at the first appearance of the character is displayed in a display color that suggests that the expectation level of jackpot is low, the display color of the item changes at the second appearance of the character It can be noticed with high expectations.

  Further, the special effect pattern after the non-deterministic effect is such that a character having an item in a predetermined display color appears and the display mode of the hold display does not change when the character does not touch the hold display. After executing the confirmed effect for the same amount of time as the confirmed effect, the countdown effect is performed for a predetermined time, and a specific symbol (in this example, it appears in normal time) as a decorative symbol variation display during the execution of the countdown effect. This is an effect pattern in which a skull symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol that does not occur, and then a change from a specific symbol to a reach symbol is determined. In addition, when a specific symbol is temporarily stopped during execution of the countdown effect, even if there is remaining time, the countdown effect is terminated at that point, and the final effect is not executed. This is an effect pattern in which the display mode does not change. As described above, when a specific symbol is temporarily stopped during execution of the countdown effect, the countdown effect is not ended and the final effect is not executed, but it is determined that the reach is formed in the variation. And expectation does not decline with the end of countdown production.

  In addition, the special effect patterns A to C after the non-definite effect are effect patterns with different timings for temporarily stopping and displaying a specific symbol during the execution of the countdown effect. Specifically, the special effect pattern A after the non-confirmed effect is an effect pattern in which a specific design is temporarily stopped and displayed at the time of the remaining 2 seconds of the three seconds of the countdown effect. This is an effect pattern that temporarily stops and displays a specific symbol at the time of 1 second remaining in the 3 seconds of the countdown effect. The special effect pattern C after the non-deterministic effect is at the time of 0 seconds remaining in the 3 seconds of the countdown effect. It is an effect pattern that displays a specific symbol temporarily.

  Next, a specific effect example in the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the first hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 is a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 when the first hold change effect is executed.

  First, in this example, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as hold displays corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side. Then, at the time when the decorative symbol variation display is started, for example, when execution of the first hold change effect is determined with respect to the hold display of hold 2, FIGS. 244 (A) and (B) are performed. As shown, a character having an item in red appears from the left side of the display area toward the center after the start of the decorative symbol display. Of these, as shown in FIG. 244 (A), when performing a non-deterministic effect, the character touches the hold display in the process of returning from the center of the display area toward the left side. There is no change in the display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 244 (B), in the case where the finalized effect is executed, the character touches the hold display of hold 2 in the process of returning from the center of the display area toward the left side. The display mode of the hold display of hold 2 that the character has touched changes to the red color of the item that the character has. In this way, when a character appears, in the process of returning from the center of the display area toward the left side, the character touches one of the hold displays, and the hold display that the character touches The display mode may change to the red color of the item that the character has, but when the character appears, whether the character touches the hold display or the character touches any hold display It is not possible to grasp whether or not to do so, and it is possible to focus attention on the direction in which the character travels.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 244 (C), when the non-deterministic effect is executed, the countdown effect is executed for 3 seconds after the non-deterministic effect is executed. In this countdown effect, the display area is displayed in the order of “3 → 2 → 1 → 0” with the passage of time, so that the expectation as to whether or not the finalized effect is executed is given.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 244 (D), when the confirmed effect is executed during the execution of the countdown effect, the character having the item in red appears again from the left side of the display area toward the center portion. In this way, when the character reappears, in the process of returning from the central portion of the display area toward the left side, the character touches the hold display of the hold 2 and the hold 2 is touched by the character. The display mode of the hold display changes to the red of the item that the character has. However, when a character appears again, the character always touches any hold display in the process of returning from the center of the display area toward the left side, and the hold display where the character touches However, when the character reappears, it is impossible to grasp which hold display the character touches when the character appears again. You can pay attention to the direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 244 (E), during execution of the countdown effect, a specific symbol (in this example, a skull symbol as a decorative symbol that does not appear normally) is temporarily displayed as a variation display of the decorative symbol. In such a case, even if there is remaining time, the countdown effect is terminated at that time, and the finalized effect is not executed, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change. However, as shown in FIGS. 244 (F) and (G), when a specific symbol is temporarily stopped during execution of the countdown effect, the timing at which the reach symbol set in the variation pattern is formed thereafter. Then, it changes from a specific design to a reach design. In this example, a specific symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a variation display of the decorative symbol during the execution of the countdown effect. However, any notification may be made as long as a reach is formed in the variation. Further, instead of displaying a temporary stop of a specific symbol during execution of the countdown effect, the reach symbol may be stopped and displayed at that time to confirm that the reach is formed. Also in this case, the countdown effect is terminated at the time when the reach is formed, and the confirmed effect is not executed. As a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 244 (H), when the confirmed effect is not executed during the execution of the countdown effect and a specific symbol is not temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol change display, the countdown effect is displayed. At the end, it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change.

[21-2. Repeating parallel production (second hold change production)]
Next, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 3) for executing the second hold change effect as the hold change effect, the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol After the character moves, a plurality of characters appear in the vicinity of the hold display, and the plurality of characters are in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time so that each character touches any of the hold displays. The parallel production to move is executed. In this parallel effect, the number of characters touches the hold display, but the display mode of the hold display that the character touches in any of the multiple touches of the character to the hold display. One of the parallel production at the time of change and the parallel production at the time of losing without any change in the display mode of the hold display that the character has contacted is executed in any contact. That is, in the parallel effect, when a plurality of characters move within the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the same time, the timing at which the character touches the hold display occurs at the same time, and the display mode of the hold display is Notifies that there are multiple chances of change. Moreover, in parallel production, when a plurality of characters move within the display area of the production display device 1600 at the same time, the number of characters touches the hold display. You can get a chance to see if it changes. In this example, as a parallel effect at the time of hitting and a parallel effect at the time of losing, the effect of whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes when the character touches the hold display, It is only necessary to execute the parallel effect at the time of the loss in the display mode in which the display mode of the hold display can be changed while the display mode of the hold display can be changed in the display mode in which the display mode of the hold display can be changed. It is only necessary that each expression mode is distinguishable by the player.

  In addition, when the parallel production at the time of losing is executed, a plurality of characters appear again in the vicinity of the hold display as the second parallel production, and either the parallel production at the time of hit or the parallel production at the time of losing is displayed. May be executed. In addition, when the parallel production at the time of losing is executed as the second parallel production, a plurality of characters reappear near the hold display as the third parallel production, and the parallel production at the time of hit and the parallel at the time of losing There is a case where any one of directing is performed. In addition, when the parallel production at the time of losing is executed as the third parallel production, a plurality of characters appear again in the vicinity of the hold display as the fourth parallel production, and the parallel production at the time of hit and the parallel at the time of losing Of the productions, only the parallel production at the time of hitting may be executed. As described above, even when the parallel production at the time of losing is executed, as long as a plurality of characters reappear in the vicinity of the hold display, there is a possibility that the parallel production at the time of hitting may be executed. It can be noted with expectation whether or not a plurality of characters will appear again after the performance is executed. In addition, in the fourth parallel production, the parallel production at the time of winning is always executed, so even if the parallel production at the time of losing is executed, it is expected that the parallel production will be continued thereafter. It can be noticed. As the first to third parallel productions, the greater the number of executions of the parallel production, the higher the probability that the parallel production is a parallel production at the time of hitting, and the possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change. It may be set as follows. As a result, even if the parallel production at the time of losing is executed, there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold display will change by continuing the parallel production thereafter. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the display mode changes.

  FIG. 245 shows a timing chart when the effect pattern set as the second hold change effect is executed. First, in the hit-time parallel effect pattern A, a plurality of characters appear in the vicinity of the hold display, and the characters display the effect display device 1600 at the same time so that each character comes into contact with any of the hold displays. This is an effect pattern that executes a parallel effect at the time when the display mode of the hold display touched by the character changes in any contact among the multiple touches of the character with respect to the hold display. is there.

  In addition, in the simultaneous effect pattern A at the time of losing, the plurality of characters appear at the same time so that a plurality of characters appear in the vicinity of the hold display and each character comes into contact with any of the hold displays. This is an effect pattern that executes a parallel effect at the time of a loss that does not change the display mode of the hold display that the character touches any of the multiple touches of the character with respect to the hold display. is there.

  Further, the hit-time parallel effect pattern B executes the parallel effect twice, and after the parallel effect at the time of losing, a plurality of characters appear again near the hold display as the second parallel effect. It is an effect pattern in which a parallel display at the time of hit is executed, and the display mode of the hold display touched by the character is changed in any one of a plurality of touches to the hold display in the parallel display at the time of hit. . In addition, the lost parallel production pattern B is to execute the parallel production twice, and after executing the parallel production at the time of the loss, a plurality of characters appear again in the vicinity of the hold display as the second parallel production. This is an effect pattern in which a parallel effect at the time of losing is executed, and as a result, the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  Further, the hitting parallel effect pattern C is to execute the parallel effect three times, and after repeating the execution of the parallel effect at the time of losing twice, a plurality of characters in the vicinity of the hold display as the third parallel effect. Appears again and executes the parallel presentation at the time of hit, and the display mode of the hold display that the character touches in any one of the multiple touches of the character with respect to the hold display in the parallel presentation at the time of hit changes This is a production pattern. Also, the lost parallel production pattern C is to execute the parallel production three times, and after repeating the execution of the parallel production twice at the time of the loss, a plurality of characters in the vicinity of the hold display as the third parallel production. Appears again and executes a parallel effect at the time of loss, resulting in an effect pattern in which the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  Further, the hit-time parallel effect pattern D is to execute the parallel effect four times, and after repeating the execution of the parallel effect at the time of losing three times, a plurality of characters in the vicinity of the hold display as the fourth parallel effect. Appears again and executes the parallel presentation at the time of hit, and the display mode of the hold display that the character touches in any one of the multiple touches of the character with respect to the hold display in the parallel presentation at the time of hit changes This is a production pattern.

  Next, a specific effect example in the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the second hold change effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 when the second hold change effect is executed.

  First, in this example, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as hold displays corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side. Then, at the time of starting the decorative display variation display, for example, when execution of the second hold change effect is determined with respect to the hold display of hold 2, as shown in FIG. 246 (A), After the decorative display variation display starts, a plurality (in this example, eight characters) of characters appear near the upper side of the hold display while passing through the back side of the hold display from the lower side to the upper side of the hold display. In this way, when a plurality of characters appear, each character appears through the back side of the hold display, so that the visual recognition of the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not hindered.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 246 (B) and 246 (C), after eight characters appear in the vicinity of the upper side of the hold display, each character touches any of the hold displays of hold 1-4. As such, the eight characters flow down while passing through the front side of the hold display toward the bottom of the hold display at the same time. When each character touches one of the hold displays 1 to 4, the hold display that the character touches emits light as shown by an asterisk, and the character touches. It is notified that the display mode of the held display may change. Thus, at the time when each character touches any of the hold displays 1 to 4, each character passes through the front side of the hold display and flows down, and the hold display that the character touches is displayed. Since the light is emitted, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the character touches the hold display displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 246 (B), in the case of executing a parallel effect at the time of losing, when each character comes in contact with any of the hold indications of hold 1-4, in any contact However, the display mode of the hold display touched by the character is not changed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (C), in the case of executing the parallel production at the time of hitting, when each character touches one of the hold indications of the hold 1-4, the hold 2 When the character touches the hold display (when the character touches the hold display of hold 2 multiple times, any contact may be used), the hold that the character touches The display mode of the hold display of 2 changes to the display mode of the hold display (red in this example) determined by the hold notice effect pattern.

  In the parallel effect described above, when a plurality of characters appear and each character touches any one of the hold displays 1 to 4, the display mode of the hold display that the character touches changes each time. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a chance as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes by the number of characters. Also, at the start of the parallel production, all eight characters that will contact the hold display will appear, and the number of characters will be specified, so whether or not the display mode of the hold display will change Can be grasped at the start of the parallel production. Further, in the parallel production, a plurality of characters appear, and the character is in contact with any of the hold displays 1 to 4. However, when a plurality of characters appear, any one of the hold displays is displayed. On the other hand, it is impossible to grasp whether or not each character contacts, and attention can be paid to the traveling direction of each character with respect to the hold display. In addition, it is impossible to grasp which of the hold displays changes among the hold displays of the hold 1 to 4 that each character has contacted, and each character touches the hold display. It can be noted whether or not the display mode of the hold display touched by the character changes.

  In this example, each character is in contact with any of the hold displays 1 to 4 of the hold display, but among the 8 characters appearing near the upper side of the hold display, the hold 1 to Two characters are in contact with each of the four hold displays. However, among the hold displays of the hold 1 to 4, many characters of the eight characters may be in contact with the hold display that changes the display mode of the hold display. In this case, it is highly possible that the display mode of the hold display in contact with many characters changes in the parallel performance, and therefore it is particularly noticeable to which hold display many characters touch. it can. In addition, when performing a parallel effect at the time of losing, even if a character touches the hold display, the display mode of the hold display that the character touches is not changed. At the time of starting, the number of characters that appear may be reduced. In this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not the display mode of the hold display is likely to change depending on whether or not there are a large number of characters that appear at the start of the parallel performance.

  When the parallel production at the time of losing is executed, as the second parallel production, eight characters appear again near the upper side of the hold display, and the parallel production at the time of hit and the parallel production at the time of losing One of them may be executed. In addition, when the parallel production at the time of losing is executed as the second parallel production, eight characters appear again in the vicinity of the upper side of the hold display as the third parallel production, There is a case where one of the parallel production of time is executed. In addition, when the parallel effect at the time of losing is executed as the third parallel effect, as shown in FIG. 246 (D), as the fourth parallel effect, eight characters are again displayed near the upper side of the hold display. Of the parallel effects at the time of hitting and the parallel effects at the time of losing, only the parallel effect at the time of hitting may be executed as shown in FIG. As described above, even when the parallel production at the time of losing is executed, as long as eight characters appear again in the vicinity of the upper side of the hold display, there is a possibility that the parallel production at the time of hitting may be executed. It can be noted with expectation whether eight characters will appear again after executing the parallel performance of time. In addition, in the fourth parallel production, the parallel production at the time of winning is always executed, so even if the parallel production at the time of losing is executed, it is expected that the parallel production will be continued thereafter. It can be noticed.

  In this example, a plurality of (8 in this example) characters appear near the upper side of the hold display at the start of the parallel effect, but at the start of the parallel effect at the time of hitting, A plurality of characters can be made to appear so as to include a special character that is determined to change the display mode of the hold display. In this case, when a special character is included in a plurality of characters at the start of the parallel performance, when the special character touches the hold display, the display mode of the hold display that the special character touches Since this always changes, it is possible to focus on the type of character that appears at the start of the parallel performance. In addition, special characters are displayed larger than normal characters other than special characters so that special characters stand out, and it is easy to determine whether or not special characters are included in multiple characters. To be able to grasp. In addition, multiple characters are displayed in such a way that some of the characters overlap each other at the time of appearance, but if the special characters are included in the multiple characters, the special character will be the foreground. In order to make the special character stand out, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the special character is included in the plurality of characters. In addition, the special character is allowed to appear at the time of execution of the parallel effect at the time of hitting, but as the number of executions of the parallel effect increases, that is, among the first to fourth parallel effects, The slower the execution timing, the higher the probability that a special character will appear. As a result, even if the parallel production at the time of losing is executed, the possibility that a special character will appear by continuing the parallel production after that becomes high. It can be noticed with expectation whether or not it will appear.

[21-3. Beam production after target production (third pending change production)]
Next, in the hold change effect pattern (hold change effect pattern number 4) for executing the third hold change effect as the hold change effect, the hold display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol After the character moves, the character appears and the aiming in the predetermined display color appears from the character toward the hold display, and the effect display is made so that the aim is matched to the hold display whose display mode may change Either the target effect at the time of moving in the display area of the device 1600 or the target effect at the time of losing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 so that the aim is not aligned with the hold display. Running. In the target effect at the time of hitting, there is a possibility that the display mode of the hold display that is aimed at the beam effect described later will change due to the aiming on the hold display, whereas the target at the time of loss In the effect, it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change without executing the beam effect described later, because the aim is not aimed at the hold display. That is, it suggests whether or not the display mode of the hold display may change depending on whether or not the aim is suitable for the hold display.

  The aim for the hold display is displayed in any one of blue, red, and rainbow colors, as in the display mode of the hold display that may change. When the display mode of the hold display that is aimed at the beam effect described later changes due to the aiming with respect to the hold display, the display mode of the hold display changes to the display color of the aim. I have to. For this reason, it can be grasped | ascertained before the display mode changes whether the hold display may change to what display mode.

  In addition, when the target production at the time of hitting is executed, the beam is launched toward the hold display that is aimed at the target production at the time of hitting, and the beam collides with the hold display at the aim. One of the beam effects and the beam effect at the time of losing when the beam is bounced back without colliding with the on-hold display in which the aim is aligned. In the beam production at the time of hit, the display mode of the hold display where the beam collided changes due to the collision of the beam with the hold display aimed at the target effect at the time of hit, In the beam effect, the display mode of the hold display does not change because the beam does not collide with the hold display aimed at the target effect at the time of hitting. That is, it suggests whether or not the mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the beam collides with the hold display. As described above, when the target effect is executed, the display state of the hold display is notified depending on the display color of the aim. If the beam effect at the time of hit is not further executed after executing the above, the display mode of the hold display is not changed.

  In addition, as a character appearing in the target effect and the beam effect, there is a probability whether or not the aim is aimed at the hold display in the target effect and a probability that the beam collides with the hold display in the beam effect. Any of three different characters A to C appear. Among these, the character A is set to have a higher probability that the target effect is aimed at the hold display in the target effect, but the probability that the beam collides with the hold display in the beam effect is lower. ing. Character B is set so that the probability that the target display is aimed at the hold display and the probability that the beam will collide with the hold display at the beam effect are medium compared to other characters. Has been. In addition, the character C is set to have a higher probability that the beam collides with the hold display in the beam effect, although the probability that the target effect is aimed at the hold display is lower than the other characters. Yes. Thus, the degree of attention to these effects can be made different by changing the expectation level of the target effect and the beam effect depending on the type of character that appears at the start of the target effect.

  FIG. 247 shows a timing chart during execution of the effect pattern set as the third reserved change effect. First, in the target effect pattern at the time of losing, a beam effect is executed when a character appears and an aim in a predetermined display color appears from the character toward a hold display, and the aim is not aligned with the hold display. It is an effect pattern which performs the target effect at the time of losing which it is decided that the display mode of a hold display does not change without.

  In addition, the beam effect pattern at the time of hitting is determined by the appearance of the character and the aiming in a predetermined display color from the character toward the on-hold display. After performing the target effect at the time of hitting suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the display will change, the beam is launched toward the hold display that is aimed at, and the beam collides with the hold display that is aimed at This is an effect pattern for executing a beam effect at the time of hit when the display mode of the hold display in which the beam collides changes.

  In addition, the beam effect pattern at the time of the loss is that when the character appears and the aim is displayed in a predetermined display color from the character toward the hold display, After performing the target effect at the time of hitting suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the display will change, the beam is launched toward the hold display that is aimed at, and the beam does not collide with the hold display that is aimed at This is an effect pattern for executing a beam effect at the time of losing that it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change.

  Next, a specific effect example in the effect display device 1600 when the third hold change effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 when the third reserved change effect is executed.

  First, in this example, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four hold displays are displayed as hold displays corresponding to the number of hold memories on the first special symbol side. Then, at the time of starting the decorative display variation display, for example, when execution of the third hold change effect is determined with respect to the hold display of hold 2, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), After the decorative symbol variation display starts, a character appears on the right side of the display area, and two sights in red directed from the character to the hold display appear near the hold display. These two sights are expected to be expected by repeating whether each sighting is in alignment with or not in alignment with any of the on-hold displays 1 to 4. In this way, when two sights in red appear, it can be understood that the display mode of the hold display may change to red, which is the display color of the sight. At the time when the aiming appears, it is not possible to know whether the aiming is on the hold display and which on-hold display is aimed, and it is possible to focus on the traveling direction of the two aiming. it can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (B), when executing the target effect at the time of hitting, with respect to the hold display of the hold 2 after a lapse of a predetermined time after the two aiming points in red appear. The two sights are matched. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (C), in the case of executing the target effect at the time of losing, the two displays with respect to the hold display after a lapse of a predetermined time after the two aiming points in red appear. It is erased without aiming and it is determined that the display mode of the hold display does not change. In this way, when two aiming is achieved with respect to the hold display of hold 2, it is understood that the display mode of the hold display of hold 2 may change to red, which is the display color of the aim. However, at the time when the two aiming is matched to the hold display of the hold 2, it is not possible to grasp whether the display mode of the hold display of the hold 2 actually changes. It can be noted whether or not the display mode of the hold display of hold 2 changes.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 248 (C), the beam effect is executed after the target effect at the time of hitting, but in the beam effect, toward the hold display of the hold 2 that is aimed at the target effect at the time of hitting. Fire the beam. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (D), when executing the beam effect at the time of hitting, the beam collides with the hold display of the hold 2 that is aimed at the target effect at the time of hitting, and the beam The display mode of the hold display of the hold 2 that has collided changes to red, which is the display color of the aim. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 248 (E), when executing the beam effect at the time of the loss, the beam is rebounded without colliding with the hold display of the hold 2 that is aimed at the target effect at the time of hitting. The display mode of the hold display of hold 2 is not changed.

  In the target effect described above, after notifying the display mode that the hold display may change depending on the display color of the aim, the hold display is determined depending on whether the aim is suitable for any hold display. It is notified whether or not the possibility that the display mode changes will continue, and which is the hold display that may change the display mode, and in the beam effect after the execution of the target effect at the time of hitting, the aim is Whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes depending on whether or not the beam collides with the matched hold display is notified in a stepwise manner. In this way, by notifying in stages until the display mode of the hold display changes, it is possible to focus attention on the contents of the effect until the end of the target effect and the beam effect while giving different expectations at each stage. .

  In addition, in this example, when two sights appear in the target effect and the sight is aimed at any of the hold displays, the two sights for the same hold display among the hold displays of the hold 1 to 4 However, the following patterns may be set. For example, a pattern may be set in which the first aim is set to one of the two aiming displays and the second aim is not set to any holding display. Good. In addition, the first aim is set to one of the two aiming indications, and the second aiming is given to the other holding indication that is different from the holding indication that the first aiming is suitable. You may set the pattern which suits. However, if each of the two aiming points is matched to two different holding indications, each of the two different holding indications is emitted when the beam is launched toward the holding indication aiming at the subsequent beam effect. In addition, the beam is not emitted to at least one of the two different hold displays, and the display mode of the hold display in which the beam did not collide does not change. In addition, when both of the two aiming are matched with respect to the same hold display, the probability that the beam collides with the hold display in which the two aiming in the subsequent beam effect is compared with other patterns. To increase the probability that the display mode of the hold display changes. In such a case, at the stage of whether or not the target display is aimed at the hold display, the two aiming at the same hold display or the two aim at the different hold display. It can also be noticed.

  Further, in the above, a pattern in which the display color of the first aim and the display color of the second aim among the two aimings may be set. In addition, two characters appear in the target effect, a different pattern is set for the character having the first aim and the character having the second aim, toward the hold display that is aimed at the beam effect. When launching the beam, each character may launch the beam toward the hold display.

[22. Stock production across multiple variations]
In the present embodiment, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, an operation valid time during which the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is validated during the decorative symbol variation display (during the special symbol variation display) is set. In addition, it is possible to execute an operation effect that can operate the pressing operation unit 303 over the effective operation time. In addition, when a game ball is won (start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the game specified from the pre-determination command When the variation pattern that will execute the operation effect is specified as the advance determination information such as the effect mode type (variation pattern type), from the prior determination of the execution of the operation effect to the execution of the operation effect A stock effect that sequentially adds one of a plurality of types of addition time can be executed at a plurality of timings set during the period. In addition, in this example, one of the addition types of plural types of addition time is added at least for each reserved use (every special symbol variation display) from the time when the operation effect is executed to the time when the operation effect is executed. It is possible to add time sequentially.

  In addition, at the time of execution determination of the operation effect in advance, the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and the stock effect is sequentially added so that the sum of the addition time added in the stock effect matches the operation effective time. By setting the addition time to be added, when the operation effect is executed, the pressing operation unit 303 can be continuously operated (long-pressed) over the operation effective time that is the sum of the addition time added in the stock effect. Yes.

  FIG. 249 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the stock effect across a plurality of variations when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance. As shown in FIG. 249 (A), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is lit (the number of holds = 4), a predetermined additional time is required until the operation effect is executed when the hold effect is used. Six stock times are set as the timing for adding the. Specifically, as a timing for adding the predetermined addition time, stock time 6 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 3, stock time 5 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 2, stock time 4 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 1 A total of six stock times consisting of stock times 1 to 3 are set before the execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation during the suspension. In this way, one stock time is set for each hold change before the hold digestion, in which the operation effect is executed, from the time of the prior determination of the execution of the operation effect until the execution of the operation effect. In addition, three stock periods are set at the time of the on-hold digestion in which the operation effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 249 (B), when the execution of the operation effect is preliminarily determined when the hold 3 is lit (the number of holds = 3), a predetermined time is required until the operation effect is executed when the hold is used. As a timing for adding the addition time, five stock times are set. Specifically, as a timing for adding a predetermined addition time, stock timing 5 during the fluctuation at the time of the change of the hold 2, stock time 4 during the fluctuation at the time of the change of the hold 1, execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation at the time of the hold digestion A total of 5 stock periods consisting of 1 to 3 stock periods have been set before.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 249 (C), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 2 is lit (the number of hold = 2), a predetermined time is required until the operation effect is executed when the hold is used. As the timing for adding the addition time, four stock times are set. Specifically, as a timing for adding the predetermined addition time, a total of 6 consisting of stock time 4 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 1 and stock times 1 to 3 before execution of the operation effect during the change at the time of the hold-up. Stock times are set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 249 (D), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 1 is lit (the number of holds = 1), a predetermined time is required until the operation effect is executed at the time of the hold. Three times are set as the timing for adding the addition time. Specifically, as a timing for adding a predetermined addition time, a total of three stock times consisting of stock times 1 to 3 are set before the execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation at the time of suspension.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (A), as the operation effective time used for the operation effect, any one of 5 to 10 seconds is set, and each operation is effective as a variation pattern for executing the operation effect. A plurality of types of variation patterns having time are set. In addition, at each timing of adding a predetermined addition time, one of 0 to 5 seconds is set as the addition time. When the addition time is 0 seconds, the addition time does not increase. Then, at the time of prior determination of the execution of the operation effect, the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified and added at each timing so that the sum of the addition time added in the stock effect matches the operation effective time The predetermined addition time is determined in advance, and the predetermined addition time is sequentially added until the operation effect is executed. In this example, at each timing of adding a predetermined addition time, one of 0 to 5 seconds is set as the addition time, but at each timing, the predetermined time is set to be subtracted. For example, addition and subtraction may be repeated until the operation effect is executed. Thus, even when the time is subtracted in the stock effect, the sum of the time added in the stock effect and the time subtracted in the stock effect is set to match the operation effective time. I am going to do that.

  Moreover, as the operation effective time used for the operation effect, ∞ (infinity) is set in addition to any of 5 to 10 seconds, but this ∞ is a variation pattern that executes the operation effect. Of these, only the fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting is set. In addition, when ∞ is specified as the operation valid time set in the operation effect at the time of prior determination of the execution of the operation effect, the addition is performed at any timing among a plurality of timings for adding a predetermined addition time. The addition time is determined in advance as ∞, and the addition time of ∞ is added at that timing, thereby matching the operation effective time of ∞. In this way, when the addition time of ∞ is added in the stock effect, the winning is always derived as a result of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) that will execute the operation effect. Whether or not ∞ is added as the addition time can be noticed with expectation. However, when the addition time added in the stock effect is ∞, it is notified that the operation effective time used for the operation effect is ∞, but when the operation effect is executed, the operation effective time is 10 seconds. As in the case of being notified, the effective operation time is set to end when 10 seconds elapse.

  In addition, when determining the variation pattern that will execute the operation effect, the variation pattern is determined such that the expectation degree of jackpot increases as the operation effective time used for the operation effect becomes longer. Further, since the sum of the addition time added in the stock effect coincides with the operation effective time, the probability that the operation effective time becomes longer as the addition time added at each timing becomes longer. Thus, the longer the operation effective time used for the operation effect is, the higher the probability of deriving a hit as a result of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) that causes the operation effect to be executed. Whether or not the addition time added at each timing or the operation effective time that is the sum of the addition time is long can be noted with expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (B), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is lit (the number of holds = 4), a predetermined additional time is required until the operation effect is executed at the time of the hold digestion. Since the stock time of 6 times is set as the timing for adding the value, the pending 4 o'clock scenario determination table is used so that the sum of the addition time added at the 6 times coincides with the operation effective time. The addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance. Specifically, when 10 seconds is preliminarily determined as the operation valid time, any one of the scenarios PTN_hold 4_A1 to A3 is determined. For example, when the scenario PTN_hold 4_A3 is determined, 2 seconds for stock time 6, 0 seconds for stock time 5 (not added), 1 second for stock time 4, 1 second for stock time 3, 1 second for stock time 2, 1 second for stock time 1, By sequentially adding addition times determined in advance at the six times, the operation effective time is made to coincide with 10 seconds. Further, when ∞ (10) seconds is preliminarily determined as the operation valid time, one of the scenarios PTN_hold 4_B1 to B3 is determined, but in such a scenario PTN_hold 4_B1 to B3, it is not 0 seconds. The addition time of ∞ is added at the last timing of the stock time when the addition time is added.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 250 (C), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 3 is lit (the number of holds = 3), a predetermined amount of time is required until the operation effect is executed when the hold is used. Since the stock time of 5 times is set as the timing for adding the addition time, the pending 3 o'clock scenario determination table is set so that the sum of the addition time added at the 5 times coincides with the operation effective time. The addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance. Similarly, when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 2 is lit (the number of holds = 2) or when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 1 is lit (the number of holds = 1), Using a corresponding scenario determination table (not shown), the addition time to be added at each timing is determined in advance.

  Further, in the operation effect, the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated over the operation effective time, and a predetermined meter can be raised by continuing to operate the pressing operation unit 303 within the operation effective time. An effect of whether or not a predetermined meter reaches the upper limit is executed. Moreover, when the variation pattern at the time of winning is determined among the variation patterns that will execute the operation effect, by continuing to operate the pressing operation unit 303 with the operation effect, a predetermined time within the operation effective time is obtained. If the meter can reach the upper limit, but the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is continuously operated in the operation effect, a predetermined time within the operation effective time is obtained. The meter does not reach the upper limit. However, when the variation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the predetermined meter is set to the upper limit when the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated in the operation effect or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the operation effect. When it is determined that the predetermined meter has not reached the upper limit when the operation effective time has elapsed, such as when the operation effective time has not elapsed, the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit when the operation effective time has elapsed. That is, it is notified whether or not a win is derived as a result of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) depending on whether or not the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective period. In addition, as described above, when determining the variation pattern that will execute the operation effect, the variation pattern is determined so that the big hit expectation is higher as the operation effective time used for the operation effect is longer. Therefore, as the operation effective time used for the operation effect becomes longer, the probability that the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective period increases, and the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated with expectation within the operation effective time. .

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the stock effect and the operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. FIGS. 251 and 252 are specific examples of effects on the effect display device 1600 when executing the stock effects and the operation effects.

  First, in this example, when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is lit (the number of holds = 4), the operation effective time set in the operation effect is specified, and the addition added in the stock effect Stock time 6 during the change at the time of the hold 3 change, stock time 5 during the change at the time of the hold 2 change, and stock time 4 during the change at the time of the change of the hold 1 so that the total time matches the operation effective time The addition time to be added at each of the stock periods 1 to 3 is determined in advance before the execution of the operation effect during the fluctuation at the time of digestion. Then, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), at the time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, for example, when 2 seconds is determined as the addition time to be added during the variation at the time of the hold 3 change, As shown in FIG. 251 (B), after the start of the decorative symbol variation display, “2:00 STOCK” is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and the addition time added in the stock effect is 2 seconds. Notify.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 251 (C), during execution of the stock effect, the total of the addition time added in the stock effect is displayed on the upper side of the display area. For example, 2 seconds is added as the addition time. If it is, “TOTAL 2:00” is displayed on the upper side of the display area to notify that the total of the addition time added in the stock effect is 2 seconds. Then, every time the hold order changes (every time the decorative symbol variation display is started), the addition of the addition time in the stock effect is repeated until the time when the operation effect will be executed. The total addition time added in the production can be increased step by step. Similarly, even during the decorative display variation display during the on-hold digest that will execute the operation effect, before the operation effect is executed, the addition of the additional time in the stock effect is repeated, and the addition added in the stock effect The total time can be increased step by step.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 252 (D), at the start of the operation effect, first, “TOTAL 5:00” is displayed on the upper side of the display area, and the total of the addition time added in the stock effect, that is, the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed. It is notified that the effective operation time for enabling the operation is 5 seconds. In addition, a message “Align your designs in time!” Is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and behind it, the number symbol “777”, which is a big hit symbol, is displayed in a translucent manner. doing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 252 (E), after the operation effect is started, the remaining time obtained by subtracting the time from the operation effective time with the passage of time (in the present example, “3:30 remaining”) is displayed above the display area. ”) Is displayed. In addition, an image simulating the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed at a substantially central portion of the display area, and a message instructing to continue operating (press and hold) the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed. When the pressing operation unit 303 continues to be operated within the operation effective time, the meter drawn inside the semi-transparent numerical symbol is raised step by step, and the opaque region increases, so that the big hit symbol is increased. It is getting closer to completion.

  In addition, as an image imitating the pressing operation unit 303, three display modes are provided so as to be displayed in any one of blue, red, and rainbow colors. And the big hit expectation degree is set so as to increase in the order of blue, red and rainbow colors. For this reason, when a display mode with a high jackpot expectation is displayed as an image simulating the pressing operation unit 303, the probability that the meter will reach the upper limit within the operation effective time is high, and the willingness to participate in the operation effect can be increased. .

  In addition, the shorter the effective operation time that is the sum of the addition times added in the stock effect, the faster the meter ascending speed with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. Further, the shorter the remaining operation effective time is, the faster the meter rise speed with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. When the variation pattern at the time of hitting is determined, the meter rising speed is set to be faster with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, whereas the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined. In this case, the meter ascending speed is set to be slow with respect to the time when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. By controlling the rising speed of the meter, it is possible to effectively entertain whether or not the meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 252 (F), when the meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective time, the numerical symbol “777” which is a big hit symbol is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) ) Is a big hit. When the variation pattern at the time of hit is determined, the meter can reach the upper limit by continuing to operate the pressing operation unit 303 within the effective operation time, but the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. If the meter has not reached the upper limit when the operation effective time has elapsed, such as when the meter has not reached the upper limit even though the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated, At the time, the meter reaches the upper limit.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 252 (G), when the meter does not reach the upper limit within the operation effective time, the numerical symbol “777” which is a big hit symbol is not completed, and the operation effective time elapses. A message “TIME UP” is displayed to notify that the result of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is lost. When the variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined, the meter does not reach the upper limit even if the pressing operation unit 303 is continuously operated within the operation effective time.

[22-1. Stock production at the time of pre-judgment of the mode of operation production just before operation]
In the above-described embodiment, when the operation effect is executed, the pressing operation unit 303 can be continuously operated (long press) for a predetermined operation effective time. In the present example, a stock effect that sequentially adds addition times is executed so that the total matches the operation effective time. However, in this example, when the operation effect is executed, immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. Thus, the pressing operation unit 303 is allowed to operate, and when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance, a stock effect that sequentially stocks the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect is executed.

  Specifically, when a game ball wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (start condition is established), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. When a variation pattern that will execute an operation effect having a mode immediately before a predetermined operation is specified as pre-determination information such as a game effect mode type (variation pattern type), the operation effect is executed. It is possible to execute a stock effect that sequentially stocks the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect at a plurality of timings set between the time of the preliminary determination and the execution of the operation effect. Note that the stock time is provided as the timing for stocking the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect, similarly to the timing for adding the predetermined addition time described above. That is, the stock time is set once for each hold change before the hold-up operation, in which the operation effect is executed, from the time when the operation effect is executed to the execution of the operation effect. At the same time, three stock periods are set at the time of the on-hold digestion in which the operation effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 253 (A), as the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect, whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates depending on whether it is strong or weak, A combination of whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red, green, or blue is set, and a plurality of patterns having the contents of the mode immediately before each operation as a variation pattern for executing the operation effect. A variation pattern of the type is set. Further, at each timing of stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes or the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates depending on whether it is strong or weak, or the pressing operation unit 303 is red. Either green or blue lighting is set. And at the time of prior determination of the execution of the operation effect, the content of the mode immediately before operation that operates in the operation effect is specified, and the content of the mode immediately before operation that is stocked in the stock effect is The contents of the mode immediately before the operation stocked at each timing are determined in advance so as to match, and the contents of the mode immediately before the operation determined in advance are sequentially stocked until the execution of the operation effect. .

  In this example, at each timing when the content of the mode immediately before operation that operates in the operation effect is stocked, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates depending on whether it is strong or weak, or the pressing operation unit The content of either red, green, or blue is set for 303, but at each timing, the content of the mode immediately before the operation may be set to be erased. For example, you may make it repeat the stock and deletion of the content of the aspect immediately before operation before execution of an operation effect. Thus, even if the content of the mode immediately before operation is erased in the stock production, the content of the mode just before operation stocked in the stock production and the content of the mode just before operation erased in the stock production are combined. Is set to coincide with the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect.

  Further, when determining the variation pattern that will execute the operation effect, whether the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes or the pressing operation unit 303 is strong or weak as the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect. The variation pattern is determined so that the degree of big hit expectation varies depending on the combination of whether or not the vibration is generated and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red, green, or blue. In principle, the variation pattern is determined so that the expectation of jackpot increases in the order of lighting operation, vibration, and protrusion of the pressing operation unit 303. In the mode immediately before the operation in which the pressing operation unit 303 is lit, the variation pattern is determined so as to increase the big hit expectation degree in the order of blue → green → red, and in the mode immediately before the operation in which the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates. The fluctuation pattern is determined so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher in the order of weak vibration → strong vibration.

  As shown in FIG. 253 (B), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is lit (the number of holds = 4), the operation effect is operated until the operation effect is executed at the time of the hold-up. Since the stock time of 6 times is set as the timing for stocking the content of the mode immediately before the operation to be performed, the content of the mode just before the operation stocked at the 6 timings is the content of the mode just before the operation that operates in the operation effect. The contents of the mode immediately before operation stocked at each timing are determined in advance using the pending 4 o'clock scenario determination table. Specifically, when the immediately preceding operation mode 1 (protrusion & vibration A & red) is determined in advance as the content of the immediately preceding operation mode that operates in the operation effect, any one of the scenarios PTN_preservation 4_A1 to A5 is determined. For example, when the scenario PTN_preservation 4_A1 is determined, a notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes at the stock time 6, a notification that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly at the stock time 5, and the pressing operation unit 303 is red at the stock time 4. The notification immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect by preliminarily determining the notification that lights up at the time, the notification that does not stock at any time in the stock period 1 to 3, and stock the contents of the mode immediately before the operation determined in advance at the six times It matches with the contents of. In this example, when the content of the mode immediately before operation that operates in the operation effect is mode 1 just before operation (protrusion & vibration A & red), the expectation level for jackpot is the highest among the types of modes immediately before operation. , A blessing effect that notifies a blessing message or the like is performed when all of the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly, and the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 lights in red doing. In addition, in this example, if the contents of the mode immediately before the operation are not stocked even though it is the stock time, as in the stock times 1 to 3 of the scenario PTN_preservation 4_A1, a disappointing effect that notifies that the stock is not stocked doing.

  In addition, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation includes that the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red, for example, notification is made that the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in red as in the scenario PTN_Take 4_A3. It is possible to notify that it is lit in blue or green, which is a color that is less expected to hit the jackpot than red, in the stock period before. As described above, in this example, it is possible to notify the color of the pressing operation unit 303 determined in advance in the order of the big hit expectation degree in the order of green → blue → red. For this reason, even if it is notified that it will be lit in a color with a low expectation level of jackpot, it will be noticed whether it will change to a notification that it will be lit in a color with a high level of expectation of jackpot in the subsequent stock period. Can do.

  In addition, when the content of the mode immediately before the operation includes the strong vibration of the pressing operation unit 303, for example, rather than notifying that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly, as in the scenario PTN_preservation 4_A4. In the previous stock period, it is possible to notify that a weak vibration, which is a vibration mode having a lower degree of expectation of jackpot than a strong vibration, is notified. As described above, in this example, it is possible to notify the vibration mode of the pressing operation unit 303 determined in advance in the order of weak vibration → strong vibration which is the order of the big hit expectation degree. For this reason, even if it is a case where it is notified that a weak vibration with a low jackpot expectation level is notified, it can be noted whether or not it will change to a notification of a strong vibration with a high jackpot expectation level at a subsequent stock period. .

  Further, when the immediately preceding operation mode 18 (no protrusion & no vibration & blue) is preliminarily determined as the content of the immediately preceding operation mode that operates in the operation effect, any one of the scenarios PTN_preservation 4_B1 to B3 is determined. However, in such a scenario PTN_protection 4_B1 to B3, it is notified that the pressing operation unit 303 is lit in blue at any timing of the stock periods 4 to 6.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 253 (C), when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 3 is lit (the number of holds = 3), the operation effect is performed until the operation effect is executed at the time of the hold. Since the five stock times are set as the timing for stocking the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates at the time, the content of the mode immediately before the operation that is stocked at the timing of the 5 times is the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect The contents of the mode immediately before the operation stocked at each timing are determined in advance using the pending 3 o'clock scenario determination table so as to match the contents of Similarly, when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 2 is lit (the number of holds = 2) or when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 1 is lit (the number of holds = 1), Using a corresponding scenario determination table (not shown), the contents of the mode immediately before operation stored at each timing are determined in advance.

  Next, a specific effect example in the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the stock effect and the operation effect for stocking the contents of the mode immediately before the operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a specific effect example in the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the stock effect and the operation effect that stock the contents of the mode immediately before the operation.

  First, in this example, when the execution of the operation effect is determined in advance when the hold 4 is lit (the number of holds = 4), the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect is specified and stocked in the stock effect. The stock time 6 during the change at the time of the hold 3 change, the stock time 5 during the change at the time of the hold 2 change, and the change of the hold 1 so that the content of the mode immediately before the operation matches the content of the mode immediately before the operation that operates in the operation effect. The contents of the mode immediately before the operation that is stocked at each of the stock periods 1 to 3 are determined in advance before the execution of the operation stage during the stock period 4 during the fluctuation of the time and during the fluctuation during the suspension. Then, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), at the time when the decorative symbol variation display is started, for example, as the content of the mode immediately before the operation that is stocked during the variation at the time of the hold 3 change, the pressing operation unit 303 is red. When notification of lighting is determined, as shown in FIG. 254 (B), after starting the decorative display of decorative symbols, “button red STOCK” is displayed at the approximate center of the display area, It is notified that the content of the mode immediately before operation stocked in the production is lighting of the pressing operation unit 303 in red.

  In addition, at the time when the decorative symbol variation display is started, for example, a notification that the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates strongly is determined as the content of the operation immediately before operation stocked during the variation at the time of the change of the hold 3 As shown in FIG. 254 (C), “button vibration A STOCK” is displayed at the substantially central portion of the display area after the start of the decorative symbol variation display, and the content immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect. However, it is notifying that it is the strong vibration of the press operation part 303. In addition, when the decorative symbol change display is started, for example, when the notification that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes is determined as the content of the mode immediately before the operation that is stocked during the change at the time of the change of the hold 3. As shown in FIG. 254 (D), after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, “button protrusion STOCK” is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area, and the content of the mode immediately before operation stocked in the stock effect is It is notified that the pressing operation unit 303 is protruding.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (E), during execution of the stock effect, a list of the contents of the immediately preceding operation stocked in the stock effect is displayed above the display area. When the red lighting of the pressing operation unit 303 is stocked as the content, it is displayed on the upper side of the display area as “button red STOCK finished”, and the content of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock production is pressed. It is notified that the operation unit 303 is lit in red. Then, every time the hold order changes (every time the decorative symbol change display is started), the stock of the content immediately before the operation in the stock effect is repeated until the time when the operation effect is executed. Thus, the contents of the mode immediately before the operation stocked in the stock production can be increased step by step. Similarly, even during the display of fluctuating decorative symbols at the time of the on-hold digest, when the operation effect is executed, before the operation effect is executed, the stock of the content immediately before the operation in the stock effect is repeated, and the stock effect is stocked. The contents of the mode immediately before the operation can be increased step by step.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (F), at the start of the operation effect, that is, immediately before the operation of the press operation unit 303, the press operation unit 303 is collectively displayed with the contents of the operation immediately before stocked in the stock effect. It is working. For example, when the content of the mode immediately before operation that operates in the operation effect is mode 1 immediately before operation (protrusion & vibration A & red), the pressing operation unit 303 lights in red, vibrates strongly, and further operates to protrude. doing. During the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 in the state immediately before the operation, “STOCK is being released” is displayed above the display area. Then, in the operation effect, as with the operation effect after the execution of the stock effect that adds the above-described addition time, the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated over the operation effective time and the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. By continuing, it is possible to raise the predetermined meter, and the effect of whether or not the predetermined meter reaches the upper limit within the operation effective time is executed.

  In this example, when the content of the mode immediately before operation stocked in the stock production is the vibration of the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 vibrates immediately before the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing operation unit 303 may vibrate immediately after the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. Further, in this example, after the contents of the mode immediately before operation are stocked in the stock production, the press operation unit 303 is collectively operated with the content of the mode immediately before operation immediately before the operation of the press operation unit 303. When the content of the mode immediately before operation is stocked in the stock effect, the pressing operation unit 303 may be operated once with the content of the mode immediately before operation. Moreover, you may make it maintain the operation | movement of the press operation part 303 by the content of the mode immediately before operation from the time of the content of the mode immediately before operation by the stock production until immediately before operation of the press operation part 303. In such a case, the content of the mode immediately before the operation can be grasped at the time when the content of the mode immediately before the operation is stocked in the stock effect without depending on the visual recognition of the display area.

[23. Limitation of light guide effect using light guide plate]
In this embodiment, when the light guide effect at the time of changing the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is executed during the change display of the decorative symbol (during the variable display of the special symbol), the change Even if the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is performed from the time when the decorative symbol variation is stopped (when the special symbol variation is stopped) until the specific period has elapsed, It restricts that the light guide effect at the time of change is executed. In addition, when a specific period has elapsed since the change of the decorative design in which the light guide effect at the time of change is stopped (when the change of the special symbol is stopped), the light guide plate 2601 is illuminated and decorated in a manner different from that of the light guide effect at the time of change. When the release notification is made, the light guide effect is executed, and notification that the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect during change is released.

  In addition, if the decorative symbol is displayed at the time when a specific period has elapsed from when the variation of the decorative symbol that performed the variation light guide effect was stopped, the light notification effect at the time of cancellation notification While the light guide effect A is executed, when the decorative symbols are not changed, the light guide plate 2601 emits light as a light guide effect at the time of release notification and in a mode different from the light guide effect A at the time of release notification. The light guide effect B at the time of release notification to be decorated is executed. That is, the mode of light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate 2601 is changed depending on whether or not the decorative symbol is being displayed when the specific period has elapsed since the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol in which the light guide effect at the time of change is executed. ing.

  FIG. 255 shows a timing chart at the time of execution of the light notification effect at the time of release notification when the specific period occurs after the execution of the light guide effect at the time of change. First, when starting the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the variation pattern command and determination from the main control board 1310 are started. The result notification command is transmitted, but when the variation pattern that will execute the variation light guide effect is specified from the variation pattern command, during the variation display of the decorative design, as the variation light guide effect, A light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated with light from the LED 2611 and the LED 2621 to display a picture. The timing for displaying the pattern on the light guide plate 2601 can be either during normal fluctuation of reach or not, or during reach production after reach, and the pattern is displayed on the light guide plate 2601. By doing so, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit in the variation display of the decorative design.

  In addition, when the decorative design that performed the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is stopped, the counting of whether or not the specific period has elapsed is started and whether or not the specific period has elapsed until the specific period has elapsed. Continue counting no or no time. Until the specific period elapses, execution of the light guide effect during fluctuation is limited, and the light guide plate 2601 is not decorated with light emission. In addition, the count of whether or not the specific period has passed is not only during the period when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is not performed, but also during the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) (Middle) keeps counting. In other words, until the specific period elapses, even if the decorative symbols are displayed in a variation based on the variation pattern that will cause the variation light guide effect to be performed, the execution of the variation light guide effect is restricted. Therefore, the light guide plate 2601 is not decorated with light emission. In this way, since the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is not executed during the display of the decorative symbol during the period after the execution of the light guide effect at the time of change until the specific period elapses, the light guide effect at the time of change is not executed. Is not continuous in a short period of time, prevents the player's eyes from being burdened by the light of the LED 2611 and the LED 2621, and further prevents the lack of scarcity of the production itself that illuminates and decorates the light guide plate 2601 can do.

  In this example, while the variation time of the decorative symbol (special symbol) when normal variation that does not reach is performed is set to about 5 seconds on average, execution of the light guide effect during variation is limited. The specific period is set to about 20 seconds. That is, the specific period is set so that normal fluctuations that do not reach can be performed four times. For this reason, even when four of the upper limit numbers of holdings are held at the time when the decorative design that performed the light guide effect at the time of change is stopped, the four holdings are consumed, that is, 4 It is possible not to execute the light guide effect during variation until the variation display of the decorative symbols based on one hold is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (A), when the change display of the decorative symbol is performed at the time when the specific period has passed since the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol that has performed the light guide effect at the time of change, at the time of release notification As the light guide effect, the light guide effect A at the time of release notification is executed to notify that the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect at the time of change has been released. Then, in the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 158 is prevented from appearing in the light guide effect at the time of changing so as to decorate the light guide plate 2601 in a manner different from the light guide effect at the time of change, It is supposed to appear only in the light guide effect A at the time of cancellation notification. In the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, a light guide plate different from the light guide plate 2601 used in the light guide effect at the time of change is provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, and the light of the LED is irradiated to the light guide plate. However, the pattern shown in FIG. 158 may be displayed. In this way, in the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, the light guide plate 2601 is decorated with light emission in a manner different from the light guide effect at the time of change, so that it is not confused as to whether it is a light guide effect at the time of change, It is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit in the variation display of the decorative design.

  In the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, the time during which the light guide plate 2601 is decorated with light emission is set to be extremely shorter (for example, 1 second or less) than when the light guide effect at the time of change is executed. The time for displaying the pattern on the screen ends in an instant. As a result, even when the light guide effect A at the time of release notification is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation such as the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the light guide plate 2601 is performed. The visual recognition for the production is not hindered, and it is possible to pay attention to the variation production.

  In addition, the restriction on execution of the light guide effect at the time of change will be released when the specified period has elapsed since the stop of the change of the decorative design that executed the light guide effect at the time of change. Even when it is time to execute the light guide effect during fluctuation (when the fluctuation pattern that will execute the light guide effect during fluctuation is being executed), the light guide effect during fluctuation is executed at that time. The light guide effect A at the time of release notification is preferentially executed. In such a case, a predetermined time (for example, after the end of the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, for example, so as not to continuously execute the light guide effect at the time of change after the end of the light guide effect A at the time of release notification) It is assumed that the fluctuation light guide effect is executed after 1 second). In this way, by temporarily stopping the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 between the end of the light guide effect A at the time of release notification and the start of the light guide effect at the time of change, it is released when the light guide effect at the time of change is executed. It is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the light guiding effect A is continued at the time of notification.

  As shown in FIG. 255 (B), when the change of the decorative symbol is not performed at the time when the specific period has elapsed since the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol in which the light guide effect at the time of variation is executed, when the change notification is not performed As the light guide effect, the light guide effect B at the time of release notification is executed to notify that the restriction on the execution of the light guide effect at the time of change has been released. Further, in this example, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more) has passed since the decorative symbol variation display has not been performed since the decorative symbol variation stoppage, the effect display device 1600 or the like is used. In order to execute a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) such as introduction of the pachinko machine 1, there is a high possibility that the demonstration effect is being executed at the time when the light guide effect B at the time of release notification is executed. In the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, for example, a pattern lacking the central portion of the pattern shown in FIG. 158 is guided when the light guide plate 2601 is illuminated and decorated in a manner different from the light guide effect at the time of change. It does not appear in the light effect, and appears only in the light guide effect B at the time of cancellation notification. In the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, a light guide plate different from the light guide plate 2601 used in the light guide effect at the time of change is provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, and the light of the LED is irradiated to the light guide plate. However, it is also possible to display a pattern lacking the central portion of the pattern shown in FIG. In this way, in the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, the light guide plate 2601 is illuminated and decorated in a manner different from the light guide effect at the time of change, so that it is not confused as to whether or not it is a light guide effect at the time of change. Further, in the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, when the light guide plate 2601 is decorated with light emission, since the pattern lacking the central part of the pattern shown in FIG. 158 is displayed, it is displayed on the effect display device 1600 through the central part. It is possible to clearly see the image during the demonstration. As a result, in the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, it is possible to grasp that the decorative symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, and to prevent the misunderstanding that the light guide effect at the time of change is generated.

  Also, in the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, the time for decorating the light guide plate 2601 is set to a longer time (for example, 5 seconds or more) than when the light guide effect at the time of change is executed. The display time of the pattern is continued for a long time. As a result, when the decorative symbol variation display is not performed, the effect display device 1600 is not paying attention, but by executing the release notification light guiding effect B for a long time, the variation light guiding effect is achieved. It is possible to easily grasp that the restriction on the execution of. In addition, for a player who is dissatisfied with the fact that the execution of the light guide effect at the time of the change is limited, the player waits for the game from the stoppage of the change of the decorative symbol that has executed the light guide effect at the time of the change, and is introduced at the time of the release notification. After executing the light effect B, the game can be resumed.

  In addition, when the display of the decorative symbol variation B is started during execution of the release notification light guide effect B in a state where the decorative symbol variation display is not performed, the cancellation notification light guide effect B is ended. I am doing so. As a result, even if the decorative symbol variation display is started during the execution of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, the decorative symbol variation display executed on the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the light guide plate 2601, etc. It is possible to pay attention to the variation effect without being obstructed by the visual recognition of the variation effect. In addition, in the case where the decorative symbol variation display is started during execution of the release notification light guide effect B, the release notification light guide effect B is ended, but immediately after the decorative symbol variation display is started. Does not execute the light guide effect during fluctuation. That is, a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the end of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification so as not to continuously execute the light guide effect at the time of change after the end of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification. Then, the light guide effect at the time of change is executed. In this way, the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is temporarily stopped between the end of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification and the start of the light guide effect at the time of change, and is released when the light guide effect at the time of change is executed. It is possible to prevent a misunderstanding that the light guiding effect B is continued at the time of notification.

  Further, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303 during the execution of the release notification light guide effect B, the release notification light guide effect B can be ended. As described above, in the light notification effect B at the time of release notification, the time during which the light guide plate 2601 is decorated for light emission is longer than the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of change (for example, 5 seconds or more). If the player wants to end the light guide effect B at the time of release notification, the player only has to operate the pressing operation unit 303, and the end timing of the light guide effect B at the time of release notification can be determined according to the player's will. It is said. It should be noted that, even during execution of the light notification effect A at the time of release notification, the player may operate the light guide effect A at the time of release notification by operating the pressing operation unit 303.

  Further, in the light guide effect at the time of the change, a production sound is output from a speaker or the like in accordance with the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601, whereas a light guide effect at the time of release notification (light guide effect A at the time of release notification, light guide at the time of release notification) In effect B), the light guide plate 2601 is decorated with light emission, but no effect sound is output from a speaker or the like. As a result, during execution of the light guide effect at the time of release notification, it is not confused as to whether or not it is a light guide effect at the time of change, and it is highly possible that the lottery result will be a big hit with the change display of decorative symbols It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that it is suggested.

  In this example, various sounds are output from the speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game. However, the peripheral control IC 1510a dynamically sets each channel for each sound to be output from the speaker or the like. On the other hand, when the number of combinations of sounds that are to be output exceeds the maximum number of channels (for example, 16 channels), the output is scheduled within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. Each channel is dynamically assigned to a combination of sounds. Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output through each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority. In this regard, at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of change, an effect sound accompanying the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 is assigned to the channel and output, while at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of release notification, the effect accompanying the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 2601 The sound is not assigned to the channel itself, and the production sound is not output. That is, at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of release notification, an empty channel is easily generated by not assigning the effect sound accompanying the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 2601 to the channel itself. Thereby, at the time of starting the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the effect sound related to the change effect is not output although the change effect such as the change display of the decorative symbol is performed. Can do. Further, at the start of the light guide effect B at the time of the release notification, a change effect such as a decorative display of the decorative symbol is not performed, but even when the light effect is started during the execution of the light guide effect B at the time of the release notification Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the production sound related to the variation production is not output.

  Next, a specific example of the effect in the effect display device 1600 and the light guide plate 2601 at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of change and the light guide effect at the time of release notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a specific effect example in effect display device 1600 and light guide plate 2601 at the time of execution of the light guide effect at the time of change and the light guide effect at the time of release notification.

  As shown in FIG. 256 (A), when starting the variable symbol display on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the main control is started. When the variation pattern command and the determination result notification command are transmitted from the substrate 1310, and the variation pattern that will execute the light guide effect during variation is specified from the variation pattern command, the variation display of the decorative symbol is being performed. In addition, the light is emitted from the LED 2611 and the LED 2621 to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 to display a picture. Thus, by displaying a pattern on the light guide plate 2601, it is suggested that the lottery result is likely to be a big hit in the variation display of the decorative pattern.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 256 (B), when the change time corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed and the stop symbol of the special symbol is to be stopped, a stop display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and based on the command. The stop display at the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed. At this time, the counting of the time whether or not the specific period has elapsed is started, and during the period until the specific period elapses, the execution of the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation is limited, and the light guide plate 2601 emits light. I try not to decorate it.

  As shown in FIG. 256 (C), when a specific period from the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol in which the light guide effect during variation has elapsed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, FIG. 256 (D) As shown in, as the light guide effect A at the time of release notification, the light of the LED 2611 and the LED 2621 is irradiated to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, and a pattern different from the light guide effect at the time of change is displayed. doing. In this way, in the release notification light guide effect A, the light guide plate 2601 is illuminated and decorated in a manner different from the change light guide effect, thereby notifying that the restriction on execution of the change light guide effect has been released. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (E), when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more) has passed since the decorative symbol variation display has not been performed since the decorative symbol variation stoppage, the demonstration effect is executed. However, if the specific period from the stop of the fluctuation of the decorative design that has performed the light guide effect at the time of change during the execution of the demonstration effect, as shown in FIG. As the light guide effect B, the light of the LED 2611 and the LED 2621 is irradiated to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, and the pattern lacking the central portion is different from the light guide effect at the time of fluctuation. it's shown. At this time, the image during the demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly seen from the central portion of the pattern. In this way, in the release notification light guide effect B, the light guide plate 2601 is illuminated and decorated in a manner different from the change light guide effect, thereby notifying that the restriction on execution of the change light guide effect has been released. ing.

[24. Unfortunate production in the temporary stop period of the lost pattern in the super reach production]
In the present embodiment, when starting to display the variable display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 changes. The pattern command and the determination result notification command are transmitted, and based on these commands, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 are started to be displayed, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle Stopped display in the order of the decorative pattern. Further, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed and the special symbol stop symbol is to be stopped and displayed, a stop display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and based on the command, the special symbol is stopped according to the stop symbol. The stop display at the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed. In addition, before the stop display of the decorative symbol at the stop symbol is confirmed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed as a temporary stop until the stop display is confirmed after the stop symbol of the decorative symbol fluctuates. During the temporary stop period (about 1 to 2 seconds), the decorative symbols stop and fluctuate (the decorative symbols fluctuate vertically and horizontally).

  In addition, as a variation pattern in which a variation effect such as a reach effect is set, after the suspend symbol is temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol stop symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is started again from the state of fluctuation fluctuation, A change pattern of re-variation is also set in which the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the period has elapsed, and the stop display at the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed. For this reason, in a state where the losing symbol sways and fluctuates as the decorative symbol stop symbol, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the decorative symbol variation display is started again.

  In addition, when a game ball is won (start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the game specified from the pre-determination command When a specific variation pattern that will execute a reach effect (such as a super reach effect) with a high expectation of big hits among reach effects is specified as prior determination information such as the effect type (variation pattern type) In the temporary stop period of the lost pattern, the light of the LED 2621 is irradiated to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 to display the pattern. It is possible to execute a stop-read-ahead effect that suggests in advance that a high reach effect will be performed. That is, in the stop-reading effect, the lottery result can be a big hit in subsequent variable effects by irradiating the light of the LED 2621 to the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600. It is suggested in advance that the nature is high.

  The above-mentioned stop-ahead look-ahead effect is a variation based on a specific change pattern that is determined in advance when a specific change pattern that will execute a reach effect (such as a super-reach effect) that has a high expectation level for jackpots. Regardless of whether or not a plurality of fluctuating effects are executed during the period until the effect is executed, the fake effects can be executed during the temporary stop period of each decorative symbol. In other words, the pre-reading effect at the time of stoppage can be executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol in the change effect when the specific change pattern is determined in advance in a state where there is a hold, whereas in the state where there is no hold, It is not executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol in the variation effect.

  However, if the variation effect in the period after the specific variation pattern is determined in advance is a variation effect at the time of a big hit that stops and displays the jackpot symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol, or a super reach effect with a high expectation level of the big hit In some cases, the pre-reading effect is not executed when stopped. In other words, only in the case of a fluctuating effect at the time of losing and displaying a losing symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and only in the case of a fluctuating effect other than the super reach effect, the look-ahead effect at the time of suspending the temporary symbol for the losing symbol Can be executed. In this way, when the pre-reading effect at the stop is executed during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the decorative symbol variation display is started again from the state in which the lost symbol has fluctuated and fluctuated like the re-variable variation pattern described above. Since the stop display with the losing design is confirmed, there is no expectation as to whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative design again when the pre-reading effect at the stop is executed. The expectation that the lottery result will be a big hit is raised.

  In addition, in this example, in a state where there is a hold, a supermarket depending on whether or not a specific variation pattern that will execute a reach effect (such as a super reach effect) with a high expectation level of jackpot is determined in advance. It is decided whether or not to perform the prefetching effect during stoppage during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the variable effect other than the reach effect. If it is determined, it may be determined to execute the stop-read-ahead effect with a higher probability than when the variation pattern in which the lottery result is lost is determined in advance. Even in such a case, the pre-reading effect at the time of stoppage becomes an effect with a high expectation level of the big hit, and it is suggested in advance that there is a high possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit in the subsequent variation effect.

  In addition, a variation pattern for executing a super reach effect at the time of losing, in which a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation level, by a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. If specified, a disappointing effect is notified to notify that no big hit was obtained during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect. Such a disappointing effect is executed during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, regardless of whether there is a hold or no hold. Also, if it is a fluctuating effect other than a super reach effect, or if it is a super reach effect at the time of a big hit that stops and displays a big hit symbol as a decorative symbol stop pattern in the super reach effect, execute a disappointing effect There is no. In this way, when the disappointing effect is executed during the temporary stop period of the lost pattern at the end of the super reach effect, the decorative symbol changes again from the state where the lost symbol fluctuates like the re-variable change pattern described above. Since the stop display in the losing design is confirmed without starting the display, no expectation is given to whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative design again when the disappointing effect is executed. Yes.

  As described above, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, the stop look ahead effect is not executed and the disappointing effect is executed. For this reason, in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach production, not only is there no expectation whether or not the decorative symbol display will start again, but the lottery result will be a big hit in the subsequent variable production. The expectation to become is not given. Also, in the super reach production, the expectation of a big hit is raised because the degree of big hit expectation is high among the reach production, but at the end of the super reach production at the time of losing, what kind of to the player is like a disappointing production By executing an effect that does not give an expectation, it is possible to prevent the tension from being excessively maintained after the super reach effect ends.

  FIG. 257 shows a timing chart during execution of the stop-read-ahead effect and the disappointment effect during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol. First, when starting the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the variation pattern command and determination from the main control board 1310 are started. Although a result notification command is transmitted, if a variation effect other than the super reach effect is specified among the change effects at the time of loss based on the change pattern command, the change effect other than the super reach effect is specified. During the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end, the prefetch effect at the stop time can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 257 (A), in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the fluctuating effect other than the super reach effect, when there is no hold, or in the state of hold, When a specific variation pattern that will execute a reach effect (such as a super reach effect) with a high expectation level is not determined in advance, the prefetch stop effect is not executed. In such a case, in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the lost symbol is oscillated and transmitted from the main control board 1310 while maintaining the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Based on the stop display command, the stop display of the lost symbol is determined.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), in the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the fluctuating effect other than the super reach effect, the reach effect with the high expectation level of the big hit in the reach effect in the state where there is a hold ( When a specific variation pattern to be executed) is pre-determined, a prefetch stop effect is executed. In such a case, the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 emits light as a pre-reading effect during stoppage during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, and the subsequent big effects have high expectation level It is suggested in advance that the reach will be performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 257 (C), when the super reach effect is specified among the change effects at the time of the loss based on the change pattern command, there is a hold state or no hold state. Regardless of whether or not there is a disappointing effect to notify that a big hit was not obtained during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect. In such a case, during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol, the lost symbol changes in a state where a display image dedicated to the disappointing effect is displayed, which is different from the background image when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped. Thus, based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the stop display of the lost symbol is determined.

  Next, a specific example of the effect on the effect display device 1600 when executing the stop-ahead look-ahead effect and the disappointment effect using the temporary stop period of the lost symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 258 is a specific effect example on the effect display device 1600 when executing the stop-read-ahead effect and the disappointment effect using the temporary stop period of the lost symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 258 (A), when starting the variable symbol display on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400, the main control is started. Although the variation pattern command and the determination result notification command are transmitted from the substrate 1310, variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is started based on the variation pattern command. . Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (B), after a predetermined time has elapsed, the lost symbol is temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol stop symbol, and the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed. , The loss pattern is swaying and fluctuating. In addition, as shown in FIG. 258 (C), the stop display of the lost symbol is determined based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310. In addition, in the temporary stop period of the lost pattern at the end of the fluctuating effects other than the super-reaching effect, if there is no hold, or in the state where there is a hold, reach effect with a high expectation of jackpot in the reach effect ( When a specific variation pattern that will execute a super reach effect is not determined in advance, the prefetch stop effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 258 (D), in the temporary stop period of the losing symbol at the end of the fluctuating effect other than the super reach effect, the reach effect with the high expectation level of the big hit in the reach effect in the state where there is a hold ( When a specific variation pattern to be executed) is pre-determined, a prefetch stop effect is executed. In such a look-ahead effect at the time of stoppage, the light of the LED 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2601 provided on the front surface of the effect display device 1600 to display a pattern, and the reach that has a high expectation of big hits in the subsequent fluctuating effects It is suggested in advance that the production will be performed. In addition, when the light guide plate 2601 is decorated with light emission, the light emission mode (light emission color, light emission time, number of times of light emission, etc.) of the light guide plate 2601 is changed according to the expectation of jackpot when executing a predetermined variation pattern determined in advance. It is possible to change the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2601.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 258 (E), when the super reach effect is specified among the change effects at the time of the loss based on the change pattern command, it is in a state where there is a hold or no hold. Regardless of whether or not there is a disappointing effect during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect. In such a disappointing effect, the display of the decorative symbol is started again as an effect image dedicated to the disappointing effect displayed on the effect display device 1600, different from the background image at the time when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped. The message “End” is displayed to clearly notify that the jackpot was not obtained. In addition, in the disappointing effect, the losing pattern in the temporarily stopped display state is displayed small in the upper right of the display area, whereas the effect image dedicated to the disappointing effect is displayed large on the entire display area. It is easier to pay attention to the production image dedicated to the regrettable production. Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (F), based on the stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the stop display of the losing symbol displayed in the upper right of the display area is determined.

  In the disappointing effect described above, the effect image dedicated to the disappointing effect is displayed as a still image without movement of the character or the like. Also, while the super reach production is being performed, the sound output is louder than usual from the speakers, etc., while the super reach production at the end of the loss is being performed, the speakers etc. There is no sound output from. From this, too, in the disappointing effect, the player can grasp that it is clearly informing that the big win was not obtained without starting the display of variation of the decorative symbol again. .

  In the disappointing effect, characters appearing in the super reach effect are displayed as effect images dedicated to the disappointing effect. In other words, there are multiple types of regrettable effects with different characters as the regretful effects, and super reach so that characters that appeared in the executed super reach effects out of the multiple types of super reach effects also appear in the regrettable effects. The unfortunate production changes depending on the type of production. Thereby, only the same disappointing effect is not executed during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect, and the player is less likely to get bored. However, a plurality of types of disappointing effects may be provided, and the disappointing effects may be randomly executed from among a plurality of types during the temporary stop period of the lost symbol at the end of the super reach effect.

[25. Button related effects]
Next, button related effects will be described. FIG. 259 is an explanatory diagram showing a serif notice as an example of a button-related effect executed by the effect display device 1600, FIG. 260 is a timing chart of the serif notice shown in FIG. 259, and FIG. 261 is an effect display device 1600. FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation trigger pseudo-error effect as an example of a button-related effect to be executed, and FIG. 262 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-operation pseudo error effect as an example of a button-related effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Yes, FIG. 263 (A) is a timing chart of the operation trigger pseudo error effect shown in FIG. 261, and FIG. 263 (B) is a timing chart of the non-operation pseudo error effect shown in FIG.

  First, the line notice as a button related effect will be described. In this example, when a variation pattern command for instructing the start of a variation effect and a determination result notification command corresponding to the lottery result are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 performs lottery related to a notice or the like in the received command analysis process. Execute the process. That is, the user selects a notice lottery table corresponding to the notice lottery table corresponding to the lottery result (big hit, reach lose, lose, etc.) specified from the variation pattern command and the judgment result command, and also sets a random number (notice random number) for determining the notice. By acquiring and comparing the determination value set in the notice lottery table with the obtained notice random number, the presence / absence of the notice effect and the notice type when the notice effect is executed are determined.

  If it is decided to execute the speech advance notice as the button-related effect, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the effect display device 1600 to display the left, middle, and right decorative symbols at timing t0 in FIG. (FIG. 259 (A)), a reach where the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol is generated, and a normal reach effect is displayed in which the decorative symbols in the middle are variably displayed at a low speed (FIG. 259 (B)). Further, at the timing t1 in FIG. 260A after the reach has occurred, an operation instruction display 1600a for instructing button operation and a remaining time display 1600b are displayed (FIG. 259C). In this example, “Press the button!” Is displayed as the operation instruction display 1600a.

  Further, after the peripheral control board 1510 displays the operation instruction display 1600a, an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 (press operation unit 303) is valid at the timing t2 in FIG. 260 (A). And the scale displayed as the remaining time display 1600b is reduced as the effective period elapses (FIG. 259 (D)). Then, when the effect operation unit 300 is operated at timing t3 in FIG. 260 (A) within this effective period and an operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the main character 1600c on the effect display device 1600. And a dialogue of the main character 1600c (so-called cut-in) is displayed (FIG. 259 (E)). In this example, “Awesome!” Is displayed as the dialogue of the main character 1600c, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display during execution. In addition, the contents displayed as the lines of the main character 1600c in the line preview are not only those related to the lottery result such as the jackpot expectation degree, but also lines that are unrelated to the lottery result (for example, “It's been a long time”) are displayed. In this case, the player is inferred that the possibility of a big hit as a result of the variable display during execution is low.

  In addition, when the presentation operation unit 300 is not operated within an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the presentation operation unit 300 is valid, no serif notice is executed. In this way, if the production operation unit 300 is not operated, the speech advance notice is not executed, so that the player can be prompted to operate the production operation unit 300. It should be noted that the speech advance notice may be executed even when the production operation unit 300 is not operated within an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the production operation unit 300 is valid. The player who has forgotten to operate the operation unit 300 can be remedied and the contents of the line notice, that is, the jackpot expectation can be transmitted.

  In this example, after executing the serif notice and displaying the serif of the main character 1600c for a predetermined period, at the timing t4 in FIG. Then, a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is executed (FIG. 260 (F)). Detailed illustrations of each reach production are not shown, but in normal reach production, for example, the decoration pattern in the middle of the screen changes at a low speed and corresponds to the background of the left, middle, and right decoration patterns. A background image for normal reach production that is different from the normal background image is displayed as the background image to be output, and further, a production sound for normal reach production is output, and the decorative pattern in the middle is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time. For example, the result can be derived and displayed. Further, in a super reach effect different from the normal reach, for example, the main character 1600c or the like is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 (at this time, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced in the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600) Display), a background image corresponding to the background of the main character 1600c, which is different from the background image at the time of normal or normal reach production, is displayed, and the effect sound for super reach production is further displayed. For example, it is possible to output and display a success / failure effect image or the like indicating whether or not the main character 1600c or the like can achieve a predetermined purpose. In the super reach production, if the main character 1600c or the like can achieve the predetermined purpose after a predetermined time, it becomes a big hit, and if the purpose cannot be achieved, the game is lost.

  In the example shown in FIG. 259, since the determination result notification command indicating that it is a big hit is received, after displaying a mode in which the predetermined purpose can be achieved by the super reach effect (FIG. 259 (F)), the big hit symbol ( A state in which the decorative symbols on the middle left and right are all stopped at the same symbol, “777” in the example of FIG. 259 (G) is displayed (FIG. 259 (G)), and control is made to the big hit gaming state (FIG. 259 ( H)). In addition, it is possible to execute even when a judgment result notification command that is out of line notice is received, and in this case, after the line notice, the decoration pattern can be displayed without executing the super reach effect different from the normal reach effect. It may be possible to stop at a design different from the left and right decorative designs, or after performing a super-reach production different from the normal reach production after the serif notice, display the mode that could not achieve the predetermined purpose, It is also possible to display an off-set symbol that stops the symbol with a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols.

  As described above, in the serif notice as the button-related effect, an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is valid is set during the decorative symbol variation display, and the effect operation unit 300 is within this effective period. When an operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 displays the main character 1600c and displays the lines of the main character 1600c. In the serif notice, the main character 1600c and the serif of the main character 1600c are displayed for a predetermined period regardless of the operation timing of the effect operation unit 300, and disappear before starting a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect. It is like that. Therefore, when the production operation unit 300 is operated at an early stage of the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) and an operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, after the speech notice is ended, the decorative symbol is displayed until timing t4 in FIG. When the normal reach is executed and the timing t4 in FIG. 260 is reached, a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is started, and the effect operation unit 300 is operated at the end of the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) to operate the peripheral control board 1510. When the signal is input, the speech advance notice is finished, and immediately after that, at timing t4 in FIG. 260, a super reach effect different from the normal reach effect is started.

  Next, an operation trigger pseudo error effect as a button related effect will be described. Upon receiving from the main control board 1310 a change pattern command for instructing the start of a change effect for executing an operation trigger pseudo error effect and a determination result notification command corresponding to the lottery result, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the above-described received command analysis process. A lottery process related to a notice or the like is executed, and display control of the effect display device 1600 is started at timing t0 ′ in FIG. 263 (A) to start the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. A reach that stops at a symbol is generated, and a normal reach effect is displayed in which the decorative symbol inside is variably displayed at a low speed (FIG. 261 (A)). Note that, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed, a lottery result indicating that a button related effect other than the operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed is not obtained in the lottery process regarding the notice or the like. That is, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed, other button related effects are not executed.

  After the decorative display variable display is started on the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 displays an operation instruction display 1600a for instructing button operation and a remaining time display 1600b at the timing t1 ′ in FIG. 261 (B)) and the timing t2 ′ of FIG. 263 (A), an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the rendering operation unit 300 is effective is started, and the remaining time is displayed as the effective period elapses. The scale displayed as 1600b is reduced (FIG. 261 (C)). Then, when the production operation unit 300 is operated at the timing t3 ′ in FIG. 263 (A) within this effective period and an operation signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510, the decoration design variation production and sound production (in this example) The display and sound during the normal reach production are interrupted, and the pachinko machine 1 is switched to the pseudo error mode as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state (including a bug occurrence state) (FIG. 261 (D)), and then for a predetermined period. At the timing t4 ′ in FIG. 263 (A) after the elapse (for example, after 5 seconds), a pseudo return mode in which the pachinko machine 1 is returned from the error state is displayed (FIG. 261 (E)).

  In this example, a special image (FIG. 261 (D)) is displayed as if the display content of the effect display device 1600 was disturbed and hardened (progress of the effect was stopped) as a pseudo error mode. Specifically, a special image (mosaic special image) in which an image at a predetermined timing during normal reach production ((FIG. 261 (C)) is partially displaced is displayed, and at first glance, the production display device 1600 is abnormal. An illusion that an (error state) has occurred, while the special image is being displayed, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size on the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size are clearly displayed without being partially displaced as in the case of special images. It is recognized that it is not an abnormality (error state), so that it is not mistaken for an abnormality (error state).

  Further, the pseudo error mode may be any mode as long as the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state. In addition to the above-described example of the mosaic special image, the pseudo error mode is originally displayed on the effect display device 1600, for example. A mode in which the power image is displayed in an incomplete state, a mode in which the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed as a still image without being updated, or the like may be used. Further, an image displayed as a pseudo error mode (such as a mosaic special image in which the display content of the effect display device 1600 described above is disturbed) is prepared in advance (stored as image data in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2). It may be generated each time by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data currently displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 and specializes the read image data. Effect display device 1600 so as to be displayed on effect display device 1600 in a mode that has undergone various processing (a mosaic mode, a mode in which the aspect ratio is different from the normal mode, a mode in which the direction ratio is different from the normal mode, etc.) Drawing data for drawing an image on the peripheral control IC Generated on the VRAM 510a, it may be processed to) the display. Also, in this example, a message image is displayed as if it was restored from the error state, such as “Please wait for a while while returning” as a pseudo return mode. Any mode can be used as long as it can be recognized. For example, a mode similar to a computer startup screen may be displayed.

  In addition, when switching to the pseudo error mode, the pseudo error sound (for example, the gaming machine 1 has an abnormality or failure) that is output in a shorter period (for example, 1 second) than the pseudo error mode display period (for example, 5 seconds) is displayed. The special sound “Gako!” Is generated at the time of switching, and while the subsequent pseudo error mode and pseudo return mode are displayed, no production sound is output or the volume is suppressed. (Including silence), and by executing such special sound effects in accordance with the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode, it is easier for the player to make an illusion as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state. can do. Further, when displaying the pseudo return mode, a pseudo return sound different from the pseudo error sound (for example, a specific sound “pipipip ...” as if the upper gaming machine 1 is restored) is output. The pseudo return sound may be output continuously during the display period of the pseudo return mode (for example, 5 seconds) in order to give the player the impression of restoration from the abnormality. it can. However, since it is necessary for the game hall manager or the like to recognize that it is not a true abnormality (error state), even if it is displayed in the pseudo error mode or the pseudo return mode, the occurrence of a malfunction or the player If an illegal act occurs, the notification sound and notification sound for notifying them are output with a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) so as to be reliably transmitted to the outside without suppressing the volume. . Further, the pseudo error sound and the pseudo return sound depend on the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d and the volume adjustment based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301, as with other effect sounds. Note that the pseudo error sound and the pseudo return sound may be set to have a relatively large volume with respect to other effect sounds, volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and operation of the effect operation unit 301. Even if the volume of the production sound is changed according to the volume adjustment based on the above, the true error that the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state is further increased by outputting the pseudo error sound and the pseudo return sound at a predetermined volume or higher. This makes it easier for the player to make an illusion.

  Further, since the pseudo error mode is displayed immediately after the operation of the production operation unit 300, the relation between the operation of the production operation unit 300 by the player and the pseudo error mode is close, and the player has operated the production operation unit 300. Can be recognized as an error condition. In this example, the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode are also displayed when the rendering operation unit 300 is not operated within an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the rendering operation unit 300 is valid. As a result, the player can be surprised by assuming that an error state has occurred because the production operation unit 300 has not been operated within the effective period.

  Further, one or both of the display periods of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode may be adjusted according to the remaining period of the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the rendering operation unit 300 is valid. . Specifically, the period from when the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed at the timing t1 ′ in FIG. 263 to when the display of the pseudo return mode is ended at the timing t5 ′ is always irrespective of the operation reception timing of the rendering operation unit 300. It may be made constant. As a result, it is possible to execute a fluctuating effect that matches the fluctuating time regardless of the operation reception timing of the effect operation unit 300.

  After the pseudo return mode is displayed (FIG. 261 (E)), when the timing t5 ′ in FIG. 263 (A) is reached, the normal reach effect which is the effect mode before displaying the pseudo error mode is not executed. Displays another production mode (super-reach production) and starts the production of variation. In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is displayed so that the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d are opposed to each other at the center of the effect display device 1600, and the left, middle, and right decorations are displayed on the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600. The symbol is reduced and displayed (FIG. 261 (F)). And the battle effect which makes the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d confront is performed. Further, when the received determination result notification command shows a big hit, a mode in which the main character 1600c attacks the enemy character 1600d is displayed as a result of the battle effect (FIG. 261 (G)), and the main character 1600c is displayed as the enemy character. A mode of winning 1600d is displayed (FIG. 261 (H)). On the other hand, when the received determination result notification command shows a loss, a mode in which the enemy character 1600d attacks the main character 1600c is displayed as a result of the battle effect, and a mode in which the main character 1600c is defeated by the enemy character 1600d is displayed. It becomes like this.

  At timing t5 ″, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 stops the special symbol change display and transmits a stop display command for instructing the peripheral control board 1510 to display and display the decorative symbol display result. Reference numeral 1510 denotes a mode in which the decoration symbol is indicated by the determination result command based on the reception of the stop display command, that is, “777” is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol in the example shown in FIG.

  Next, a non-operation pseudo error effect as a button related effect will be described. When receiving the variation pattern command for instructing the start of the variation effect for executing the non-operation pseudo error effect from the main control board 1310 and the determination result notification command corresponding to the lottery result, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the received command analysis process. The lottery process for the advance notice is executed, and the display device 1600 is controlled to display at the timing t0 "in FIG. 263 (B) to start the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. A normal reach effect is generated to generate a reach that stops at a design and the decorative design in the middle is variably displayed at a low speed (FIG. 262 (A)). In FIG. 2, a lottery result indicating that a button-related effect other than the non-operation pseudo error effect is to be executed cannot be obtained. Other button-related production is so as not to be executed when you run the error performance.

  After the decorative display variable display is started on the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 displays an operation instruction display 1600a for instructing button operation and a remaining time display 1600b at the timing t1 "in FIG. 263 (B) ( 262 (B)) After that, without starting an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the effect operation unit 300 is effective, at the timing t2 ″ in FIG. After the sound effect (in this example, the display or sound during the normal reach effect) is interrupted and switched to a pseudo error mode as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state (FIG. 262 (C)), after a predetermined period has elapsed ( For example, after a time t3 ″ in FIG. 263 (B) after 5 seconds), a pseudo return mode is displayed in which the pachinko machine 1 is returned from the error state. Figure 262 (D)).

  That is, in the non-operation pseudo error effect, the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and suddenly switches to the pseudo error mode during the button operation instruction to the player, and the operation instruction display 1600a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even in practice, an effective period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the operation reception of the production operation unit 300 is valid is not started, and an operation signal is output in response to the operation of the production operation unit 300. The peripheral control board 1510 does not accept the operation signal (the operation signal may not be output even if the presentation operation unit 300 is out of the effective period). In this way, since the pseudo error mode is suddenly displayed at an unexpected timing, it is possible to surprise the player who is preparing to operate the production operation unit 300 with surprise.

  After the pseudo return mode is displayed (FIG. 262 (D)), when the timing t4 ″ in FIG. 263 (B) is reached, the normal reach effect, which is the effect mode prior to displaying the pseudo error mode, is not executed. Displays a different production mode (super reach production) and starts a variation production, in this example, the peripheral control board 1510 faces the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d at the center of the production display device 1600. At the same time, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed on the lower left portion of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 262 (E)), and a battle effect is performed to confront the main character 1600c and the enemy character 1600d. In addition, if the received judgment result notification command indicates a loss, an enemy is displayed as a result of the battle effect. A mode in which the character 1600d attacks the main character 1600c is displayed (FIG. 262 (F)), and a mode in which the main character 1600c is defeated by the enemy character 1600d is displayed (FIG. 262 (G)). When the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, a mode in which the main character 1600c attacks the enemy character 1600d is displayed as a result of the battle effect, and a mode in which the main character 1600c wins the enemy character 1600d is displayed.

  At timing t5 ″, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 stops the special symbol change display and transmits a stop display command for instructing the peripheral control board 1510 to display and display the decorative symbol display result. Based on the reception of the stop display command 1510, the decoration symbol is displayed in a manner corresponding to the determination result command, that is, “232” is stopped and displayed as the off symbol in the example shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the operation trigger pseudo-error effect and the non-operation pseudo-error effect as the button-related effects are executed, the decorative symbol variation effect (in this example, the normal reach effect) is interrupted and the pachinko machine 1 enters an error state. After switching to the pseudo error mode such as “high”, a pseudo return mode is displayed in which the pachinko machine 1 is returned from the error state after a predetermined period of time (for example, after 5 seconds). Further, after displaying the pseudo return mode for a predetermined period, the variation effect of the decoration pattern before the interruption is not resumed, but the variation effect of the effect mode different from the variation effect is started. In addition, the super reach production as a production mode different from the normal reach production performed after the pseudo return mode is displayed has a higher degree of big hit expectation than the normal reach production (a specific lottery result (for example, a big win symbol is easily derived)) It is. Therefore, instead of resuming the normal reach production after the operation trigger pseudo error production, it is a completely different production mode, and it is switched to the super reach production that has a higher expectation level than the normal reach production and executes the fluctuation production. Can be improved.

  In the above example, the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as button related effects during the normal reach effect, and the big hit expectation is higher than the normal reach effect after the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are finished. The super-reaching effect other than the normal reach effect is performed before the decorative effect's variable effect is interrupted by the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect. In this case, the super-reach production effect mode (type of super-reach effect) executed after the end of the operation trigger pseudo-error production and the non-operation pseudo-error production, and the big hit expectation are decorated. Different from the super reach production that was performed before the interruption of the design variation production May be a big hit expectations higher effect is produced than in the in a by super reach demonstration that was previously run interruption of variation effect decorative symbol (different types of super reach effect). In other words, after the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are finished, it is only necessary that a variable effect that is more advantageous for the player than before the execution of the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect is executed. . This not only increases the expectation for the big hit before the execution of the operation trigger pseudo error presentation and the non-operation pseudo error presentation, but also the big hit expectation before the execution after the operation trigger pseudo error presentation and the non-operation pseudo error presentation. Expectation for big hits can be increased by starting a high-level super-reach production, which can improve the gaming fun.

  Moreover, you may make it perform control which stops discharge | release of a game ball in synchronization with the display of a pseudo error mode and a pseudo return mode, and control which stops payout of a game ball. That is, the display period of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode (the period from timing t3 ′ to timing t5 ′ in FIG. 263A, the period from timing t2 ″ to timing t4 ″ in FIG. 263B) is a game. By stopping the launch of the ball or stopping the payout of the game ball, it is possible to make the player believe that the pseudo error state has actually become an error state, and to make the subsequent game production You can be surprised by the changes.

  In addition, the execution timing of the button-related effects is not limited to the above, but the decorative effects change effect is interrupted before the reach occurs, the button-related effects are executed, and the reach is generated after the button-related effects are completed. By executing the super reach effect, a variation effect of an effect mode different from the change effect of the decorative pattern before the interruption may be executed, or the decorative pattern may be removed (the decorative pattern including at least two kinds of symbols) In this case, the left and right decorative designs may be the same design and only the middle decorative design is different from the reach design, or at least the left and right designs may be different design designs. (Good)) after temporary stop (a state where the display is slowly changing in the vertical and horizontal directions and is not completely stopped) Related effect may be executed variation effect of different representation embodiment the variation effect decorative symbol before interruption after completion of the button-related effect running (so-called re-change and quasi-continuous variation). Also, in this case, if a judgment result command is received, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner without starting a fluctuating effect of an effect mode different from the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol before the interruption after the button-related effect ends. The decorative effect may be stopped at least at the left and right symbols different from each other, and the variation effect may be terminated without generating reach.

  In addition, the button-related effects (line notice, operation trigger pseudo error effect, non-operation pseudo error effect) are not limited to those described above, and the effect operation is accompanied by a movement (such as an upward movement) of the pressing operation unit 303 from the reference position. It may be a movable effect that encourages player operations after changing the appearance of the unit 300. The display of the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode in such a movable effect is, for example, a predetermined timing during the movement of the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, or immediately after the press operation unit 303 is moved to the raised position. It can be exemplified that the movement of the pressing operation unit 303 is stopped at the timing and the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode are displayed. Further, in such an embodiment, until the pseudo return mode is completed, the pressing operation unit 303 is in a state of being out of the reference position (the pressing operation unit 303 is stationary in the middle of movement, the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position). The pressing operation unit 303 that is in a state deviated from the reference position at a predetermined timing after the completion of the pseudo return mode may be restored to the reference position. In this way, by generating the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode together with the sudden stoppage of the movable in the movable production operation unit 300, it is easier to make the player have an illusion as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state. can do.

  Further, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as the button related effects, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the line notice is executed as the button related effects. For example, when an operation trigger pseudo error effect and a non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as button related effects, a super reach effect exceeding a predetermined jackpot expectation is executed after the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are finished. (Or if the execution rate of the super reach production that is higher than or equal to the expected level of the big hit is higher than the execution rate of the super reach production that is less than the expected level of the big hit), and if the line advance notification is executed as a button related effect To execute a super reach production less than a predetermined jackpot expectation level (or to increase the execution ratio of a super reach production less than a predetermined jackpot expectation level higher than the execution rate of a super reach production greater than a predetermined jackpot expectation level) It may be. Thereby, when the operation trigger pseudo error effect and the non-operation pseudo error effect are executed as the button related effects, the expectation of the big hit can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Moreover, you may make it one big hit expectation degree higher than the other of the case where an operation opportunity pseudo-error production is performed as a button related production, and the case where a non-operation pseudo-error production is performed. For example, when an operation trigger pseudo error effect is executed as a button related effect, a super reach effect exceeding a predetermined jackpot expectation level is executed after the operation trigger pseudo error effect ends (or a super reach effect exceeding a predetermined jackpot expectation level). If the non-operation pseudo error effect is executed as a button-related effect, the super reach effect less than the predetermined jackpot expectation level is set. It may be executed (or the execution ratio of the super reach effect less than the predetermined big hit expectation degree is higher than the execution ratio of the super reach effect higher than the predetermined big hit expectation degree). Thereby, the expectation degree of jackpot can be changed according to the switching display timing of the pseudo error mode, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Further, the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode may be generated at a different timing from the button-related effects described above. Another timing is preferably a timing at which the player can make an illusion as if the pachinko machine 1 is in an error state. For example, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 The second timing of moving the back left lower arm 3330 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right moving arm 3430 of the back right rendering unit 3400 from the normal timing in the middle of moving any of the back lower right movable ornament 3420 and the second state. Timing immediately after moving to the state, timing immediately after moving the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 to the second state. The upper left movable ornament 3310, the lower left movable ornament 3320, the upper right movable ornament 3410, and the movement of the back bottom right movable decorative body 3420 is stopped may be displayed pseudo error mode or pseudo-return manner. Further, the front stage decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310, the front stage decoration part 3322 of the back lower left movable decoration body 3320, the front stage decoration part 3412 of the back upper right movable decoration body 3410, and the tip of the back lower right movable decoration body 3420 The rotation may be stopped at a predetermined time during the rotation of any one of the step decoration units 3422 to display the pseudo error mode and the pseudo return mode.

[26. Barbell Reach Production]
Hereinafter, the barbell reach effect which is an effect executed during the special symbol change will be described. The barbell reach effect is an effect executed during the SP reach performed in the present embodiment. The SP reach is an effect that is easy to be executed when the special lottery result of the change is a big hit and is difficult to be executed when the special lottery result of the change is out of order, that is, an effect with a high expectation degree of the big hit. The barbell reach effect is an example of an effect in which an effect in which the first index and the second index indicating the degree of jackpot expectation in the change are promoted, and the other effects described in FIG. It goes without saying that an effect in which the first index and the second index are promoted is executed. The barbell reach effect is an example of an effect in which a pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

  The pseudo continuous effect is an effect of executing the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the variation of the decorative symbol multiple times during one change of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. . “Ending the decoration symbol variation” means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes the variation of the decoration symbol once, and the decoration symbol For example, the pseudo-continuous symbol (the symbol that determines the pseudo-continuous if this symbol stops) is stopped. Note that a pseudo continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N consecutive pseudo continuous effects. The following natural number) is called the Mth quasi-continuous production. In addition, during a single change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the player may actually perform the operation again, while actually performing the operation again. An effect that is not performed is called a “pseudo-gase effect”. Hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous effect”.

  The pseudo-continuous effect occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the variation of the decorative symbol is executed again during one change of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. When it is confirmed that the peripheral control IC 1510a does, the pseudo-continuous symbol may be stopped in at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. In the following example, the peripheral control IC 1510a stops a character such as “Continue!” As a pseudo-continuous symbol in the medium decoration symbol. Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd or even numbers and no reach) may be used as the pseudo-continuous symbol.

[26-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 265 is an example of the variation pattern pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control board 1310, for example. In the description of FIG. 233 and the like, an example in which a variation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result has been described. However, in the example of FIG. Is defined.

  The variation pattern table in FIG. 265 shows the correspondence between the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the effect outline of the variation pattern, and the distribution. “Non-hold 4” in the winning category indicates a state where the number of reserved special symbol changes at the time of winning corresponding to the change is 3 or less, and “hold 4” indicates the time of winning corresponding to the change. This shows a state where the number of reserved special symbol fluctuations is four.

  As described above, in the example of FIG. 265, information on the variation pattern of each special lottery result (winning type including the hold state) is stored in one variation pattern table. Accordingly, the main control MPU 1310a selects a variation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning and the number of reserved special symbol variation at the time of winning according to the distribution of the variation pattern table.

  It should be noted that “+ pseudo 1” and “+ pseudo 2” described in the effect summary column indicate that two series of pseudo series effects and three series of pseudo series effects are executed, respectively. The pseudo-gase effect described above can be executed, for example, when the effect outline is “not reach (normal fluctuation time)” or the like. Further, even if the variation pattern in which “+ pseudo 1” is executed, a pseudo gaze effect that suggests the occurrence of the third pseudo run in “+ pseudo 2” may be executed.

  Note that the variation time of each variation pattern may be defined in the variation pattern table of FIG. Also, in the following example, it is assumed that the jackpot winning probability by the special lottery when the probability variation state is not activated (the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state) is 1/200, and the probability variation ratio of the jackpot winning is 1/200 It shall be 2.

[26-2. About the first and second indicators]
The effect display device 1600 displays, for example, a first meter that displays a first index and a second meter that displays a second index during execution of special symbol variation. Even when the special symbol variation is not being executed, the first meter and the second meter may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In that case, “0” may be displayed as the numerical value of the meter. The numerical value displayed at the end of the previous fluctuation may be displayed. The first index and the second index indicate, for example, the jackpot expectation level of the special symbol fluctuation during execution (in principle, the larger the value, the higher the jackpot expectation degree), and step by step during the execution of the fluctuation Promotion is possible. Both the first index and the second index are composed of a plurality of stages, and the number of stages that the first index can take is greater than the number of stages that the second index can take.

  In the example described below, when the second index is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 100 or more), a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach or movie reach (effect display device 1600) with a high expectation degree of jackpot is expected. It is determined that a reach effect with a high degree of expectation of big hits) in which a predetermined movie flows is generated. Further, it is assumed that the second index does not exceed the predetermined value until the predetermined effect starts. That is, in a state where the second index is equal to or less than the predetermined value, the second index also indicates the expected degree of occurrence of the predetermined performance. Further, when the second index is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the second index suggests only the big hit expectation degree in the fluctuation, that is, the big hit expectation degree in the predetermined effect. Specific details will be described later.

  In addition, for example, when the first index and the second index become a predetermined value (for example, 777), the special lottery result in the change may be determined as a big hit decision or a probable change big hit decision. It is desirable that the distribution for displaying the predetermined value is extremely small (for example, the lowest distribution value among the stages existing as distribution values).

  In this chapter, the index displayed on the first meter and the second meter will explain an example of the jackpot expectation in the running change, but it may show the expectation of any pending change That is, an effect in which indexes of the first meter and the second meter are changed may be executed as a prefetch effect.

[26-3. Method for determining the first index value]
266 and 267 are examples of the first index determination table. Specifically, an example of the first index determination table is divided into two and described in FIGS. 266 and 267. FIG. 266 is an example of the left half of the first index determination table, and FIG. It is an example of the right half of a decision table.

  The first index determination table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The first index determination table stores, for example, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the variation pattern, and the distribution of the final numerical value of the first index displayed on the first meter in the variation of the variation pattern.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a specifies the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 1310a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the first index determination table, and determines the final value of the first index displayed on the first meter in the variation according to the distribution corresponding to the identified variation.

  In the examples of FIGS. 266 and 267, the final numerical value of the first index is a value in 25 steps (0, 100, 200, 333, 500, 700, 777, 900, 999, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 6000, 7000, 7777, 8000, 9000, 9995, 9998, 9999).

  The first index displayed on the first meter in the effect display device 1600 in the special symbol variation is promoted step by step toward the final value selected at a predetermined promotion timing for each variation pattern.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the first promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 268 at each promotion timing, performs the promotion lottery, and promotes the value of the first index displayed on the first meter. It is assumed that the value of the first index of the first meter immediately before the start of fluctuation is “0”, which is the lowest value.

  FIG. 268 is an example of the first promotion lottery table. The first promotion lottery table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example. The first promotion lottery table stores promotion patterns and distribution of each promotion pattern. For example, when “no promotion” is selected as the promotion pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not promote the value of the first index of the first meter at the promotion timing.

  For example, when “MAX” is selected as the promotion pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a promotes the value of the first index of the first meter to the selected final value at the promotion timing.

  For example, when “1 step promotion” is selected as the promotion pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a promotes the value of the first index of the first meter by one step at the promotion timing. Note that “N-level promotion” (N is a natural number) means that N levels are promoted in the final numerical value group of the first index that can be taken by the fluctuation pattern of the change.

  Specifically, for example, when the variation pattern 2 whose production outline is “not reach (normal variation time)” is selected, the final numerical value group that can be taken in the variation pattern 2 is “0”, “100”, It is assumed that “700” is selected from “200”, “500”, and “700” as the final numerical value. The value of the first index immediately before the start of the change is “0”, and in this state, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects “3 stage promotion” as the promotion pattern at the start of the change, which is an example of the promotion timing, The value of the first index displayed on the first meter is promoted to “500”, which is a numerical value three steps higher than “0” in the final numerical value group.

  If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects “N-stage promotion” in a state where the first index is increased by N stages and exceeds the selected final numerical value, for example, at the promotion timing, Promote the meter's first index value to the final selected value. Further, when the promotion timing comes with the first index being promoted to the final selected value, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 does not carry out the promotion lottery, and there is a distribution only for “not promoted” The promotion lottery is performed using the first promotion lottery table, or the promotion lottery result is forcibly changed to “not promoted”. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first index displayed on the first meter from exceeding the final numerical value.

  In addition, when the first index is a value for determining the big hit (“333”, “777”, “7777”, etc.), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 performs the promotion lottery at the subsequent promotion timing regardless of the final value. The promotion lottery may not be performed using the first promotion lottery table in which the allocation exists only for “not promoted”. This is to avoid the player being confused when the first indicator of the first meter is changed from a value for which the jackpot is determined to a value for which the jackpot is not determined.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may forcibly promote the value of the first index up to the selected final numerical value at the final promotion timing in the variation. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the promotion lottery using the first promotion lottery table in which the allocation exists only for “promotion to MAX” at the final promotion timing in the change, or The selected promotion pattern may be forcibly changed to “up to MAX” promotion.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 268, a plurality of types of first promotion lottery tables, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has different types of first promotions depending on, for example, a variation pattern, a selected final numerical value, or a promotion timing. A promotion lottery is implemented using the promotion lottery table.

  Specifically, for example, when a final value with a low expectation of jackpot is selected, if the first index reaches the final value at an early promotion timing, promotion is not performed at the subsequent promotion timing. The person guesses at an early stage that the displayed low value of the jackpot expectation is the final value, and there is a possibility that the expectation will be lowered. On the other hand, if the final value with a high degree of jackpot expectation is selected, but a situation in which a value with a low jackpot expectation level is frequently displayed until just before the final promotion timing, the player is promoted at each promotion timing. There is a risk of not paying attention to the performance and focusing only on the final promotion timing.

  In order to suppress the occurrence of such situations, the promotion lottery is performed using different first promotion lottery tables as follows. For example, a first promotion that includes a promotion pattern (for example, four-level promotion, five-level promotion, etc.) that has a higher number of stages to be promoted as the variation pattern with a larger number of elements in the final numerical value group or the higher selected final numerical value The promotion lottery may be carried out using the lottery table or the first promotion lottery table in which the promotion patterns having a large number of stages to be promoted are distributed. In addition, for example, a variation pattern having a higher number of promotion timings or a lower final selected number does not include a promotion pattern having a higher number of stages to be promoted (for example, 4-stage promotion, 5-stage promotion, etc.) The promotion lottery may be performed using the promotion lottery table or the first promotion lottery table with a large number of promotion patterns with a small number of stages to be promoted. Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may perform the promotion lottery using only one first promotion lottery table.

  Hereinafter, an example of promotion timing in each variation pattern will be described. In the following explanation of the example of the promotion timing, the arrival timings are described in order from the earliest. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is also simply referred to as “symbol”. Note that, in the effect outline based on each variation pattern described below, at the final promotion timing, the promotion lottery using the first promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (B) is performed.

(1) When the production overview is “shortening variation” (a) Only when the variation starts. Therefore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the final numerical value of the first index at the start of fluctuation.

(2) When the production outline is “not reach (normal fluctuation time)” (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high-speed fluctuations, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, and (d) When the right symbol is stopped . In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (c), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (A) is referred to.

(3) When the production overview is “not reach + pseudo 1” (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high-speed fluctuations, (c) At the left symbol stop, (d) At the right symbol stop, (e ) Promotion lottery when the pseudo-symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) during the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) when the left symbol is stopped, and (h) when the right symbol is stopped. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (g), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (A) is referred to.

(4) When the production overview is “Normal reach” (a) When the change starts, (b) During all symbol high-speed changes, (c) When the left symbol stops, (d) When the right symbol stops, (e) When a reach telop occurs And (f) when the reach symbol and the symbol have passed. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (e), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (C) is referred to.

(5) When the production outline is “normal reach + pseudo 1” (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) At the time of stopping the left symbol, (d) At the time of stopping the right symbol, (e) When a fake continuous symbol is stopped in the symbol, (f) during the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) when the left symbol is stopped, (h) when the right symbol is stopped, (i) when a reach telop occurs, and (j) When the reach design and the design pass. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (i), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (C) is referred to.

(6) When the production outline is “first half of SP reach” (a) Promotion lottery at the start of change, (b) During all symbols high-speed change, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, (d) When the right symbol is stopped, (e) When a reach telop occurs, (f) When the reach symbol and the same symbol have passed, (g) When the middle symbol becomes a high-speed fluctuation and becomes a white background, (h) When the title of barbell reach is displayed, and (i) Immediately before the current branch of Barbell Reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (h), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (C) is referred to.

(7) When the production overview is “first half of SP reach + pseudo 1” (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) When the left symbol is stopped, (d) When the right symbol is stopped, (e ) When the quasi-continuous symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) During the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) When the left symbol stops, (h) When the right symbol stops, (i) When a reach telop occurs, (j ) When the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (k) When the middle symbol becomes a high-speed fluctuation and becomes a white background, (l) When the title of the barbell reach is displayed, and (m) Immediately before the winning branch of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (l), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (D) is referred to.

(8) When the production overview is “first half of SP reach” (a) At the start of change, (b) During high speed change of all symbols, (c) At the left symbol stop, (d) At the right symbol stop, (e) Reach When a telop occurs, (f) When the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (g) When the symbol in the middle changes rapidly and becomes a white background, (h) When the title of barbell reach is displayed, (i) Barbell reach (J) Movable decorative body (backside movable decorative body, back upper movable decorative body, back upper left movable decorative body, back left lower movable decorative body, back upper right movable decorative body, and back (Lower right movable ornament) When combined, (k) When the title is displayed in the second half, and (l) Immediately before the winning branch in the second half of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timings (a) to (k), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (E) is referred to.

(9) When the production overview is “first half of SP reach + pseudo 1” (a) at the start of fluctuation, (b) at all high-speed fluctuations, (c) at the left symbol stop, (d) at the right symbol stop, ( e) When the quasi-continuous symbol stops at the middle symbol, (f) During the second high-speed variation of all symbols, (g) When the left symbol stops, (h) When the right symbol stops, (i) When a reach telop occurs ( j) When the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (k) When the middle symbol becomes a high-speed fluctuation and becomes a white background, (l) When the title of the barbell reach is displayed, (m) Immediately before the winning branch of the barbell reach, (N) At the time of moving decorative combination, (o) At the start of the second half of the title display, and (p) Immediately before the winning branch at the second half of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (o), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (E) is referred to.

(10) When the production overview is “first half of SP reach + pseudo 2” (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high-speed fluctuations, (c) At the left symbol stop, (d) At the right symbol stop, ( e) When the quasi-continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, (f) During the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) When the left symbol is stopped, (h) When the right symbol is stopped, (i) The quasi-continuous symbol is displayed in the middle symbol Is stopped, (j) during the third high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (k) when the left symbol is stopped, (l) when the right symbol is stopped, (m) when a reach telop occurs, (n) when the symbol is the same as the reach symbol When passing, (o) When the middle symbol becomes high-speed fluctuation and becomes a white background, (p) When displaying the title of Barbell Reach, (q) Immediately before the current branch of Barbell Reach, (r) Movable decorative united (S) When the title is displayed in the latter half of the period, and (t) Immediately before the current branch in the latter half of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (s), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (F) is referred to.

(11) When the production outline is “movie reach” (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During all symbol high-speed fluctuations, (c) When the left symbol stops, (d) When the right symbol stops, (e) Reach telop occurs (F) When the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (g) When the middle symbol becomes a high-speed fluctuation and becomes a white background, (h) When the movie reach title is displayed, (i) The movie reach title Every 5 seconds from the display (for example, 5 times), and (j) Immediately before the branch of movie reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (i), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (G) is referred to.

(12) When the production outline is “Movie Reach + Pseudo 1” (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) At the left symbol stop, (d) At the right symbol stop, (e) When the pseudo-symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) during the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) when the left symbol stops, (h) when the right symbol stops, (i) when reach telop occurs, (j) When the same symbol as the reach symbol passes, (k) When the middle symbol becomes a high-speed change and becomes a white background, (l) When the movie reach title is displayed, (m) Five seconds have elapsed from the movie reach title display Every time, and (n) before the branch of the movie reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timings (a) to (m), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (H) is referred to.

(13) When the production outline is “movie reach + pseudo 2” (a) At the start of fluctuation, (b) During high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (c) At the stop of the left symbol, (d) At the stop of the right symbol, (e) When the quasi-continuous symbol stops in the middle symbol, (f) During the second high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (g) When the left symbol is stopped, (h) When the right symbol is stopped, (i) The pseudo-continuous symbol stops in the middle symbol (J) During the third high-speed fluctuation of all symbols, (k) When the left symbol is stopped, (l) When the right symbol is stopped, (m) When a reach telop occurs, (n) The reach symbol and the same symbol have passed (O) When the middle symbol becomes a high-speed change and becomes a white background, (p) When the movie reach title is displayed, (q) Every 5 seconds from the movie reach title display, and (r) Movie reach Before the current branch. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timings (a) to (q), for example, the first promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (H) is referred to.

  In the example of the above-mentioned promotion timing, there is one that is defined by a period (that is, the promotion timing is not uniquely determined), such as “All symbols are changing fast”, but in such an example, the promotion timing is The timing may be an arbitrary timing during the period. That is, when the promotion timing is “all symbols are changing fast”, any timing at which all symbols are changing at high speed can be the promotion timing.

  However, for example, the production summary is “(b) All Symbols High-Speed Fluctuation” in “Movie Reach + Pseudo 1”, and the production summary is “(b) All Symbols High-Speed Fluctuation” in “Movie Reach + Pseudo 2”. In addition, it is desirable that the timings of the promotion timings having the same name coincide. Assuming that the timings of the promotion timings with the same name are not the same (for example, “(b) All Symbols High-Speed Fluctuating” in the production overview “Movie Reach + Pseudo 1” is 1 After 2 seconds, the outline of the production is “Movie Reach + Pseudo 2” “(b) All Symbols High-speed Fluctuation” is 2 seconds after the start of all symbol high-speed fluctuations, etc.). Since the fluctuation pattern can be predicted, the interest in the production is diminished. In order to avoid the occurrence of such a situation, it is desirable that the timings coincide with each other regarding the promotion timings with common names. The same applies to the promotion timing of the second index described later.

[26-4. Method for determining the second index value]
FIG. 269 is an example of a second index determination table. The second index determination table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The second index determination table stores, for example, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the variation pattern, and the distribution of the final numerical value of the second index displayed on the second meter in the variation of the variation pattern.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a specifies the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 1310a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the second index determination table and determines the final value of the second index displayed on the second meter in the variation according to the distribution corresponding to the identified variation.

  In the example of FIG. 269, the final numerical value of the second index takes one of 12 levels (0, 18, 35, 52, 98, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500, 777, 999). . The second index displayed on the second meter in the effect display device 1600 in the special symbol variation can be promoted step by step toward the final value selected at a predetermined promotion timing for each variation pattern. In the example of FIG. 269, when the value of the second index displayed on the second meter exceeds 100, (the final value of the second index) / 10 (%) is approximately equal to the expected degree of jackpot. As described above, the distribution of the final numerical value of the second index value in each variation pattern is determined. Specifically, for example, when the numerical value of the second index displayed on the second meter is “200”, the big hit expectation is “20.02%”, and the second index displayed on the second meter When the numerical value is “500”, the expected value of jackpot is “50.90%”, and the numerical value is distributed for each effect summary. The same applies to other numerical values exceeding 100.

  Further, in the variation pattern in which neither the SP reach nor the movie reach is included in the production outline, there is no distribution whose final numerical value exceeds 100. As a result, as described above, when the second index of the second meter reaches 100, the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach with a high degree of jackpot expectation is confirmed, and the player can obtain an uplifting feeling at that time. it can.

  In the variation pattern in which the final numerical value of the second index can take a value larger than 100 (that is, the variation pattern including SP reach or movie reach in the production outline), there is a distribution in which the final value is “100”. To do. As will be described later, the second meter displays the value of the second index “100” that determines the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach in the fluctuation of occurrence of SP reach or movie reach. To make it possible.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the second promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 270 at each promotion timing, performs the promotion lottery, and promotes the value of the second index displayed on the second meter at the timing. . It is assumed that the value of the second index of the second meter immediately before the start of fluctuation is “0” which is the lowest numerical value.

  FIG. 270 (A) is an example of the second promotion lottery table used at the promotion timing other than during SP reach and during movie reach. FIG. 270 (B) shows the promotion timing during SP reach and movie reach. It is an example of the 2nd promotion lottery table used. In other words, only the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (A) is used in the variation pattern in which neither the SP reach nor the movie reach is included in the effect summary.

  The second promotion lottery table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example. The second promotion lottery table stores promotion patterns and distribution of each promotion pattern. The meaning of “N stage promotion” in the second promotion lottery table is the same as the meaning of “N stage promotion” in the first promotion lottery table.

First, the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (A) will be described. The second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (A) includes a promotion pattern “promotion to the smaller of 100 or MAX”. For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses “100
When “Promote to smaller one of or or MAX” is selected, the value of the second index of the second meter is set to the smaller of the selected final value of the second index and “100” at the promotion timing. (If the final value is “100”, it is promoted to “100”). Thereby, in the fluctuation pattern in which the SP reach or movie reach occurs, the second index displayed on the second meter can be prevented from exceeding 100 before the SP reach or movie reach occurs. In a variation pattern in which neither reach nor movie reach occurs, the second index displayed on the second meter can be prevented from reaching 100.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a increases the second index by N stages to a state where the selected final numerical value is exceeded, or if the second index is promoted by N stages, 100 is set before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach. When “N-level promotion” is selected in the state of exceeding, for example, at the promotion timing, the value of the second index of the second meter is promoted to the smaller of the selected final numerical value and 100 .

  In addition, when the second index has been promoted to the final selected value, or when the second index has been promoted to 100 before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach and the promotion timing is reached, for example, peripheral control The CPU of the IC 1510 does not carry out the promotion lottery, performs the promotion lottery using the second promotion lottery table in which the allocation is present only for “not promoted”, or forcibly changes the lottery result to “do not promote”. The peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value of the second meter to 100 before the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach when the selected final numerical value exceeds 100 in the change of the change pattern including SP reach or movie reach. You may promote to a larger value (and less than the final value).

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the final promotion timing in the variation of the variation pattern that does not include either the SP reach or the movie reach, and the SP reach or movie reach before the execution of the SP reach or movie reach in the variation of the variation pattern including the SP reach or movie reach. At the last promotion timing, the value of the second index may be forcibly promoted to the smaller of the selected final numerical value or 100.

  Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a promotes using the second promotion lottery table in which the allocation exists only for “promotion to the smaller of 100 or MAX” at the last promotion timing in the change. The lottery may be performed or the promotion lottery result may be forcibly changed to “promotion to the smaller of 100 or MAX”.

  Next, the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (B) will be described. As described above, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 270 (B) is “1 step promotion” and the promotion pattern in the example of FIG. 270 (B) used at the promotion timing during SP reach and movie reach. Only "not promote" is included. In other words, compared to before the start of the SP reach or movie reach, the number of promotion patterns with fewer stages that can be promoted is increased.

  In addition, at the final promotion timing of the fluctuation during which the SP reach or movie reach is performed, the value of the second index may be forcibly promoted to the final selected value. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the promotion lottery using the second promotion lottery table in which the allocation is only in “promotion to MAX” at the final promotion timing in the change, or The promotion lottery result may be forcibly changed to “promotion to MAX”.

  Further, when the second index is a value for determining the jackpot (“777”), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 does not perform the promotion lottery at the subsequent promotion timing regardless of the final value, only “not promote”. It is desirable to perform the promotion lottery using the second promotion lottery table in which the distribution exists, or to forcibly change the promotion lottery result to “not promote”.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may perform the promotion lottery of the second index using the second promotion lottery table other than that described with reference to FIG. Specifically, similarly to the first promotion lottery table, for example, a different second promotion lottery table may exist for each variation pattern, for each selected final numerical value, or for each promotion timing.

  It should be noted that the promotion timing of the second index in a variation pattern that does not include both “SP reach” and “movie reach” in the effect summary is the same as the promotion timing of the first index, for example. However, as described above, at the promotion timing, the referenced second promotion lottery table may differ depending on the promotion timing. For example, in these fluctuation patterns, in the promotion lottery other than the last promotion timing, for example, the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (A) is referred to, and in the promotion lottery at the last promotion timing, for example, FIG. ) In the second promotion lottery table.

  Further, the promotion timing of the second index before the start of SP reach in the variation pattern including “SP reach” in the effect summary is the same as the promotion timing of the first index, for example. In these fluctuation patterns, at the promotion timings other than the last among the promotion timings before the start of SP reach, for example, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 270 (A) is referred to, and the promotion of the last promotion timing before the start of SP reach is performed. In the lottery, for example, the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (C) is referred to.

  Similarly, the promotion timing of the second index before the start of movie reach in the variation pattern including “movie reach” in the effect summary is the same as the promotion timing of the first index, for example. In these fluctuation patterns, at the promotion timings other than the last of the promotion timings before the start of movie reach, for example, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 270 (A) is referred to, and the promotion of the last promotion timing before the start of movie reach is made. In the lottery, for example, the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 270 (C) is referred to.

  Hereinafter, an example of the promotion timing after the start of SP reach in the variation pattern including “SP reach” in the effect outline and an example of the promotion timing after the start of movie reach in the variation pattern including “movie reach” in the effect overview will be described.

(1) When the production overview includes “first half of SP reach” and does not include “second half” (that is, only the first half production is performed for SP reach)
(A) When displaying the title of the barbell reach, and (b) Immediately before the current branch of the barbell reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing in (a), for example, the second promotion lottery table in FIG. 268 (B) is referred to, and in the promotion lottery in the promotion timing in (b), for example, the second promotion in FIG. 268 (D) is performed. The lottery table is referenced.

(2) When the production outline includes “first half of SP reach” (a) When displaying the title of the barbell reach, (b) Immediately before the current branch of the barbell reach, (c) When combining the movable decorations, (d) At the beginning of the second half of the title display, and (e) just before the current branch of the second half of the Barbell Reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (d), for example, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (E) is referred to, and in the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (e), for example, FIG. 268 (D) The second promotion lottery table is referred to.

(3) When the production summary includes “movie reach” (a) When the movie reach title is displayed, (b) 7 seconds, 14 seconds, 22 seconds, and 28 seconds have elapsed since the movie reach title display, and ( c) Immediately before the successful branch of movie reach. In the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (a) to (b), for example, the second promotion lottery table of FIG. 268 (F) is referred to, and in the promotion lottery at the promotion timing of (c), for example, FIG. 268 (D) The second promotion lottery table is referred to.

  In the above-described example, the example in which the promotion timing of the first index and the promotion timing of the second index completely match (a variation pattern that does not include both SP reach and movie reach), the promotion timing of the first index, and the second index. Although the example where the part of the promotion timing is consistent (variation pattern including either SP reach or movie reach) has been explained, the promotion timing of the first index and the promotion timing of the second index are completely different. May be.

  Specifically, for example, there may be a variation pattern that is defined such that all the promotion timings of the first index do not coincide with any of the promotion timings of the second index. In addition, the second indicator is not promoted at the promotion timing elected for the promotion pattern of the first indicator promotion of the first step or higher, or the first indicator is not promoted at the promotion timing elected to the promotion pattern of the second indicator promotion of the first step or more. Thus, the promotion timing of the first index and the promotion timing of the second index may be completely different.

Referring to the examples in FIGS. 266 and 267, as for the first index, even in the variation pattern that is frequently selected even when the production summary is out of the normal range, such as “normal reach”, the high final numerical value is often distributed ( For example, the distribution of 9999 is 21). On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 268, for the second index, the distribution of the high final numerical value in the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is very small (for example, the deviation fluctuation pattern in which the distribution of 999 exists is “movie reach + pseudo 2” only. There is 1). In other words, the first indicator is easier to select the final numerical value of the higher level in the case of outliers compared to the second indicator (although the final step of the first indicator is shown, the final step of the second indicator is not shown) When the jackpot expectation level is compared between when the final stage of the second index is shown but the final stage of the first index is not shown, the latter is far more likely to be expected). Therefore, the big hit expectation is higher when the second index at the higher level is compared with the case where the first index at the higher level is displayed.
When “999” is displayed in the second index, the big hit expectation is “99.34%”, which is almost a big hit, and the ratio of “999” is very low. “999” in the first index appears at a high frequency. This is because the player wants to experience the event that “999” is displayed on the meter. For example, it is more preferable to add an effect such that the numerical value displayed on the first index moves to the second index as it is.

[26-3. Overview of Barbell Reach Production]
Hereinafter, a barbell reach effect which is an example of an effect for promoting the first index and the second index displayed on the effect display device 1600 will be described. FIGS. 271 to 274 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an outline of a barbell reach effect. Barbell reach production is an example of SP reach. Each of FIGS. 271 (A) to 274 (T) depicts the promotion timing of the first index and the second index.

  Hereinafter, an example in which the big hit variation pattern (probability variation) whose production overview is “first half of SP reach + pseudo 2” is selected will be described. Further, it is assumed that “9999” is selected as the final value of the first index and “999” is selected as the final value of the second index.

  The effect display device 1600 displays a first meter 1641 that displays a first index and a second meter 1642 that displays a second index. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the color in the second meter 1642 changes according to the value of the second meter 1642. Specifically, for example, when the value of the second meter 1642 is “0” and “18”, it is white, when it is “35”, yellow when it is “52”, green when it is “98”, “100”, “150”, “200”, and “300” are red, “500” and “999” are gold, “777” (decision of jackpot) is a rainbow, etc. Assume that the color in meter 1642 changes.

  Only the second meter 1642 changes the color according to the numerical value, as described above, as compared to the case where the first index of the upper level is displayed, the second index of the upper level is displayed. This is because the big hit expectation is higher when compared. However, the color of the first meter 1641 may be changed according to the numerical value.

  Immediately before the start of the change of the special symbol, the display of the first meter 1641 and the second meter 1642 are both “0” which is the lowest numerical value.

  In FIG. 271 (A), at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the variation of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600, and executes the promotion lottery of the first index and the second index. In FIG. 271 (A), “2 stage promotion” is selected in the first index promotion lottery, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “200”, and “not promoted” is selected in the second index promotion lottery. As a result, the display of the second meter 1642 remains “0”.

  In FIG. 271 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes all symbols in the effect display device 1600 to change at high speed. In FIG. 271 (B), when all the symbols are changing at a high speed (when all the symbols are changing at a high speed, the timing may be arbitrary. The same applies to the following description). In the promotion lottery, “2 stage promotion” is selected and the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “500”, and in the promotion lottery of the second index, “1 stage promotion” is selected and the display of the second meter 1642 is “ Has been promoted to 18 ”.

  In FIG. 271 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the left symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 271 (C), “No promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 remains “500”, and “No promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second indicator. As a result, the display of the second meter 1642 remains “18”.

  In FIG. 271 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the right symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 271 (D), “3 stage promotion” is selected in the first index promotion lottery, the display on the first meter 1641 is promoted to “900”, and “1 stage promotion” is displayed in the second index promotion lottery. The display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “35” and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to blue.

  In FIG. 271 (E), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the pseudo continuous symbol (“continue! × 2”) as the middle symbol in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 271 (E), “1 step promotion” is selected in the first index promotion lottery, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “999”, and “not promoted” is selected in the second index promotion lottery. As a result, the display of the second meter 1642 remains “35”.

  In FIG. 271 (F), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the decoration display device 1600 to rapidly change all the decorative symbols again. In FIG. 271 (F), “not promoted” is selected in the first indicator promotion lottery, the display of the first meter 1641 remains “999”, and “not promoted” is selected in the second indicator promotion lottery. As a result, the display of the second meter 1642 remains “35”.

  In FIG. 272 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the left symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (G), “1 step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “1500”, and “1 step promotion” is set in the promotion lottery of the second indicator. The display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “52” and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to yellow.

  In FIG. 272 (H), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the right symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (H), “2 stage promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “2500”, and “not promoted” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index. As a result, the display of the second meter 1642 remains “52”.

  In FIG. 272 (I), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510 a stops the pseudo-continuous symbol (“continue! × 3”) as the middle symbol in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (I), “No promotion” is selected in the first indicator promotion lottery, the display of the first meter 1641 remains “2500”, and “1 step promotion” is set in the second indicator promotion lottery. The display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “98” and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to green.

  In FIG. 272 (J), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the decoration display device 1600 to rapidly change all the decorative symbols again. In FIG. 272 (J), “1 step promotion” is selected in the first index promotion lottery, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “3000”, and “not promoted” is selected in the second index promotion lottery. As a result, the display of the second meter 1642 remains “98”.

  In FIG. 272 (K), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the left symbol during high-speed fluctuation in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (K), “2 stage promotion” is selected in the first index promotion lottery, the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “4000”, and “1 stage promotion” is displayed in the second index promotion lottery. The display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “100” and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to red.

  At this time, the display of the second meter 1642 becomes “100”, so that the player can recognize that the occurrence of SP reach or movie reach has been confirmed. Further, as described above, after this, the numerical value of the second meter 1642 is not promoted until the barbell reach production which is the SP reach is started.

  In FIG. 272 (L), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the right symbol in high speed fluctuation in the reach state in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 272 (H), “promotion to MAX” is selected in the promotion lottery of the first index, and the display of the first meter 1641 is promoted to “9999”. At this time, since the first index displayed on the first meter 1641 is promoted to the final value, the numerical value of the first meter 1641 is not promoted thereafter in the fluctuation.

  In FIG. 273 (M), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a reach telop indicating that a reach has occurred on the effect display device 1600.

  In FIG. 273 (N), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the middle symbol to fluctuate at a low speed in the effect display device 1600, and passes the same middle symbol as the reach symbol between the middle symbol and the right symbol.

  In FIG. 273 (O), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the medium symbol to be changed again at high speed again in the effect display device 1600, and for example, displays other than the first meter 1641, the second meter 1642, and the decorative symbol. The background of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in white. This display suggests that a further reach effect has occurred.

  In FIG. 273 (P), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a title indicating that the barbell reach effect, which is the SP reach, has started on the effect display device 1600. Since the barbell reach production which is SP reach has started, the promotion lottery of the numerical value of the second index displayed on the second meter 1642 is started again. In FIG. 273 (P), “No promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index, and the display of the second meter 1642 remains “100”.

  In FIG. 273 (Q), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a barbell reach winning branch effect in the effect display device 1600. In the winning branch effect, the special lottery result is notified (hit or missed), or the development of the barbell reach effect with the higher degree of expectation of the big hit is announced. In FIG. 273 (Q), “1 step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index, and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “150”.

  In FIG. 273 (R), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a barbell reach winning branch effect in the effect display device 1600. In the winning branch effect, the special lottery result is notified (hit or missed), or the development of the barbell reach effect with the higher degree of expectation of the big hit is announced. In FIG. 273 (Q), immediately before the notification in the winning branch effect, “1 step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index, and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “200”. In FIG. 273 (R), it is shown that the movable decorative body has developed into the latter half production of the barbell reach production by appearing on the front surface of the production display device 1600, but the execution timing of the operation of the movable decorative body is shown. May be before or after winning is shown in the first half of the barbell reach production.

  In FIG. 274 (S), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a back lower movable decorative body 3110, a back upper movable decorative body 3210, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and The back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is moved to the first combined position, and then returned to the original position. The operation of these movable decorative bodies is an example of an effect informing the development of the barbell reach effect to the latter half effect. In FIG. 274 (S), “2 step promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index, the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “500”, and the color of the second meter 1642 is changed to gold. .

  In FIG. 274 (T), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a winning branch effect of barbell reach in the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 274 (T), immediately before the notification in the winning branch effect, “2 stage promotion” is selected in the promotion lottery of the second index, and the display of the second meter 1642 is promoted to “999”. Therefore, at this time, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special lottery result in the fluctuation is a big hit ("999" is displayed on the second meter 1642 and only the movie reach is not a big hit, (Because the revealed reach is a barbell reach equivalent to the SP reach).

  In FIG. 274 (U), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the middle symbol, which is the same as the reach symbol, as the winning notification effect in the effect branching effect of the barbell reach in the effect display device 1600, and the special lottery result in the change is a big hit This is notified and the fluctuation is terminated.

  In the promotion lottery at a certain promotion timing, the value of the second meter 1642 is confirmed to be promoted to a value with a high expectation degree of jackpot or a value that determines the jackpot (for example, 999), and immediately before the promotion timing. When the numerical value of the first meter 1641 is the same as the numerical value after the promotion of the second meter 1642, the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the numerical value of the first meter 1641 to move to the second meter 1642 in the effect display device 1600. May be displayed and the numerical value of the second meter 1642 may be promoted.

  Thus, the player can enjoy the effect by guessing that there is a relationship between the first index indicated by the first meter 1641 and the second index indicated by the second meter 1642. In particular, in the above-described example, the second indicator is lower than the jackpot expectation when the first indicator is promoted to a higher level, but is lower than the jackpot expectation when the first indicator is promoted to a higher level, but such an effect is executed. Thus, the player can obtain a sense of expectation with respect to the display on the first meter 1641. In the example described above, even if “999” is displayed as the first index, the expectation for the big hit is not so high, but when “999” indicated in the first index moves to the second index, It is because it becomes a super hot production.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may execute a predetermined effect when the numerical value of the first meter 1641 is promoted. Specifically, for example, when the peripheral control IC 1510 a promotes the value of the first meter 1641, the numerical value in the first meter 1641 is changed at high speed, and the first meter 1641 is assigned according to the distribution shown in the effect color selection table described later. A white or red effect (for example, a flame-like effect or an aura-like effect) is displayed in the surroundings, and then the numerical value selected at the promotion timing is displayed.

  FIG. 275 is an example of an effect color selection table for the first index. The effect color selection table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510, for example. The effect color selection table stores the distribution of the effect colors (white and red) in each special lottery result (big hit or miss) of the change.

  For example, when the second meter 1642 has never been promoted before the promotion timing of the change, the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the effect color selection table of FIG. 275 (A). For example, when the second meter 1642 has been promoted even before the promotion timing of the change, the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the effect color selection table in FIG. 275 (B).

  Note that in the example of FIG. 275, the special lottery result of the change is off when the second meter 1642 has been promoted even before the second meter 1642 has never been promoted before the promotion timing of the change. When it is, it is easy to select red. In other words, when the meter display of the second index has been promoted even once (the stage is up), when the meter display of the first index is displayed in stages, the effect color that is expected to be high ( By making it easier to reveal the red color in the example of FIG. 275, it is possible to give the player a sense of elevation.

[27. Notice board notice]
[27-1.1 Bulletin board notice effect in fluctuation]
The bulletin board notice effect that is an example of the suggestion effect of the special lottery result will be described below. 276 and 277 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the outline of the bulletin board notice effect. For example, a bulletin board notice effect using two bulletin boards is executed at a predetermined rate in the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the reach is executed.

  For example, the first bulletin board 1610 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a normal game state other than the big hit game state and a state where a special effect such as SP reach is not executed. The first bulletin board 1610 is displayed in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, for example. The first bulletin board 1610 displays, for example, a display of a description of the model of the pachinko machine 1, a display prompting the operation of various operation units such as the pressing operation unit 303, and a display suggesting development and continuation to a pseudo-continuous effect during the above-described change in the state. In addition, a display that suggests the contents of the effect that develops in the change or the pre-reading object change, and an effect that is simply a lively activity that has a low correlation with the big hit expectation level are displayed.

  In addition, the effect display device 1600 includes a hold display area 1620 located in the lower left area in the effect display device 1600. In the hold display area 1620, for example, in the above-described state, a display indicating the number of fluctuations on hold and the hold thereof The display pedestal is displayed. For example, in the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, the number of black circles indicates the number of pending changes, and the number of white circles indicates how many other changes can be reserved. In other words, in the example of FIGS. 276 and 277, one variation is pending, and the remaining three variations can be suspended.

  First, in FIG. 276 (A), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts changing the decorative design in the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, “There may be something on the first bulletin board 1610 displayed on the upper part of the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the start of the variation of the decorative symbols or after a predetermined time has elapsed. ? "Or a lively message that has a low correlation with the expected degree of jackpot.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays on the first bulletin board 1610 a display indicating that the big hit expectation degree in the fluctuation such as “chance!” Is high. In FIG. 276 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, on the first bulletin board 1610, suggesting execution of a pseudo-continuous effect such as “Continue!” After performing the change, the process may move to FIG. 276 (D).

  Also, if there is a pending change, in FIG. 276 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays on the first bulletin board 1610, for example, a suggestion of executing the hold change effect such as “change!” An on-hold change effect may be executed, and an effect after (D) may be executed in the variation corresponding to the hold. In addition, about the display of the 1st bulletin board 1610, only one of FIG. 276 (B) and FIG. 276 (C) may be implemented, or in addition to or instead of FIG. 276 (B) and FIG. 276 (C). Another display may be implemented.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a prompts the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 described later, such as “Look at the lower bulletin board !!” on the first bulletin board 1610. Display. In FIG. 276 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, a display in which the hold display area 1620 vibrates on the effect display device 1600, and the hold display area 1620 may move. Perform the production.

  In FIG. 276 (E), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the at least part of the hold display area 1620 to disappear from the effect display apparatus 1600 when the hold display area 1620 moves downward in the effect display apparatus 1600. Is displayed. That is, the display such as “Look at the lower bulletin board !!” on the first bulletin board 1610 indicates that the hold display area 1620 moves (or the area of the hold display area 1620 in the effect display device 1600 decreases). It is also a suggestion display, and when displaying “Look at the lower bulletin board !!” on the first bulletin board 1610, a predetermined display of a plurality of kinds of displays such as red letters and the background color of the bulletin board is red. If the effect is determined to be more than reach (or more than SP reach) when performed, the effect on the first bulletin board 1610 suggests that a predetermined reach occurs in addition to the decrease in the area of the hold display area 1620. It is also an effect to do. The same applies to other examples described later.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 276 (F), only part of the hold display area 1620 (for example, only the area where the number of holds can be recognized) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may erase all of the hold display area 1620 from the effect display device 1600. In this case, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a display that can recognize the hold number (for example, a number indicating the hold number itself) sufficiently smaller than the hold display area 1620 and large enough to be recognized by the player. It is desirable to display on the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 277 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a makes the second bulletin board 1611 appear on the effect display device 1600, and the second bulletin board 1611 has a high expectation degree of big hit such as “Great chance !!”. Display. As in the examples of FIGS. 276 and 277, the display in the second bulletin board 1611 indicates that the jackpot expectation is higher than the display in the first bulletin board 1610 (the second bulletin board 1611 itself is It is desirable that the expectation level for jackpots is increased by the appearance. The area where the second bulletin board 1611 is displayed is at least one of the areas before the hold display area 1620 is moved (that is, the area where the hold display area 1620 was displayed in FIGS. 276 (A) to (D)). Duplicate with part.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 277 (H), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the decorative design in the reach state on the effect display device 1600, and then executes the effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, in the first bulletin board 1610 and the second bulletin board 1611 at the start of SP reach when executing SP reach, or at the end of the change when not executing SP reach. Erase. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, at the timing before the second bulletin board 1611 appears, the timing when the second bulletin board 1611 appears, or the timing when the above-mentioned display is performed on the second bulletin board 1611. The display inside may be deleted.

  In the example of FIGS. 276 and 277, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the display in the first bulletin board 1610 and the display in the second bulletin board 1611 before the reach development, but at other timings. May be. For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes, for example, display in the first bulletin board 1610 after the reach development, and immediately before the development to a reach with a high jackpot expectation level such as SP reach, An indication of development may be performed.

  In the bulletin board effect, it is desirable that the time during which characters are displayed on the second bulletin board 1611 is longer than the time during which characters are displayed on the first bulletin board 1610. In particular, as in the example described above, if the content displayed in the second bulletin board 1611 is higher than the content displayed in the first bulletin board 1610, This is because the expectation can be maintained for a longer time.

  In the example of FIGS. 276 and 277, after the characters are displayed on the second bulletin board 1611, the characters are still displayed on the first bulletin board 1610, but the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611 or the second bulletin board 1611 is displayed. The display in first bulletin board 1610 may be erased after the characters are displayed. Thereby, a player's consciousness can be directed to the 2nd bulletin board 1611 which performs a display with higher expectation.

  It is desirable that the number of types of contents that can be displayed on the second bulletin board 1611 is larger than the number of types of contents that can be displayed on the first bulletin board 1610. Since the first bulletin board 1610 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a longer time than the second bulletin board 1611, the first bulletin board 1610 can be used for various effects due to the large number of types of contents that can be displayed.

  In addition, for example, when characters or the like are displayed on the first bulletin board 1610, when characters or the like are displayed on the second bulletin board 1611, sound output from a speaker, a light emitting lamp, a light emission color of the lamp, and the like May be different from each other. In particular, for example, when a high display indicating that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high is displayed on the second bulletin board 1611 among the displays that may be displayed only on the second bulletin board 1611, a dedicated sound is output from the speaker. Or a dedicated lamp may emit light.

  In the example of FIG. 276, on the first bulletin board 1610, a display of a mode in which the jackpot expectation degree develops step by step, such as “Chance!” Is displayed after “Maybe?” Is displayed. However, the second bulletin board 1611 does not have to perform such a progressive display. In particular, in the second bulletin board 1611, when only a display with a high jackpot expectation level is performed, the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611 itself is synonymous with the high jackpot expectation level. A sense of uplifting can be given to the player.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may cause the second bulletin board 1611 to appear and display the second bulletin board 1611 without displaying the second bulletin board 1611 on the first bulletin board 1610. Note that the appearance rate of such a pattern is desirably set lower than the appearance rate in the case where the first bulletin board 1610 is urged to view the second bulletin board 1611, and the jackpot expectation degree of the pattern Is preferably set higher than the jackpot expectation when the first bulletin board 1610 is urged to view the second bulletin board 1611.

  Thereby, the player can feel an unexpected feeling due to the sudden appearance of the second bulletin board 1611. In addition, a player who knows the existence of the pattern has an expectation for the appearance of the second bulletin board 1611 even if the first bulletin board 1610 does not prompt the user to view the second bulletin board 1611. In addition to being able to maintain a feeling, an uplifting feeling can be obtained when the second bulletin board 1611 appears in this case.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the second bulletin board 1611 to appear, displays the second bulletin board 1611 to prompt the user to view the first bulletin board 1610, and then hits the first bulletin board 1610 with a big hit such as “Chance!”. A display indicating that the degree of expectation is high may be performed. Note that the appearance rate of such a pattern is desirably set lower than the appearance rate in the case where the first bulletin board 1610 is urged to view the second bulletin board 1611, and the jackpot expectation degree of the pattern Is preferably set higher than the jackpot expectation when the first bulletin board 1610 is urged to view the second bulletin board 1611.

  Thereby, after a character is displayed on the first bulletin board 1610, an effect different from the normal effect that the second bulletin board 1611 appears can be realized, and the player can feel a surprise.

  278 and 279 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of the outline of the bulletin board notice effect. Differences from FIGS. 276 and 277 will be described. In the example of FIGS. 278 and 279, a hold display area 1630 is displayed in the lower area of the effect display device 1600. The hold display area 1620 described with reference to FIGS. 276 and 277 has a shape that covers only the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, but the hold display area 1630 extends over the lower left area and the lower right area of the effect display device 1600. Shape.

  In the example of FIG. 278, the number of pending changes is displayed on the left side of the hold display area 1630. However, the number of pending changes is also displayed on the right side of the hold display area. Also good. Specifically, for example, a display showing the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol on hold is displayed on the left side of the hold display area 1630, and a display showing the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol on hold is shown on the right part. May be.

  278 (A), (B), and (C) are the same as those in FIGS. 276 (A), (B), and (C), respectively, except for the shape of the hold display area 1630, and thus description thereof is omitted. To do. The display contents of the first bulletin board 1610 after FIG. 278 (D) are the same as the display contents of the first bulletin board 1610 after FIG.

  In FIG. 278 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display in which the right part of the hold display area 1630 vibrates on the effect display device 1600, for example, and the right part of the hold display area 1630 may move. An effect that suggests a certain thing is executed.

  In FIG. 278 (E), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the right part of the hold display area 1630 to move downward in the effect display apparatus 1600, so that at least a part of the right part of the hold display area 1630 is the effect display apparatus. A display of disappearing from 1600 is performed. Subsequently, in FIG. 278 (F), the right portion of the hold display area 1630 disappears from the effect display device 1600.

  In FIG. 279 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the second bulletin board 1611 to appear on the effect display device 1600, and the second bulletin board 1611 displays a display indicating that the big hit expectation degree such as “Great chance !!” is high. Do. The area where the second bulletin board 1611 is displayed is the area before the right part of the hold display area 1630 moves (that is, the right part of the hold display area 1630 in FIGS. 278 (A) to (D)). Overlap with at least a part of Subsequently, in FIG. 279 (H), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the decorative symbols in the reach state on the effect display device 1600.

  In FIGS. 278 and 279, the right part of the hold display area 1630 has moved and the second bulletin board 1611 has appeared. For example, on the left part, a display indicating the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol being held is displayed. In the case where the right part is configured to display the number of pending fluctuations of the second special symbol, the part of the right part and the left part with the pending fluctuation number of 0 moves. Then, the second bulletin board 1611 may appear.

[27-2. Pre-reading using bulletin board notice]
FIG. 280 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outline of a prefetching effect using a bulletin board preliminary effect. First, in FIG. 280 (A), there is no pending variation, and a game ball wins the first starting port 2002 while the first variation is being executed. A second variation, which is a variation corresponding to the winning, is a variation of a prefetch target, and a bulletin board notice effect is executed as a prefetch effect.

  In FIG. 280 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, the first bulletin board 1610 on the first bulletin board 1610 at the same time as the winning, or after the predetermined time has passed since the winning, and FIG. 276 (B). The same display (display of a roaring message, a lively message having a low correlation with the jackpot expectation level, etc.) is performed.

  In FIG. 280 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, on the first bulletin board 1610 that the jackpot expectation degree in the second variation is high, at the end of the first variation which is a deviation variation.

  In FIG. 280 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, the same display (first display) as that in FIG. 276 (D) on the first bulletin board 1610 at the start of the second change or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the second change. Display that prompts the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611). Further, in FIG. 279 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, a mode in which the hold display area 1620 vibrates on the effect display device 1600, as in FIG. 276 (D). An effect that suggests the possibility of moving is executed. It should be noted that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display the first bulletin board 1610 that prompts the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 in the first variation. The effects after FIG. 280 (D) are the same as the effects after FIG. 276 (E), for example, and the description thereof is omitted.

[27-3. Bulletin board notice using the operation unit]
Hereinafter, an example in which the bulletin board notice effect changes according to operations by various operation units will be described. FIG. 281 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of bulletin board notice effect using the pressing operation unit 303. FIG. 281 (A) shows a state in which the first variation has started and the second variation, which is the prefetch target variation, is suspended.

  In FIG. 281 (A), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a message prompting the player to press the center pressing operation portion 303a on the first bulletin board 1610 at the start of fluctuation or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The operation unit 303a is set in an operation valid state. As shown in the example of FIG. 281 (A), the display on the first bulletin board 1610 suggests that some change may occur in the lower portion of the effect display device 1600 when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. It is desirable to display it.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation effective state, in FIG. 281 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, a message prompting the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611. Exit state. If the central pressing operation portion 303a is not pressed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of FIG. 281 (A) on the first bulletin board 1610, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a will The display in 1610 is deleted, the operation valid state of the pressing operation unit 303 is terminated, and the process proceeds to FIG. 281 (D) after the first variation is completed.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 281 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the combination of the decorative symbols in which at least one is a different number, for example, in order to end the first variation which is a deviation variation. Note that the display on the first bulletin board 1610 in FIG. 281B continues, for example.

  In FIG. 281 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a continues the display prompting the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 in the first bulletin board 1610, as in FIG. 276 (D). In 1600, for example, a display in which the hold display area 1620 vibrates is performed, and an effect suggesting that the hold display area 1620 may move is executed. The effects after FIG. 281 (D) are the same as the effects after FIG.

  In FIG. 281, the example in which the bulletin board notice using the operation unit is executed as a pre-reading effect has been described, but it may be executed as an effect in one variation.

  FIG. 282 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of bulletin board notice gaze effect using the pressing operation unit 303. In FIG. 282, a so-called gasse effect is executed in which the second bulletin board 1611 is suggested but the second bulletin board 1611 does not appear. FIG. 282 (A) shows a state in which the first variation has started and the second variation, which is the prefetch target variation, is suspended. In FIG. 282 (A), the same effect as in FIG. 281 (A) is executed.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation effective state, in FIG. 282 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a low expectation degree of big hits such as “...” On the first bulletin board 1610, for example. Is displayed, and the operation valid state is terminated. If the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display in FIG. The display in 1610 is deleted, the operation valid state of the pressing operation unit 303 is terminated, and the process proceeds to FIG. 282 (D) after the first variation is completed.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 282 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a finishes the first fluctuation, which is a deviation fluctuation, for example. Note that the display on the first bulletin board 1610 in FIG. 282 (B) continues, for example, from the display until a predetermined time or at the end of the first variation. Subsequently, in FIG. 282 (D), the second variation starts.

[27-4. Bulletin board notice effect using multiple operations of the operation unit]
Hereinafter, an example in which the bulletin board notice effect changes due to a plurality of operations by various operation units will be described. FIG. 283 and FIG. 284 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the outline of the bulletin board notice effect using the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. FIG. In FIG. 283 (A), first, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, presses the central press operation unit 303a on the first bulletin board 1610 as shown in FIG. Is displayed to prompt the player, and the central pressing operation portion 303a is set in the operation effective state.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation effective state, in FIG. 283 (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, a message prompting the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611. The operation valid state of the operation unit 303a is terminated.

  If the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display in FIG. 283 (A) is displayed on the first bulletin board 1610, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the first bulletin board. The display in 1610 is deleted, the operation valid state of the pressing operation unit 303 is terminated, the bulletin board effect does not progress, and the effect defined in the variation pattern of the variation is executed.

  In FIG. 283 (C), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a continues the display that prompts the player to pay attention to the second bulletin board 1611 in the first bulletin board 1610, as in FIG. 276 (D). In 1600, for example, a display in which the hold display area 1620 vibrates is performed, and an effect suggesting that the hold display area 1620 may move is executed.

  In FIG. 283 (D), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a moves at least a part of the hold display area 1620 by moving the hold display area 1620 downward in the effect display device 1600, for example, as in FIG. 276 (E). Is displayed from the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 283 (E), at least a part of the hold display area 1620 disappears from the effect display device 1600.

  In FIG. 283 (F), for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the second bulletin board 1611 to appear on the effect display device 1600, and the rotation operation unit 302 such as “Turn ... turn!” On the second bulletin board 1611. Is expected to be very high when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated (for example, the highest jackpot expectation degree of the display big hit expectation degree displayed on the first bulletin board 1610 is higher than the highest expectation degree) ) A display indicating that the display is highly likely to be executed (in the example of FIG. 283 (F), a display reminiscent of the player that “super heat” is displayed when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated). ) To turn the rotation operation unit 302 into an operation valid state.

  When the rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the operation effective state, in FIG. 284 (G), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays on the second bulletin board 1611 that the expectation degree of big hit such as “Intense heat !!” is extremely high. The operation valid state of the rotation operation unit 302 is terminated.

  If the rotation operation unit 302 does not rotate even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display in FIG. 283 (F) is displayed on the second bulletin board 1611, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the second bulletin board 1611. , The operation valid state of the rotation operation unit 302 is terminated, the bulletin board effect does not progress, and the effect defined in the variation pattern of the variation is executed.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 284 (H), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the decorative design in the reach state on the effect display device 1600, and then executes the effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation.

  In the example of FIGS. 283 and 284, the effect progresses by operating different operation units (the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotating operation unit 302), but a plurality of one operation unit (for example, only the central pressing operation unit 303 a). The production may proceed by one operation.

  Moreover, in the effect that a display indicating that the big hit expectation is high is performed on the second bulletin board 1611 by the operation of the operation unit, for example, when the operation of a plurality of operation units is used, a plurality of operations of one operation unit are performed. When using, when using one operation of one operation part, it is desirable that the big hit expectation is high in the order. Thereby, the will of the player who operates an operation part improves, and an interest improves by extension.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine (rotating type) The present invention can also be applied to a game machine (a game machine) or a fusion game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused (one that performs a slot game using a game ball). Here, a slot machine as a swing type gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 223, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. Front door 6002 and main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, the front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting a key into a key hole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise.

  The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. In the protruding portion, a medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a storage and settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. The bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, the storage settlement button 6022, and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been. The main control board 1310 is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) that is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Three variable rotators (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through the display window are provided. You can see through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, an effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  On these variable rotators, translucent symbol bands on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information are affixed to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from top to bottom from the display window described above. It has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Peripheral control unit 1500 is based on various commands from main control board 1310, such as operation control of a plurality of movable effects, drawing control of effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above.

  The main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of medals as game media into the medal slot 6008, and starts to display symbol information variation based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right Based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time, the change display of symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as gaming media to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls thrown in the ball slot 6008 ′ as a game medium to operate the start lever 6014. The symbol information variation display is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as gaming media to the tray 6026.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Door frame, 4 ... Main body frame, 5 ... Game board, 5a ... Game area, 558 ... External terminal board, 559 ... Frame earth board, 560 ... Dispensing unit, 570 ... Ball Guide unit, 580... Dispensing device, 580a... Discharging passage, 580b .. Ball extraction passage, 581... Discharging device main body, 582. Dispensing device rear lid, 583. Dispensing device front lid, 584. ... first transmission gear, 587 ... second transmission gear, 588 ... dispensing gear member, 588a ... dispensing gear, 588b ... detection piece, 589 ... dispensing blade, 589a ... blade piece, 589b ... sphere housing portion, 590 ... blade rotation detection Sensor, 591 ... Discharge detection sensor, 592 ... Ball removal movable piece, 593 ... Ball removal lever, 600 ... Upper full ball path unit, 610 ... Lower full ball path unit, 630 ... Power supply board, 6 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 0a ... Power switch, 630b ... Noise countermeasure circuit, 630c ... Rectifier circuit, 630d ... Power factor correction circuit, 630e ... Smoothing circuit, 630f ... Power supply generation circuit, 630g ... Power supply destruction circuit, 633 ... Discharge control board, 1300 ... Main Control unit, 1310 ... main control board, 1500 ... peripheral control unit, 1501 ... cover body, 1502 ... base body, 1503 ... wiring cover body, 1510 ... peripheral control board, 1520 ... peripheral data ROM board, 1530 ... liquid crystal output board, 1540... Shield plate, 1545... Conductive elastic member, 1600.

Claims (1)

Lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on establishment of a predetermined start condition;
Determination means for determining whether or not the winning based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means;
Symbol variation executing means for executing symbol variation based on establishment of a predetermined start condition;
A holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number;
Effect execution means for executing an effect capable of suggesting a determination result by the determination means;
A holding display indicating the number of lottery information held by the holding means, and a display means for displaying an effect executed by the effect executing means,
The effect execution means is capable of reducing the ratio of the reserved display area in the display area of the display means, and is an area included in the reserved display area before the reduction of the ratio, and A special effect can be executed in an area including at least an area that is not included in the area of the hold display after the reduction of the ratio,
As the special production, a plurality of types of production can be executed,
In addition to the display means for displaying the hold display, a special hold display means for indicating the number of lottery information held by the hold means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the special effect is performed as an effect that suggests an expectation that the determination result by the determination means is a win.